THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


'A  science  teaches  us  to  know;  an  art,  to  do." 

—  Whewell's  History  of  the  Inductive  Sciences. 


The  Science  and  Art 

OF 

PHRASE-MAKING; 


A  Series  of  Practical  and  Progressive  Lessons,  designed  to 

teach  Stenographic  Phrasing  by  Principle,  not  by 

Rote,  thus  dispensing  largely  with  Phrase- 

memorization    and    enabling    the 

Student  to  make  Good  Phrases 

for  himself. 


H'cxt~3300k  for  Schools,  ?*riwate 
and  2Joung 


Adapted  to  the  use  of  writers  of  the  Benn  Pitman  and   Graham 
systems  and  other  Pitmanic  systems  fundamentally  similar. 


BY 


DAVID  WOLFE  BROWN, 

Official  Reporter.  U.  S.  House  of  Representatives; 

Author  of  "The  Mastery  of  Shorthand,"     "The  Factors  of  Shorthand 

Speed,"  etc. 


"Good  phrases  are  surely,  and  ever  were,  very  commendable." 

— Shakespeare's  Henry  IV. 


WASHINGTON,    D.    C. 

SHORTHAND    PUBLICATION    BUREAU. 
BLISS    BUILDING. 


SUMMARY  OF  CONTENTS. 


PREFACE. — Phrasing  to  be  learned  by  principle,  not  by 
rote.  Study  of  phrasing  by  principle  is  far  more  interest- 
ing than  the  memorizing  of  alphabetically-arranged  phrase- 
lists.  Qualifies  the  learner  to  make  phrases  for  himself  in 
limitless  number.  When  studied  by  principle,  phrasing 
can  be  taken  up  much  earlier  than  when  studied  from  al- 
phabetically-arranged lists.  Principles  of  word-formation 
are  extensively  used  in  phrase-formation;  thus  the  framing 
of  phrases  may  be  learned  simultaneously  with  the  construc- 
tion of  word-outlines.  The  book  is  a  practical  book,  based 
on  the  daily  practice  of  practical  reporters. ..  .Pages  13-18. 

CHAPTER  I.  PHRASES  DEFENDED.  DEFINED,  AND 
DISTINGUISHED. — A  convenient  and  familiar  phraseo- 
gram  is  the  reporter's  godsend.  Thomas  Allen  Reed's  testi- 
mony. Phrasing  especially  needed  in  court  reporting. 
American  court  reporting  has  developed  a  peculiar  and 
highly  useful  phrasing  system.  Phrases  defined.  Simple 
or  word-joining  phrases.  Word-blending  phrases.  Broken 
phrases.  Elliptic  phrases.  Composite  phrases.  Special  or 
irregular  phrases Pages  19-25. 

CHAPTER  II.  THE  PHRASING  VOCABULARY.— Com- 
mon speech  comprises  but  a  few  thousand  words,  with  ca- 
pacity for  innumerable  combinations.  What  words  may  be 
phrased.  What  words  may  not  be  phrased Pages  26-28. 

CHAPTER  III.  THE  REQUISITES  OF  A  GOOD 
PHRASE. — Should  follow  natural  speech.  Sense  relation. 
Easy  and  fluent  junctions.  When  may  bad  junctions  be 
tolerated?  Don't  doubt  the  power  of  the  hand.  Bad  junc- 
tions classified  and  illustrated.  How  may  bad  junctions  be 
obviated?  Lineality  a  requisite  of  good  phrases.  A  phrase 
should  not  contain  too  many  words.  Legibility  of  phrases. 
A  good  phrase  is  spontaneous Pages  29-39. 

CHAPTER  IV.  LIMITATIONS,  CAUTIONS,  ETC.— 
Phrasing  principles  must  not  be  applied  indiscriminately. 
A  hurried,  spasmodic  style  to  be  avoided.  Adaptation  of 
particular  phrases  to  individual  writers Pages  40-41 


448552 


10  SUMMARY  OP  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  V.  POSITION.— General  rule  of  phrase-posi- 
tion. Exceptions.  "Initial  displacement,"  partial  or  com- 
plete. When  may  the  first  word  of  a  phrase  be  displaced? 
Exercise  on  "Initial  displacement."  When  may  first  two 
words  be  displaced?  Should  initial  is,  his,  as,  and  has  vary 
from  regular  position?  Initial  7  and  he  distinguished. 
How  should  exercises  in  this  book  be  studied  and  prac- 
tised?   Pages  42-50. 

CHAPTER  VI.  WORD-DISTINCTIONS.— Context  an  im- 
portant aid.  The  law  of  safe  ambiguity.  "Preceding  con- 
text" and  "succeeding  context."  When  may  a  single  siga 
safely  have  several  significations?  Distinctions  by  posi- 
tion, by  "exclusion,"  by  difference  of  outline,  and  by  vocal- 
ization. How  may  positional  distinction  be  lost,  and  how 
supplied?  Distinction  by  "exclusion"  defined.  Variation 
of  outline  as  a  substitute  for  position.  Peculiar  vocaliza- 
tion of  phrases.  Vocalization  of  badly-shaped  outlines.... 

Pages  51-5S 

CHAPTER  VII.  VARIATION  OF  OUTLINE.— Purposes 
of  variation.  Different  classes  of  variation  illustrated. 
"Reporting  license."  The  reporter  occasionally  prefers 
contra-normal  convenience  and  speed  to  normal  inconve- 
nience and  slowness.  Contra-normal  expedients  classified 
and  illustrated  Pages  59-G6 

CHAPTER  VIII.  ELLIPSIS:  THE  LAW  OF  IMPLICA- 
TION.— \Vhen  may  words  be  omitted  in  writing,  to  be  sup- 
plied in  reading  by  the  sense?  The  law  of  safe  ellipsis. 
"Implication"  and  "indication"  distinguished.  None  but 
necessary  connective  words  may  be  implied.  List  of  allow- 
able ellipses,  with  illustrations  and  exercises. .  .Pages  67-89 

CHAPTER  IX.  THE  TICK  WORD-SIGNS.— The  most 
useful  connective  expressions  of  the  laneuage.  Initial  ticks 
of,  to.  or,  but,  he,  I,  etc.,  illustrated,  with  exercises.  I  and 
he  distinguished.  Displacement  of  initial  ticks.  The  how 
and  there  ticks.  Hooks  on  ticks.  Ticks  joined  to  ticks... 

Pages  90-129. 

CHAPTER  X.  THE  CIRCLE  WORD-SIGNS.— Exercises 
on  initial  is,  his,  as,  has.  Final  circle  for  us,  with  exercise. 
Circles  joined  to  ticks  or  "brief  w  and  y"  word-signs. 
Coalescing  of  circles.  Exercises  on  double  circles  as.  phrase- 
factors.  Exercises  on  the  circle  following  double  circle,  and 
circle  following  loop.  Ellipsis  of  circles. ..  .Pages  130-142. 


SUMMARY    OF    CONTENTS.  11 

CHAPTER   XI.      "BRIEF   W  AND   Y"   WORD-SIGNS  — 

Exercises  on  initial  we,  with,  icere,  ivhat,  ivould,  you,  etc. 
Junction  of  "brief  w  and  y"  word-signs.  8  circle  on  "brief 
w  and  y"  word-signs.  Initial  w  hook  for  we  and  with,  and 
exercises  thereon.  You  and  would  following  a  circle.  In- 
version of  we,  were,  ivould  and  you.  You  used  for  your. 
Enlarged  way  and  yay  signs  to  represent  we  would,  you 

were,  with  you,  etc.    You  represented  by  quasi  r  hook 

Pages  143-171. 

CHAPTER  XII.  "PROXIMITY"  AS  A  MEANS  OF 
WORD-INDICATION.— Indication  of  of  the.  When  of  the 
cannot  be  indicated.  Indication  of  from-to.  Indication 
of  con  or  com.  Initial  a  con-,  and  con-,  I  con-,  he  con-,  etc. 
Prefixes  in  the  midst  of  phrases.  The  terminations  ing-at 
ing-the,  ing-his,  ing-their,  etc.  Exercises. ..  .Pages  172-188. 

CHAPTER  XIII.  THE  "L-HOOK"  FOR  "WILL"  AND 
"ALL." — Exercises  on  will  and  all  expressed  by  hook.  All 
following  of  and  with.  Limitations  on  the  use  of  the  I 
hook  as  a  phrasing  factor.  L  hook  on  tick  word-signs 

Pages  189-193. 

CHAPTER  XIV.  "ARE,"  "OUR,"  "OR,"  AND  "WERE" 
EXPRESSED  BY  R-HOOK.— Princip'e  explained,  with  ex- 
ercises. Enlarged  I  and  r  hooks.  The  r  hook  on  tick  word- 
signs.  Were  expressed  by  the  r  hook Pages  194-201. 

CHAPTER  XV.  SOME  SPECIAL  PHRASE-SIGNS.— 
May  be,  may  have  been,  to  be,  to  have  been,  in  re-,  in  recon-, 
is  it.  as  it,  is  there,  as  there,  etc.  Circle  enlarged  to  a  loop, 
to  add  there,  their,  or  they  are Pages  202-210. 

CHAPTER  XVI.  THE  DOUBLE-LENGTHING  PRIN- 
CIPLE.— Its  application  to  phrasing  explained.  Exercises 
on  there  and  their  expressed  by  double-lengthing.  Double- 
length  ing  and  mb.  There  as  part  of  a  word.  Expression 
of  other  by  double-lengthing.  Peculiar  method  of  writing 
of  their,  of  all  their,  is  there,  as  there,  etc.  Double-length 
strokes  joined  without  an  angle.  Dear  and  whether  ex- 
pressed by  double-lengthing.  Triple-length  strokes.  Double- 
lengthing  of  straight  strokes Pages  211-229. 

CHAPTER  XVII.  THE  "N"  HOOK  AS  A  PHRASING 
FACTOR. — The  use  of  n  hook  for  one.  Exception  in  the 
case  of  no  one.  N  hook  for  own.  Special  exercises  on  with 
our  own,  in  our  own,  their  own.  Exception  in  the  case  of 
my  own.  N  hook  for  than  and  been Pages  230-240. 


12  SUMMARY  OF  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  XVIII.  THE  HALF-LENGTHING  PRINCI- 
PLE.— The  expression  of  it.  to,  icould,  and  had  by  half- 
lengthing,  with  exercises  thereon.  The  expression  of  not 
by  halving  and  the  n  hook,  with  exercises  thereon.  Expres- 
sion of  not  by  n  hook  only Pages  241-255. 

CHAPTER  XIX.  THE  F-V  HOOK.— Expression  of  have 
and  to  have  by  v  hook.  Exercises  thereon.  Ought  to  have, 
would  have,  have .  had,  or  have  it.  Expression  of  of  by  v 
"hook;  of  it  by  v  hook  and  halving.  Exceptional  v  hook  on 

consonants  iih  and  the  to  express  of  and  have 

Pages  256-271. 

CHAPTER  XX.  "THE  N  CURL." — Peculiar  representa- 
tion of  in,  in  his,  in  as,  with  exercises.  Ellipsis  of  a,  an  or 
the,  following  in.  Double  circle  following  the  "in  curl.".. 

Pages   272-279. 

CHAPTER   XXI.      SPECIAL   METHODS   OF   WRITING 

PARTICULAR  WORDS  OR  EXPRESSIONS 

Pages  280-290. 

CHAPTER  XXII.  SUGGESTIONS  ON  CONSTRUCTION 
•OF  SPECIAL  OR  IRREGULAR  PHRASES.— When  are  ir- 
regular phrases  justified?  Characteristics  of  irregular 
phrases.  Sometimes  pre-memorized,  sometimes  extempo- 
rized. Irregular  phrases  classified.  How  are  irregular 
phrases  constructed?  Intersection.  Requisites  of  irregular 
phrases.  Legibility  of  irregular  phrases. ..  .Pages  291-299. 

CHAPTER  XXIII.  LIST  OF  IRREGULAR  PHRASES 
OF  GENERAL  UTILITY Pages  300-310 

CHAPTER  XXIV.  LIST  OF  SIMPLE  OR  WORD-.TOTN- 
ING  PHRASES Pages  311-339 

INDEX Pages  341-354 


PREFACE. 

1.  A  glance  at  the  contents  of  this  volume  will  show 
that  it  differs  widely,  both  in  plan  and  execution,  from  the 
ordinary  "phrase-book."     It  seeks  to  teach  phrasing  by  a 
new  method.     From  the  start  it  calls  on  the  pupil,  not  to 
memorize  phrases  but  to  make  them  for  himself,  by  putting 
into    practice   the   principles   according   to   which    correct 
phrases  are  constructed.    In  the  opinion  of  the  author,  the 
mere  copying  and  attempted  memorizing  of  alphabetically- 
arranged  phrase-lists,  as  a  means  of  learning  the  art  of 
phrasing,  has  had  its  day.     Phrase-formation,  like  word- 
formation,  is  governed  and  guided  by  certain  defined  prin- 
ciples.    These  are  few  and  simple,  although  the  phrases 
which  are  their  outgrowth  are  innumerable.    To  these  prin- 
ciples all  professional  reporters,  so  far  as  they  phrase  at 
all,   must   conform.     Only   by   acquiring   familiarity   with 
these  principles,  whether  such  familiarity  be  acquired  di- 
rectly or  indirectly,  consciously  or  unconsciously,  with  time 
wasted  or  time  economized,  can  phrase-writing  be  learned 
effectually  and  thoroughly. 

2.  A  highly  intelligent  teacher  of  long  experience*  has 
happily  laid  down  the  correct  method  of  teaching  or  learn- 
ing the  art  of  phrasing.     "If  the  teacher,"  he  says,  "will 
take  up  one  principle  at  a  time,  explain  it  to  the  pupil,  and 
give  him  a  sufficient  number  of  phrases  to  accustom  him  to 
its  application,  and  the  next  day  take  up  another  in  the 
same  way,  and  so  on  from  day  to  day,  he  will  find  that  the 
pupil  will  soon  be  able  to  write  phrases  as  naturally  as  he 
writes  single  words."    But  where  is  the  text-book  by  means 
of  which  phrasing  can  be  thus  learned  or  taught?    Where 
is  the  book  which  will  inspire  the  student,  in  the  language 
of  Isaac  Pitman,  to  "grasp  the  principle  of  uniting  words, 

*W.  S.  Rogers. 


14  PREFACE. 

rather  than  endeavor  to  commit  phrases  to  memory?"  The 
very  well  informed  writer  just  quoted  concedes  that  one 
who  seeks  a  book  from  which  the  principles  of  phrase- 
writing  may  be  learned  or  taught  in  the  manner  he  recom- 
mends, will  seek  in  vain.  The  present  volume  undertakes 
to  supply  that  want.  It  aims  to  exhibit  clearly,  systemat- 
ically and  concisely,  in  a  series  of  progressive  lessons,  the 
comparatively  few  and  simple  rules  and  principles  of  the 
phrasing  art,  with  illustrations  and  exercises  appropriate 
to  each.  The  course  of  study  here  laid  down  must,  in  the 
opinion  of  the  author,  prove  not  only  instructive  but  highly 
interesting,  and  cannot  fail  to  give  the  student  in  a  short 
time  a  far  better  command  of  the  art  of  phrasing  than  can 
ever  be  attained  by  the  laborious  and  uninteresting  course 
of  study  usually  adopted — the  study  of  mere  phrase-lists 
arranged  alphabetically,  with  no  attempt  to  reach,  through 
logical  classification,  the  particular  principles  which  dif- 
ferent phrases  exemplify.  When  the  student  once  learns, 
as  he  may  from  such  a  book  as  this,  to  "grasp  the  principle 
of  uniting  words,"  the  memorizing  of  tediously-extended 
phrase-lists  is  no  longer  a  necessity.  Relieved  from  "the 
burden  of  empirical  and  imitative  practice,"  the  student 
gradually  but  rapidly  learns  to  make  phrases  for  himself 
in  limitless  number — not  in  the  dangerously  incorrect  way 
so  common  with  young  writers,  but  safely  and  correctly, 
because  he  works  along  the  clearly-illuminated  lines  of  well- 
understood  practical  principles. 

3.  If  any  student  or  teacher  should  be  disappointed 
when  he  fails  to  find  opposite  each  phrase  herein  given  its 
shorthand  representation,  he  should  understand  that  if  the 
various  phrases  had  been  given  in  shorthand  characters  as 
intended  to  be  written  by  the  pupil,  the  prime  purpose  of 
the  book — to  teach  students  to  make  correct  phrases  for 
themselves — would  have  been  defeated.  If  the  lessons  be 
taken  up  one  by  one  in  the  order  given,  no  such  shorthand 
key  will  be  necessary;  for  care  has  been  taken  that  no  les- 
son shall  contain  any  word  or  phrase  which  at  the  time  of 


PREFACE.  15 

its  introduction  cannot  be  correctly  written  in  accordance 
with  the  instruction  previously  given  in  this  book,  or  the 
knowledge  which  the  student  may  reasonably  be  presumed 
to  have  acquired  before  undertaking  its  study. 

4.  The  author's  purpose  has  been  to  make  this  emphat- 
ically and  pre-eminently  a  practical  book.    It  aims  to  define 
and  expound,  not  what  in  his  opinion  the  art  of  phrasing 
ought  to  be,  but  what  it  is.     It  seeks  to  exhibit  the  art  as 
exemplified  in  the  daily  work  of  practical  reporters,  who, 
though  they  do  not  all  phrase  to  the  same  extent,  do  all 
phrase  more  or  less,  and  so  far  as  they  phrase  at  all,  con- 
form consciously  or  unconsciously  to  well-settled  principles 
as  exhibited  in  this  volume. 

5.  If  the  contents  of  this  book  should  not  be  found  at 
every  point  absolutely  original,  the  author  will  consider 
this  fact  no  reproach;   for  an  instruction-book,  if  it  is  to 
meet  the  needs  of  those  who  are  to  use  it,  must  embody,  as 
it  is  hoped  the  present  volume  does,  the  best  fruits  of  the  la- 
bors of  previous  workers  in  the  same  field.     In  many  cases 
the  views  and  instructions  of  others  have  interwoven  them- 
selves inseparably  with  the  ideas  of  the  author,  so  that  it 
has  been  impossible  to  credit  particular  suggestions  to  par- 
ticular writers.    Where  the  exact  words  of  any  author  have 
been  used,  such  use  (unless  oversight  has  prevented)  is  in- 
dicated. 

6.  Among  the  books  which  the  author  has  found  more 
or  less  useful  in  the  preparation  of  these  lessons,  the  follow- 
ing may  be  named:     Pitman  &  Howard's  Reporter's  Com- 
panion and  Phonographic  Dictionary;  Graham's  Handbook. 
Dictionary  and  Second  Reader;   DementV~Pitmanic  Short- 
hand;  Palmer's  Expert  Reporter;   Practical  Shorthand,  by 
L.  B.  Case  and  others;  Isaac  Pitman's  Phrase-Book;  Hum- 
phrey's  Interlinear   Shorthand;    Barnes's   Shorthand  Man- 
ual;   T.  A.  Reed's  Leaves  from  my  Note-book;    Munson's 
Phrase-Book;  The  Phrase,  by  F.  G.  Morris. 

7.  If  some  of  the  views  and  instructions  herein  given 
should,  in  the  opinion  of  anyone,  vary  from  views  hereto 


16  PREFACE. 

fore  expressed  by  the  author,  he  can  only  say  that  he  does 
not  feel  too  old  to  acquire  new  ideas,  and  that  he  values 
truth  more  highly  than  consistency.  In  his  previous  book, 
"The  Factors  of  Shorthand  Speed,"  an  effort  was  made  to 
direct  the  pupil  as  to  what  course  he  should  pursue,  with 
the  means  then  within  his  reach,  to  acquire  the  art  of  phras- 
ing. Some  paragraphs  in  that  book,  especially  under  the 
title  "Practical  Suggestions  about  Phrasing,"  need  not  have 
been  written,  and  probably  would  not  have  been,  if  there 
had  then  existed  such  a  Dook  as  the  present,  to  which  the 
author  might  have  referred  the  help-needing  reader. 

8.  The  question  may  be  asked,  "At  what  stage  of  the 
student's  course  may  the  study  of  this  book  safely  and  ben- 
eficially  begin?"     The   author   believes   that   the   learner, 
with   such  a  book  as  the  present  to  guide  him  in   right 
methods  and  guard  him  from  wrong  ones,  may  not  only 
safely  but  profitably  begin  the   study  of  phrasing  much 
earlier  than  has  heretofore  seemed  wise  and  practicable. 
As  each  abbreviating  principle  of  toord-formation — such  as 
the  s  circle,  the  double-length  principle,  the  I  or  r  hook,  the 
n  hook,  the  f-v  hook,  the  half-lengthing  principle,  etc. — 
is  reached  in  its  order,  there  seems  to  be  no  reason  why 
the  application  of  this  particular  word-forming  principle 
to  phrase-formation — for  instance,  the  use  of  the  I  hook  to 
express  phraseographically  the  word  will,  or  the  use  of  the 
double-lengthing  principle  to  express  their,  other,  etc.,  or 
the  use  of  the  n  hook  to  express  one,  own,  than,  etc. — should 
not  immediately  be  made  familiar  to  the  learner.     Expe- 
rience has  shown  that  the  eagerness  of  immature  writers 
to  indulge  in  phrasing  practice  can  scarcely  be  restrained: 
let  such  practice,  then,  be  wisely  directed,  so  that  it  may  be 
safe  and  profitable. 

9.  Under  the  system  of  study  heretofore  generally  pur- 
sued, many  simple  word-groups  which  the  mere  beginner 
necessarily  meets  in  his  writing  and  reading,  are  first  pre- 
sented to  him,  not  as  phrases,  but  as  separate  words,  and 
for  the  time  being  are  so  read  and  written  by  him,  because 


PREFACE.  17 

of  the  seeming  necessity  that  the  subject  of  phrasing  be 
reserved  until  a  later  stage.  Thus  the  beginner,  by  read- 
ing and  writing  as  isolated  words  some  of  the  commonest 
and  most  useful  phrases,  acquires  methods  of  thinking  and 
writing  which  must  later  be  unlearned  at  considerable  cost 
of  time  and  labor.  But  by  the  method  of  study  herein  laid 
down,  the  early  introduction  of  simple  phrases  is  made  pos- 
sible and  profitable.  The  student's  primary  exercises  in 
reading  and  writing  can,  by  the  judicious  introduction  of 
correct  phrases,  be  largely  diversified  in  the  scope  of  their 
ideas  and  language,  and  thus  made  much  more  interesting 
and  beneficial.  If  phrase-formation  thus  keeps  equal  pace 
with  word-formation,  the  study  of  shorthand,  as  the  author 
believes,  may  be  made  vastly  more  interesting  than  at  pres- 
ent, and  the  student's  progress  be  greatly  accelerated. 

10.  In  respect  to  most  of  the  principles  and  methods  of 
phrasing  herein  presented,  the  Graham  and  Benn  Pitman 
systems  practically  coincide.  Wherever  any  principle  or 
expedient  included  in  this  volume  is  not  found  in  both  sys- 
tems, the  fact  distinctly  appears;  so  that  writers  of  either 
may  freely  use  this  book  without  fear  of  unconsciously  im- 
bibing matter  disapproved  by  the  authority  whose  teaching 
they  have  chosen  to  adopt.  No  important  or  useful  phras- 
ing principle  of  either  system  has  been  consciously  omit- 
ted.* In  a  few  cases,  methods  of  phrase-writing  are  herein 
presented  which  possibly  neither  of  these  high  authorities 
has  approved.  Yet  because  these  expedients  are  somewhat 
extensively  (though  not  generally)  used,  and  do  not  appear 
to  the  author  objectionable,  it  has  been  thought  best  to  in- 
clude them,  and  thus  allow  the  student  or  the  teacher  to  ex- 
ercise his  own  discretion  as  to  their  adoption.  In  every 
such  case,  however,  due  notification  is  given,  so  that  these 
few  and  minor  portions  of  the  book  may,  if  desired,  be 
passed  over. 


*If  this  book  should  enable  Graham  and  Benn  Pitman  writers  to  see 
in  how  many  points  the  two~systems  agree,  and  in  how  few  they  vary, 
the  author  will  feel  that  he  has  incidentally  worked  out  a  result  we)1 
•worth  accomplishing. 


18  PREFACE. 

11.  The  lessons  in  this  book,  to  be  profitable,  must  be 
not  only  studied  but  mastered.*    A  smattering  acquaintance 
with  them  will  simply  confuse  the  student,  and  delay  or 
defeat  his  acquisition  of  speed.    Without  genuine  study,  the 
art  of  good  phrasing  can  never  be  learned;  and  without  a 
thorough  knowledge  of  this  art,  no  one  can  ever  become 
a  truly  accomplished  reporter. 

12.  The  author  cannot  send  out  this  volume  to  the  pub- 
lic without  acknowledging  his  indebtedness  to  his  esteemed 
friend   and   professional  co-worker,   Mr.   Fred   Irland,   for 
valuable  aid  and  counsel,  cheerfully  and  continuously  given, 
from  the  inception  of  the  work  until  its  completion. 


*For  the  author's  suggestions  as  to  the  method  in  which  the  exercises 
may  be  most  profitably  used  by  teacher  and  student,  see  note  to  Para- 
graph 65. 


CHAPTER  I. 


PHRASES       DEFENDED,       DEFINED       AND       DISTIN- 
GUISHED. 

13.  One  of  the  ablest  and  most  distinguished  reporters 
that  ever  lived,  has  said:  "In  following  a  rapid  speaker,  the 
occurrence  of  a  phrase  or  sentence  which  can  be  condensed 
into  a  convenient  and  familiar  phraseogram  is  a  god-send 
to  the  writer;  and  if  two  or  three  such  occur  close  together, 
they  enable  him,  if  he  is  losing  ground,  to  advance  by  leaps 
and  bounds  until  he  is  close  at  the  speaker's  heels.     The 
common  phrases,  as  a  matter  of  fact  and  in  point  of  fact, 
have  often,  like  good  fairies,  helped  me  over  the  ground 
when  I  have  been  running  a  hard  race;  and  I  felt  really 
grateful  for  their  intervention.  In  taking  evidence,  for  ex- 
ample, the  occurrence  of  such  a  question  as,  do  you  mean 
to  say  as  a  matter  of  fact  that  the  affairs  of  the  company 
could  not  l>e  settled,  will    (because  of  the  several  useful 
phrases  which  may  be  brought  into  play)    enable  the  re- 
porter to  make  up  any  amount  of  lost  ground,  or  if  he  has 
none  to  make  up,  will  permit  him,  so  to  speak,  to  play 
with  the  speaker,  and  record  his  words  with  the  utmost 
ease  and  nonchalance,  however  rapidly  they  may  be  uttered." 
(T.  A.  Reed.) 

THE    AMERICAN    SYSTEM    OF    PHRASING. 

14.  This  apt  language,  illustrating  how  highly  reporters 
of  large  experience  appreciate  the  value  of  good  phrases'as 
speed-promoters,  is  the  testimony  of  a  man  conservative 
almost  to  the  point  of  timidity  in  availing  himself  of  the 


20        PHRASES   DEFINED   AND   DISTINGUISHED. 

help  which  good  phrasing  affords,  and  who  could  but  poorly 
conceive  the  wonderful  possibilities  of  the  phrasing  art, 
that  advanced  system  of  phrasing — the  American  system, 
as  it  may  justly  be  called — which  the  present  book  under- 
takes to  exhibit.  In  this  country,  reporting  has  been  culti- 
vated to  a  remarkable  and  admirable  extent;  and  phrasing 
as  applied  to  court  reporting  has  been  especially  developed. 
The  system  of  phrasing  here  presented  is  pre-eminently 
adapted  to  the  reporting  of  colloquial  matter,  such  as  ex- 
temporaneous speech  or  legal  testimony.  When  the  stu- 
dent whose  practice  has  been  confined  entirely  or  mainly 
to  book-matter  or  to  ornate  compositions  of  a  rhetorical 
character,  undertakes  to  report  matter  expressed  in  collo- 
quial or  informal  style,  he  encounters  unexpected  difficulty, 
because  required  to  write  commonplace  phrases  or  expres- 
sions— the  homely  language  of  every-day  life,  which  rarely 
occurs  in  books.  For  these  every-day  expressions  and  col- 
loquial word-groups,  which,  because  so  familiar,  are  rap- 
idly spoken,  there  should  be  a  correspondingly  rapid  means 
of  expression.  This  medium  of  expression  has  been  found 
in  the  American  system  of  court  reporting,  which,  so  far 
as  it  involves  the  art  of  phrasing,  it  is  one  aim  of  this  book 
to  exhibit.  This  volume  is  especially  designed  to  make  col- 
loquial or  commonplace  expressions  easy  of  execution,  and 
thus  to  prepare  the  student  for  reporting  court  proceedings 
and  other  forms  of  familiar  discourse. 

GOOD    PHRASES    PROMOTE    LEGIBILITY. 

14%.  It  should  not  be  forgotten  that,  apart  from  the 
question  of  speed,  good  phrases  conduce  to  legibility;  and 
this  they  do  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  in  a  phrase  the  accus- 
tomed positions  of  word-outlines,  and  even  word-signs,  are 
often  lost;  that  ordinary  word-forms  are  often  varied;  and 
that,  but  for  the  illumination  of  context,  outlines  would 
often  be  ambiguous.  Most  emphatically  it  is  true  that  "in 
a  phrase,  words  are  so  related  that  one  helps  to  read  an- 
other." 


PHRASES   DEFINED   AND   DISTINGUISHED.        21 


SIMPLE  PHRASES. 

15.  Phrasing  is  sometimes  defined  as  "the  joining  of 
words  together  without  lifting  the  pen."     But  this  defini- 
tion is  for  several  reasons  too  narrow.     Good  phrasing  is 
much  more  than  this.     As  Benn  Pitman  has  wisely  said, 
"The  mere   desultory  stringing  of  words  together  is  not 
phrasing."     In  the  first  place,  this  definition  ignores  sev- 
eral highly-useful  classes  of  phrases  which,  it  may  be  said, 
illustrate  phrasing  as  a  fine  art.    It  includes  only  one  class 
of  phrases,  and  those  the  simplest  and  least  artistic — "those 
which  simply  join  together,  without  alteration,  the  ordinary 
outlines  of  words  as  they  are  written  when  standing  alone." 
These  phrases,  for  the  writing  of  which  one  needs  to  know 
but  little  more  than  the  separate  forms  of  the  words  to  be 
phrased,  may  be  called  simple  or  word-joining  phrases. 

WORD-BLEXDIXG   PHRASES. 

16.  But  the  art  of  phrasing  teaches  us  to  write  many 
common  words  in  a  way  in  which  they  are  not,  and  cannot 
be,  written  when  standing  alone.     Much  more  important 
and  useful  than  the  simple  phrases  just  defined  are  those 
in  which,  under  the  operation  of  what  may  be  called  the 
laws  of  phrasing,  the  grouped  words,  or  a  portion  of  them, 
take  different  forms  from  those  they  would  take  if  written 
separately — not  only  different,  but  briefer  and  more  facile. 
Sometimes  a  phrase  consists  of  a  single  consonant  stem, 
with   two  or  three  simple   modifications  or  appendages — 
hook,  circles,  etc. — representing  additional  words  by  signs 
briefer  than  those  ordinarily  used.    In  this  way  much  more 
is  accomplished  in  economy  of  movement  and  economy  of 
time  than  the  mere  saving  of  pen-lifts.    Practice  has  demon- 
strated that  by  utilizing  in  phrases  the  hooks,  the  circles, 
the  loops,  the  lengthening  and  halving  principles,  and  other 
abbreviating  devices,  in  a  manner  unknown  to  and  beyond, 
though  not  inconsistent  with,  the  principles  of  word-forma- 


22       PHRASES  DEFINED   AND  DISTINGUISHED. 

tinn,  numerous  common  and  useful  words  can,  without  any 
loss  of  speed  or  legibility,  but  with  a  decided  gain  of  both, 
be  written  in  phrases  much  more  briefly  than  the  separated 
or  isolated  word-forms.  Thus  in  phrasing,  the  elementary 
principles  of  phonography  are  brought  into  a  new  service, 
unforeseen  when,  for  the  mere  purpose  of  word-formation, 
those  principles  were  devised.  Phrases  of  this  class  "group 
together  by  means  of  stem-signs  and  the  various  hooks, 
circles,  loops  and  other  modifications,  all  the  consonants 
of  two  or  more  words,  without  regard  to  the  form  of  each 
individually.  In  such  cases  some,  or  occasionally  all,  of  the 
words  lose  their  identity  or  individuality,  although  as  a 
rule,  there  is  one  word-form  that  stands  intact,  around 
which  the  others  gather  in  a  sort  of  verbal  cluster."* 

17.  Many  word-forming  principles,  now  largely  used  in 
phrase-formation,  were  devised  at  a  time  when  stenographic 
phrasing  was   scarcely   recognized   as   a   possibility.     Em 
phatically  it  is  true  that  the  men  who  in  the  early  years  of 
Pitmanic  shorthand  arranged  the  principles  of  word-forma- 
tion "builded  better  than  they  knew."    For  instance,  when 
the  I  and  the  r  hooks  were  invented  as  mere  factors  in  the 
formation   or  abbreviation  of  word-outlines,  it  was   little 
dreamed  that  later  on,  as  the  pressure  of  reporting  needs 
would  push  phonetic  shorthand  to  its  fullest  possibilities, 
these  two  hooks  would  be  made  useful  in  phrases  to  repre- 
sent respectively  the  common  words  will  and  are.    So,  too, 
when  the  double-lengthing  principle  was  devised  for  the 
purpose   of   giving   more   facile   forms   to   such   words   as 
neither,  father,  etc.,  it  was  not  foreseen  that  this  principle 
would  ere  long  be  made  useful  in  phrases  for  the  purpose 
of  representing  with  admirable  brevity  the  very  common 
expressions  there,  they  are  and  other.     Similar  remarks 
might  be  made  as  to  the  f-v  hook,  the  n  hook,  the  half- 
lengthing  principle  and  other  expedients,  familiar  to  every 
one  who  has  mastered  the  principles  of  word-fornlation. 

18.  For  the  purpose  of  contrasting  these  two  methods 


*J.  E.  Munson. 


PHRASES   DEFINED   AND   DISTINGUISHED.        23 

of  phrasing,  we  may  take  the  phrase  it  will  have  had.    By 
merely  joining  the  ordinary  word-forms,  we  have  the  phrase- 


'/  V 

form .../...  V,.-  in  which  each  stroke  is  a  complete  represent- 


ative of  a  word  and  signifies  the  same  whether  joined- to 
other  words  or  separated;  so  that  the  sole  gain  by  phrasing 
consists  in  the  fact  that  all  of  the  four  words,  with  no 
variation  from  their  separate  forms,  are  written  without 
lifting  the  pen.  But  when,  under  well-settled  phrasing 
laws,  we  express  will  by  the  I  hook,  have  by  the  f-v  hook, 
and  had  by  halving,  there  results  the  beautiful,  compact 

combination  ...0. In  this  last  phraseogram  no  word  takes 

the  form  it  would  take  if  written  separately.  The  words  are 
blended,  rather  than  joined.  Each  word  is  inseparably 
merged  with  the  others.  No  one  of  them  as  written  in  the) 
phrase  could  be  taken  away  from  it  without  marring,  or 
making  unmeaning,  some  of  those  remaining. 

19.  A  word-blending  phrase,  then,  as  distinguished  from 
a  simple  or  word-joining  phrase,  is  one  in  which  some  or  all 
of  the  words  are  so  merged  and  intertwined  as  to  be  in- 
capable   of    separation  without    destroying,    not    only    the 
phrase  itself,  but  the  significance  of  some  or  all  of  the  forms 
which,  under  phrasing  laws,  the  different  words  have  as- 
sumed. 

BROKEN  PHRASES. 

20.  The  definition  already  cited — that  phrasing  is  "the 
joining  of  words  without  lifting  the  pen" — is  further  de- 
fective, because  it  ignores  many  phrases    (commonly  and 
properly  so  called,)  in  the  writing  of  which  the  pen  is  lifted 
for  the  purpose  of  bringing  into  operation  that  useful  ex- 
pedient, "proximity,"*  by  which,  for  the  purpose  of  imply- 


*See  Chapter  XII. 


24       PHRASES  DEFINED  AND  DISTINGUISHED. 

ing  certain  omitted  syllables  or  words,  two  characters  are 
brought  nearer  to  each  other  than  ordinary,  though  not 
near  enough  to  join.  Thus  the  phrase  from  day  to  day,  (in 
which,  for  the  purpose  of  indicating  the  omitted  words 
from  and  to,  the  two  d's  are  brought  close  together,  though 
not  connected,)  is  a  true  phrase — so  named  and  recognized 
by  all  stenographers:  yet  no  words  are  joined;  the  two 
strokes  constituting  the  whole  phrase  as  written  are  sep- 
arated by  a  pen-lift.  Phrases  in  the  writing  of  which  the 
pen  is  thus  lifted  for  the  sake  of  indicating  by  "proximity" 
omitted  syllables  or  wordt  may  be  called  broken  phrases. 

ELLIPTIC  PHRASES. 

21.  The  definition  already  cited  is  further  inaccurate, 
because  it  ignores  the  fact  that,  under  the  laws  of  phrasing, 
many  words  can  be  and  are  omitted  altogether — not  even 
indicated   by   any  stenographic   expedient   such   as   "prox- 
imity," but  suggested  or  implied  to  the  mind  of  the  reader 
by  the  sense  or  context  only.     Thus  the  phrase  Jesus  of 
Nazareth  is  not  a  joining  of  the  three  words  constituting 
the  word-group;   for  one  of  them — of — is  altogether  omit- 
ted in  the  writing,  to  be  supplied  in  reading  by  the  sense 
or  context.     Phrases  of  this  sort,  in  the  writing  of  which 
there  is  an  ellipsis  of  certain  words — words  being  abso- 
lutely left  out  without  other  indication  than  what  the  sense 
or  context  gives — may  be  called  elliptic  phrases. 

COMPOSITE  PHRASES. 

22.  Somewhat  lengthy  phrases  are  often  formed  by  a 
combination  of  several  shorter  phrases.     Thus  the  phrase 
I  think  you  are  of  my  opinion  may  be  compounded  of  the 
three  shorter   phrases,  I  think,  you  are,  and  of  my  opinion. 
A  phrase  in  which  several  smaller  phrases  are    thus  com- 
bined may  be  called  a  composite  phrase.    The  sub-phrases, 
as  they  may  be  called,  are  frequently  connected  by  the  word 
that,  or  some  other  connective  word,  as  in  the  phrases  I 
think  that  you  icill  be,  I  know  that  there  are  many,  I  sup- 


PHRASES  DEFINED  AND  DISTINGUISHED.       25 

pose  that  it  is  true.     Of  the  composite  parts,  some  may  be 
simple  phrases,  and  others  word-blending  phrases.     For  in- 


stance, in  the  phrase  they  will  not  take  offense 


they  will  not,  a  word-blending  phrase,  is  followed  by  take 
offense,  a  simple  or  word-joining  phrase. 

SPECIAL   OR  IRREGULAR   PHRASES. 

23.  Another  class  of  phrases  ignored  by  the  definition 
cited  consists  of  those  in  which  a  brief,  compact  represent- 
ation of  certain  words  is  attained  by  arbitrary  and  irregular 
methods  of  expression,  peculiar  perhaps  to  a  single  case  or 
a  few  cases  —  not  in  accord  with  any  general  law  of  phras- 


ing.    Of  such  phrases,  vice  versa  ..........  "  .....  is  an  illustration. 

DEFINITION  OF  A  PHRASE. 

24.  In  view  of  the  classification  of  phrases  just  given, 
the  following,  covering  all  these  classes,  will  be  found  to 
be  an  accurate  definition  of  a  phrase:  A  combination  of 
characters  (simple  or  complex,  continuously  written  or  in 
close  proximity)  representing  a  group  of  words,  as  contra- 
distinguished from  signs  representing  words  singly  or  sep- 
arately. 


CHAPTER  II. 


THE  PHRASING  VOCABULARY. 


WHAT  WORDS  MAY  BE  PHRASED. 

25.  "The  mere  desultory  stringing  of  words  together  is 
not  phrasing."  Even  though  the  words  may  conveniently 
be  joined,  yet  to  phrase  indiscriminately,  without  regard  to 
the  fitness  of  the  words  for  phraseographic  connection,  is, 
especially  to  the  young  writer,  a  decided  loss  in  speed  and 
legibility.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  most  reporters  confine  their 
phrasing  almost  entirely  to  what  may  be  called  the  phrasing 
words.  The  really  useful  phrases  of  the  language  are  made 
from  a  very  limited  body  of  words,  which  may  be  called  the 
phrasing  vocabulary.  The  reporter's  really  indispensable 
phrases  are,  in  general,  varied  combinations  of  a  few  fre- 
quently-recurring connective  words,  which,  by  reason  of 
their  frequency  in  all  ordinary  speech,  make  up  at  least 
one-half  of  any  spoken  matter.  It  may  be  truly  said  that  a 
few  hundred  words,  such  as  take,  can,  shall,  may,  this,  etc., 
constitute  the  ordinary  phrase-building  material  of  the  lan- 
guage. From  this  apparently  limited  material  the  prac- 
tised reporter  constructs  an  infinite  variety  of  colloquial 
and  highly  useful  phrases.  The  combinations  which  it  is 
possible  to  obtain  from  the  joining  of  these  comparatively 
few  common  words  are  practically  innumerable.  An  emi- 
nent reporter  (Mr.  Edwin  R.  Gardiner,)  has  aptly  said: 
"Common  speech  comprises  but  a  few  thousand  words;  new 
opportunities  of  uniting  them  are  constantly  presenting 
themselves;  we  may  list  these  combinations  by  the  thou- 
sands, and  never  list  them  all."  To  learn  all  these  com- 
binations by  rote  would  baffle  the  most  prodigious  memory. 


PHRASING  VOCABULARY.  27 

Fortunately  no  such  task  of  memorizing  is  required;  for 
when  the  common  words  which  are  the  factors  of  all  or- 
dinary phrases  are  thoroughly  familiarized,  together  with 
the  principles  by  which  these  words  may  be  joined,  number- 
less combinations,  covering  the  greatest  variety  of  connec- 
tions and  sequences,  can  be  readily  written  off-hand,  in 
whatever  order  they  may  come,  as  they  fall  from  the  speak- 
er's tongue. 

26.  The  words  constituting  what  we  call  the  phrasing 
vocabulary  have  certain  characteristics  in  common: 

(a.)  They  are  words  of  almost  constant  recurrence— 
the  language  of  ordinary  speech — words  which  readily 
combine  on  the  tongue  and  should  readily  combine  on  the 
pen.  A  phrase  is  generally  bad  if  the  words  composing 
it  are,  in  themselves  or  in  their  peculiar  connection  or  com- 
bination, rare  or  unusual. 

(&.)  The  word-forms  of  the  phrasing  vocabulary  are 
capable  of  facile  execution.  Many  words,  though  extremely 
brief  in  their  ordinary  isolated  forms,  have  been  provided 
for  phrasing  purposes  with  forms  still  more  abbreviated. 
Thus  it,  written  when  standing  alone  with  a  single  stroke  of 
the  pen,  is  frequently  represented  still  more  briefly  in 
phrases — in  fact,  is  not  written  at  all,  but  merely  indicated 
by  simply  shortening  to  half  its  ordinary  length  the  preced- 
ing stroke.  So  will,  are  and  have,  each  expressed  ordinarily 
by  a  brief  consonant  stroke,  find  still  more  compact  repre- 
sentation in  phrases  by  means  of  the  hooks  for  I,  r  and  v. 
Again^the  word  their,  written  very  compactly  if  alone,  is 
often  expressed  still  more  briefly  in  a  phrase  by  doubling 
the  length  of  the  preceding  stroke.  So  also  the  word  us, 
written  when  standing  alone  by  a  consonant  stroke,  becomes 
generally  only  a  small  circle  when  written  in  phrases. 

(c.)  The  word-forms  of  the  phrasing  vocabulary  are 
readily  legible,  not  only  because  familiarized  by  frequent 
recurrence,  but  because  in  general  they  do  not  require  to  be 
distinguished  by  position,  and  hence  can,  without  restric- 
tion, take  their  places  in  any  part  of  a  phrase. 

(d.)     They  have  a  special  capacity  for  taking  on,  or 


28  PHRASING  VOCABULARY. 

merging  with  themselves,  other  common  words,  by  means 
of  the  hooks,  circles  and  other  modifications  or  appendages 
which  in  phrasing  represent  whole  words,  and  not,  as  in 
word-writing,  merely  portions  of  words. 

WORDS   WHICH   MAY   NOT   BE   PHRASED. 

27.  While  certain  words  phrase  so  readily  that  it  may 
be  said  they  invite  the  writer  to  phrase  them,  others,  in 
order  to  be  perfectly  legible,  require  to  stand  alone.  Among 
the  class  of  words  to  be  phrased  with  great  caution,  because 
in  general  they  need  isolation  to  make  them  legible,  are  the 
following: 

(a.)  Unique  or  uncommon  words,  including  proper 
names.  Especially  should  rare  words  of  long  outlines  be 
phrased  sparingly.  When  in  phrases  such  words  are  com- 
bined with  others,  the  reader  is  often  puzzled  to  guess 
where  a  particular  word-outline  begins  or  ends.  With  an 
unfamiliar  word,  isolation  is  generally  necessary  for  legi- 
bility, while,  on  the  contrary,  familiar  and  especially  col- 
loquial words  are  often  more  legible  when  written  in  groups 
than  singly.  It  should  be  added,  however,  that  a  word 
unfamiliar  when  first  encountered  may  by  repetition,  even 
during  the  course  of  a  single  brief  speech,  become  familiar 
enough  to  be  freely  phrased. 

(&.)  Words  which  ordinarily  require  distinctive  posi- 
tion to  make  them  legible  cannot  in  general  be  used  in  a 
phrase  except  at  the  beginning,  unless  some  method  of  dis- 
tinction other  than  position — such,  for  instance,  as  vocali- 
zation— be  resorted  to.  The  subject  of  position  as  a*  means 
of  word-distinction  will  be  fully  treated  in  a  later  chapter. 

(c.)  Incomplete  outlines,  unless  the  words  represented 
be  very  familiar,  are  phrased  less  freely  and  more  cau- 
tiously than  words  in  which  all  the  consonants  are  ex- 
pressed, because  in  general  the  former  are  not  intrinsically 
so  legible  as  the  latter.  If,  for  instance,  one  should  join 
the  words  my  influence,  the  phrase,  on  account  of  the  use 
of  the  word  influence,  would  probably  not  be  legible,  while 
my  reasons  would  be  be  readily  recognized. 


CHAPTER  III. 


THE  REQUISITES  OF  A  GOOD  PHRASE. 


"A  good  phonographic  phrase  is  easy  to  write  anil  pleasant  to  read. 
It  brings  the  words  harmoniously  together  like  the  members  of  a  happy 
family;  and  to  see  them  in  such  loving  juxtaposition  gives  one  a  certain 
sense  of  satisfaction  and  pleasure."  <.T-  A.  Reed.) 

SHOULD    FOLLOW    NATURAL    SPEECH. 

28.  A  good  phonographic  phrase  simply  groups  upon 
paper,  words  already   grouped   by  the  mind   and   tongue. 
Words  which  nature  has  thus  blended  and  coalesced — which 
"flow  together  as  if  they  were  the  syllables  of  a  single 
word,"*  and,  therefore,  are  uttered  with  more  than  average 
rapidity — suggest   and   require   some   briefer   mode   of   ex- 
pression than  isolated  word-forms.     This  suggests  the  first 
requirement  of  a  good  phrase. 

29.  (a.)     "It  should  as  nearly  as  possible  follow  the 
groupings  of  natural  speech."     (Irland).     Back  of,  and  an- 
terior to,  the  sign-group,  there  should  be  a  natural  thought- 
group  and  a  natural  word-group.     Words  are  joined  in  sten- 
ographic phrases,  not  entirely  because  it  is  convenient  to 
join  them,  but  because,  by  the  laws  of  thought  and  lan- 
guage, they  belong  together. 

SENSE  RELATION. 

30.  (&.)     Words   between   which  there  is  naturally  a 
rhetorical  or  grammatical  pause  should  not  be  joined.     To 
connect  words  whose  sense  relation  is  not  close  gives  a 
combination  which  is  not  suggestive.     Two  words  may  so 


"Fred  Irland. 


30  REQUISITES  OF  A  GOOD  PHRASE. 

constantly  recur  together  that  in  ninety-nine  cases  out  of  a 
hundred  they  would  be  easily  and  properly  joined;  yet  in 
some  rare  instances  those  words,  though  one  immediately 
succeeds  the  other,  may  De  so  separated  in  sense  relation 
as  to  require  a  separation  of  their  written  signs.  Thus 
it  is  not  is  a  very  common  and,  in  general,  an  unobjection- 
able phrase;  yet  the  sentence  I  said  that  it  is,  not  that  it 
was,  would  be  very  perplexing  to  the  reader  if  not  were 
joined  to  it  is,  immediately  preceding.  So  the  phrase  in 
this  is  ordinarily  unimpeachable;  yet  in  the  sentence,  the 
vessel  came  in  this  morning,  the  words  in  this  could  not 
properly  be  written  as  a  phrase. 

31.  (c.)     The  words  of  a  phrase  should  join  each  other 
easily  and  fluently;  otherwise  no  time  is  saved  by  joining. 
"Awkward   joinings,   however   closely   the   words   may   be 
related,  are  to  be  avoided."     If  the  phrase  is  one  in  which 
the  hand  must  pause  as  it  passes  from  word  to  word,  it  is 
better  to  lift  the  pen,  because  such  phrases  waste  time, 
instead  of  saving  it.     There  are  many  cases  in  which  the 
tyro  loses  time  by  joining,  or  undertaking  to  join,  words 
which  might  much  better  be  written  separately.     Defining 
generally  the  characteristics  of  a  bad  junction,  it  may  be 
said  that  either  it  is  non-facile   (on  account  of  clumsily- 
joined  outlines,  forced  hooks,  etc.,)  or,  while  manually  easy 
of  execution,  it  leads  to  ambiguity  or  difficulty  in  reading. 

32.  Prom  the  fact  that  some  of  the  letters  of  the  alpha- 
bet do  not  so  easily  and  gracefully  connect  as  others,  bad  or 
indifferent  junctions  in  the  writing  of  single   words  are 
sometimes  unavoidable;   but  such  junctions  are  generally 
avoidable  when  they  occur  between  two  words  in  the  midst 
of  a  phrase. 

SOME    BAD    OR    DIFFICULT    JUNCTIONS    MUST    BE    TOLERATED. 

33.  But  "the  young  writer  should  not  reject  a  phrase 
because  he  cannot  at  first  make  it  with  perfect  ease  and 
accuracy;  for  it  may  be  a  phrase  quite  desirable  with  refer- 
ence both  to  speed  and  legibility."     (Practical  Shorthand.) 


REQUISITES  OF  A  GOOD  PHRASE.  31 

It  may  correspond  with  certain  natural  word-groups,  so 
that  the  writer  instinctively  feels  that  the  words  should  be 
written  together,  rather  than  separately,  and  the  sense  re- 
lation of  the  words  may  be  so  close  that  they  will  be  more 
readily  recognized  together  than  apart. 

"  A  LITTLE  EXTRA  CARE." 

34.  It  is  impossible  that  all  junctions  should  be  equally 
good;    and  the  writer  must  be  content  occasionally  with 
some  which  are  not  absolutely  unimpeachable — which  are 
merely   admissible.     A   distinguished    stenographic   author 
has  said:     "It  is  generally  better  to  disjoin  than  to  make 
phrase-outlines  that  contain  difficult  junctions;    but  occa- 
sionally speed  is  gained  and  legibility  not  impaired  by  in- 
cluding in  a  phrase,  junctions  which  require  a  little  extra 
care."     (Munson's  Phrase-Book,  121.) 

35.  Besides,  the  supposed  difficulty  of  a  particular  junc- 
tion, as  it  strikes  the  writer  on  the  first  trial,  may  not  be 
intrinsic  or  insurmountable,  but  may  arise   simply  from 
want  of  practice   on  that  particular  combination.     These 
difficult  but  not  inadmissible  phrases  should  be  treated  as 
the  beginner  treats  certain  letters  of  the  alphabet.    When 
he  finds  any  particular  consonant  stroke  more  difficult  of 
execution  than  others,  He  does  not  for  that  reason  discard  it. 
He  simply  recognizes  the  fact  that  this  particular  character 
calls  for  a  movement  which  habit  has  not  made  easy  for  his 
hand  or  fingers.     He  accepts  the  unusual  difficulty  of  the 
stroke  as  a  reason  for  giving  it  an  exceptional  amount  of 
practice;   and  thus  he  finally  reaches  a  point  where  every 
alphabetic  stroke  is  made  without  conscious  difficulty  or 
effort.     The    same   remark   applies   to   apparently   difficult 
phrase    combinations.     There    are    some    phrases    which, 
though  difficult  at  first,  become  eventually  easy  by  contin- 
ued practice,  or  if  not  absolutely  easy,  easy  enough  to  be 
preferable  to  a  pen-lift,  particularly  if  the  phrase  be  a  very 
common  one,  and  one  which  embraces  words  closely  con- 
nected in  sense.     Though  the  joinings  be  imperfect  and  on 


32  REQUISITES  OF  A  GOOD  PHRASE. 

first  trial  somewhat  awkward,  the  phrase  may  be  unambig- 
uous and  in  practice  too  useful  to  be  dispensed  with. 

DON'T  UOVUT  THE  POWER  OF  THE  HAND. 

36.  We  should  not  too  readily  doubt  the  power  of  the 
hand  to  execute  apparently  difficult  stenographic  forms  and 
combinations.     What  the  untrained  hand  can  do  is  no  meas- 
ure of  what  can  be  done  by  a  Land  whose  powers  have  been 
developed  by  practice.     For  a  couple  of  hundred  years  pre- 
ceding the  era  of  Isaac  Pitman,  the  devisers  of  stenographic 
alphabets  assumed  that  it  was  impossible  in  rapid  writing 
to    make    distinctions    between    heavy    strokes    and    light. 
Until  this  delusion  was  exploded,  a  simple,  philosophic  al- 
phabet was  unattainable.     And  while  the  Pitmanic  system 
was  in  its  vigorous  childhood,  an  enlarged  circle  or  hook 
at  the  beginning  of  a  shorthand  outline,  was,  on  account  of 
its  supposed  awkwardness  and  difficulty,  excluded  for  years 
from  the  system,  though  now  accepted  as  a  part  of  every 
version  of  Pitmanic  shorthand.     In  phrases,  as  elsewhere 
in  stenography,  hand-training  plays  an  important  part.     To 
what  point  should  such  training  be  extended?    Until  "the 
hand  carries  out  the  mind's  intention  without  requiring 
any  special  effort  to  be  directed  to  the  mere  mechanical 
execution."     (Munson's  Phrase-Book,  122.) 

37.  When  a  certain  combination  which  trained  writers 
have  approved  and  adopted  seems  to  the  student  difficult,, 
it  should  for  that  reason  be  the  more  practised  until  it 
becomes  easy.     The  shorthand  student  may  well  follow  the 
example  of  a  brilliant  young  English   stenographer    (Mr. 
George  W.  Bunbury),  who,  detailing  the  methods  of  practice 
by  which  he  won  a  "speed  certificate"  for  writing  250  words 
a  minute  for  ten  consecutive  minutes,  says: 

"After  taking  down  any  given  matter  on  the  first  trial,  I 
proceeded  to  transcribe  or  read  what  I  had  written,  circling 
each  outline  or  phrase  ichich  I  had  formed  badly  or  which 
looked  shaky.  These  outlines  and  phrases  I  carefully  noted 
in  a  small  book  I  carried  aixu.  with  me  for  that  purpose; 


REQUISITES  OF  A  GOOD  PHRASE.  33 

and  when  an  opportunity  presented  itself,  /  wrote  and  re- 
wrote them  until  I  acquired  the  greatest  possible  facility  in 
forming  them." 

38.  In  this  way,  junctions  which  it  is  desirable  to  have 
readily  at  command,  because  of  their  frequency  or  because 
of   their   correspondence   with   the   groupings   of   ordinary 
speech,  may,  though  seemingly  difficult  at  first,  be  made 
easy  by  continued  practice. 

BAD   JUNCTIONS   CLASSIFIED. 

39.  It  would  be  impossible  to  classify  all  the  various 
species  of  bad  junctions,  and  therefore  the  following  list 
is  not  to  be  considered  as  exhaustive  or  complete. 

40.  (a.)     One   class   of  bad  junctions  may   be   called 
"patched  joinings,"  in  making  which  the  writer,  in  order 
to  accomplish  the  junction,  lifts  the  pen  and  replaces  it. 
In  this  way  some  young  stenographers  undertake  to  write 


such  phrases  as  do  not  care  ....^ „  gave  them 


41.  (&.)  Bad  junctions  of  another  class  occur  when  a 
full-length  and  a  half-length  stroke  are  run  together  without 
a  distinct  point  of  junction,  so  that  there  is  nothing 
to  show  where  one  stroke  ends  and  the  other  begins,  the 
effect  of  which  is  that  the  characters  as  intended  to  be 
written  are  not  easily  recognized.  Illustrations:  might 


know,  right  after 

42.  (c.)  But  it  must  not  be  assumed  that  the  joining 
of  a  full-length  and  a  half-length  stroke  without  an  angle 
is  always  objectionable.  Such  phrases  as  so  that  are  al- 
lowable, because  they  come  under  the  rule  (applicable  to 
phrases  as  well  as  individual  words)  that  a  heavy  half- 
Itngth  curved  stroke  may  follow  a  light  full-length,  straight 


34  REQUISITES  OF  A  GOOD  PHRASE. 

or  curved,  without  an  angle,  as  in  the  words  feared  and 
named. 

43.  (d.)  Another  class  of  bad  junctions  comprises 
those  in  which  a  tick  vowel-sign  is  allowed  to  glide  into  or 
merge  with  the  adjoining  character,  without  any  distinct 


point  of  junction,  as  in  the  phrase  of  opinion 


44.     (e.)     In  other  cases  an  attempt  is  made  to  join 
the  final  hook  of  one  word  and  the  initial  hook  of  another. 

Illustrations:    again  call      -      ,   ,  in  whichever  direc- 

-/ 
tion  , k\ „    .    It  should  be  remembered  as  a     rule 


without  exception,  that  a  hook  cannot  join  a  hook,  unless 
both  be  made  in  the  same  direction,  as  in  the  word  ranger 


W         '"  *       -  ;  . 


45.  (f.)  In  another  objectionable  class  of  phrases,  two 
consonant  strokes  are  brought  together  which  cannot  be 
joined  without  special  effort,  because  the  junction  is  non- 
angular  or  obtusely  angular,  as,  which  they  •-•/••  ••  .,  reg- 


ular order    w^.-^raJX,^  ,   from   which. 

46.     (g.)     Again,  a  bad  phrase  results  where  a  hook  at 
the  beginning  or  the  end  of  a  word  joins  imperfectly  with 


the  adjacent  stroke,  as  in  the  phrase  we  are  told 


REQUISITES  OF  A  GOOD  PHRASE.  35 

47.  In  such  methods  as  those  just  enumerated,  the  young 
writer  sometimes  undertakes  to  force  a  junction  by  special 
effort,  the  result  being  characters  which  offend  the  eye  and 
cause  loss  of  time. 

HOW    MAY    BAD    JUNCTIONS    BE    OBVIATED? 

48.     (a.)     By  refraining  from  making  the  contemplated 

phrase;  as  by  writing  so  large  2 ./..    instead  of.        ) 

(&.)     By  changing  one  of  the  word-forms,  writing,  for 


instance,  so  much ^bs^,  ...instead  of 

(c.)  In  cases  where,  though  the  junction  is  somewhat 
difficult,  the  phrase  is  considered  allowable  or  desirable, 
there  must  be  sufficient  extra  practice  to  make  the  seem- 
ingly difficult  junction  easy. 

LINEALITY,  ETC. 

49.  A  good  phrase  should  not  extend  inconveniently  far 
above  the  line  of  writing,  like  the  phrase  literary  re- 
searches, or  rare  resources;  nor  too  far  below,  like  the 
phrase  to  this  day  there  appears  to  ~be;  nor  too  far  horizon- 
tally, like  the  phrase  as  many  know  their  necessary  effect. 
Many  beginners  seem  to  think  that,  to  phrase  properly, 
all  that  is  necessary  is,  as  word  follows  word,  to  keep  the 
pen  on  the  paper  until  some  impossibility  of  junction  re- 
quires it  to  be  lifted.  The  objection  to  phrases  which  un- 
duly extend  upward  or  downward  or  sideward  is  not  only 
that  they  "interfere  with  the  writing  above  or  below,"  or 
that  "time  is  lost  in  the  pen's  return  to  the  line  of  writing." 
These  objections  are  strong;  but  a  stronger  one  is  that 
phrases  of  undue  length  upward,  downward  or  sideward 
disturb  the  adjustment  of  the  hand  by  carrying  it  away 
from  the  field  in  which  it  is  accustomed  to  move  and  in 
which  it  moves  easily.  Anyone  by  careful  observation  can 


36  REQUISITES  OF  A  GOOD  PHRASE. 

see  that  in  general  the  pen  performs  its  work  within  a  lim- 
ited range.  The  hand,  as  it  travels  across  the  page,  adjusts 
itself  again  and  again  to  a  constantly  changing  area  of 
writing,  very  limited  in  extent.  Each  new  adjustment  pre- 
pares it  for  action  in  a  new  field,  and,  generally  speaking, 
is  accomplished,  if  possible,  during  a  pen-lift,  not  while  the 
act  of  writing  is  being  performed.  This  instinctive  craving 
of  the  hand  at  certain  points  for  readjustment  is  what  con- 
stitutes the  difficulty  of  so  decided  a  lateral  movement  as  is 
required  in  writing,  for  instance,  the  phrase  as  soon  as  an- 


other case  may  occur f }*LjL^^s. ^.T.rr^,.  A  phrase  is 

too  long  when  the  hand  feels  the  inconvenience  of  a  too  ex- 
tended movement  upward,  downward  or  laterally.  But  it 
must  not  be  forgotten  that  phrases  too  long  for  some  writers 
are  not  too  long  for  others.  Some  hands  can  make,  without 
readjustment,  a  wider  sweep  of  movement  than  others. 
This  is  less  on  account  of  intrinsic  ability  or  inability  of  a 
particular  hand  than  on  account  of  the  way  the  hand  has 
been  trained  or  is  managed. 

50.    A  good  phrase  should  not  contain  a  confusing  suc- 
cession of  similar  signs  in  the  same  direction,  such  as  the 


phrase  in  my  nomination. : Such  phrases 

cause  hesitation,  the  hand  and  the  eye  seeming  to  lose  their 
bearings. 

NOT  TOO  MANY  WORDS. 

51.  A  good  phrase  does  not  contain  an  excessive  num- 
ber of  words.  The  more  words  a  phrase  comprises,  the 
harder  it  is  for  the  mind,  either  in  writing  or  in  reading, 
to  follow  its  course  without  confusion.  A  distinguished 
English  reporter  (T.  A.  Reed)  has  said:  "It  is  seldom  that 
more  than  half  a  dozen  words  can  be  conveniently  and  ju- 


REQUISITES  OF  A  GOOD  PHRASE.  37 

diciously  joined — not  often  so  many.  A  phrase  of  three  or 
four  nearly-related  words  is  easily  written,  catches  the  eye 
readily,  and  is  deciphered  with  the  utmost  ease."  This  is 
the  view  of  one  whose  practice  in  phrasing  was  far  more 
conservative  than  that  of  many  other  expert  reporters.  On 
this  particular  point  no  absolute  rule  can  be  given.  The 
individual  writer,  when  he  has  had  the  benefit  of  proper 
practice,  is  in  the  last  resort  the  only  competent  judge  with 
regard  to  the  number  of  words  which  he  can  include  in  a 
phrase,  without  defeating  speed,  convenience  or  legibility 

A  GOOD  PHRASE  IS  LEGIBLE. 

52.  A  prime  requisite  of  a  good  phrase  is  that  it  should 
be  capable  of  being  read  easily  and  unmistakably.     Some- 
times one  phrase  is  liable  to  be  mistaken  for  another,  or  for 
a  word  of  several  strokes.    Sometimes  there  is  difficulty  in 
reading,  because  there  has  been  introduced  into  the  phrase 
a  word-sign  (that  is,  an  incomplete  outline,  containing  less 
than  all  the  consonants  of  the  word)  not  common  and  sug- 
gestive enough  to  be  recognized  when  thus  combined  with 
other  words.     Certain  incomplete  outlines,  such  as  shall, 
will,  thinlc,  opinion  and  many  others,  may  be  freely  intro- 
duced into  phrases,  while  other  outlines,  to  be  legible,  re 
quire  to  be  written  separately  and  in  their  normal  positions. 
The  phrase,  many  different  times,  would  not  be  easily  read, 
because  the  signs  different  and  times  require  isolation  and 
special  position  to  make  them  legible.     What  incomplete 
outlines  and   what  unvocalized    word-forms  may  without 
peril  be  introduced  into  phrases  will  be  best  learned  by  ex- 
perience and  practice — especially  by  practice  upon  phrases 
given  in  this  book,  in  collecting  which  the  effort  has  been 
to  introduce  as  many  as  possible  of  those  common  words 
which  go  to  make  up  the  phrasing  vocabulary. 

53.  Sometimes  a  phrase  is  hard  to  read  because  it  con- 
tains some  difficult  and  unfamiliar  word,  which  ought  to 
have  been,  but  is  not,  made  clear  by  vocalization,  more  or 
less  full. 


38  REQUISITES  OF  A  GOOD  PHRASE. 

A    GOOD    PHRASE    IS    SPONTANEOUS. 

54.  A  phrase,  to  be  of  value,  must  be  spontaneous.    It 
should  flow  from  the  pen  smoothly  and  pauselessly,  with- 
out perceptible  mental  effort.    Phrases  which,  while  being 
written,  require  close  attention  in  following  their  intrica- 
cies, hamper  the  free  movement  of  the  hand  and  cause  hesi- 
tation.    But  when  it  is  said  that  phrases  should  be  spon- 
taneous— should  indeed  be  written  almost  automatically — 
we  do  not  mean  that  only  such  phrases  are  to  be  written 
as  can  be  flung  from  the  pen  without  thought  or  effort  by 
one  who  has  never  given  time  or  attention  to  the  study  of 
phrasing  as  a  fine  art.     A  good  phrase  should  be  sponta- 
neous in  the  same  sense  that  the  speaking  of  correct  Eng- 
lish is  spontaneous  with  those  who  have  been  educated  so 
to  speak.     The  spontaneity  desired  is  not  the  spontaneity 
of  ignorance,  but  the  spontaneity  of  education  and  culture. 
Good   phrasing  habits    do  not  come    without  cultivation. 
Phrasing  rules,  and  in  some  cases  particular  phrases,  aie 
to  be  studied  until  thoroughly  familiarized.     While  it  is 
true  that  "any  conscious  effort  to  make  phrases,  except  as 
a  matter  of  mere  experiment,  is  a  mistake,"  yet  the  absence 
of  "conscious  effort"  should  come  as  the  natural  result  of 
a  masvery  of  the  phrasing  art  in  its  principles  and  details. 
That  phrase  which  to  a  tyro  may  seem  difficult,  requiring 
him  to  "wrestle"  with  it  letter  by  letter  or  stroke  by  stroke, 
may  be  in  fact  not  a  bad  phrase,  but  an  extremely  good  one, 
because  one  that  comes  easily  and  naturally  (that  is  spon- 
taneously)  to  the  writer,  if  by  study  and  practice  he  has 
properly  prepared  himself  for  his  work. 

55.  But  though  phrases  should  in  general  be  sponta- 
neous, it  is  not  meant  that  all  the  phrases  useful  to  a  re- 
porter can  be  devised  off-hand,  on  the  spur  of  the  moment, 
during  the  hurry  of  reporting.     It  would  be  a  mistake  to 
disparage  certain  highly-useful  special  phrases  which  the 
books  have  provided  to  be  memorized  or  which  the  practical 
reporter  constructs  for  himself.    Through  the  labor  and  ex- 


REQUISITES  OP  A  GOOD  PHRASE.  39 

perience  of  reporters  and  authors  there  have  been  evolved, 
and  placed  in  the  text-books,  to  be  mastered  by  every  one 
who  would  be  an  expert,  certain  highly  useful  phrases 
which,  (because  they  involve  in  their  construction  abstruse 
rules,  or  complex  mental  processes,  or  arbitrary  or  unique 
methods  of  abbreviation),  could  scarcely  be  extemporized 
by  the  most  accomplished  reporter.  Besides  these  highly 
useful  and  almost  indispensable  phrases,  others  of  similar 
nature  are  almost  daily  invented  by  every  practical  reporter 
to  meet  his  personal  and  immediate  needs.  Some  are  not 
invented  during  the  stress  of  reporting,  but  are  devised  de- 
liberately beforehand,  because  their  necessity  is  foreseen. 
Others  of  the  same  nature  are  gradually  evolved  during 
actual  reporting  work,  being  suggested  by  the  continued 
repetition  of  certain  verbal  combinations.  The  reporter,  as 
a  particular  group  of  words  is  spoken  again  and  again, 
gradually  writes  it  more  and  more  briefly,  achieving  at  last 
a  special  phrase,  arbitrary  perhaps  in  its  character — fol- 
lowing perhaps  in  its  construction  no  general  law — but 
which  possibly,  because  of  its  aptness  and  prospective  use- 
fulness, becomes  thereafter  a  permanent  part  of  his  report- 
ing equipment.  While  insisting  that  phrases  should  in  gen- 
eral be  spontaneous,  we  by  no  means  discourage  or  dispar- 
age the  memorizing  or  invention  of  a  certain  number  of 
these  highly  useful  special  or  irregular  phrases. 


CHAPTER  IV. 


LIMITATIONS,  CAUTIONS,  ETC. 

56.  As  the  student,  by  practice  and  experience,  gains 
gradually  a  mastery  of  the  principles  and  rules  of  phrase- 
making,  he  will  almost  instinctively  form,  and  form  cor- 
rectly, more  phrases  than  can  be  put  in  any  collected  list. 
But  in  too  many  cases,  beginners  "take  much  longer  time 
in   jerking   out   inconvenient   and   illegible   joinings   than 
would  be  occupied  in  writing  words  separately."     In  their 
zeal  they  carry  phrasing  to  excess  by  undertaking  to  "join 
every  word  that  is  physically  capable  of  uniting  with  an- 
other." 

57.  The  student,  ambitious  to  acquire  the  art  of  phras- 
ing, often  errs  in  assuming  that,  because  a  certain  number 
of  phrases  are  formed  by  the  application  of  a  particular 
principle,  the  same  principle  may  be  indiscriminately  ex- 
tended to  all  cases    apparently  similar    that  can  possibly 
arise.    For  instance,  having  employed  the  I  hook  to  express 
will  in  the  phrases  it  will,  they  will,  which  will,  etc.,  some 
students,  jumping  wildly  to  the  conclusion  that  in  any  case 
the  I  hook  can  thus  be  used,  may  undertake  to  express  will 
by  the  hook  in  such  combinations  as  the  country  will,  the 
kingdom  will,  time  will,  the  result  of  which  must  be  forms 
unsuggestive  and  illegible. 

58.  The  various  phrasing  expedients  are  but  a  means, 
not  an  end,  and  are  always  to  be  used  in  subordination  to 
the  great  laws  of  convenience  and  legibility.     Useful  ex- 
pedients, intended  to  be  time-saving,  must  not  be  forcibly 
and  violently  brought  into  play  in  cases  where  their  em- 
ployment would  really  be  a  hindrance.     Correct  and  con- 
servative habits  in  this  matter  will  be  a  natural  outgrowth 
of  a  study  of  these  lessons,  if  the  student  conscientiously 


LIMITATIONS,  CAUTIONS,  ETC.  41 

confines  his  phrasing  efforts  for  the  time  being  to  the  mod- 
els here  given. 

59.  The  student  must  especially  aim  to  "avoid  a  hur- 
ried,  spasmodic    style    of    writing."     With   many   young 
writers,  somewhat  familiar  with  ordinary  word-forms,  but 
frequently  at  loss  in  determining  whether  and  how  to  join 
them,  the  pen,  when  phrasing  is  undertaken,  halts  at  the 
•end  of  each  word,  and  the  writing  becomes  a  succession  of 
spasmodic  jerks.     Instead  of  this,  there  must  be  acquired 
•the  habit  of  steady,  continuous  writing.    The  student  should 
•determine  not  to  indulge  himself  in  the  too  common  habit 
of  starting  a  phrase  and  then,  pen  in  hand,  feeling  his  way, 
;as  it  were,  through  the  mazes  of  the  phrase,  word  by  word 
or  stroke  by  stroke.     If  there  must  be  a  hesitating  pause, 
let  it  come  before  the  phrase  is  begun  and  while  the  writer 
is  deciding,  not  how  a  particular  word,  but  how  the  phrase 
as  a  whole,  is  to  be  written.    Thus  the  mind  will  gradually 
learn  to  outrun  the  hand,  to  think  out  a  phrase  as  the  pen 
begins  to  write  it;   and  in  this  way  there  will  be  formed 
that  habit  of  pauseless,  unhesitating  movement  at  which 
•every  student  should  aim. 

60.  It  should  not  be  assumed  that  all  the  phrases  or 
methods  of  phrasing  presented  in  this  book  are  adapted 
to  all  writers.    Some  hands  are  naturally  fitted  for  the  ex- 
ecution of  minute  characters  and  delicate  distinctions,  while 
other  hands,   in  attempting  such  contractions,  must  fail. 
Adopting  in  substance  the  language  of  Thomas  Allen  Reed, 
it  may  be  said  that  if  the  student  has  a  naturally  heavy 
hand,  he  will  require  more  time  and  labor  to  acquire  a 
facile  shorthand  execution  than  his  light-fingered  brother, 
and  may  not  indulge  in  some  of  the  refinements  of  abbrevia- 
tion requiring  delicate  and  minute  distinctions.     But  even 
such  should  remember  that  lightness  of  hand,  though  large- 
ly a  matter  of  constitution  and  temperament,  may  be  culti- 
vated.   What  an  undisciplined  hand  can  do  is  no  criterion 
of  what  the  same  hand  may  do  after  patient,  well-directed 
training. 


CHAPTER  V. 


POSITION. 

61.  With  a  few  exceptions,  to  be  hereafter  explained, 
"the  first  word  of  a  phrase  must  be  written  in  its  own  po- 
sition, that  is,  in  the  position  which  it  properly  occupie& 
when   standing  alone;    and   the  subsequent  words  of  the 
phrase  must  accommodate  themselves  to  the  position  of  the 
first."     (Benn  Pitman).    If  a  word  be  unconnected  with  any 
other,  or  if  it  be  the  first  word  of  a  phrase,  it  may  be  as- 
signed a  particular  position  for  the  purpose  of  indicating 
some  omitted  vowel  or  in  some  other  way  distinguishing 
the  word  from  some  word  of  similar  outline;  but  when  a 
word  occurs  in  the  midst  of  a  phrase,  the  reader  cannot 
know  whether  it  is  a  word  of  the  first  position,  or  the  sec- 
ond, or  the  third.     Its  actual  position  signifies  nothing,  be- 
cause the  writer  makes  no  attempt  to  assign  it  its  normal 
place,  and  in  fact  cannot  do  so,  except  by  breaking  the 
phrase.    Such  a  word,  for  instance,  as  right,  though  it  be- 
longs normally  in  the  first  position,  may  in  the  midst  of  a 
phrase  happen  to  be  written  in  the  second,  as  in  the  phrase 
I  must  do  right;  or  in  the  third,  as  in  the  phrase  our  rights^ 
So  the  word  take,  normally  belonging  in  the  second  posi- 
tion, may  in  a  phrase  occupy  the  first  position,  as  in  the 
phrase  I  will  take;  or  the  third,  as  in  the  phrase  let  us  take. 
And  though  the  flow  of  the  phrase  may  chance  to  throw  a 
word  into  its  normal  position,  the  place  it  thus  occupies, 
being  the  result  of  accident,  not  intention,  counts  for  noth- 
ing, either  in  indicating  an  omitted  vowel  or  in  any  other 
way  distinguishing  the  word  from  one  of  similar  outline. 

62.  To  the  statement  that  the  first  word  of  a  phrase  is 
always  written  in  its  own  position  and  thereby  determines 


POSITION.  43 

or  controls  the  position  of  the  remainder  of  the  phrase,  the 
following  exceptions  are  to  be  noted: 

63.  First  exception:  A  phrase  beginning  with  "Saint," 
"Mount,"  "Court,"  or  any  other  expression  which  is  the 
common  prefix  of  a  familiar  class  of  words,  is  occasionally 
treated  as  a  compound  word  and  is  given  position  accord- 
ingly. This  frequently  avoids  an  awkward  descent  of  the 


pen  below  the  line.      Illustrations:  Mount  Vernon 


. ..,.../„ 


not ;    Saint    Joseph  ,  , .../.-.^»   not 


64.  In  accordance  with  the  same  general  principle,  any 
phrase  which  by  continued  repetition  has  become  so  familiar 
that  the  eye  recognizes  it  as  a  ivhole,  without  regard  to  its 
separate  parts,  may  be  treated  as  if  it  were  one  compound 
word,  and  as  such  may  be  put  in  the  most  convenient  posi- 
tion, without  regard  to   the  normal  position  of  the  first 
word. 

*EXERCISE. 

65.  Each  of  the  following  phrases  is  to  be  written,  un- 
der the  rule  just  given,  as  if  it  were  a  compound  word,  omit- 
ting the  words  in  parenthesis: 


*The  various  exercises  contained  in  this  book  are  not,  except  in  a  few 
cases,  designed  to  be  memorized — certainly  not  in  the  dreary  and  tedi- 
ous way  in  which  shorthand  students  ordinarily  attempt  to  memorize 
phrase-lists.  The  student  should  in  the  first  place  acquire  a  perfectly 
clear  understanding  of  the  principle  which  the  particular  exercise  ex- 
emplifies. Next  he  should  settle  clearly  in  his  mind  the  approved  forms 
of  the  various  words  introduced  in  the  phrases  which  the  exercise  calls 
upon  him  to  write.  For  this  purpose  he  should  refer,  if  necessary,  to  his 
teacher  or  his  text-book.  Then  he  should  deliberately  and  carefully  copy 
the  exercise  into  shorthand,  once  only,  for  the  purpose  of  further  im- 
pressing the  principle;  after  which  he  should  write  it  from  dic/a«ton(the 
rate  being  suited  to  his  speed)  a  sufficient  number  of  times  to  make  the 
application  of  the  given  principle  instinctive.  After  the  exercise  has 
thus  been  mastered,  it  should,  as  often  as  may  seem  necessary,  be  recur- 
red to  by  way  of  review.  A  long  exercise  may  of  course  be  divided,  if  it 
should  seem  advisable,  into  two  or  more  lessons.  (.See  note,  next  page.) 


44  POSITION. 

court  (of)  bankruptcy  St.  Joseph 

court  (of)  chancery  St.  Paul 

court  (of)  justice  St.  Peter 

Mt.  Vernon  St.  Vincent 

66.  Second  exception:  When  the  first  word  of  a  phrase 
is  represented  by  a  sign  which  never  stands  alone  (like  the 
a  tick  or  the  "n  curl")  and  hence  has  no  position  of  its 
own,  the  second  word  is  written  in  its  normal  place,  and 
the  position  of  the  first  word  is  accommodated  thereto.  II- 


lustration:  a  voice-— —>••'—,  a  few  ..,1 , ,  in  similar 


•«,  in 


67.  This  rule  operates  not  only  when  the  initial  a  tick 
is  joined,  but  when,  under  a  rule  to  be  given  hereafter,  it  is 
disjoined  to  indicate  that  con  or  com  follows  the  a,  an  or 

and  expressed  by  the  tick.  Illustrations:  and  confined „ 


a  confused 


68.     The  a  tick,  when  it  is  followed  by  another  tick  hay- 
ing no  definite  position,  or  when,  as  authorized  by  the  Gra- 

The  list  given  in  the  final  chapter  of  this  book  embraces  none  but  sim- 
ple phrases,  in  which  each  word  as  phrased  retains  the  form  which  it 
takes  when  written  separately.  All  of  these  phrases  may  be  correctly 
written,  without  any  previous  knowledge  of  phrasing  principles,  by  any 
student  far  enough  advanced  to  be  acquainted  with  the  ordinary  short- 
hand forms  of  the  individual  words.  These  phrases  may  therefore  be 
used,  in  convenient  portions,  for  dictation  exercises  as  soon  as  the 
scholar  begins  the  study  of  this  book.  Thus  used,  they  will  not  only  di- 
versify the  regular  course  of  study,  but  will  do  much  toward  making 
the  phrasing  habit  spontaneous,  and  will  incidentally  familiarize  the 
student,  without  rote  memorization,  with  many  common  and  exceeding- 
ly useful  verbal  combinations. 


POSITION.  *5 

ham  system,  it  has  a  hook  prefixed  or  affixed,  is  written  on 


the  line.    Illustrations:  and  a  «.._,«,,  and    the..^ and 


have  ~-z~-,  and  willu^—*,,  and  are^  —      But  when,  in  the 

Craham  system,  the  and  tick  is  prefixed  to  ivhat  or  would, 
the  tick  accommodates  itself  to  the  normal  position  of  the 
added  word.  (See  Paragraph  239.) 

When  the  first  two  words  of  a  phrase  are  in  as  or  in  Ms, 
expressed  by  the  "in  curl"  and  its  accompanying  circle,  the 
third  word  of  the  phrase  takes  its  own  position,  and  the 
first  and  second  are  accommodated  thereto.  Illustrations: 


/" 

in  Ms  life  ---------  ,in  Ms  letter  &  _______  f  in  MS  laugh. 


INITIAL  DISPLACEMENT. 

69.  Third  exception:  In  some  cases  the  first  word  of  a 
phrase  is  partially  or  wholly  displaced  in  order  to  give  the 
second  word  its  normal  position,  and  thus  distinguish  it 
from  some  word  of  similar  outline.    But  in  such  cases,  of 
course,  care  must  be  taken  that  the  word  displaced  from 
its  regular  position,  shall  still  be  legible.    For  convenience, 
this  method  of  shifting  the  first  word  of  a  phrase  from  its 
regular  position  may  be  called  Initial  Displacement.     The 
displacement  may  be  either  (a)  partial;  or  (&)   complete. 

PARTIAL  DISPLACEMENT. 

70.  (a.)     Sometimes  normal  position  can  be  given  to 
the  second  word  of  a  phrase  by  slightly  raising  or  lowering 
the  first — enough  to  show  that  displacement  is  intended,  but 


46  POSITION. 

not  enough  to  take  the  word  entirely  out  of  position.    Illus- 

C 

trations:    on  these -,  of  those  ..../..— ,1  thank  .  I  —.... 

(_  -t 

what  if ,  in  these *_....,  in  those.... 


In  each  of  the  examples  just  given,  the  word  displaced  is 
one  belonging  to  the  first  position,  and  is  still  recognizable 
as  such,  in  spite  of  partial  displacement.  Thus,  while  the 
second  word  gains  in  legibility  by  securing  its  normal  and 
distinctive  place,  the  legibility  of  the  first  word  is  not  ob- 
scured, because  its  position  is  merely  modified,  not  abso- 
lutely sacrificed. 

WHAT    WORDS    ARE    THUS    DISPLACED. 

71.  The  words  whose  position  may  thus  be  modified 
without  being  absolutely  sacrificed,  are  always  words  of  the 
first  position,  and  embrace, — 

Certain  tick  word-signs,  such  as  on,  of,  all,  including  7 
when  it  takes  the  form  of  a  tick; 

Certain  "brief  w  or  y"  signs,  as  we,  what,  with; 

The  first-place  circle  representing  his  or  is;  and 

Certain  words  consisting  of  horizontal  strokes,  full- 
length  or  half-length,  with  or  without  attachments,  as  any, 
in,  because,  my,  seem,  not. 

^COMPLETE    DISPLACEMENT. 

72.  (6.)     In  some  cases  distinctive  position  is  secured 
for  the  second  word  of  a  phrase  by  taking  the  first  entirely 
out  of  its  normal  place,  provided  it  can  be  readily  recog- 
nized when  thus  displaced.     But  the  cases  are  few  and  ex- 
ceptional in  which  it  is  desirable  to  sacrifice  altogether 
the  position  of  the  first  word  of  a  phrase. 

73.  The  following  words  may  with  safety  be  entirely 
displaced  at  the  beginning  of  a  phrase: 


POSITION.  47 

The  "brief  w"  sign  for  we.  Illustration  :  we  had  not.  c..^ 
We  and  with,  expressed  by  the  initial  w  hook.    Illus- 
trations: with  him  .£"">»...,  icith  whom, ,    . 

f — N    » 

The  "brief  y"  word-sign  you,  especially  when  inverted.* 

1 
Illustrations:  you  did ~~—  .  V°u  had  «JL 

EXERCISE. 

74.  In  writing  the  following  pnrases,  the  first  word  of 
each  is  to  be  raised  or  lowered  enough  to  bring  the  second 
word  into  its  normal  position: 

all  these  on  much 

all  those  on  our  part  (on  downward) 

give  these  on  these 

give  tfiose  on  those 

in  these  we  had 

in  those  we  thank  you 

in  those  days  we  took 

not  these  what  if 

not  those  what  if  they 

of  each  when  these 

of  these  things  when  those 

of  those  things  with  each 

of  those  who  are  with  much 

of  those  who  would  be  with  these 

on  each  with  those 

on  her  part  with  those  who  can** 


*The  inverted  form  of  the  word-sign  you  is  recognized  by  Graham, 
but  not  by  Henn  Pitman.    See  Paragraph  304. 

**The  author  has  found  it  advantageous  to  write  can  in  all  cases  with 
the  stroke  k,  without  the  final  hook.  This  form  is  sanctioned  by  Isaac 
Pitman  and  Munson,  though.uot  by  Graham  or  Benn  Pitman.  Besides 
saving  one  motion  of  the  hand,  it  facilitates  many  phrases  otherwise  dif- 
ficult or  impracticable. 


48  POSITION, 

EXERCISE. 

75.  In  the  following  phrases,  in  order  to   bring  the 
second  word  into  its  regular  place,  the  first  word  is  not 
merely  modified  in  position,  but  is  completely  displaced: 

as  if  to  whom  you  may 

as  if  that  we  found 

as  if  they  we  had  not 

his  own  with  him 

*to  whom  with  whom  4j 

to  whom  you  can  with  whom  you  are 

FIRST    TWO    WORDS    DISPLACED. 

76.  In  a  few  cases,  especially  where  u  phrase  begins 
with  the  a  tick  (which  has  no  position),  both  the  first  and 
second  words  are  accommodated  to  the  position  of  the  third, 
which  is  accorded  its  regular  place  for  the  sake  of  distinc- 
tion.   Illustrations:   and   with    these...       ^°     ,    end   with 


whom ,  in  my  brief. 


EXERCISE. 

77.  In  the  following  exercise,  the  first  two  words  of 
each  phrase  are  to  be  so  written  as  to  bring  the  third  word 
into  its  normal  position: 

and  we  had  and  with  those 

and  with  each  and  with  whom 

and  with  him  in  his  opposition 

and  with  much  in  his  possession 

and  with  these  in  my  brief 

WHEN  IS  INITIAL  DISPLACEMENT  PROPER? 

78.  Initial  displacement  is  not  to  be  resorted  to  when- 
ever practicable,  but  only  when  necessary.    For  the  sake  of 

*In  this  exercise  whom  is  supposed  to  be  written  with  the  ra   stroke 
in  the  third  position,  according  to  Benn  Pitman. 


POSITION.  49 

legibility,  it  is  generally  desirable  that  the  first  word  of 
the  phrase,  rather  than  the  second  or  the  third,  should  be 
in  its  normal  position.  To  bring  the  second  or  the  third 
into  position  by  displacing  the  word  or  words  preceding, 
is  an  exceptional  device,  not  readily  applied  off-hand,  and 
to  be  resorted  to  only  when  it  serves  some  useful  purpose. 
The  young  student  should  be  chary  of  undertaking  to  invent 
for  himself  phrases  of  this  class.  There  will  be  little  need 
of  such  phrases  outside  of  those  included  from  time  to 
time  in  the  exercises  of  this  book. 

"is,"  "HIS,"  "AS,"  "HAS." 

79.  Some  authors  allow,  and  some  reporters  practise, 
complete  and  indiscriminate  displacement  of  is,  his,  as,  has, 
when  any  one  of  these  words  occurs  as  the  first  word  of  a 


phrase.     Thus  we  see  such  phrases  as  is  curious    _ 9  ^ 

c 

ie  nowhere &«>*/.. ,  as  these.. , The  habit- 
ual sacrifice  of  the  position  of  these  four  words  for  the 
purpose  of  bringing  the  second  word  of  a  phrase  into  a 
more  desirable  place  must,  in  the  opinion  of  the  author, 
be  hazardous;  and  he  does  not  believe  it  is  in  accord  with 
the  general  practice  of  conservative  and  careful  reporters. 
All  stenographic  authorities  recognize  that  when  any  one 
of  the  words  is,  his,  as,  has,  is  written  alone,  it  should  be, 
because  it  needs  to  be,  distinguished  by  position.  The  need 
of  distinctive  position  would  seem  to  be  equally  strong  or 
stronger  when  any  one  of  these  words  begins  a  phrase; 
for  the  first  word  of  a  phrase  is  the  key  to  the  whole  ex- 
pression. The  indiscriminate  sacrifice  of  the  position  of 
these  fcej/-words  seems  likely  to  cause  hesitation,  if  not  abso- 
lute inaccuracy,  in  reading;  and  it  is  to  be  remembered  that 


60  POSITION. 

the  reporter  needs  to  read  his  notes  not  only  accurately,  but 
promptly. 

DISTINCTION  OF  "l"  AND  "HE." 

80.  The  learner  should  be  especially  warned  against 
writing  initial  /  tick  so  low  as  to  be  mistaken  for  he,  and 
initial  he  tick  so  high  as  to  be  mistaken  for  J.  For  cer- 
tainty of  distinction,  as  well  as  convenience  of  phrasing, 
the  author  prefers  to  assign  he  to  the  second  position,  ac- 
cording to  Mr.  Graham,  rather  than  to  the  first,  according 
to  Benn  Pitman.  Although  some  writers  give  to  both  these 
ticks  the  first  position,  undertaking  to  preserve  a  distinc- 
tion by  writing  them  in  different  directions  (the  I  tick, 
when  struck  in  the  direction  of  chay,  always  upward,  and 
the  he  tick  always  downward),  the  demands  of  the  reporter 
would  appear  to  be  more  fully  met  by  allowing  some  lati- 
tude in  respect  to  direction,  while  constantly  and  strictly 
preserving  distinction  of  position.  If  the  /  tick,  when 
struck  in  the  direction  of  chay,  is  never  to  be  written  down- 
ward, and  the  initial  he  tick  never  upward,  such  useful 


phrases  as  I  would  ..........  _,  he  thinks  .......  /*..       .....  are  im- 

practicable. 

UTILITY  OF  INITIAL  DISPLACEMENT. 

81.  Where  initial  displacement  occurs,  the  second  word 
of  the  phrase  is  known  to  be  in  its  normal  position,  be- 
cause the  first  word  is  displaced.  When,  without  initial 
displacement,  the  second  word  simply  happens  to  fall  into 
its  normal  place,  its  position  has  no  significance,  and  gives 
no  aid  in  reading  the  word.  In  such  a  case  the  word  is 
read,  not  by  the  aid  of  position,  but  by  means  of  context 
or  outline,  or,  if  necessary,  vocalization. 


CHAPTER  VI. 


WORD-DISTINCTIONS. 


CONTEXT. 

82.  One  of  the  greatest  aids  to  a  stenographer  in  read- 
ing his  notes  is  context.  Frequently  it  illuminates  a  sen- 
tence which  otherwise  would  be  hopelessly  obscure.  It  is 
one  of  the  commonest  and  most  useful  means  by  which 
the  practised  reporter  distinguishes  words  whose  outlines 
are  to  the  eye  precisely  similar.  The  assumption  is  often 
made  that  two  or  more  words  embracing  the  same  con- 
sonants must  be  in  all  cases  distinguished  by  differing 
methods  of  shorthand  representation.  But  the  danger  of 
using  a  single  sign  with  two  or  more  different  significa- 
tions is  often  exaggerated.  If  it  were  the  business  of  the 
stenographer  to  report  isolated  words,  with  no  connection 
in  sense,  very  different  systems  of  shorthand  from  those 
now  in  vogue  would  be  required.  But  practical  reporting 
is  the  reporting  of  words  as  they  stand  in  sentences — words 
connected  by  grammar  and  sense — in  short,  words  with  a 
context.  Whilst  theoretically  it  may  seem  desirable  that 
no  stenographic  sign  should  in  any  case  have  more  mean- 
ings than  one,  the  reporter  finds  that  in  many  cases  a  char- 
acter having  two  or  more  significations  may  be  in  practice 
as  unambiguous  as  if  it  had  but  one;  because,  generally, 
in  sensible  sentences,  as  they  actually  occur  in  reading, 
writing  and  speaking,  the  possible  significations  of  a  par- 
ticular character  or  word,  if  they  have  been  properly  as- 
signed, cannot  be  substituted  one  for  another  and  still 


52  WORD-DISTINCTIONS. 

"make  sense."  In  ordinary  discourse  the  listener  very  rare- 
ly has  difficulty  in  giving  to  each  word  the  sense  intended 
(though  words  of  multiple  meaning  are  constantly  em- 
ployed), because  the  context  gives  the  key.  So  it  is  not 
strange  that  the  shorthand  representatives  of  words  should 
admit  of  similar  latitude  of  signification. 

THE  LAW  OF   SAFE  AMBIGUITY. 

83.  The  law  of  multiple  meanings,  or  safe  ambiguity, 
may  be  stated  thus:  Two  or  more  significations  may  safely 
be  attached  to  a  single  sign,  if  those  significations  are  so 
remote  in  sense  that  when  the  signs  are  linked  with  a  con- 
text in  any  intelligently  constructed  sentence,  the  wrong 
signification  cannot  reasonably  or  sensibly  be  substituted 
for  the  right  one.    It  will  be  found  that  in  the  arrangement 
of  the  word-signs  of  the  stenographic  system,  where  two  or 
more  meanings  have  been  assigned  to  a  single  character, 
the  assignment  has  in  general  been  made  in  accordance 
with  the  principle  just  stated. 

84.  Context  as  a  means  of  word-distinction  becomes 
especially  helpful  in  the  reading  and  writing  of  phrases; 
for,  as  has  been  well  said,  "When  phrase  combinations  are 
well  chosen   and   correctly  written,  the  words  are  more 
easily  read  than  when  written  separately."      (Isaac  Pit- 
man.)* 

THREE  METHODS  OF  WOKD-DISTINCTION. 

85.  Two  or  more  words  embracing  the  same  consonants, 
if  liable  to  be  mistaken  one  for  another  (that  is,  if  not  dis- 
tinguished by  context),  are,  when  written  as  isolated  words, 
distinguished  either  by  position,  by  difference  of  outline, 
or  by  vocalization.    Words  needing  to  be  thus  distinguished 


*Mr.  Clarence  E.  Walker,  in  his  recent  work  entitled  "Speed  and 
Legibility,"  draws  this  acute  and  important  distinction  between  "a  pre- 
ceding context"  and  "a  succeeding  context:"  "Forms  which  .  .  have  to 
be  determined  from  context  can  be  safely  used,  if  a  preceding  context 
determines  them ;  but  where  you  have  to  refer  to  a  succeeding  context, 
unless  an  immediately  succeeding  context,  your  reading  will  suffer,  even 
though  such  determination  can  always  be  made." 


WORD-DISTINCTIONS.  53 

make  up  the  lists  of  "distinguished  words"  as  found  in  the 
text-books.  So  far  as  possible,  words  joined  in  phrases  are 
distinguished  in  the  same  way  as  when  standing  alone.  But 
in  phrasing,  the  reporter's  favorite  method  of  distinction — 
by  position — is  to  a  large  extent  impracticable.  Words 
which,  standing  alone,  are  distinguished  by  position  cannot 
be  thus  distinguished  in  phrases  except  in  two  cases: 

(a.)  A  word  which  begins  a  phrase  can,  of  course,  and 
generally  does,  retain  its  accustomed  place,  and  is  thus 
distinguished  from  any  antagonistic  or  conflicting  word  as 
fully  as  if  it  were  not  phrased. 

(&.)  The  second  or  third  word  of  a  phrase  is  sometimes 
brought  into  its  normal  position  by  displacing  the  pre- 
ceding word  or  words,  as  explained  in  the  last  chapter. 

86.  As,  in  phrases,  positional  distinction  between  words 
liable  to  conflict  is  in  most  cases  lost,  care  must  be  taken 
that,  if  necessary,  some  other  and  effective  method  of  dis- 
tinction be  substituted.    We  should,  however,  discriminate 
between  words  ordinarily  written  in  position  because  they 
need  to  be  so  distinguished,  and  words  which  are  in  no 
danger  of  conflict,  which  can  readily  be  distinguished  by 
context,  but  which,  when  standing  alone,  are  written  in  po- 
sition, not  because  there  is  danger  from  some  conflicting 
word  of  similar  outline,  but  merely  in  deference  to  a  gen- 
eral rule  of  locating  words  according  to  their  accented  vow- 
els.    Astonishingly  numerous  are  the  words  which  lose  their 
positional  distinction  in  phrases,  and  yet,  with  no  substi- 
tuted method  of  distinction,  are  perfectly  legible.    For  ex- 
ample, some  and  seem,  mind  and  amount,  etc.,  when  writ- 
ten separately,  are  written  in  position  in  accordance  with 
their  accented  vowels;    but  in  such  phrases  as  there  are 
some,  it  may  seem,  to  my  mind,  large  amount,  the  ordinary 
positional  distinction  between  some  and  seem,  mind  and 
amount,  is  lost;   yet   (thanks  to  that  potent  friend  of  the 
reporter,  context),  there  is  no  loss  of  legibility. 

87.  To  know  what  words  commonly  written  in  position 
may  be  phrased  without  regard  to  position  or  any  other 


54  WORD-DISTINCTIONS. 

method  of  distinction,  is  a  species  of  knowledge  which  the 
young  reporter  will  gradually  learn  from  practice  upon 
such  exercises  as  this  book  gives.  In  determining  whether 
any  particular  word,  ordinarily  written  in  position,  may  be 
freely  introduced  in  phrases  without  positional  or  other 
distinction,  the  question  to  be  asked  is,  can  this  word  be 
recognized  infallibly  by  its  outline  alone,  or  must  it,  be- 
cause similar  in  outline  to  some  other  word,  be  in  some 
way  distinguished?  In  the  case  of  a  word  which,  standing 
alone,  is  necessarily  distinguished  by  position,  the  loss  of 
positional  distinction  may  be  supplied  in  phrases,  first,  by 
the  rule  of  Exclusion  (a  method  of  distinction  peculiar  to 
phrasing);  or,  second,  by  Difference  of  Outline  (sometimes 
called  "Variation") ;  or,  third,  by  Vocalization. 

EXCLUSION  DEFINED. 

88.  Two  words  of  similar  outline,  ordinarily  and  ne- 
cessarily distinguished  by  position,  may  be  distinguished  for 
phrasing  purposes  by  adopting  it  as  an  invariable  rule  that 
one  of  the  words  shall  never  be  admitted  into  any  phrase 
(except  of  course  when  it  begins  a  phrase),  while  the  other 
word  may  be  freely  joined.     This  is  called  distinction  by 
Exclusion.     For  instance,  indeed  and  no  doubt,  perfectly 
distinguished  by  difference  of  position  when  unconnected 
with  other  words,  are  liable  to  conflict  when  phrased,  ex- 
cept at  the  beginning  of  phrases.    To  obviate  this  difficulty, 
it  is  generally  adopted  as  a  rule  that  indeed  must  not  be 
admitted  into  any  phrase  except  at  the  beginning,  while  no 
doubt  may  be  phrased  freely.    It  is  obvious  that,  if  one  of 
the  words  or  expressions  be  always  written  separately  and 
in  position,  the  other,  though  freely  phrased  without  regard 
to  position,  cannot  be  mistaken. 

WHICH  WORD   SHOULD  BE  EXCLUDED* 

89.  When  it  is  decided  that  of  two  particular  words, 
one  shall,  for  the  sake  of  avoiding  ambiguity,  be  excluded 
from  phrases,  the  word  selected  for  exclusion,    (that  is, 


WORD-DISTINCTIONS.  55 

i 

selected  for  the  slower  method  of  writing),  should  be  *he 
less  common  and  useful  of  the  two  words;  or  if  there  seema 
to  be  no  room  for  preference  in  this  respect,  then  we  should 
reserve  for  phrasing  purposes  the  word  which  the  phrase 
brings  into  or  nearest  to  its  own  position,  rather  than  the 
word  which  the  phrase  carries  away  from  its  own  position. 
For  instance,  as  to  go  and  to  give  must  be  distinguished, 
we  join  go  in  order  to  bring  it  into  its  own  position;  and 
we  disjoin  give  for  the  same  reason.  So,  in  distinguishing 
of  me,  and  of  him,  we  join  me,  and  disjoin  him;  but  in  the 
phrases,  to  me  and  to  him,  we  join  him,  and  disjoin  me. 

VARIATION  OF  OUTLINE. 

90.  Words  of  similar  outlines  which  in  phrases  lose 
their  positional  distinction,  may  be  distinguished,  if  dis- 
tinction be  necessary,  by  giving  to  one  of  them  a  different 
outline  from   its  usual  one.     Thus  the  stroke  t   standing 
alone,  above  the  line,  is  perfectly  clear  as  a  word-sign  for 
time,  but  in  many  phrases,  would  scarcely  be  legible.    The 
method  of  distinction  adopted  in  such  a  case  is  to  substi- 
tute the  full  outline  of  the  word  for  the  incomplete  outline 
used  as  a  word-sign.    The  substitution  of  a  full  outline  for 
an   incomplete  outline  is  one   of  the  several  methods  cf 
"Variation"  which  will  be  explained  in  the  next  chapter. 

VARIATION  FACILITATES  JUNCTIONS. 

91.  It  may  be  remarked  incidentally  that  in  a  phrase, 
an  unusual  outline  is  often  given  to  a  word,  not  for  the 
sake  of  word-distinction,  but  to  accomplish  an  easy  junction 
with  the  preceding  or  following  word.     This  subject  will 
be  more  fully  treated  in  the  next  chapter. 

VOCALIZATION   AS   A   SUBSTITUTE  FOR  POSITION. 

92.  When   distinction    by  Exclusion    or    by  Variation 
seems  unadvisable,  there  remains  the  method  of  distinction 
by  Vocalization;  that  is  to  say,  two  words  of  similar  out- 
line, if  liable  to  be  confounded,  are  often  distinguished  by 


56  WORD-DISTINCTIONS. 

adopting  it  as  an  inflexible  rule  that  one  of  the  pair,  not 
necessarily'  both,  shall  always  be  vocalized.  For  instance, 
the  words  there  and  other,  if  occurring  in  the  midst  of  a 
phrase,  are  distinguished  by  uniformly  vocalizing  other. 

WHY  VOCALIZATION  IS  TO  BE  PREFERRED. 

93.  Of  the  three  methods  of  distinction  already  pointed 
out  as  open  to  the  phrase-writer — Exclusion,  Variation  and 
Vocalization — the  last  is  generally  the  best.    Unlike  Varia- 
tion, it  does  not  disturb  the  uniformity  of  the  writer's  out- 
lines.    To  write  a  given  word  at  different  times  in  two  or 
three  different  ways,  tends  to  cause  hesitation,  and  there- 
fore is  not  a  desirable  expedient,  though  sometimes  neces- 
sary. 

94.  Vocalization  is  better,  too,  than  Exclusion,  because 
the  latter  frequently  compels  the  writer  to  break  a  natural 
and  desirable  phrase,  and  excludes  from  his  phrasing  vo- 
cabulary one  of  two  words,  both  of  which  may  be  common 
and  useful. 

WHICH   WORD   SHOULD   BE   VOCALIZED/ 

95.  When,  for  the  sake  of  word-distinction,  resort  is 
had  to  Vocalization,  both  of  the  words  may  be  vocalized 
whenever  they  occur,  or    (what  is  decidedly  preferable), 
one  only  may  be  vocalized,  allowing  the  other  to  be  distin- 
guished  by    the   absence    of    vocalization.     Thus,   in   the 
phrases  by  their  and  by  other,  if  other  be  always  vocalized, 
their  will  always  be  legible  without  vocalization.     If  the 
two  words  needing  to  be  distinguished  are  of  frequent  oc- 
currence, it  "pays"  to  vocalize  habitually  only  a  particular 
one  of  the  pair. 

96.  The  word  selected  for  vocalization  should  be   uie 
less  common  of  the  two;  or  if  the  two  words  seem  equally 
common  and  useful,  let  that  one  be  vocalized  which  the 
phrase  takes  out  of  position.     In  this  way  we  distinguish 
we  may  live  and  we  may  love  by  vocalizing  love,  which  the 
phrase  takes  away  from  its  ordinary  place. 


WORD-DISTINCTIONS.  57 

FULL  VOCALIZATION  NOT  NECESSARY. 

97.  Usually  the  word  distinguished  by  vocalization  need 
not  be  fully  vocalized;  that  is  to  say,  all  the  vowels  need 
not  be  inserted.     Generally  a  single  characteristic  or  dis- 
tinctive vowel    (that  is,  a  vowel  belonging  to  one  of  the 
words  and  not  the  other)  is  sufficient.    But  a  rare  word,  if 
introduced  into  a  phrase,  should  be  vocalized  as  fully  as 
time  may  allow,  just  as  it  would  be  by  any  careful  writer 
if  it  stood  alone.    It  is  fully  vocalized,  not  for  fear  it  may 
be  mistaken  for  some  other  word,  but  for  fear  that,  being  a 
strange  outline,  it  may  not  be  read  at  all. 

98.  A  word  which  sometimes  needs  vocalization  may 
not  need  it  in  every  case.     The  stenographer,  as  he  grows 
in  experience,   will   frequently  see  on  the  instant,  as  he 
writes  a  word,  the  impossibility  of  misreading  the  unvocal- 
ized  outline,  and  will,  of  course,  omit  vocalization,  though 
the  same  word  in  another  case  might  require  it. 

PECULIAR  VOCALIZATION. 

99.  A  method  of  vocalization  peculiar  to  phrasing  is 
practised  by  many  reporters.     Though  an  incomplete  out- 
line used  as  a  word-sign  does  not  usually  require  or  even 
allow  vocalization,  such  an  outline  is  sometimes  made  clear 
in  phrasing  by  the  insertion  of  a  vowel.    For  example,  the 
reporter,  having  hurriedly  phrased  the  words  this  language, 
may  immeditely  see  a  possibility  of  the  phrase  being  read 
•this  thing;  so,  by  way  of  precaution  he  inserts  a  distin- 


guishing vowel,  thus  ...\^...^,....  Or,  having,  on  the  spur  of  the 

moment,  phrased  th.is  object   L ,  he  instantly  sees  that, 

though  this  subject  would  be  written  ..  >O....,,  the  small  dif- 


58  WORD-DISTINCTIONS. 

ference  between  a  single  and  a  double  circle  may  not  insure 
the  phrase  against  being  hastily  misread.  So,  instead  of  re- 
writing it,  he  inserts,  as  a  safeguard  against  mistake,  a 

characteristic  or  distinguishing  vowel,  thus.....V$ (Gra- 


ham's  Second  Reader,  page  99.)  In  such  cases,  the  vowel 
inserted  is,  of  course,  the  one  belonging  to  the  particular 
part  of  the  word-sign  which  is  written  in  lieu  of  the  whole. 

VOCALIZATION  OF  BADLY-SHAPED  OUTLINES. 

100.  Sometimes  a  word  or  a  phrase  which,  if  the  char- 
acters were  carefully  shaped,  would  be  perfectly  legible,  is, 
in  the  hurry  of  writing,  slightingly  or  imperfectly  formed; 
and  1he  defect  is  instantly  recognized  by  the  writer.  In 
such  cases  vocalization  is  often  his  hastily-seized  safeguard 
against  possible  misreading.  A  vowel  or  two,  however  hur- 
riedly inserted,  may  show  clearly  the  word  intended,  and 
the  insertion  may  be  much  more  quickly  accomplished  than 
retouching  the  outline  of  the  word  or  re-writing  the  phrase. 


CHAPTER  VII. 


VARIATION  OF  OUTLINE. 

101.  Occasionally  a  word  assumes  in  a  phrase  a  form 
different  from  that  which  it  takes  when  it  stands  alone. 
Uniformity  of  outline  (in  general  highly  desirable)  is  in 
these  cases  departed  from  in  order  to  accomplish  one  or 
more  of  the  following-named  purposes:  First,  to  promote 
brevity  by  writing  certain  words  much  more  briefly  under 
phrasing  laws  than  they  could  be  written  if  standing  alone; 
second,  to  promote  legibility  by  distinctions  of  outline  be- 
tween words  which,  if  written  alike,  might  be  confounded; 
third,  to  secure  facile  junctions  where,  if  ordinary  word- 
forms  were  adhered  to,  junctions  would  be  difficult  or  im- 
possible. 

102.  The  variations  of  outline  which  take  place  in  the 
accomplishment  of  the  objects  just  named  may  be  classified 
as  follows: 

PHRASE  WORD-SIGNS. 

103.  (1.)  The  circles,  the  hooks,  the  halving  princi- 
ple, the  double-lengthing  principle,  etc.,  are  used  to  fur- 
nish a  body  of  word-signs  peculiar  to  phrasing — signs  which 
represent  many  of  the  leading  words  of  the  phrasing  vocab- 
ulary, but  which  are  not  and  cannot  be  used  to  represent 
such  words  when  standing  alone.  A  few  of  the  very  com- 
mon and  useful  words  for  which  in  phrasing  we  provide 
briefer  signs  than  the  ordinary  ones  are, — will,  represented 
by  the  I  hook;  are  and  our,  represented  by  the  r  hook;  own 
and  one,  represented  by  then  hook;  it,  had  and  would,  repre- 


60  VARIATION  OF  OUTLINE. 

sented  by  halving  the  preceding  stroke;  their  and  they  are, 
represented  by  making  the  preceding  stroke  double  length, 
etc.  Thus  there  arise  a  number  of  what  may  be  called 
phrase  word-signs. 

104.  (2.)     In  the  use  of  these  phrase  word-signs,  the 
word-forms  to  which  they  are  applied  or  attached  undergo 
frequently  some  change  of  outline.     For  instance,  in  the 
phrase  at  it,  we  make  at  half  length  to  add  it;  and  the  two 
•words  merge  or  coalesce  in  such  a  way  that  both  lose  their 
distinctive  forms.    The  stroke  which  before  modification 
was  one  word  loses  its  accustomed  length  and  -thereby  be- 
comes two  words.     So,  when  we  attach  their  to  have  by 
making  v  double  length,  both  words  lose  their  original  or 
•ordinary  forms,  and  merge  or  coalesce  into  a  single  stroke. 

"WORD-SPLITTING." 

105.  (3.)     In  some  cases  modifications  may  be  applied 
to  a  stem  to  represent,  not  the  whole  of  a  succeeding  word, 
'but  only  the  first  part  of  it,  the  remainder  being  supplied 

lay  the  next  stroke.  Thus,  in  the  phrase  my  time „> 


the  first  letter  of  the  word  time  is  expressed  by  halving  the 
preceding  stroke;  and  the  word  is  completed  by  joining  the 


m.    So  in  the  phrase  in  like  manner ,  the  I 

hook  on  in  supplies  the  first  letter  of  the  succeeding  word 

like.    In  the  phrase  in  receipt ..„"""[ ,  the  r  hook  on  in 

gives  us  the  r  which  begins  the  word  receipt. 


VARIATION  OF  OUTLINE.  Gl 

"RESTORATION." 

106.  (4.)     For  the  sake  of  convenient  phrasing,  a  full 
outline   (that  is,  an  outline  embracing  all  the  consonants 
of  the  word)  may  be  substituted  for  an  incomplete  outline 
ordinarily  used  as  a  word-sign.     Thus,  in  the  phrase:  so 
much  and  very  much,  much  is  written  with  the  full  outline 
because  the  ordinary  word-sign,  chay  in  the  third  position, 
cannot  easily  be  attached  to  so  or  very.  In  various  phrases, 
time,  always  written  when  standing  alone  with  the  word- 
sign  t  in  the  first  position,  is,  for  the  sake  of  legibility,  ex- 
pressed   by   the    two   strokes    tm,   as   in   the   phrase    this 

time .:*?. ,  because  in  such  cases    the  stroke  t,  no  longer 

standing  alone  and  no  longer  distinguished  by  position, 
would  scarcely  be  recognized  as  intended  to  represent  time. 
This  process  of  substituting  a  full  outline  for  an  incom- 
plete outline  ordinarily  used  as  a  word-sign,  is  sometimes 
called  "Restoration." 

VARIATION  WITHOUT  CURTAILMENT. 

107.  (5.)     The  varied  form  may  embrace  all  the  con- 
sonants of  the  regular  form,  but  these  (for  the  purpose  of 
word-distinction  or  facile  phrasing)   may  be  combined  or 
expressed  in  a  different  way  from  the  ordinary,  or  may  be 
written  in  a  different  direction.    Illustrations:  in  that  State 


. ,  bear  in  mind  ...  V:. ,  this  shipment 


A  variation  of  the  same  nature  is  practised^tgjGraham 
writers  when,  in  order  to  meet  phrasing  exigencies,  you  is 


inverted,  as  in  the  phrase  when  you  do 


62  VARIATION  OF  OUTLINE. 

FICTITIOUS  PRIMITIVES. 

108.  (6.)  Occasionally,  to  achieve  a  phrase,  a  conso- 
nant stroke  is  substituted  for  a  tick  word-sign  or  a  "brief 
w  or  y"  word-sign  or  a  circle  word-sign,  as  where  or  is  rep- 
resented by  the  upward  r  in  the  phrase  three  or  four.  In 
many  cases,  however,  the  stroke  thus  substituted  for  the 
briefer  sign  is  never  used  unmodified,  but  is  merely  made 
tue  basis  for  abbreviations  or  modifications  which  cannot  be 
applied  to  the  briefer  ordinary  sign.  Thus,  by  assuming 
the  stroke  v  represents  of  (though  never  so  used  in  fact,)  we 


obtain  the  useful  phrases,  of  their  „..?***—..,  of  all .,,_ 


and  of  all  their ....... >?>„«.  By  treating,,.^. as  if  it  repre- 
sented were,  though  never  used  unmodified  for  that  pur- 
pose, we  obtain,  by  applying  abbreviating  principles,  the 

useful  phrases  were  it^,  were  it  not,...c^..^t  were  not,.tS>. 

The  substituted  consonant  stroke  which,  by  a  convenient 
fiction,  is  treated  in  these  cases  as  if  it  were  the  accepted 
sign  of  the  primitive  word  (though  it  is  not  such  in  fact 
and  possibly  is  never  written  as  such)  may  be  called  a  "fic- 
titious primitive." 

OMISSION  OF  LETTERS. 

109.  (7.)  Ordinary  word-forms  may  be  varied  by  the 
omission  of  one  or  more  letters.  This  is  sometimes  done 
under  some  general  law  of  ellipsis,  as  when  we  convert  the 
st  loop  into  a  circle,  and  write  mws'&e  instead  of  must  be. 
(See  Paragraph  153.)  In  other  cases,  a  letter  or  several 
letters  of  a  word  are  omitted,  not  in  pursuance  of  any  gen- 
eral phrasing  principle,  but  arbitrarily,  giving  us  what  is 


VARIATION  OF  OUTLINE.  63 

called  a  "special  phrase,"  as  honorable  Senator 

CUSTOMARY  PHRASES  VARIED. 

110.  (8.)  Sometimes  a  particular  phrase,  ordinarily 
written  in  a  particular  way,  may,  when  it  becomes  part  of 
a  larger  phrase,  be  varied  in  form  or  direction  in  order  to 
facilitate  a  junction.  Thus  it  will,  usually  represented  by 


J. 


drops  its  ordinary  form  in  the  phrase  when  it 


will  «. 

COXTRA-XORMAL  EXPEDIENTS  JUSTIFIED. 

111.  (9.)     Another  form  of  variation  occurs  when,  in 
t.:e  exercise  of  what  may  be  called  "reporting  license,"  we 
give  to  certain  shorthand  characters  or  elements  a  value  or 
signification  different  in  phrases  from  that  assigned  them 
iu  the  writing  of   isolated   words.     In   such   cases,   rules, 
(which  are  made  to  facilitate  the  reporter's  work,  not  to 
hamper  it,)  are  overruled  by  the  great  law  of  convenience. 
The  practical  results  thus  obtained  are  in  many  cases  of  too 
great  value  to  be  sacrificed  in  deference  to  abstract,  theo- 
retical consistency.     The  reporter  finds  that  in  exceptional 
cases  it  is  better  that  strict  rule  or  principle  be  violated 
than  that  he  should  continue  endlessly  to  write  cumbrous 
forms,  or  be  deprived  of  facile  phrases  because  they  con- 
travene some  of  the  ordinary  principles  of  word-formation. 

112.  A  fundamental  truth  in  the  practice  of  phrasing — 
and  it  can  scarcely  be  too  often  repeated — is  that  words 
naturally  and  instinctively  grouped  by  the  tongue  should, 
if  possible,  be  grouped  by  the  pen.    To  accomplish  this  end, 


64  VARIATION  OF  OUTLINE. 

the  reporter  with  cultivated  reporting  instincts  is  willing 
now  and  then  to  forego  a  strict  conformity  to  rule.  For 
instance,  he  feels  it  an  intolerable  detention  to  break  the 
natural  phrase  we  may  be  by  writing  we  separately,  when 
the  three  words  may  readily  be  phraseu  if  mr  ia. 
this  particular  case  can  be  treated  as  wmb.  True,, 
the  effect  is  that  a  particular  character  represents  in 
two  different  cases  two  different  things,  thus  violating  ap- 
parently a  fundamental  principle  of  phonographic  short- 
hand, that  each  stroke  or  mark  should  represent  one,  and 
only  one,  sound.  But  the  reporter  asks  himself,  "Does  this 
irregular  use  of  a  character  to  represent  exceptionally 
something  which  it  does  not  ordinarily  or  regularly  repre- 
sent, involve  in  this  particular  case  real  danger  of  mis- 
reading? Is  it  not  a  fact  in  this  instance,  as  in  others, 
that,  though  two  readings  are  in  a  certain  sense  possible, 
only  one  can  'make  sense'?"  When  he  has  satisfied  him- 
self that  a  substantial  advantage  is  to  be  gained  by  tolerat- 
ing an  ambiguity  which  is  only  apparent,  because  it  entails 
no  uncertainty  in  reading,  he  boldly  prefers  contra-normal 
convenience  and  speed  to  normal  inconvenience  and  slow- 
ness. 

CONTRA-NORMAL  EXPEDIENTS  CLASSIFIED. 

113.  So  far  as  these  contra-normal  expedients — expe- 
dients not  so  much  outside  of  ordinary  rules  as  against 
them — appear  in  the  practice  of  reporters,  they  may  be 
classified  as  follows: 

114.  (a.)     The  use  of  the  r  hook  as  a  w  hook  in  cer- 
tain cases  where  the  w  hook  is,  according  to  rule,  inadmis- 
sible, as  in  the  instance  just  given,  where  mr  is  treated 
as  if  it  were  wmb,  so  that  it  may  be  used  to  represent  we 
may  be. 

115.  (6.)     The    double-lengthing    of    mb    to    add    thr,. 


as  in  the  phrase  you  may  be  there  ...  ,....jxr— ^~,  notwith- 


VARIATION  OF   OUTLINE.  65 

standing   the   fact   that,   according   to    strict  rule,   double 
length  m&  means  mbr  or  mpr,  not  mb-thr, 

116.     (c.)     The    double-lengthing    of    ing  to    add  tTir, 


as  in  the  phrase  wrong  their ..../.. .notwithstanding 

the  fact,  that  according  to   strict  rule,   double-length  ing 
means  nkr  or  ngr,  not  ing-thr. 

117.  (d.)     The  dropping  of  an  initial  hook  in  the  midst 

of  a  phrase  in  such  a  way  that  vr ...  „.,. ..\...« takes  in  fact 

the  form  of  w  ....^..J ,  though  still  read  vr,  as  in  the 

phrase  it  is  very  important    ..^..J^ — •  /  that  wir....w,^r"\iii) 

V— - 

takes  in  fact  the  form  of  mp,  though  still  read  mr,  as  in  the 

phrase  much  more  ^. ../.^......;  that  thr  ^./...^  takes  in  fact  the 

A-s 

form  of  2 * ,  though  still  read  thr,  as  in  the  phrase 

Tie  is  therefore....^. ,,. 

118.  (e.)The  use  of  the  r  hook  as  if  it  were  you,  as 

in  the  phrases  do  you  say ,L ;  which  you  do 


:L ;  which  you  do  -A-       ,' 


66  VARIATION  OF  OUTLINE. 


you   shall.  .....  .....  xw,  .....     (Sanctioned   by   Graham,   not   by 

*/ 

Pitman.) 

119.     (f.)     The  use  of  an  apparent  n  hook  as  a  "brief 
tc"  sign  for  what  or  would,  as  in  the  piirases  of  what 


—  —...„  ;  and  would  ......  ~,..-.-^>..M  .....     (Sanctioned  by  Graham, 

not  by  Pitman.) 

120.     (g.)    The  inversion  of  you,  we,  were  and  would, 


In  such  phrases  as  when  you  do^., ,.!.../  there  were  many 

0 

'^-^^  , .     (Sanctioned  by  Graham,  not  by  Pitman.) 

121.     (h.)     The  use  of  an  I  hook  for  a  w  hook  where 
the  w  hook  is  not  practicable,  as  when....,.^,,™^^.^  and, 


are  written  for  we  can  and  we  could.       (Sanctioned  by 
Graham,  not  by  Pitman.) 

(Further  illustrations  of  the  principles  of  "Variation," 
together  with  exercises  for  making  them  familiar  to  the 
pupil,  will  be  found  at  appropriate  places  in  later  chap- 
ters.) 


CHAPTER  VIII. 


ELLIPSIS:     THE   LAW   OF   IMPLICATION. 


"Words  may  often  be  entirely  omitted,  and  yet  no  ambiguity  ensue."— 
Mavor's  Universal  Stenograp/ty,  (published  1807.) 

122.  For  the  sake  of  brevity,  or  to  secure  a  facile 
phrase,  several  words,  or  a  single  word,  or  a  part  of  a 
word,  may  be  altogether  omitted  from  a  phrase,  provided 
the  sense  or  the  grammatical  construction  will  neces- 
sarily show  that  there  is  an  omission,  and  will  readily  sug- 
gest the  word  or  words  to  be  supplied.  The  words  omitted 
are  generally  small  connecting  words — usually  articles, 
conjunctions  or  prepositions.  Words  thus  omitted  in  writ- 
ing, and  suggested  in  reading  by  the  sense  or  grammatical 
construction,  are  said  to  be  implied.  The  omission  may  oc- 
cur at  the  beginning  of  a  phrase  (as  in  the  case  of  on  the, 
omitted  in  writing  the  phrase  on  the  one  hand) ;  or,  in  the 
midst  of  a  phrase  (as  when  of  is  omitted  from  the  phrase 
court  of  justice) ;  or,  at  the  end  of  a  phrase  (as  when  the 
word  to  is  dropped  from  the  phrase  in  reference  to).  In 
thus  omitting  words  which  may  safely  be  omitted,  and  fear- 
lessly trusting  to  the  sense  or  construction  to  suggest  them, 
the  writer  takes  advantage  of  the  fact  that  certain  words 
necessarily  precede  others;  that  certain  words  necessarily 
come  between  others;  and  that  certain  words  necessarily 
follow  others.  Thus,  when  we  write  as  a  phrase  face  face, 
it  is  obvious  that  between  the  two  words  there  is  an  omis- 
sion, and  the  word  to  necessarily  suggests  itself  to  fill  the 
gap.  So,  when  we  write  more  more,  the  necessity  of  and 
as  a  connecting  word  must  be  obvious.  If  we  write  for 
sake  justice,  we  cannot  but  observe  that,  to  make  the 
sense  complete,  we  must,  in  reading,  supply  the  before 


68  .  ELLIPSIS. 

sake,  and  of  before  justice,  making  the  clause  read  for  the 
sake  of  justice. 

123.  This  law  of  implication,  as  an  aid  to  the  reporter, 
has  been  stated  by  an  early  phonographic  author  in  these 
words:     "It  is  sometimes  allowable,  in  a  phraseogram,  to 
omit  some  portions  of  a  word,  or  whole  words,  where  the 
phrase  embodied  in  the  skeleton  is  so  familiar  and  sug- 
gestive that  the  context  will  readily  assist  us  in  decipher- 
ing it."  (Robert  Patterson's  Reporter's  Assistant,  page  18.) 

124.  The  same  principle  is  thus  stated  in     Graham's 
Handbook,      (Revised   Edition),   page   233:     "Generally   it 
is  allowable,  in  reporting  style,  to  omit  any  words  which 
must,  and  may  readily,  be  supplied  to  complete  the  sense 
or  construction." 

125.  Prof.  F.   G.  Morris   ("The  Phrase,"  page  49),  in 
stating  the  same  principle,  uses  this  language:     "Any  ele- 
ment, circle,   loop,   stroke,   syllable,   word,  which  prevents 
a  good  phrase,  and  which  at  the  same  time  will  certainly 
and  readily  be  supplied  in  reading,  is  omitted  for  the  sake 
of  the  phrase." 

"IMPLICATION"  AND  "INDICATION"  DISTINGUISHED. 

126.  The   terms   "ellipsis"   and    "implication"   are   not 
to  be  applied  to  a  case  where  omitted  words,  or  parts  of 
words,  instead  of  being  supplied  by  the  sense  or  construc- 
tion, are  indicated  by  some  stenographic  expedient,  such 
as  the  writing  of  two  words  close  together  to  indicate  the 
omission  of  the  intervening  words  of  the,  or  the  bringing  of 
part  of  a  word  into  proximity  with  a  preceding  stroke,  to 
indicate  an  omitted  con  or  com.     In  such  cases  the  omitted 
syllables  or  words  are  said  to  be  indicated,  not  implied, 
indication  being  simply  one  method  of  expression.     But  if 
(as  when  we  write  word  God  for  word  of  God)   the  fact 
of  omission,  and  the  word  necessary  to  supply  the  omission, 
are  suggested  by  the  context  or  construction  only,  not  by 
any  peculiar  method  of  writing  or  arranging  the  written 


ELLIPSIS.  69 

words,  it  is  said  that  the  omitted  syllable,  word  or  words 
are  implied. 

127.  It   should   be    remembered   that,   in   all   cases   of 
ellipsis  or  implication,  properly  so  called,  where  the  miss- 
ing words  are  implied,  not  indicated,  there  is  no  lifting  of 
the   pen   on   account   of  the   omission.     When   the   phrase 
is  once  begun,  the  pen  remains  upon  the  paper  until  it  is 
completed.     Implied  tvords  are,  in  writing,   treated  as  if 
they  did  not  exist;  in  reading  they  are  brought  out  by 
means  of  the  sense  or  grammatical  construction.     In  ap- 
plying the  principle  of  ellipsis  or  implication,  nothing  is 
left  to   guesswork.     The   brief   connecting  words  omitted, 
and  no  others,  are  necessarily  supplied  to  make  the  clause 
complete.     The  nature   of  the   omission   is   such  that  the 
careful   writer,   when   he   comes   to   read   the   notes,   must 
notice   the   omission,   and   cannot   be   in   doubt   as   to   the 
word  or  words  necessary  to  fill  the  gap. 

CAUTION. 

128.  The  principle  of  ellipsis  should  not  be  applied  to 
an  unfamiliar  phrase,  and  nothing  is  to  be  omitted  except 
what  may  be  called  necessary  connective  words.     The  stu- 
dent, or  even  the  advanced  practitioner,  should  not  venture, 
in  note-taking,  to  omit  words  upon  the  impulse  or  caprice 
of  the  moment,  and  without  regard  to  any  clearly-settled 
principles   of   ellipsis.     No   more   dangerous   habit   can  be 
acquired  by  the  young  reporter  than  that  of  leaving  out 
words  in  a  heedless,  helter-skelter  manner,  trusting  to  be 
able  to  supply  them  in  reading  by  means  of  the  context 
or  his  own  "gumption" — in  other  words,  by  mere  guess- 
ing.    The  cases  where  ellipsis  may  be  safely  and  properly 
indulged,   have,   to   a   large   degree,   been   ascertained   and 
classified;   and  to  these,  or  to  cases  similar  or  analogous, 
the  prudent  writer  will  confine  himself.     With  the  excep- 
tion of  "special  or  irregular  phrases,"  involving  methods 
of  ellipsis  peculiar  to  particular  cases,  it  is  believed  that 


7V  ELLIPSIS. 

this  chapter  exhibits  substantially  all  the  classes  of  cases 
coming  under  the  great  law  of  implication  or  ellipsis. 

In  the  exercises  given  in  this  and  subsequent  chapters, 
the  words  or  letters  to  be  omitted  are  always  indicated  by 
parentheses. 

ELLIPSIS  OF  "A." 

129.  The  article  a,  occurring  in  the  midst  of  a  phrase, 
is  often  omitted  and  implied. 

EXERCISE. 

Write  the  following  phrases,  omitting  in  each  the  ar- 
ticle a: 

at  such  (a)  moment  in  such  (a)  case 

for  (a)  long  time  (tin)  in  such  (a)  place 

for  (a)  longer  time    (tm)  in  such  (a)  position 

for  (a)  moment  such  (a)  man 

in  (a)  great  measure  that  is  (a)  question 

ELLIPSIS  OF  "AND." 

130.  And,  in  the  midst  of  a  phrase,  is  frequently  omit- 
ted and  implied. 

EXERCISE. 

Write  the  following  phrases,  omitting  in  each  the  con- 
junction and: 

again  (and)  again  longer  (and)  longer 

better  (and)  better  lower  (and)  lower 

deaf  (and)  dumb  more  (and)  more 

east  (and)  west  north  (and)  south 

forever  (and)  ever  over  (and)  over 

heaven  (and)  earth  right  (and)  left 

ladies  (and)  gentlemen  right  (and)  wrong 

larger  (and)  larger  such  (and)  such 

less  (and)  less  through  (and)  through 

life  (and)  death  worse  (and)  worse 

lord  (and)  master  yeas  (and)  nays 


ELLIPSIS.  71 

ELLIPSIS   OF    "OB." 

131.  Or,  occurring  in  the  midst  of  a  phrase,  is  frequent- 
ly omitted  and  implied. 

EXERCISE. 

Write  the  following  phrases,  omitting  in  each  the  con- 
junction or: 

black  or  white  sooner    (or)    later    (down- 
more  (or)  less  ward?)    ls^gf3a0™.)8iBD' 

one  (or)  two  two  (or)  three 

right  (or)  wrong  white  (or)  black 

ELLIPSIS  OF  "THE." 

132.  The,  occurring  in  the  midst  of  a  phrase,  is  fre- 
quently omitted  and  implied. 

EXEECISE. 

Write  the  following  phrases,  omitting  in  each  the  ar- 
ticle the: 

all  (the)  world  in  (the)  meantime  (tm  for 

at  (the)  present  day  time) 

at  (the)  request  in  (the)  name 

during     (the)     latter    part    in  (the)  world 

(prt)  on    (the)     (con)trary    (o» 
for  (the)  benefit  downward) 

for  (the)  mos(t)  part  to  (the)  world 

for  (the)  present  under  (the)  circumstances 

for  (the)  support  under  (the)   necessity 

ELLIPSIS  OF  "OF." 

133.     Of,  in  the  midst  of  a  phrase,  is  frequently  omit- 
ted and  implied. 


72 


ELLIPSIS. 


EXERCISE. 


Write  the  following  phrases,  omitting  in  each  the  pre- 
position of: 


act  (of)  (Con)gress 
act  (of)  Parliament 
bill  (of)  lading 
bill  (of)  particulars 
bill  (of)  sale 
board  (of)  trade 
by  way  (of)  illustration 
child  (of)  God 
children  (of)  God 
children  (of)  men 
church  (of)  England 
church  (of)  God 
church  (of)  Rome 
city  (of)  Boston 
city  (of)  Manchester 
city  (of)  New  York 
city  (of)  Norwich 
city  (of)  Philadelphia 
condition  (of)  things 
constitution  (of)  England 
course  (of)  business 
court  (of)  chancery 
court  (of)  claims 
court  (of)  justice 
fear  (of)  God 
freedom  (of)  speech 
good  many  (of)  them 
gospel  (of)  Christ 
house  (of)  God 
house  (of)  prayer 
In  point  (of)  fact 
In  the  presence  (of)  God 
Jesus  (of)  Nazareth 


kingdom  (of)  Christ 
kingdom  (of)  heaven 
kingdom  (of)  this  world 
kingdoms  (of)  this  world 
laws  (of)  God 
laws  (of)  life 
laws  (of)  Moses 
legislature  (of)  Maine 
letters  (of)  marque 
life  (of)  Christ 
life  (of)  Jesus 
loss  (of)  life 
love  (of)  Jesus 
man  (of)  business  • 
many  (of)  them 
many  (of)  these  (vocalize 

these) 

many  (of)  those 
matter  (of)  course 
matter  (of)  fact 
matter  (of)  importance 
Member  (of)    (Con)gress 
Members  (of)    (Con)gress 
Member  (of)  Parliament 
Members  (of)  Parliament 
neither  (of)  them 
one   (of)   them 
people  (of)  God 
people  (of)  this  country 
point  (of)  order 
point  (of)  view 
right  (of)  way 
rights  (of)  another 


ELLIPSIS.  78 

rights  (of)  man  water  (of)  life 

rights  (of)  mankind  wisdom  (of)  God 

rights  (of)  nations  word  (of)  God 

service  (of)  God  words  (of)  God 
short  space  (of)  time  (tm)     word  (of)  man 

spirit  (of)  Christ  *  world  (of)  fashion 

spirit  (of)  Jesus  world  (of)  nature 

sum  (of)  money  world  (of)  spirits 

sums  (of)  money  writ  (of)  error 

ELLIPSIS   OF    "OF  THE." 

134.  Of  the,  in  the  midst  of  a  phrase,  is  frequently 
•omitted  and  implied.  Cases  of  this  kind,  where  of  the 
is  omitted,  the  adjacent  words  being  joined,  with  nothing 
but  the  sense  or  construction  to  show  the  fact  of  omission, 
must  not  be  confounded  with  cases  in  which  the  omitted 
words  are  indicated  by  proximity;  that  is,  by  a  small  space 
between  the  adjacent  words.  (See  Paragraphs  317-323.) 

EXERCISE. 

Write  the  following  phrases,  omitting  in  each  the 
"words  of  the,  and  connecting  the  adjacent  words: 

act  (of  the)  legislature  constitution    (of   the)    Gov- 

at  the  end  (of  the)  day  ernment 

Attorney  General   (of  the)  constitution  (of  the)  United 

United  States  States 

circuit  court  (of  the)  Unit-  every  part  (of  the)  world 

ed  States  freedom  (of  the)  people 

•circumstances  (of  the)  case  freedom  (of  the)  press 

citizen      (of     the)      United  gentlemen  (of  the)  jury 

States  history  (of  the)  world 

citizens     (of    the)     United  in  this  part  (of  the)  world 

States  legislature    (of   the)    Terri- 
tory 


*In  this  phrase  and  the  next  two,    world  is  supposed  to  be  written 
•with  the  Benn  Pitman  sign. 


74  ELLIPSIS. 

liberty  (of  the)  press  one  (of  the)  worst 

member  (of  the)  bar  (br)  President    (of  the)    United 

members  (of  the)  bar  States 

member  (of  the)  legislature  Supreme    Court     (of    the) 

one  (of  the)  best  United  States 

one  (of  the)  most 

135.  Where  the  phrase  in  which  of  the  occurs,  is  not  a 
familiar  one,  or  where  the  preceding  and  following  words 
will  not  readily  join,  of  the  should  be  expressed  by  proxim- 
ity or  by  the  two  joined  ticks.    (See  Paragraphs  318-323.) 

"ON  THE"  OMITTED  AND  IMPLIED. 

136.  The  ellipsis  olj  on  the  at  the  beginning  of  a  few 
phrases,  such  as  on  the  one  hand,  on  the  other  hand,  etc., 
is  so  rare,  and  there  are  so  many  cases  where,  to  make 
the  sense  clear,  on  the  must  be  written,  not  implied,  that 
it  is  deemed  best  to  include  under  the  head  of  "Special  or  Ir- 
regular Phrases"  the  few  phrases  in  which  this  method  of 
ellipsis  is  resorted  to. 

ELLIPSIS  OF  "WITH." 

137.  With  may  be  omitted  and  implied  at  the  end  of 
such  phrases  as  in  conjunction  with,  etc.  <(See  Paragraphs 
328-329.) 

In  the  following  phrases,  with  may  be  omitted: 

in  accordance  (with)  in  (con) junction  (with) 

in   (com)parison  (with)  in  (conn)ection  (with) 

in  (com)bination  (with)         in  harmony  (with) 

ELLIPSIS  OF  "TO." 

138.  To  is  frequently  omitted  and  implied  at  the  end 
of  such  phrases  as  in  reference  to,  in  regard  to,  in  reply  to, 
in  relation  to,  etc. 

139.  To   phrases   from   which   the   last   word   is   thus 
omitted,  additional  words  may  be  attached,  if  the  form  of 
the  last  stroke  will  admit  of  such  additions;  and  the  stroke 


ELLIPSIS. 


75 


itself  may  be  modified  by  circles,  hooks,  ticks,  half-length- 
ing  and  double-lengthing.    Illustrations:  in  regard  to  this, 


.;  in  reply  to  them,...       ">„„.;  in  reference  to 


the 


,.~  ;  in  reference  to  their,    ,.  ...  ;  in  re- 


.,„...  .     (For  explanation  of  method  of 


spect  to  your, 


writing  phrases  beginning    with  in  re-,  see  Paragraph  385.) 
EXERCISE. 

Write  the  following  phrases,  omitting  to  and  joining 
the  following  word: 


in  reference  (to)  that 

in  reference  (to)  the 

in  reference  (to)  the  matter 

in  reference  (to)  this 

in  reference  (to)  which 

in  reference  (to)  your 

in  regard  (to)  it 

in  regard  (to)  its 

in  regard  (to)  that 

in  regard  (to)  that  which 

in  regard  (to)  them 

in  regard  (to)  this 

in  regard  (to)  this  one 

in  regard  (to)  you 

in  regard  (to)  your 

in  reply  (to)  him 

in  reply  (to)  it 


in  reply  (to)  many 

in  reply  (to)  several 

in  reply  (to)  some 

in  reply  (to)  such 

in  reply  (to)  that 

in  reply  (to)  their 

in  reply  (to)  theirs 

in  reply  (to)  this 

in  reply  (to)  you 

in  reply  (to)  your 

in  reply  (to)  yours 

in  respect  (to) 

in  respect  (to)  him 

in  respect  (to)  his 

in  respect  (to)  many 

in  respect  (to)  many  more 

in  respect  (to)  one 


76  ELLIPSIS. 

in  respect  (to)  several  in  respect  (to)  themselves 

in  respect  (to)  some  in  respect  (to)  this 

in  respect  (to)  such  in  respect  (to)  which 

in  respect  (to)  that  in  respect  (to)  you 

in  respect  (to)  them  in  respect  (to)  your 

140.  To,   following  the   word   according,    is   generally 
omitted,  and,  if  convenient,  the  next  word  is  joined,  as  in 

the  phrase  according  to  this  v> 

EXERCISE. 

Write  the  following  phrases,  omitting  to  and  joining 
the  next  word: 

according  (to)  its  own  according  (to)  these  (vo- 

according  (to)  justice  calize  these) 

according  (to)  law  according  (to)  this 

according  (to)  that  according  to  tnose 

according  (to)  the  according  (to)  such 

according  (to)  their  according  (to)  which 

according  (to)  them  according  (to)  your 

141.  To,  the  sign  of  the  infinitive,  may  in  many  cases 
be  omitted  and  implied,  when  it  is  immediately  followed  by 
the  verb  to  which  it  belongs. 

EXERCISE. 

Write  the  following  phrases,  omitting  to,  the  sign  of 
the  infinitive: 

every  reason  (to)  think  it  seems  (to)  mak6 

have  (to)  be  it  is  never  (to)  be 

help  (to)  make  it  is  not  (to)  be 

is  this  (to)  be  it  is  sure  (to)  be 

It  seems  (to)  be  it  is  (to)  be 

it  seems  (to)  have  said  (to)  be 


ELLIPSIS. 


77 


seems  (to)  be 

seems  (to)  make 

seems  (to)  take 

so  as  (to)  be 

so  as  (to)  become 

so  as  (to)  make 

that  is  (to)  be 

that  is    (to)    say    (vocalize 

say) 
there  is  (to)  be 


want  (to)  be 

want  (to)  say 

was  (to)  be 

we  wish  (to)  do  (I.  D.*) 

we  wish   (to)  say  (I.  D.' 

when  is  this  (to)  be 

wish  (to)  be 

wish  (to)  do 

wish  (to)  say 

you  are  (to)  be 


142.     In  the  following  phrases,  to,  the  sign  of  the  infini- 
tive, is  to  be  omitted  after  the  special  phrase  in  order 


in  order  (to)  answer 

in  order  (to)  keep 

in  order  (to)  be 

in  order  (to)  know 

in  order  (to)  become 

in  order  (to)  observe 

in  order  (to)  carry 

in  order  (to)  pay 

in  order  (to)  determine 

in  order  (to)  say 

in  order  (to)  develop 

in  order  (to)  see  (vocalize 

in  order  (to)  distinguish 

see) 

in  order  (to)  do 

in  order  (to)  send 

in  order  (to)  effect 

in  order  (to)  show 

in  order  (to)  encourage 

in  order  (to)  take 

in  order  (to)  enjoy 

in  order  (to)  test 

in  order  (to)  have 

in  order  (to)  touch 

in  order  (to)  inquire 

in  order  (to)  turn 

in  order  (to)  judge 

in  order  (to)  understand 

143.     But  to,  the  sign  of  the  infinitive,  should  not  be 
omitted  if  a  better  junction  can  be  obtained  by  writing  it. 


*These  letters,  meaning  "Initial  Displacement,"  indicate  that  the 
first  word  of  a  phrase  is  written  put  of  its  ordinary  position  in  order  that 
the  second  word  may  be  written  in  its  normal  place.  Occasionally  they 
indicate  that  the  first  two  words  are  displaced  in  order  to  bring  the  third 
into  its  ordinary  position. 


78  ELLIPSIS. 

EXERCISE. 

In  the  following  phrases,  insert  to: 

designed  to  make  in  order  to  refuse 

in  order  to  blame  in  order  to  reject 

in  order  to  charm  in  order  to  remember 

in  order  to  deliver  in  order  to  reply 

in  order  to  direct  in  order  to  retain 

in  order  to  limit  in  order  to  tell 

in  order  to  make  in  order  to  throw 

in  order  to  manage  in  order  to  treat 

in  order  to  modify  in  order  to  write 

in  order  to  move  mean  to  make 

in  order  to  place  want  to  make 

in  order  to  receive  who  is  to  make 

144.  The  preposition  to  may  be  omitted  in  the  midst 
of  a  phrase,  where  the  sense  or  construction  will  supply 
it.    Illustrations:   it  seems   (to)   me,  it  seemed   (to)    me, 
it  appears  (to)  me. 

EXERCISE. 

Write  the  following: 

appears  (to)  me  say  (to)  you 

in  addition  (to)  this  seemed  (to)  me 

it  appears  (to)  me  seems  (to)  me 

it  seemed  (to)  me  there  appears  (to)  me 

it  seems  (to)  me  there  seems  (to)  me 

145.  To,  the  sign  of  the  infinitive,  is  never  omitted  and 
implied  at  the  beginning  of  a  phrase,  though,  by  some 
writers   (following  the  .teaching  of  Mr.  Graham).,  it  may 
be  omitted  and  indicated  by  dropping  the  next  word  to  "the 
fourth  position." 

ELLIPSIS  OF  "FROM." 

146.  When  in  Congress,  State  Legislatures,  or  other 
deliberative  assemblies,  members  of  the  body  are  referred 


ELLIPSIS.  79 

to,  not  by  their  names,  but  by  the  localities  from  which, 
they  come,  the  word  from,  preceding  the  name  of  the  State, 
county  or  other  locality,  may  be  omitted  for  the  sake  of 
forming  a  convenient  phrase. 

EXERCISE. 
Write  the  following,  omitting  the  preposition  from: 

delegate  (from)  Alaska  member   (from)   Massachu- 
delegate  (from)  Texas  setts 

gentleman  (from)  Chester  my  friend  (from)  Delaware 

gentleman  (from)  Illinois  my  friend  (from)  Nevada 

gentleman  (from)  Jackson  my  friend  (from)  New  York 

gentleman      (from)       New  my  friend  (from)  Pennsyl- 

Hampshire  vania 

gentleman  (from)  NewJer-  my  friend   (from)   Tennes- 

sey  see 

gentleman       (from)      New  my  friend  (from)  Texas 

York  senator  (from)  New  York 

gentleman  (from)  Texas  senator   (from)   Pennsylva- 
member  (from)  Alleghany         nia 

member  (from)  Kansas  senator  (from)  Texas 

member  (from)  Louisiana  senator  (from)  Virginia 

ELLIPSIS  OF  "CON"  OB  "COM." 

147.  The  prefix  con  or  com,  usually  expressed  in  sep- 
arately-written words  by  the  dot,  and  in  phrases  by  prox- 
imity,* may  sometimes  be  omitted  in  a  phrase,  and  the  re- 
mainder of  the  word  joined  to  the  preceding  word.  Illus- 


trations:  some   (consideration  .ar^i ,    ;  in  any  (con)- 

L 


dition  U.., But  no  word  beginning  with  con 


*See  Paragraphs  328-336. 


80  ELLIPSIS. 

or  com  should  be  thus  joined  except  those  familiar  out- 
lines from  which,  when  standing  alone,  the  con  dot  is  ha- 
bitually omitted.  For  instance,  as  the  con  dot  would 
scarcely  b&  omitted  from  the  word  confession  if  it  stood 
alone,  the  phrase  by  his  own  confession  is  better  written. 

., «...\^.~....  than 

EXERCISE. 

148.  In  the  following  phrases,  con  or  com  is  to  be 
omitted,  and  the  remainder  of  the  word  joined  to  the  pre- 
ceding word: 

every  (con)sideration  some  (con)sideration 

extra  (com)pensation  some  (con)versation 

in  any  (con)dition  such  (con)sideration 

in  (con) sequence  they  may  (con)sider 

in  my  (con)versation  upon  no  (con)sideration 

into  (con)sideration  very   ( considerable 

it  is  (con)venient  will  be  (con)sidered 

on    (the)     (con)trary  (on    you  will  (con)sider 
downward) 

ELLIPSIS  OF  "ING." 

149.  The  participial  termination  ing  may  often  be  omit- 
ted and  implied,  to  facilitate  a  junction  with  the  next 
word;  but  in  separately-written  words  or  at  the  end  of  a. 
phrase,  the  expression  of  ing  will  generally  aid  in  ready 
reading. 

EXERCISE. 

Write  the  following  phrases,  omitting  ing: 

are  you  go  (ing)  there  enact  (ing)  clause 

board  (ing)   school  enter  (ing)  wedge 

command  (ing)  officer  labor  (ing)  classes 

draw  (ing)  room  labor  (ing)  people 

drink  (ing)  saloon  look  (ing)  glass 


ELLIPSIS.  81 

presid(ing)  elder  stepp(ing)  stone 

read  (ing)  room  this  even  (ing) 

resolv(ing)    clause  this  morn  (ing) 

sew(ing)    machine  visit(ing)  board 

smok(ing)  car  (kr)  water(ing)  place 

sitt(ing)    room  without  tak (ing)  time  (tm) 

speak(ing)  tube  work(ing)  classes 

OMISSION    OF    SYLLABLES    OR    LETTERS. 

150.  As  a  general  rule,  to  facilitate  a  phrase,  we  may 
omit  a  letter  or  a   syllable  when  the  omission   does  not 
make  the  word  illegible,  especially  if  the  letter  or  syllable 
proposed  to  be  omitted  is  obscurely  sounded.     For  instance, 
in  log  cabin,  the  omission  of  fc  in  cabin  enables  us  to  phrase 
two  words  which  otherwise  could  not  be  easily  joined. 

ELLIPSIS  OF  THE  TERMINATIONS  "AL"  AND  "LY." 

151.  The  adjectival  termination  al  and  the  adverbial  ter- 
mination ly  are  sometimes  omitted  to  facilitate  a  junction, 
as  in  the  phrases  nation  (al)    expenditure,  nation  (al)    re- 
sources,  absolute  (ly)    necessary,   absolute  (ly)    impossible, 
perfect  ( ly )   excellent. 

ELLIPSIS    OF    INITIAL    "H." 

152.  The  h  tick  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  may  fre- 
quently  be   omitted   and   implied,   to   facilitate   a   phrase. 

Illustrations:     Ladies'    (H)ome  Journal     >,../;.. .Jrrrsa....  ,    our 


(h)ome    market  _-x. y~T.-.   ,    at    (h)ome 


such    (h)armony /   _ .„. ,   do    (h)arm 


*>.>  A*<, » -  *~  -  • 


82 


ELLIPSIS. 

ELLIPSIS    OF    "T"    OR    "D." 


153.     To  secure  an  easy  junction,  the  sound  of  t  at  the 
end  of  a  word  may  be  omitted  by  changing  an  st  loop  to  a 


circle.  Illustrations:  mus(t)  ~be , 


.jus(t)  now, 


*2z**a. 


By  means  of  this  elision  in  writing,  which  corresponds  with 
an  elision  frequent  in  ordinary  pronunciation,  we  secure 
many  phrases  which  otherwise  would  be  difficult  or  im- 
possible. 


EXERCISE. 


Write  the  following  phrases,  omitting  t  by  changing 
the  loop  to  a  circle: 


almos(t)  always 

almos(t)  impossible 

almos(t)  ready 

bes(t)  interests 

bes(t)  material 

bes(t)  (of)  my  belief 

bes(t)  regards 

bes(t)  way 

everlas(t)  (ing)  day 

everlas  ( t )  ( ing )   Father 

•everlas(t)  (ing)  God 

everlas  (t)  (ing)  happiness 

everlas  (t)  (ing)  life 

it  mus(t)  always  be 

it  mus(t)  be 

it  mus(t)  be  done 

it  mus(t)  go 

it  mus(t)  have 

it  mus(t)  never 

it  mus(t)  not  be 

jus(t)  been 

jus(t)  enough 


jus(t)  now 
las(t)  April 
las(t)  day 
las(t)  December 
las(t)  hour 
las(t)  Monday 
las(t)  month 
las(t)  night 
las(t)  time  (tm) 
mos(t)  beautiful 
mos(t)  distinguished 
mos(t)  excellent 
mos(t)  happy 
mos(t)  important 
mos(t)  likely 
mos(t)  necessary 
mos(t)  powerful 
mos(t)  reasonable 
mos(t)   sure(ly) 
mus(t)  admit 
mus(t)  also 
mus(t)  always 


ELLIPSIS. 


-S3 


mus(t)  come 

mus(t)  have 

mus(t)  it  be 

mus(t)  likely 

mus(t)  necessarily 

mus(t)  never 

mus(t)  there  be 

mus(t)  therefore 

next  (ns)  day 

next  December 

next  July 

next  November 

next  (ns)  time  (tm) 

pos(t) -chaplain 

Pos  ( t )  master-General 

pos(t) -office 

pos(t)-paid 

such  as  mus(t)  be 

that  it  mus(t)  be 

that  which  you  mus(t)  be 

that  which  you  mus(t)  do 

there  mus(t)  always  be 

there  mus(t)  be 

there  mus(t)  be  somethiag 

there  mus(t)  come 

there  mus(t)  never  be 

there  mus(t)  not  be 


they  mus(t)  do 
they  mus(t)  have 
they  mus(t)  recollect 
you  mus(t)  appear 
you  mus(t)  be 
you  mus(t)  become 
you  mus(t)  beware 
you  mus(t)  be  careful 
you  mus(t)  be  sure 
you  mus(t)  be  (w)illing 
you  mus(t)  bring 
you  mus(t)  have 
you  mus(t)  make 
you  mus(t)  not 
you  mus(t)  not  attempt 
you  mus(t)  not  be 
you  mus(t)  not  become 
you  mus(t)  not  decide 
you  mus(t)  not  do 
you  mus(t)  not  go 
you  mus(t)  not  take 
you  mus(t)  not  think 
youmus(t)  probably 
you  mus(t)  receive 
you  mus(t)  recollect 
you  mus(t)  recollect  that 
you  mus(t)  say 


154.  Where  zcl  at  the  end  of  the  word  is  ordinarily 
represented  by  a  loop,  the  sound  of  cl  may  be  elided  in 
phrases,  and  a  circle  substituted  for  the  loop,  in  order  to 
secure  an  easy  junction  with  the  next  word. 


EXEP.CISE. 


Write  the  following  phrases,  substituting  In  each  a  circle 
for  the  loop: 

authorize (d)  version  civilize (d)  globe 

civilize  (d)  country  civilize  (d)  nation 


ELLIPSIS. 


civilize (d)  world 

close (d)  door 

enclose  (d)  letter 

I  am  authorize  (d)   (to)  ask 

I  am  authorize  (d)   (to1*  say 

propose  (d)  legislation 


recognize  (d)   necessity 
revise  (d)  code 
revise  (d)  edition 
surprise  (d)  that 
surprise  (d)   (to)  be 
surprise  (d)    (to)  have 


155.  By  omitting  d  or  ed  (the  termination  of  the  past 
tense)  and  writing  the  present  form  of  the  verb  instead  of 
the  past,  we  may  often  secure  a  useful  phrase  which  would 
be  difficult  or  impossible  if  the  past  tense  were  expressed. 


Illustrations:   have  you  live(d)   there 


have 


receive  (d)    their, 

156.  By  an  ellipsis  of  t  we  are  sometimes  enabled  to 
express  their  or  their  by  a  double-length  stroke,  which 
would  otherwise  be  impracticable,  as  in  the  phrases  I 


wen(t)  there  ,  they  sen(t)  there 


In  these  cases  it  is  advisable  to  vocalize  the  double  length 
stroke,  as  shown  in  the  illustrations,  for  the  sake  of  in- 
suring legibility. 

157.  "The  t  or  d  sound  which,  if  written,  would  be  ex- 
pressed by  halving,  may  be  omitted  in  some  cases,  princi- 
pally from  verbs,  to  secure  advantages  which  would  other- 
wise be  lost,  as  by  adding  have  by  an  f-v  hook.    Thus  trf 
may  represent  tried  to  have  as  well  as  try  to  have,  the 
omitted  ed  being  supplied  by  the  context."       (Graham's 
Hand-book.) 

TWO    CIRCLES    MERGED. 

158.  A  circle  written  instead  of  a  loop  at  the  end  of 
a  word  may  merge  with  a  circle  at  the  beginning  of  the 


ELLIPSIS.  85 

next  word,  thus  making  a  double  circle,  as  in  the  phrases 


jus(t)  as  well  as    yO--- ,  almos  (t)  as  well  as _..._.* 


ELLIPSIS    OF    "S." 

159.     For  the  sake  of  convenient  phrasing,  a  single  cir- 
cle may  be  used  for  two  sounds  of  s,  and  a  double  circle 


for  three.**    Illustrations:     all  that  is  said 


(cir  cum)  stance  .........  V>"—i  J'ust  as  soon  as.  . 


,  this 


V>"—i  J' 


HOOKS  ELIDED. 

160.  In  order  to  facilitate  phrasing,  hooks,  initial  or 
final,  are  sometimes  elided.  Under  this  principle,  the  w 
at  the  beginning  of  well,  willing  and  week  is  frequently 
omitted. 

EXERCISE. 
Write  the  following  phrases,  omitting  the  w: 

as  (w)ell  as  it  may  as  (w)ell 

as  (w)ell  as  it  should  be         it  might  as  (w)ell 

as  (w)ell  as  you  may  las(t)   (w)eek 

I  am  willing  next  (ns)   (w)eek 

it  is    (w)ell  enough  (well    such  as  are  (w)illing  (are 

downward)  downward) 

it  is    (w)ell   known  (well    this  (w)eek 

downward)  very  (w)ell 


•See  Paragraphs  255-263. 
**See  Paragraphs  269-272. 


86  ELLIPSIS. 

"R"    HOOK    OMITTED    AND    IMPLIED. 

161.    To  facilitate  a  junction,  the  r  hook  is  frequently 
elided  or  imperfectly  expressed,  as  in  the  phrases  it  is  per- 


haps  ,J*<- »  *n  which  consideration 


162.  Sometimes,  in  consequence  of  the  elision  of  the  r 
hook,  the  consonant  to  which  it  belongs  assumes  an  im- 
perfect and  apparently  ambiguous  form.  Thus  mr  in  the 
midst  of  a  phrase  takes  frequently  the  form  of  mp  by 
reason  of  the  omission  of  the  r  hook,  as  in  much  more 

..../ .....;  vr,  with  the  hook  omitted  in  the  midst  of  a 

/•— v 

phrase,  has  the  appearance  of  the  consonant  stroke  w,  as 


in  the  phrase  there  is  very  little eJL...sr. ;  thr,  with 

the  hook  omitted  under  similar  circumstances,  looks  like 
the  consonant  stroke  z,  as  in  the  phrases  he  is  therefore 


t 


,  which  is  therefore «/ For  the  sake  of 


brevity,  these  apparent  anomalies  are  tolerated,  because  in 
practice  no  confusion  or  illegibility  results. 

EXERCISE. 

Write  the  following  phrases,  omitting  the  r  hook  as  in- 
dicated: 

he  is  the(r)efore  it  is  ve(r)y  strange 

he  is  ve(r)y  likely  much  mo(r)e 

it  is  thei(r)  matter  much  mo(r)e  important 

it  is  ve  ( r )  y  likely  so  ve  ( r )  y  little 

it  is  ve(r)y  little  which  is  the(r)eby 


ELLIPSIS.  87 

"N"    HOOK    ELIDED. 

163.  The  n  nook  is  occasionally  elided  for  the  sake  of 
securing  a  convenient  junction. 

EXERCISE. 

Write  the  following  phrases,  omitting  the  n  hook  as  in- 
dicated: 

all  that  has  bee(n)  said  upo(n)  their 

America  (n)   people  upo(n)  them 

dow(n)  there  upo(n)  themselves 

has  bee  (n)  able  upo(n)  those 

has  bee(n)  there  upo(n)  those  who 

it  has  bee(n)  suggested  woma(n)'s  rights 

Norther  (n)  Democracy  wome(n)'s  rights 

164.  In  the  word  can,  the  n  may  frequently  be  elided  for 
the  sake  of  phrasing.* 

EXERCISE. 
Write  the  following  phrases,  omitting  the  n  in  can: 

ca(n)  be  it  ca(n)  be 

ca(n)  only  be  it  ca(n)  never  be 

ca(n)  there  be  there  ca(n)  be 

ca(n)  they  do  this  ca(n)  only  be 

ca(n)  this  be  what  ca(n)  they  do 

ca(n)  you  what  ca(n)  they  remember 

ca(n)  you  go  which  ca(n)  be 

ca(n)  you  receive  you  ca(n)  generally 

ca(n)  you  remember  you  ca(n)  now 

ELLIPSIS    OF    PERSONAL    PRONOUNS. 

165.  The   personal    pronouns    I,    you,    he,    we,    they, 
when  they  occur  in  the  midst  of  phrases  like  as  near  as  you 
can,  as  much  as  I  can,  may  be  omitted,  if  the  context  will 


*The  author's  practice  is  to  writ*  can  without  the  n  hook  in  all  cases. 
Tins  is  not  in  accord  with  Graham  or  Benn  Pitman,  but  is  recognized  by 
Munson  and  Isaac  Pitman. 


ELLIPSIS. 


clearly  and  certainly  suggest  the  word  to  be  supplied.  In 
testimony,  such  phrases  are  very  common  in  both  questions 
and  answers,  and  are  often  uttered  very  rapidly.  The  ex- 
pression of  the  personal  pronoun  in  such  cases  would  often 
compel  the  breaking  of  a  natural  and  useful  phrase,  which, 
when  the  pronoun  is  elided,  flows  from  the  pen  unbroken. 

EXERCISE. 

Write  the  following  phrases,  omitting  in  each  the  per- 
sonal pronoun: 

as  fa(r)  as  (I)  can 

as  far  as  (you)  can 

as  far  as  (he)  can 

as  far  as  (we)  can 

as  far  as  (they)  can 

as  fas(t)  as  (I)  can 

as  fas(t)  as  (you)  can 

as  fas(t)  as  (he)  can 

asfas(t)  as  (we)  can 

as  fas(t)  as  (they)  can 

as  long  as  (I)  can 

as  long  as  (you)  can 

as  long  as  (he)  can 

as  long  as  (we)  can 


as  long  as  (they)  can 
as  many  as  (I)  can 
as  many  as  (you)  can 
as  many  as  (he)  can 
as  many  as  (we)  can 
as  many  as  (they)  can 


as  much  as  (I)  can 
as  much  as  (you)  can 
as  much  as  (he)  can 
as  much  as  (we)  can 
as  much  as  (they) can 
as  near  as   (I)  can 
as  near  as  (you)  can 
as  near  as  (he)  can 
as  near  as  (we)  can 
as  near  as  (they)  can 
as  soon  as  (I)  can 
as  soon  as  (you)  can 
as  soon  as  (he)  can 
as  soon  as  (we)  can 
as  soon  as  (they)  can 
as  well  as  ( I )  can 
as  well  as  (you)  can 
as  well  as  (he)  can 
as  well  as  (we)  can 
as  well  as  (they)  can 


PHRASES    WITH   TWO   OMISSIONS. 

166.    Frequently  there  are  two  omissions    (and  there 
may  be  more)  in  a  single  phrase.    Illustrations:  for  (the) 


sake   (of) 


in   (the)    sight   (of)    God 


ELLIPSIS.  89 

IRREGULAR  ELLIPSIS. 

167.  The  cases  of  ellipsis  already  given  in  this  chap- 
ter are  capable  of  regular  classification,  each  case  falling 
under  a  given  principle  of  omission.  But  there  are  some 
phrases  which  follow  no  general  principle;  for  instance, 
where  a  part  of  a  word  (not  a  regular  word-sign)  is  in 
particular  phrases  written  for  the  whole.  Illustrations: 

Honor(able)  Senator _    ,   in    (the)    sec(ond) 


place 

168.  Certain  familiar  questions  occurring  in  the  exam- 
ination of  witnesses,  and  generally  spoken  very  rapidly,  are 
usually  written  by  court  reporters  in  a  highly  elliptical 


style.     Illustrations:   where  do  you  reside fe.      ..  ,  how 

long  have  you  Known  him*'  /-.v*^^-^"^—     ,  ivhat  is  your 


business . ...N^A.-.  or        ~-,.JScL. .-  ...     Phrases  of  this  kind, 

as  well  as  those  referred  to  in  the  last  paragraph,  being  so 
irregular  as  to  be  incapable  of  classification  under  any 
general  rule,  will  be  found  included  and  appropriately  illus- 
treated  under  the  head  of  "Special  or  Irregular  Phrases."** 


*This  phrase  introduces  the  Graham  sign  for  ?iow.  . 

**In  this  chapter  no  reference  has  been  made  to  Mr.   Graham's  expe- 1 
client  of  omitting  liarr  in  such  phrases  as  wouhl  hare  bt>/>n,  because  when  I 
been  is  expressed  by  the  n  hook  as  explained  in  a  subsequent  part  of  this 
book,  •would  hare  been  is  as  briefly  written  as  would  been. 


CHAPTER  IX. 


THE  "TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 

169.  The  tick  word-signs,  single  and  in  groups,  repre- 
sent some  of  the  most  common  and  useful  connective  ex- 
pressions of  the  language.     They  have  been  aptly  termed 
"the  joints  or  hinges  on  which  sentences  turn."     To  gain 
a  mastery  of  these  (without  which  a  mastery  of  phrasing 
is  impossible),  the  student  should  spare  no  effort.     These 
small  but  extremely  valuable  signs    (with  which  as  used 
separately  the  student  is  assumed  to  have  become  familiar 
in  his  earlier  lessons)  are, — of,  to,  or,  out,  on,  should,  he, 
all,  too,  already,  before,  ought,  who. 

170.  This  list  includes  most  of  the  vowel  word-signs 
represented   by   a   single    stroke,   heavy   or   light.     The   I 
tick,    the   the   tick   and   the   a   tick    are   omitted    for   the 
present,  because  the  conditions  and  rules  affecting  them  are 
in  some  respects  exceptional.     Two  ticks  peculiar  to  the 
Graham  system — the    how   tick,    and    the    there   tick — are 


also  reserved  for  separate  treatment.  Before,  included 
in  the  preceding  list,  is  in  the  Benn  Pitman  system  a 
heavy  perpendicular  tick  on  the  line,  but  in  the  Graham 
system  is  represented  by  6  with  the  f  hook. 

INITIAL  TICKS. 

171.  Of  the  ticks  included  in  the  list  just  given,  all  ma/ 
be  used  initially  (that  is,  at  the  beginning  of  a  phrase), 
and  when  so  used  they  occupy  the  position  they  would  oc- 
cupy if  standing  alone,  the  second  and  subsequent  words  of 
the  phrase  accommodating  themselves  to  the  position'  of  the 
first.  Most  of  these  ticks  are  also  legible  when  attached 
to  a  preceding  stroke,  because  (though  they  can  have  no 
distinctive  position  except  when  standing  alone  or  at  the 
beginning  of  a  phrase)  they  may,  by  reason  of  the  context, 
be  read  just  as  well  out  of  position  as  in  ii.  For  instance. 


'TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


in  the  phrase  for  it  should  be,  should  is  perfectly  unam- 
biguous, although  the  reader  cannot  tell  the  normal  posi- 
tion of  the  tick  from  its  position  in  the  phrase.  The  excep- 
tional ticks  which  require  to  preserve  their  positional  dis- 
tinction, because  without  it  they  may  be  misread,  will  be 
enumerated  and  explained  hereafter. 

172.  Each  of  the  ticks  embraced  in  the  preceding  list 
is  invariably  written  downward  except  on,  should  and  tie, 
which,  for  convenience  in  phrasing,  may  be  written  either 
upward  or  downward. 

173.      EXERCISE  ON   "OF"   TICK    (INITIAL). 


of  advantage 

of  course 

of  course  it  is 

of  course  they  will 

of  course  they  will  be  able 

of  course  this 

of  everybody 

of  God 

of  honor 

of  importance 

of  law 

of  life 

of  many 

of  me 

of  men 

of  my 

of  my  opinion 

of  one 

of  one  thing 

of  several 

of  some  men 

of  something 

of  some 

of  some  kind 

of  such  as  have 


of  such  people 

of  such  things 

of  that 

of  that  day 

of  that  which  is 

of  them 

of  themselves 

of  this 

of  this  act 

of  this  age 

of  this  bill      . 

of  this  country 

of  this  generation 

of  this  work 

of  this  world 

of  which 

of  which  you  are 

of  which  you  will 

of  which  you  must 

of  which  you  mus(t)  be 

yours* 

yourself 
of  you 
of  your 
of  yourselves 


(of 
{of 


Throughout  these  exercises,  wherever  two  phases  are  represented 
in  the  same  way,  they  are  connecteit  by  a  brace. 


92  "TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


174.     EXERCISE  03  "TO"  TICK  (INITIAL). 


*to  believe 

to-morrow 

to  blame 

to  one  another 

to  bring 

fto  our 

to  church 

to  place 

to  claim 

to  receive 

to  come 

to  reply 

to  (con)sider 

to  some 

to-day 

to  some  degree 

to  do 

to  strike 

to  do  good 

to  strike  out 

to  do  right 

to  such 

to  do  so 

to  such    as    are    (r    down- 

to do  something 

ward  ) 

to  do  that 

to  such  as  may 

to  do  their 

to  such  persons 

to  every 

to  suppose  that 

to  every  man 

to  take 

**to  have 

to  that  which  you 

(  inthe  phrase  to  we,  write 

to  their 

to  him  »»«  separately,  in  accord- 
ance with  Paragraph  89). 

to  them 

to  it 

to  think  that 

(  to  its 

to  this 

{  to  itself 

to  those  who 

to  love 

to  which  you  are 

to  make 

to  which  you  will 

to  make  them 

to  write 

to  make  this 

to  you 

to  many 

to  your 

to  many  such 

to  your  honor 

to  mention 

to  your  many 

*See  Paragraph  175. 

••Represented,  acco 

k.          -•»•••••• 

t Represented,  according  to  Graham,  by  prefixing  r  hook  to  the  tick. 


**Rep resented,  according  to  Graham,  by  attaching  the  v  hook  to  the 
tick.          „.!  •••••»••  r 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


175.  In  certain  cases,  including  many  of  the  phrases 
in  the  foregoing  list,  initial  to  or  to  the  is  omitted  by  Mr. 
Graham,  and  implied  by  writing  the  succeeding  word  below 
"the  line,  in  what  is  called  "the  fourth  position."  As  this 
is  a  principle  of  word  indication  rather  than  of  phrasing, 
no  exercises  upon  it  are  required  by  the  plan  of  this  book. 


176.      EXERCISE  ON   "OR"  TICK    (INITIAL).* 


or  can 


or  something 

or  something  else  (else  down- 
ward, and  vocalized  to  distin- 
guish it  from  less,  which  in  a 
similar  case  is  written  down  but 
unvocalized.) 

or  such 
or  sure(ly) 


or  the 

or  this 

or  themselves 

or  we  have 

or  w(h) ether 

or  w(h)  ether  you  are 

or  with 

or  you 

or  you  can 

or  you  have 

or  you  may 

or  you  will 

or  your 

or  yourself 


177.      EXERCISE    ON    "BUT"    TICK    (INITIAL).** 


but  has  no 

but  is  not 

but  lately  (or  little) 

but  may 

but  must 

but  mus(t)  be 

but  once 

but  one 

but  one  such 

but  only 


but  rather 

but  some 

but  somebody  (smb)  else 

but  something 

but  sure(ly) 

but  tell  me 

but  that 

but  that  is  not 

but  themselves 

but  there  (their) 


*See  Paragraph  199. 
**See  Paragraph  199. 


9-1 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


!but  theirs 
but  there  is 
but  there  has  been 
but  when 
but  whenever 


I 


but  you  are 
but  you  will 
but  your 
but  yours 
but  yourself 


178.      EXERCISE    ON     "ALL"    TICK     (INITIAL.) 


*all 
all 
all 
all 
all 
all 
all 
all 
all 
all 
all 
all 
(  all 
(all 
all 
all 
t  all 
{all 
all 
all 
all 
all 
all 
all 
all 
all 
all 
all 
all 


are  (are  upward)  all 

blessings  all 

churches  all 

(circum)  stances  all 

classes  all 

(con)siderations  all 

directions  all 

his  all 

his  money  all 

his  own  all 

honor  all 

important  all 

is  all 

his  all 

is  not  all 

it  all 

its  all 

it  is  all 

its  own  all 

kinds  all 

mankind  all 

matters  all 
means  (  all 
men  I  all 

mention  all 

might  have  all 

might  not  all 

mine  all 

must  all 


mus(t)  be 

my 

my  friends 

my  reasons 

particulars 

people 

persons 

places 

right 

such 

such  matters 

such  things 

that 

that  has  been 

that  is  necessary 

that  this 

that  you  may 

the  matter 

themselves 

there  is 

therefore 

they 

their 

they  are 

think 

think  so 

this 

we  do 

we  have 


*Represented,  a 


according  t£>  Grahau: 


Graham,  by  prefixing r  hook  to  the  tick. 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS.  95 

all  which  all  you 

all  will  be  all  you  are  (are  upward) 

all  we  do  all  you  may 

all  we  have  all  you  must 

all  which  all  your 

all  will  be  all  yours 

179.      EXERCISE    ON    "TOO"    TICK     (INITIAL.) 

too  careful  too  much  (men)* 

too  full  too  recent 

too  grave  too  respectful 

too  great  too  short 

too  important  too  soon 

too  late  too  sure 

too  little  too  true 

too  many  too  valuaole 

180.      EXERCISE  ON    "BEFORE"    TICK    (INITIAL.)** 

before  him  before  there  can  be 

before  many  days  before  this 

before  that  before  you 

before  that  time  before  you  are 

(  before  their  before  your 

(  before  there  (  before  yours 

before  them  (  before  yourselves 

181.      EXERCISE    ON    "WHO"    TICK    (INITIAL.) 

fwho  are  (are  downward)         who  can 

who  are  going  ft  who  ca(n)not 

who  are  laboring  who  could 

who  are  mostly  who  could  not 

who  are  only  \  who  do 

who  are  you  (   who  had 

who  become  who  is 


*See  Paragraphs  90  and  106. 

i*Xot  used  by  Mr.  Graham. 

i  I!y  Mr.  Graham,  r  hook  is  prefixed  to  who  to  add  are. 

"See  note  to  Paragraph  74  and  first  note  to  Paragraph  1*7. 


9*J 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


who 
who 
who 
who 
who 
who 
who 
who 
who 
who 
who 
who 
who 
who 
who 
who 
who 
who 
who 
who 
who 
who 
who 
who 


has 

has  been 

has  had 

has  never 

has  not 

is 

is  doing 

is  having 

is  it 

is  necessary 

is  never 

is  not 

is  now 

is  only 

is  taking 

is  this 

is  (to)  be 

is  to  make 

is  your 

makes 

may 

may  never 

may  receive 

might 


who  mus(t)  be 

who  never 

who  now 

who  say 

who  shall  (upward  sft) 

who  shall  be 

who  should 

who  should  have 

who  should  know 

who  sure(ly) 

who  was 
*who  will 
*who  will  be 

who  would 

who  would  be 

who  would  come 

who  would  do 

who  would  have 

who  would  know 

who  would  make 

who  would  never 

who  would  not 

who  would  not  have  done 

who  you  are 


EXERCISE   ON    "ON"   TICK    (INITIAL). 


182.    In  each  of  the  following  phrases,  on  is  to  be  made 
upward: 


on  both  sides 

on  business 

on  demand 

on  different  occasions 

on  each  side  (I.  D.) 

on  them 


*In  these  cases  will  is  represented,  according  to  Graham,  by  prefix- 
ing the  I  hook  to  the  tick.  _ 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS.                               97 

on  themselves  on  that  side 

on  this  on  the 

on  it  on  this  occasion 

on  its  merits  on  these  things  (I.  D.) 

on  its  own  on  those  cases   (I.  D.) 

on  several  on  which 

on  that  on  your 

183.  In  each  of  the  following  phrases,  on,  except  where 
otherwise  indicated,  is  to  be  made  downward,  because  of 
convenience  of  junction: 

on  account  on  one 

on  account  of  on  one  another 

*on  his  on  one  side 

on  his  own  on  short  notice 

on  his  own  part  on  so  important 

on  important  matters  on  so  little 

on  many  on  so  many 

on  many  days  on  so  necessary 

on  many  occasions  on  (the)   (con)trary 

on  me  on  (the)  part  (of) 

on  my  on  (the)  subject 

on  my  assurance  on  their  objection 

on  my  matter  on  their  receipt 

on  my  protest  on  their  terms 

on  my  refusal  on  what 

EXERCISE   ON    "SHOULD"   TICK    (INITIAL). 

184.  In  the  following  phrases,  should  is  to  be  made  up- 
ward, except  where  otherwise  indicated: 

should  be  should  be  remembered 

should  be  able  should  be  there 

should  be  aware  should  beware 

should  be  made  should  do 

should  be  mentioned  should  do  something 


*On,  followed  by  his,  made  either  upward  or  downward. 


98 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


should  do  that 

tshniilrl    an(should    made    either 
1   go  up  ward  or  downward) 

should  have 

should  not  say 
should  not  suppose 
should  not  think 

should  have  done 

should  not  understand 

should  have  found 

should  take 

should  have  said 

should  they 

should  have  thought 

should  they  do 

should  he 

should  think 

should  his 

should  this 

should  it  be 

should  this  be 

should  never 

should  this  one 

should  not 

should  understand 

should  not  be 

should  we  do 

should  not  do 

should  we  have 

should  not  have 

should  we  think 

185.  In  the  following  phrases,  should  is  to  be  made 
downward,  except  where  otherwise  indicated: 

should  ask  should  you  accept 

should  go  (shoufd  made  either     should  you  go 

"upward  or  downward) 
should  make  should  you  impose 

should  make  some  should  you  improve 

should  many  should  you  leave 

should  rather  should  you  reside 

should  receive  should  you  resign 

should  say  should  you  respect 

should  therefore  should  you  respond 

EXERCISES    ON    "HE"    TICK. 

186.  In  the  following  phrases,  Tie  is  to  be  made  upward, 
except  where  otherwise  indicated: 


*he  calls 
he  claims 


he  finds 

he  has  another 


*It  is  strongly  recommended  that  initial  he  be  always  written  on  the 
line,  thus  distinguishing  it  clearly,  by  position,  from  initial  "/,"  writ- 
ten above  the  line  and  expressed  frequently  by  the  upward  tick.  This 
arrangement  allows  Tie  to  be  written  either  upward  or  downward,  and 
thus  makes  possible  many  useful  phrases  otherwise  impracticable. 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


he  has  been 
he  has  come 
he  has  not 
he  intends 
he  judges 
he  knows 
he  never 


he  now 

he  shall 

he  shall  be 

he 

he  supposes 

he  takes 

he  took 


shall  be 

shall  not    D^i 

supposes 

1 1**4S 


187.    In  the  following  phrases,  lie  is  made  downward: 


he  accepts 
he  acknowledges 
he  addresses 
he  asks 
he  asserts 
he  assumes 
he  came 
he  ca  (n) 
he  ca(n)  be 
he  ca(n)  make 
he  ca(n)  never 
he  ca(n)  take 
he  ca(n)  therefore 
*he  ca(n)not 
he  cannot  be 
he  cannot  do 
he  cannot  hare 
he  cannot  know 
he  cannot  say 
he  cannot  take 
he  cannot  understand 
he  comes 
he  embraces 


he  gave 
he  goes 

**he  had 

**he  had  not 
he  has  had 
he  has  not  had 

(  he  is 

|  he  has 

(  he  is  known 

I  he  has  known 

(  he  has  now 

( he  is  now 
he  has  never 
he  is  never 
he  is  not 
he  has  not 
he  is  having 
he  is  not  known 
he  is  not  (to)  be 
he  is  doing 
he  is  saying 
he  keeps 
he  made 


*In  the  opinion  of  the  author,  cannot  is  best  written  by  using  k  for 
can,  as  already  recommended,  and  joining  the  ordinary  form  for  not. 

**Tick  made  downward  to  distinguish  he  had  from  Ihad,  zndhehad  not 
from  /  had  not.  As  an  absolutely  sure  method  of  distinguishing  he  had 
from  Ihad,(a,  most  important  distinction),Mr.  Dement  recommends  that 
he  ha<l  be  represented  by  hay  half  length,  in  the  third  position;  that  is, 
just  under  the  line.  The  suggestion  is  well  worthy  of  consideration. 


100 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


lie  maintains 

he  may 

he  may  always 

he  may  never 

he  might 

he  might  as  well 

he  might  not  be 

he  mus(t)  be 

he  mus(t)  come 

he  mus(t)  go 

he  mus(t)  not  be 

he  mus(t)  not  do 

he  mus(t)  not  have 

he  mus(t)  probably 

he  mus(t)  recollect 

he  mus(t)  remember 

he  mus(t)  say 

he  mus(t)     see      (vocalize 

see) 

he  mus(t)  not  take 
he  mus(t)  not  think 
he  only  knows 
( he  pleases 


he  rather 

he  receives 

he  receives  them 

he  recollects 

he  regrets 

he  renders 

he  replies 

he  represents 

he  requires 

he  respects 

he  says 

he  seems 

he  seems  (to)  be 

he  seems  (to)  have 

he  should 

he  should  never 

he  should  not  be 

he  sure(ly) 

he  trusts 

he  values 

he  wants 

he  wants  (to)  be 

he  was 

he  would  be 


|  he  places 

188.  Before  words  beginning  with  the  stroke  I,  where 
a  tick  in  the  direction  of  ch  would  be  inconvenient,  Mr. 
Graham  authorizes  a  he  tick  in  the  second  position,  in 


the  direction  of  p;  thus,  he  will M. ,  he  loves  .. 


In  spite  of  the  similarity  of  this  tick  to  to,  no  conflict  or 
ambiguity  appears  to  result.  In  these  cases,  most  Benn 
Pitman  writers  make  the  he  tick  in  the  ordinary  direc- 
tion, as  nearly  as  the  junction  will  permit.  For  writers 
who  wish  to  adopt  the  Graham  expedient,  the  following 
exercise  is  inserted: 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS.  101 

he  also  he  will  do 

he  always  he  will  find 

he  always  may  he  will  have 

he  likes  he  will  make 

he  loves  he  will  never 

he  loves  them  he  will  probably 

he  will  he  will  receive 

he  will  ask  he  will  understand 

he  will  be  he  will  wonder 

FINAL  TICKS. 

189.  Most  of  the  tick  word-signs  are  joined  freely  to  a 
preceding  word  without  risk  of  illegibility,  although  when 
thus  used  they  lose  positional  distinction,  which  can  only 
be  preserved  at  the  beginning  of  a   phrase.     Like  many 
other  words,  they  may,  in  the  midst  of  phrases,  be  readily 
read,  though  out  of  their  normal  places. 

190.  Or   (first    position)     and   tut     (second    position) 
should  be  used  only  at  the  beginning  of  phrases,  because, 
if  joined  to  a  preceding  word,  they  may  conflict  with  each 
other  or  with  the  perpendicular  a  tick,  to  be  explained  here- 
after. 

191.  On  also  is  excluded  from  phrases,  except  at  the 
beginning,  for  fear  of  conflict  with  should,  which  is  freely 
phrased. 

192.  He  and  I  must  always  be  carefully  distinguished, 
whether  at  the  beginning  of  a  phrase  or  attached  to  a 
preceding  word.     (For  methods  of  securing  this  distinction, 
see  Paragraphs  220  and  221  and  note  to  Paragraph  186.) 

EXERCISE. 

193.  The  following  exercise  illustrates  the  manner  in 
which  of,  to,  should,  he  and  who  are  safely  phrased,  though 
connected  with  a  preceding  word,  thereby  losing  positional 
distinction: 

be  said  to  by  reason  of 

by  means  of  do  you  mean  to 


102  "TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 

in  such  manner  as  to  there  should  have 

it  is  to  there  should  not  be 

it  should  those  who  are    (are   down- 
it  should  do  ward) 

it  should  not  you  are  to  make    (are  up- 
it  should  not  he  ward) 

on  account  of  you  should  do 

so  as  to  you  should  never 

so  many  as  to  you  should  not  be 

there  should  want  of  means 

there  should  be  want  of  money 

EXERCISE. 

194.  In  the  following  list,  he,  attached  to  a  preceding 
word,  is  to  be  made  downward: 

after  he  if  he 

all  he  if  he  was 

all  he  asks  that  he 

all  he  says  think  he  is 

because  he  think  he  is  not 

because  he  was  though  he 

because  he  would  be  thus  he 

does  he  when  he 

does  he  ask  when  he  is 

does  he  say  where  he 

for  he  must  where  he  may 

for  he  was  where  he  is 

CAUTION    IN    EEGARD    TO    TICKS. 

195.  The  ticks,   as  phrasing  factors,   are   most   conve- 
niently  used   when   prefixed   to   words   having   few   or  no 
initial  circles,  hooks,  loops,  etc.,  or  affixed  to  words  hav- 
ing few  or  no  final  appendages.     To  attempt  to  join  ticks 
where  there  are  such  modifications,  results  often  in  such 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS.  103 

y 

inconvenient  or  difficult  junctions  as  joins   the 

express  the  ,.,.\$.  .....  ,  etc.,  which  should  not  be  made. 

THE  "A"  TICK. 

196.  A  tick  representing  a,  an  or  and  (made  according 
to  convenience,  either  horizontally  or  perpendicularly  —  that 
is,  in  the  direction  of  either  k  or  t)  may  be  prefixed  or  af- 
fixed to  any  word  with  which  it  makes  a  convenient  junc- 


tion.   Illustrations:  a  day  ,,...  ......  an  age  i--^an  oath 


^L  .....  . 


at  a  time  . 


and  there  ....u__f\....       T>y  and 


6j/  .....  _v.  ,  .....  ..  ,  Lord  and  Savior  .........  7f  .....  ,  and  it  is  .......  b»«« 

197.  The  a  tick,  as  it  never  stands  alone,  and  has  no 
position  of  its  own,  accommodates  itself  at  the  beginning 
of  a  phrase  to  the  position  of  the  next  word.  Illustrations: 

V  /  , 

and  if      _  .........  ,„,  ,  and  each  .....................  ,  and  which  ...,../....., 


I 

and  much ,....2 ,  a  few  n         t  a  choice ••• 


a  chance 7  ,  and  for -*« 


104  "TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 

198.  The  initial  a  tick,  if  followed  by  any  tick  having 
a  regular  position,  is  accommodated  thereto.    But  if  fol- 
lowed by  a  tick  having  no  position  of  its  own — that  is,  by 
the  or  a — it  is  written  on  the  line.    Illustrations:  and  the 

"•?*•  ,  and  a  .._....„„ . 

199.  For  the  sake  of  avoiding  conflict  with  but  or  or, 
many  writers  prefer  to  avoid  the  use  of  initial  a  tick  per- 
pendicular.    (See  Pitman  and  Howard's  Dictionary,  "A.") 

200.  When  the  a  tick  may  with  equal  convenience  be 
affixed  to  the  preceding  word,  or  prefixed  to  the  following 
word,  it  is  generally  considered  better  to  write  it  as  a  prefix 
rather  than  an  affix,  for  the  sake  of  distinguishing  it  more 
effectually  from  the  the  tick,  which  is  always  an  affix.  But 
where  any  considerable  pause  precedes  a,  an  or  and,  the 
tick  would,  of  course,  not  be  joined  to  the  preceding  word, 
because  such  junction  would  be  contrary  to  the  rule  of 
sense  relation. - 

EXERCISE. 

201.  In  the  following  phrases,  prefix  the  horizontal  a 
tick,  and  observe  the  rule  of  position  in  Paragraph  197: 

a  branch  a  discovery 

a  break  a  dismissal 

a  business  a  disorder 

a  decrease  a  dispatch 

a  defense  a  distance 

a  delay  a  distinction 

a  demagogue  a  diversion 

a  deposition  a  domestic 

a  deprivation  a  drama 

a  design  a  dream 

a  diagram  a  drive 

a  dictionary  a  duplicate 

a  dilemma  a  failure 

a  disadvantage  a  faith 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


105 


a  fancy 
a  finish 
a  frank 
a  frenzy 
a  friend 
a  glimmer 
a  globe 
a  glove 
a  grasp 
a  grave 
a  grief 
a  grip 
a  groan 
a  group 
a  jest 
a  job 
a  judge 
a  junction 
a  labor 
a  lady 
a  Latin 
a  laugh 
a  legislature 
a  life 

a  lithograph 
a  location 
a  love 
a  package 
a  pardon 
a  permission 
a  person 
a  practice 


a  prayer 
a  preamble 
a  precaution 
a  presumption 
a  prison 
a  process 
a  program 
a  provision 
a  table 
a  task 
a  tax 
a  temper 
a  throb 
a  title 
a  tooth 
a  touch 
a  track 
a  trial 
a  trick 
a  triumph 
a  trouble 
a  tunnel 
a  turn 
a  vacancy 
a  vapor 
a  verse 
a  version 
a  very 
a  vexation 
a  visit 
a  voter 
a  voucher 


EXERCISE. 

202.    In  the  following  phrases,  prefix  the  horizontal  an 
tick,  and  observe  the  rule  of  position  in  Paragraph  197: 


106 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


an  absence 
an  abuse 
an  adage 
an  addition 
an  address 
an  admirable 
an  admirer 
an  adult 
an  advantage 
an  agency 
an  agreement 
an  aggravation 


an  aggression 
an  apology 
an  apprehension 
an  approximation 
an  elevation 
an  Italian 
an  officer 
an  operation 
an  outrage 
an  overflow 
an  oversight 
an  ultra 


EXEBCISE. 


203.  In  the  following  phrases,  prefix  the  horizontal 
and  tick,  and  observe  the  rule  of  position  given  in  Para- 
graph 197: 


and  do  you  mean  to 

and  either 

and  for  such 

and  general  (or  generally) 

and  have 

and  have  you 

and  if 

and  if  such 

and  if  we 

and  if -you  are 

and  is  this 

and  its 

and  it  is  not 

and  it   was 

and  only 

and  only  such     - 

and  other 

and  that 


and  that  has  been 
and  that  this 
and  their  (or  there) 
and  then 
and  therefore 
and  there  ca(n)  be 
and  there  mus(t)  be 
and  there  was 
and  these 
and  this 
and  those 
and  we 
and  we  did 
and  we  do 
*and  we  had  (I.  D.) 
and  we  have 
and  we  think  it  is 
and  we  think  you  may 


*We  is  displaced  in  order  that  had  may  take  its  normal  position, 
through  the  line. 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS.  107 

and  we  were  and  where  have  you 

and  when  do  you  and  wherever 

( and  when  he  is  and  wherever  it  is 

(  and  when  he  has  and  wherever  you  are 

and  when  he  was  and  which 

and  when   is   this  and  which  is 

and  when  that  is  done  and  which  you  are  (arunw&r<.i) 

and  when  they  and  which  you  may 

and  where  and  which  you  will 

and  where  do  you  and  with  this 

and  where  does  it  and  you  will  be 

204.  In  the  following  phrases,  affix  a  horizontal  tick  for 
a  or  an: 

(about  a  (such  a 

(about  an  [such  an 

(at  a  j  that  is  not  a 

(at  an  (that  is  not  an 

(before  a  (to  be  a 

( before  an  ( to  be  an 

Jby  a  (was  a 

( by  an  (was  an 

(had  a  (when  a 

(had  an  (when  an 

'(in  a  | whether  a 

(in  an*  [whether  an 

f near  a  (which  a 

(near  an  "[which  an 

(in  which  a  (why  a 

(in  which  an  [why  an 

EXERCISE. 

205.  In  the  following  phrases,  affix  a  perpendicular  tick 
for  a  or  an: 


*If  the  horizontal  and  the  perpendicular  tick  are  both  practicable, 
the  horizontal  is  generally  to  be  preferred  as  less  likely  to  conflict  with 
the. 


108  "TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


(according  (to) 

a                      (make  a 

(according  (to) 

an                    (make  an 

(after  a 

(such  is  a 

(after  an 

(  such  is  an 

(because  a 

(take  a 

(because  an 

(  take    an 

(does  a 

J  think  a 

(does  an 

(  think  an 

(give  a 

(  upon  a 

(give  an 

(upon  an 

(gives  a 

(  we  have  a 

(gives  an 

(  we  have  an 

(if  a 

(whenever  a 

1 

(if  an 

(whenever  an 

(it  is  a 

(without  a 

J 

(  it  is  an 

(without  an 

THE  "THE"  TICK. 

206.  This  tick  is  written  either  upward  or  downward, 
sometimes  in  the  direction  of  p,  but  generally  in  the  direc- 
tion of  chay,  the  effort  being  in  each  case  to  secure  the 
best  possible  angle.    Unlike  the  tie  tick,  it  is  never  used 
initially  and  never  stands  alone.*    He  and  the,  as  final 
ticks,  cannot  be  distinguished  from  each  other  except  by 
the  context,  which,  howeTer,  may  be  safely  relied  upon  for 
this  purpose. 

EXERCISE. 

207.  In  the  following  phrases,  the  the  tick  is  to  be 
made  downward: 

about  the  among  the  many 

according  (to)  the  among  the  most 

after  the  because  the 

against  the  between  the 

all  the  been  the 

among  the  know  that  the 


*Th«  phrase  the  first,  used  by  some  writers,  seems  a  needless  excep- 
tion to  an  otherwise  universal  rule. 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


J09 


behind  the 

being  the 

being  the  means 

being  the  most 

*believe  the 

by  the 

by  the  many 

by  the  means 

by  the  most 

by  the  way 

could   the 

does  the 

for  the 

give  the 

gives  the 

have  the 

if  that  is  the 

if  the 

in  the 

in  the  church 

in  the  direction 

in  the  main 

in  the  meantime  (tin) 

in  the  midst 

in  the  order 

in  the  presence 

in  the  truth 

it  is  the 

it  is  not  the 


make  the 
move  that  the 
mus  (t)  have  the 
neither  the 
never  the 
nor  the 
of  the 
only  the 
so  that  the 
say  that  the 
see  that  the  ' 
shall  have  the 
should  have  the 
take  the 
that  the 
think  the 
though  the 
thus  the 
towards  the 
under  the 
upon  the 
when  the 
whenever  the 
where  the 
which   is   the 
with   the 
without  the 
would  be  the 
would  have  the 


EXERCISE. 

208.    In  the  following  phrases,  the  is  to  be  made  up- 
ward: 

at  the 

at  the  end 


*The  best  form  for  believe  is  btf.  A  final  hook  is  unnecessary  for  legi- 
bility and  prevents  the  formation  of  many  useful  phrases. 


110  "TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 

beyond  the  than  the 

but  the  there  the 

by  which  the  through  the 

do  the  throughout  the 

during  the  under  which  the 

even  the  until  the 

from  the  unto  the 

had  the  was  the 

into  the  what  the 

into  the  world*  whether  the 

over  the  world  which  the 

say  the  which  was  the 

see  the  why  the 

so  the  would  the 

THE   "I"  TICK. 

209.  For  the  personal  pronoun  7,  beginning  a  phrase, 
we  usually  write  only  half  the  ordinary  sign,  striking  the 
first  half  downward  before  certain  strokes,  or  the  second 
half  upward  before  certain  other  strokes,  according  to  con- 
venience of  junction.  Illustrations: 


shal1 


2,....,  ...  I  do  ......  .  .....  J.......    The  two- 


stroke  form  for  I  is  rarely  written  in  phrases;  so,  as  I 
becomes  habitually  a  tick,  it  is  properly  classed  with  the 
other  ticks. 

210.  At  a  hasty  glance,  the  /  tick,  when  made  down- 
ward, would  appear  to  be  confusable  with  of,  and  when 
made  upward,  with  on,  as  in  the  phrases  of  my  and  I  am, 
written  precisely  alike.  But  in  point  of  fact,  no  difficulty 
on  the  score  of  ambiguity  has  been  found  to  arise  in  prac- 
tice. It  would  seem  that  all  danger  of  actual  mis-reading 
of  I  for  of,  or  of  for  I  may  be  averted,  if  the  student  will, 


*Benn  Pitman  sign  for  world. 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


Ill 


in  the  few  cases  where  it  is  necessary,  watch  carefully  the 
context. 

211.  A  uniform  and  unhesitating  habit  with  reference 
to  the  upward  or  downward  direction  of  the  I  tick  will  con- 
duce to  speed.    To    establish    such    a    habit    the    learner 
should  familiarize  himself  by  means  of  the  appended  exer- 
cises with  the  appropriate  tick  for  each  of  the  ordinary 
junctions. 

EXERCISE. 

212.  The  following  phrases  should  begin  with  the  I 
tick  made  upward: 


EXERCISE  ON  "I"  TICK   (UPWARD). 


I  admit 

I  agree 

I  agree  that 

I  agree  with 

I  became 

I  become 

I  beg  you  will 

I  beseech   you 


I  call 

I  call  for 

I  can 

I  ca(n)  be  there 

I  ca(n)  never  be 

I  ca(n)  only  say 

I  ca(n)not 

I  cannot  be 

I  cannot  do 

I  cannot  say 

I  cannot  think 

I  clearly 

I  could 

I  could  not 

I  could  not  do 


I  could  not  say 

I  dare 

I  declare 

I  decline  (to)  say 

I  demand 

I  depend 

I  depend  upon 

I  derive 

I  design  (to)  be 

I  desire 

I  did 

I  dislike 

I  do 

I  do  believe 

I  do  many  things 


do  say 

fear 

find 


I  intend  (to)  be 

I  intend  (to)   do 

I  intend  (to)  have 

I  insist  that 

I  judge 


112 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


*I  have 


have  also 
have   generally 


I  have  just 

I  have  no  doubt 

I  have  no  objection 

I  have  received 

I  have  (the)  honor  (to)  be 

I  know 

I  know  nothing 

I  know  that 

I  merely 

I  need 

I  need  not 

I  never 

I  nevertheless 


now 

now  propose 

object 

observe. 


I  often   (I.  D.) 

I  remark 

I  send 

I  shall 

I  shall  be 

I  shall  have 

I  shall  have  (to)  be 

I  shall  not  be 

I  submit 

I  subscribe 

I  suppose  that 

I  take  this 

I  think 

I  think  you  may  as  (w)ell 

I  think  you  will 

I  thought 

I  thought  it  important 

I  understand 

I  understood 

I  undertake 


EXERCISE. 

213.    The  following  phrases  should  begin  with  the  / 
tick  made  downward: 


I  always 
I  am 
I  may 
I  am  able 
I  am  afraid 
I  am  also 
I  may  also 
I  am  anxious 
I  am  aware 


I  am  certain 

I  am  inclined 

I  am   inclined   to   think 

I  am  making 

I  am  never 

I  am  now 

I  am  obliged 

I  am  opposed 

I  am  persuaded 


*In  this  phrase  and  those  immediately  following,  I  have  is  supposed 
to  be  written  according  to  the  method  of  Benn  Pitman.  As  hereafter 
explained,  /  have  in  the  .Graham  .system  is  expressed  by  a  perpendicular 
tick  with  v  hook  attachecT  (See  I™  RlgniJll  219.) 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


113 


I  am  rather 

I  am  ready 

I  am  receiving 

I  am  right 

I  am  said  (to)  be 

I  am  sorry 

I  am  sure 

I  am  sure  (to)  be 

I  am  told 

I  am  very 

I  am  (w)illing 

I  believe* 

I  believe  it  is 

I  believe  that 

I  believe  the 

I  bring 

I   (con)sider 

I  leave 

I  like 

I  love 

I  make 

I  may 

I  may  have 

I  may  mention 

I  may  receive 

I  mean 

I  mean  to 

I  mean  (to)  ask 

I  mean  (to)  discuss 

I  mean  (to)  say 

I  mention 

I  might 

I  might  have 

I  must 

I  mus(t)  acknowledge 

I  mus(t)  admit 


I  mus(t)  also 
I  mus(t)  always  be 
I  mus(t)  be 
I  mus(t)    have 
I  mus(t)  never 
I  mus(t)  not 
I  mus(t)  not  admit 
I  mus(t)    not  attempt 
I  mus(t)   remember 
I   mus(t)    say 
I  mus(t)  take 
I  mus(t)  try  (vocalize  try) 
I  only 

I  only  desire 
I  perceive 
I  perhaps 
I  personally  know 
I  place 
I  pledge 
I  presume 
I  probably 
I  proceed 
I  promise 
I  promise  (to)  be 
I  promise   (to)   have 
I  promise  (to)  pay 
I  propose 
I  rather 
I  rather  think 
I  receive 
I  recollect 
**I  regret 

I  remember  ? 

I  remember  that  > 

I  repeat 
I  reply 


»8ee  note  to  Paragraph  207. 

*•/  regard  should  not  be  phrased. 


114 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


I  respect 

I  retain 

I  rise 

I  remark 

I  rise  to  present 

I  said 

I  said  so 

I  said  many  things 

I  said  that 

I  said  something 

I  suggest 

I  therefore 

I  trust 

I  trus(t)   that 

I  trus(t)    that  you  will 

I  want 


I  want  (to)  know 

I  want  (to)   say 

I  want  (to)   see   (vocalize 

see) 

I  want   (to)   take 
I  went 
I  will 
I  will  ask 
I  will   be 
I  will  do 
I  will  find 
I  will  have 
I  will  make 
I  will  remark 
I  will  say 
I  wonder. 


214.  The  second  stroke  of  the  7  sign,  though  usually 
made  upward,  is  occasionally  made  downward  at  the  be- 
ginning of  a  phrase  in  order  to  accomplish  a  convenient 


junction,  as  in  the  phrases  7  would     ......  „.  ,  I  was   ,  ......  \  . 

215.  This  form  of  the  I  tick  should  not  be  attached  to 
a  preceding  word,  lest  it  conflict  with  he.     In  the  midst  of 
a  phrase  the  difference  in  direction  is  often  an  important 
means   of   distinction   between   these   two   words.    At  the 
beginning  of   phrases   difference   of   position   is   sufficient. 

216.  Before  s  and  z,  some  authors  and  writers  join  the 


complete  form  of  J,  as  I  say  ^^J.  .....  ,  I  was 


......  ,J... 


This  is 


generally  done  because  of  the  supposed  difficulty  of  writing 
7  as  an  upward  tick  before  these  two  letters.    But  the  down- 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


115 


ward  tick,  as  given  in  Paragraph  214,  seems  preferable;  and 
even  an  upward  tick  before  s  and  z  may  become  compar- 
atively easy  with  moderate  practice. 

217.     The  full  form  of  /  is  occasionally  inserted  in  the 


midst  of  a  phrase,  as  in  when  I  admit, Vr^...  where 

the  junction  of  a  tick  would  be  difficult  or  impracticable. 
EXERCISE. 

218.  In  the  following  exercise,  /  should  be  expressed 
by  the  second  half  of  the  I  sign,  written  downward,  as  ex- 
plained in  Paragraph  214: 


I  ask 

I  ask  him 

I  ask   many 

I  ask  no  more 

I  ask  only  this 

I  ask  that  you  will 

I  ask   this 

I  ask  very  many 

I  ask    you 

I  say 

I  say  it  is  so 

I  say  so 

I  say   you   are 

I  say  you  cannot 

I  say  you  will  be 

I  see  (I.  D.) 

I  see  you  are 

I  see  you  will  be 

I  was 

I  was  asked 

I  was  going 

I  was  informed 

I  was  known 


I  was  many  times 
I  was  necessarily 
I  was  never 
I  was  nevertheless 
I  was  observing 
I  was   passing 
I  was  received 
I  was  retained 
I  was  right 
I  was  saying 
I  was  wrong 
I  would 
would  argue 
would  ask 
would  assume 
would  be 
would  decide 
would  entertain 
would  exercise 
would  give 
would  have 
would  hare  seen 
would  make 


116  "TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 

I  would  necessarily  I  would  not  have 

I  would  not  I  would  observe 

I  would  not  attempt  I  would  obtain 

I  would  not  be  I  would  never  take 

I  would  not  decide  I  would  receive 

I  would  not  desire  I  would  say 

I  would  not  do  I  would  take 

EXERCISE. 

219.     7,  according  to  Mr.  Graham,  may  be  represented 
by  a  perpendicular  tick  in  the  first  position,  to  which  a 

hook  or  a  tick  may  be  added,  as  7  have         ;  /  should 


The  following  exercise  is  intended  for  those  who 


adopt  this  method  of  writing  7  have  and  7  should: 

I  have  I  have  not  noticed 

I  have  a  I  have  not  BOW 

I  have  another  I  have  not  observed. 

I  have   been  I  have  not  said 

I  have  decided  I  have  not  seen 

I  have  desired  I  have  not  taken 

I  have  done  I  have  not  understood 

I  have  found  I  have  noticed 

I  have  given  I  have  now 

I  have  gone  I  have  observed 

I  have  had  many  I  have  taken 

I  have  had  some  I  have  visited 

I  have  knowledge  I  should 

I  have  known  I  should  be 

I  have  never  I  should  be  glad 

I  have  no  doubt  I  should  be  ready 

I  have  not  I  should  be  received 

I  have  not  done  it  I  should  be  seen 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS.  117 

I  should  be  sorry  I  should  not 

I  should    be    told  I  should  not  be 

I  should  have  I  should  not  desire 

I  should  have  many  I  should  not  possess 
I  should  have  no  doubt          I  should  not  say 

I  should  never  be  I  should   notice 

I  should  no  doubt  I  should  now 

"l"    AND    "HE"    DISTINGUISHED. 

220.  It  is  absolutely  necessary  that  /  and  he  be  in  every 
case  carefully  distinguished.  If  the  writer  will  make  it 
an  invariable  rule  that  initial  I  shall  be  written  in  the 
first  position,  and  initial  he  in  the  second,  all  possibility  of 
confusion  or  mistake  at  the  beginning  of  phrases  in  refer- 
ence to  these  two  words  vanishes.  Nor  is  there  any  danger 
of  confounding  he  and  I  in  the  midst  of  phrases,  when  / 
is  written  with  the  first  half  of  the  ordinary  I  sign,  that 
is  in  the  direction  of  p,  as  he  is  never  written  in  this  di- 
rection, except  in  the  limited  and  guarded  way  stated  in 


Paragraph  188.     Illustrations:   when  I  am 


where 

221.  One  means  of  distinction  is  the  adoption  of  an 
inflexible  rule  that  the  he  tick  may  be  freely  joined  to  a 
preceding  word,  but  the  I  tick,  if  made  in  the  direction  of 
he,  must  never  be  so  joined.  This  method  of  distinction 
is  strongly  recommended.  Another  method  is  afforded  by 
_Mr.  Graham's  jaile  that  the  I  tick  when  attached  to  a  pre- 
ce<fing"~word  be  always  made  either  perpendicular  or  hori- 


zontal, never  oblique.     Illustrations:   if  I  may 


118  "TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


when  I  do....  I. »  wherever  I  am 


shall  I  think     ^...U.«~~~-     (See  Graham's  Hand-book,  Sec- 


tion  103,  R.  a.)  Those  who  have  adopted  this  method 
of  expressing  medial  or  final  7,  say  that  in  practice 
there  is  no  danger  of  conflict.  In  the  language  of  Mr. 
Graham,  "As  he  is  written  by  the  same  sign  as  joined  the, 
so  /  when  joined  to  a  preceding  word  may  be  written  by 
the  same  sign  as  joined  a-an."  (Graham's  Dictionary,  p. 
212.) 

EXEBCISE. 

222.  In  the  following  phrases,  /  is  to  be  expressed  by 
a  horizontal  or  perpendicular  tick;  he,  by  an  oblique  tick: 

shall  he  take  what  was  he  doing 

shall  I  take  what  was  I  doing 

so  he  does  wherever  I  may 

so   he   thinks  whenever  he  may 

so  I  do  whenever  he  must 

so  I  think  whenever  I  must 

INITIAL  DISPLACEMENT. 

223.  Occasionally,   under  the   principle   of  initial   dis- 
placement, already  explained,  the  tick  signs,  of,  or,  on,  all 
and  7,  at  the  beginning  of  a  phrase,  may  be  written  a  little 
higher  or  lower  than  ordinarily,  for  the  purpose  of  bring- 
ing the  second  word  of  the  phrase  into  its  normal  and  dis- 

I 

tinctive  position,  as  in  the  phrases  all  these  all 


'TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


119 


those 


•I- 


on  each~-~~ ,  on  much 


,  on  our 


I  had  „. 


.1 The  displacement  of  the  first 


word  of  the  phrase  shows  that  the  second  word  not  only  is, 
but  is  intended  to  be,  in  its  normal  position.  In  the  ab- 
sence of  initial  displacement,  it  might  happen  to  be  there 
as  a  mere  consequence  of  the  order  in  which  the  words  of 
the  phrase  succeed  one  another. 

EXERCISE. 

224.  In  the  following  phrases,  the  initial  tick  is  in 
every  case  to  be  so  placed  that  the  second  word  of  the 
phrase  may  occupy  its  normal  position: 


all  other 

all  other  accounts 

kinds) 
*all  our 
all  ours 
all  ourselves 
all  over 

all  over  the  world 
all  these 
all  those 
I  doubt 
I  had 

I  had  occasion 
I  had    rather^ 
I  had  some 
I  had   (the)    honor 
I  hope 


I  hope  that 

(or  I  hope  (to)  make 

I  hope  you  may 
I  hope  you  will 

hope  your 

offer 

often 
**     saw    (vocalize   saw) 

saw  him 

saw  a 

I  saw  as  many  as 
I  saw  many 
I  saw  some  persons 
I  saw  the 
I  saw  you 

I   saw  you  could  not  be 
I  saw  you  might  not  have 


*Many  Graham  writers  would  writ*  all  our  by  prefixing  to  all  the  r 
hooU. 

**For  method  of  writing  7  before  *  or  z,  see  Paragraphs  214-216. 


120  "TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 

I  see  of  those 

I  see  a  on  each 

I  see  many  things  on  much 

I  see  the  on  these 

I  see  you  are  on  those  who 

I  see  you  are  determined        I  wish 

I  speak  I  wish  to 

I  thank  I  wish  (to)  ask 

I  took  I  wish  (to)  be 

I  value  I  wish  (to)   say 

of  these  I  wish  to  tell 

225.  In  a  few  phrases,  such  as  I  had  not  and  to  whom, 
the  normal  position  of  the  tick  is  not  simply  modified,  but 
absolutely  sacrificed;   that  is  to  say,  the  first  word  of  the 
phrase  is  taken  entirely  away  from  its  normal  position — 
without,  however,  any  loss  of  legibility. 

THE  "HOW"  TICK.* 

226.  Graham  writers  represent  the  word  how  by  a  tick 
justtmder  the  line,  which,  when  standing  alone,  is  written 
upward  in  the  direction  of  ray,  but  in  phrases  may  be  writ- 
ten either  upward  or  downward;  that  is  to  say,  in  the  direc- 
tion of  either  ray  or  chay,  according  to  convenience  of  junc- 
tion.   The  how  tick  is  always  initial,  except  in  the  phrase 

and  how.    Illustrations:  how  many ....^^^ _,  how  does  he 


*The  methods  of  abbreviation  exhibited  in  the  paragraphs  immedi- 
ately following  (226  to  243)  are  presented  here  in  order  that  the  full  re- 
sources of  Mr.  Graham's  system  may  be  understood.  Some  of  them  in- 
volve delicate  distinctions,  which  should  not  be  attempted  by  any  writer 
who  has  not  the  necessary  accuracy  of  hand.  As  to  many  of  these  expe- 
dients, those  who  use  them  do  not  claim  that  they  are  necessary  except 
for  the  development  of  the  very  highest  speed,  which,  of  course,  in- 
volves laborious  and  long-continued  practice.  The  amanuensis  may 
well  afford  to  dispense  with  them.  Let  it  never  be  forgotten  that,  if  used 
at  all,  they  must  be  thoroughly  familiarized.  (Continued  next  page.) 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS.  121 

EXERCISE. 

227.  In  the  following  phrases,  the  how  tick  is  made 
downward: 

and   how  how  goes  it 

how  a  how  is 

how  are  (are  upward)  how  is  it 

how  are  these  things  how  is  this 

how  are  we  how  many 

how  can  it  how  may 

how  ca(n)  you  how  must 

how  could  they  how  mus(t)    it 

how  could  you  how  surely 

228.  In  the  following  phrases,  how,  except  where  oth- 
erwise specified,  is  made  upward: 

how  do  they  how  is  (how  made  upward 

how  does  he  or  downward) 

how  does  it  how  long 

how  he  how  far 

how  he  is  how  fast 

how  he  is  now  how  much 

229.  In  order  that  how  may  make  a  convenient  junc- 
tion when   followed  by  upward   7,   Mr.  Graham  sanctions _ 
the  representation  of  how  in  such  cases  by  it  tick  in  the 
•third  position  similar  to  the  tick  which  in  the  second  po- 
sition represents  to;  as,  how  will /~.. 


In  this  connection  the  student  is  advised  to  read  and  ponder  the 
•"caution"  embraced  in  Paragraph  60.  As  has  been  well  remarked  by  Mr. 
Clarence  E.  Walker,  an  accomplished  Graham  writer,  in  his  recently- 
issued  book  on  "Speed  and  Legibility,"  each  stenographer  must  find  out 
what  abbreviating  expedients  he  can  handle,  and  adapt  his  shorthand 
'to  them . 


122  "TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 

EXERCISE. 

230.  In    the    following    phrases,    write    how    with    a 
downward  tick,  below  the  line,  in  the  direction  of  p: 

how  will  how  will  this 

how  will  it  be  how  will  we 

how  will  they  how  will  you 

THE    TICK    FOB    "THERE,"    ETC. 

231.  According  to  Mr.  Grahajn^fftere,  their,  they  arer 
and  occa&sionally  other,  when  they  cannot  otherwise  be 
conveniently  expressed  in  a  phrase,  may  be  denoted  by  a 
heavy  tick  written  in  the  direction  of  b  or  ;',  as  may  be- 


most  convenient,  thus:    since  their   „._ would  there 

^...u  ,     should    t here  - ••<&- •- •    Mr.     Graham     addsr 

"This  tick  may  take  the  n  or  f-v  hook  or  the  circle,  for 
the  purposes  for  which  they  are  used  in  similar  cases;  that 
is,  the  n  hook  to  add  own  and  not;  the  f-v  hook  to  add 
have,  of,  -fore;  the  circle  to  add  his,  is,  etc." 

EXERCISE. 

232.  In  the  following  phrases,  there  or  their  is  to  be 
expressed  by  the  heavy  tick  in  the  direction  of  b: 

ought  there  used  their    (there) 

says  there  what  there 

since  there  within  their 

throughout  their  would  there 

233.  In  the  following  phrases,  there  or  their  is  to  be 
represented  by  the  heavy  tick  in  the  direction  of  ;': 

about  their 
about  there 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS.  123 

should   there  with  their 

were  there  we  were  there 

HOOKS  ON  TICKS. 

234.  According  to  Mr.  Graham,  each  of  the  several  tick 
word-signs  may  take  an  initial  or  a  final  hook  (in  some 
cases  both),  as  follows: 

An  I  hook  to  add  will  or  all,  as  who  will...  ,.,.^/L..  ,  of  all 


..,..  ......  „,  and  will  or  and  all....K^.- 

An  r  hook  to  add  are  or  our,  as  but  are  or  but  our   .....  fl..., 

\ 

<\ 
of  our  «..^...-—  . 

An  f-v  hook  to  add  have  or  of,  as  to  have  ^.,..\^..J  ,  or  of 

I 

,  but  have  ...U.—  . 


J 
An  n  hook  to  add  not  or  own,  as  or  not  __  _  „_,   t  of  our 


_  ,  on  our  own  ,„...»...„...... 


Though  in  some  of  these  cases  these  hooks  may  have 
two  or  three  meanings,  the  context  is  relied  on  to  supply 
the  necessary  distinction. 

EXERCISE. 

235.    In  each  of  the  following  phrases,  I  hook  is  to  be 
prefixed  to  a  tick  word-sign  to  add  will  or  all: 
j  and  will*  j  but  will 

1  and  all*  1  but  all 


*Written  on  the  line,  according  to  the  principle  embodied  in  Para- 
garph  198. 


124 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


of  all 

on  all 

[or  all 

(or  will 


should  all 

ward 
to   all 
who  will 


(should    down- 


EXERCISE. 


236.     In  each  of  the  following  phrases,  r  hook  is  to  be 
prefixed  to  a  tick  word-sign  to  add  are,  our  or  or: 

j  all  are 
"j  all  our 
(  and  are 
\  and  our 

but  our 

of  our 

on  or  about  (on  down- 
ward) 

on  or  before    (Graham 


on  or  near 

on  our  (on  downward) 
or  are 
or  our 
ought  our 

should   our    (should   down- 
ward) 
to  our 
who  are 


sign  for  before 


EXERCISE. 


237.    In  the  following  phrases,  the  f-v  hook  is  affixed 
to  tick  word-signs  to  add  have  or  of: 

Jor  have 
[or  of 

should  have  (should  down- 
ward) 

to  have 


all  have 
all  of 
and  have 
and  of 
but  have 
but  of 


*who  have 


EXERCISE. 


238.    In  each  of  the  following  phrases,  n  hook  is  affixed 
to  a  tick  word-sign  to  add  not  or  own: 


and  our  own 
but  are  not 


but  not 

but  our  own 


•This  is  one  of  the  few  cases  in  which  the  Benn  Pitman  system  at- 
taches a  hook  to  a  tick  word-sign. 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS.  125 

of  our  own  or  will  not 

on  our  own  ought  not 

or  not  who  will  not 

239.     To    several    of    the    tick    word-signs,    what    and 

would  may,  according  to  Mr.  Graham,  be  added  thus:   and 


and  would. ...„.;»..-••• »   °f  what 


on  what  ,...,,J^~«)  to  what  ~^*,~~ . 

EXERCISE. 

240.  In  the  following  phrases,  what  or  would  is  affixed 
to  the  tick  word-signs  all,  and,  of,  on,  to: 

all  would  of  what 

all  would  say         •  of  what  avail 

and  what  of  what  benefit 

and  what  did  you  of  what  necessity 

and  what  say  you  on  what    account    (on    up- 

and  what  was  he  ward) 

and  would  on  what  assumption 

and  would  ask  to  what  matter 

and  would  do  to  what  motion 

and  would  say  to  what  portion 

APPENDAGES    TO    HOOKS    AND    TICKS. 

241.  To  a  tick  with  an  initial  or  a  final  hook  there  may 
be  appended,  according  to  Mr.  Graham,  an  s  circle,  a  tick, 
the  personal  pronoun  you,  the  ing  dot;   and  also  the  dis- 
joined ticks  a  and  the,  written  in  the  place  of  the  ing  dot 
to  represent  ing  a  and  ing  the.    Illustrations:    all  of  us, 

\a                                £ 
-«.,  or  all  the ».„,....„..,  who  are  you 2  .  Who 


126 


'TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


ore  having  a 


are  havin9 


are 


laving  the 


EXERCISE. 


242.     The   following  phrases   may   be   written   by   Gra- 
ham  writers  in  the  manner  represented: 


all  are  having  — 


and  have  the 


all  are  having  a 


and    of  a 


all  are  having  the... _.,...         and  of  the  * »- 


all  of  us     ^ 

all  of  his" 


but  are  having  ....!X-. 


and  are  having  „.«.*•...  but  are  having  a V 


and  are  having  a  ...^  but    are  having  thev..fL 


and  have  a 


on  all  his 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 


127 


on  having  a 


or  having  the 


on  having  the  .„, 


to  have  a    Vr 


or  all  his  -«•• 


to  have  the 


or  all  the 


two  of  us 


or  are  you 


who  are   having 


or  having 


who  are  having  the  .. 


or  having  a  „ .....  who  are  you  ... 


EXERCISE. 


243.  In  the  following  exercise,  ticks  are  attached  to 
ticks,  in  accordance  with  both  the  Pitman  and  Graham  sys- 
terns: 


all  a 
all  the 
and  a 
and  the 
but  a 


but     the 

he  and   (he  downward) 

he   who    (he   upward) 

Jof  a 

(of  an 


128  "TICK"  WORD-SIGNS. 

of  the*  should  a 

on  a  (should  the 

on  the  (  should  he 

on  to  Jto  a 

(ought  a  (to  an 

(ought  an  to  the 

fought  the  who  should 
(ought  he  who  should  be 

EXEBCISK. 

244.     The  following  junctions  of  ticks  with  ticks  are- 
peculiar  to  the  Graham  system: 


and  I          u ought  I 


how  he   (or  how  the)    .  ought  there 


I  should     „_  ought  not 


> 

of  whom    .. should   I 


on  whom    — should  there- «tf- .. 


*Expressed  also  by  "proximity,"  and  sometimes   implied  by  joining; 
the  words  between  which  of  the  occurs. 


"TICK"  WORD-SIGNS.  129 

EXERCISE. 

245.  In  the  following  phrases,  the  a  tick,  having  no 
regular  position,  is  accommodated  to  the  following  tick, 
\vnich  has  an  assigned  position: 

and  but  and  who 

and  how  and  wheever 


CHAPTER  X. 


THE    CIRCLE    WORD-SIGNS. 

246.  The  circle  word-signs,  is,  Ms,  as  and  has,  are  free- 
ly used  in  phrases,  initially,  medially  and  finally.  Each 
of  these  words,  when  beginning  a  phrase,  should  be  writ- 
ten in  its  normal  position,  as  required  by  the  general  rule 
already  given;  that  is  to  say,  when  beginning  phrases,  as 
well  as  when  standing  separate,  is  and  Ms  should  be  writ- 
ten above  the  line;  as  and  has,  on  the  line.  But  in  the 
midst  or  at  the  end  of  a  phrase,  where  distinction  by  posi- 
tion is  impracticable  and  generally  unnecessary,  the  circle 
in  any  position  may  ordinarily  represent  any  one  of  these 
words.* 

247.      EXERCISE    ON    PHRASES    BEGINNING    WITH    "IS." 

is  done  is  not 

is  generally  is  not  necessary 

j  is  he  is  not   now 

|  is  the  is  now 

is  he  sure  is  probable   (or  probably) 


*Instead  of  giving  to  is,  his.  as  and  fias  at  the  beginning  of  a   phrase 

thp.ir  normal  nnaitinn.  bothfrrahain  and    Benn  Pitman  allow   the    initial 


circle,  representing  tWseworaSrw^e  taken  away  from  its  regular  posi- 
tion and  accommodated  to  that  of  the  second  word  of  the  phrase, though 
in  many  cases  the  second  word  would  be  perfectly  legible  without  dis- 
tinctive position.  In  the  opinion  of  the  author,  these  four  words, 
when  used  initially,  should  not  be  thrown  out  of  position  unless  some 
valuable  purpose  is  served  thereby.  The  first  word  of  a  phrase  is  often 
the  key  to  the  whole,  and  to  give  it  its  normal  position  will  in  many 
cases  insure  the  ready  reading  of  the  whole  clause,  while  the  needless 
displacement  of  the  first  word  may  cause  a  hesitating  decipherment,  if 
not  absolute  misreading.  It  is  recommended,  therefore,  that  the  stu- 
dent, in  writing  the  following  exercises,  give  to  circle  word-signs  begin- 
ning a  phrase  their  normal  position,  unless  the  legibility  of  the  succeed 
ing  word  requires  a  resort  to  ''initial  displacement,"  according  to  rules 
already  explained. 


CIRCLE  WORD-SIGNS. 


131 


is  that 

is  that  which  may 

is  this 

is  this  done 


is  this   the 
is  this  the  way 
is  this  yours 
is  your 


248.      EXERCISE    ON    PHRASES    BEGINNING    WITH    "HIS." 


his   honor 

His  Honor  Judge  Smith 

His  Honor   (the)   Judge 

his  judgment 

his  knowledge 

249.      EXERCISE     ON     PHRASES 

as  (a)  matter 

as  (a)  matter  (of)  course 

as   (a)   matter  (of)   fact 

as  (a)  matter  (of)  law 

as  early  as    (I.   D.) 

as  for  a 

as  good 

as  good  as 

as  good  as  possible 

as  great 

as  great  as 

as  great  as  possible 

as  he 

as  the 

as  if   (I.  D.) 

as  large 

as  large  as 

as  little 

as  little  as 

as  long  (I.  D.) 

as  long  as  (I.  D.) 

as  long  ago  (I.  D.) 

as  long  as  possible  (I.  D.) 

as  many  as 

as  many  as  possible 


his  own  (I.  D.) 
his  own  name  (I.  D.) 
his  own   opinion    (I.   D.) 
his  own    position    (I.    D.) 
his  own  rolition  (I.  D.) 


BEGINNING    WITH    "AS." 

as   are    (are 


as  many 

ward) 
as  matters  ^are  now  (are 

made  upward) 
as  most 
as  much  as 
as  much  as  possible 
as  must 
as  mus(t)  be 
as  near  (I.  D.) 
as  near  as  (I.  D.) 
as  near  as  possible  (I.  D.) 
as  now 
as  shall 
as  shall  be 
as  that 
as  they 
as  this 
as  though 
as  usual 
as  was 
as  (w)ell 
as  (w)ell  as 
as  (w)ell  as  possible 
as  will  be 


up- 


132  CIRCLE  WORD-SIGNS. 

250.      EXERCISE    ON    PHRASES    BEGINNING    WITH    "HAS." 

has  again  and  again  has  known 

has  another  has  long  been  (I.  D.) 

has  been  has  made 

has  done  has  many 

has  done  it  has  never 

has  found  has  not 

has  had  has  not  been 

has  had  a  has  now 

I  has  he  has  that 

'i  has  the  has  this 

has  just  has  (to)   be 

has  jus(t)  as  has  your 

251.  Care  should  be  taken  that  the  circle  representing 
is,  his,  as  and  has  be  not  joined  initially  where  there  is 
danger  that  it  may  be  read  as  part  of  the  outline  of  the 
succeeding  word.     Thus,  is  immediately,  if  phrased,  may 
look  like  seemed;  is  particularly  may  look  like  spirit,  etc. 
There  are  so  many  word-outlines  beginning  with  the  cir- 
cle  that  the  joining  of  a  circle  word-sign  to  the  following 
word  should  not  be  indulged  in  indiscriminately,  and  may 
well  be  confined,  at  least  by  the  young  writer,  to  certain 
common  phrases,  such  as  is  not,  is  this,  etc.,  where  there  is 
no  danger  of  misreading. 

S  CIRCLE  FOB   "US." 

252.  17*  i-a  phrasing  is  generally  (but  never  at  the  be- 
ginning of  a  phrase)  represented  by  a  circle.    Illustrations: 


for  ns  ....\A.^   ~by  us  ..............  ,   of  us  ........  ••   .   *•   «*  ........  Vx- 

EXEBCISE. 

253.     In  the  following  exercise,  us  is  in  every  case  te  be 
represented  by  the  circle: 


CIRCLE  WORD-SIGNS. 


133 


about  us 

after  us 

among  us 

at  us 

before  us 

behind    us 

beneath   us 

bring  us 

by  us 

deliver    us 

for    us 

from  us 

give   us 

have   us 

in  us 

let  us 

let  us  ask 

let  us  be 

let  us  go 

let  us   have   the 


let  us  make 

let  us   say 

let  us  see  (vocalize  see) 

make  us 

near  us 

of  us 

or  us 

over  us 

put  us 

receive  us 

received  us 

remember  us 

sadden  us 

take  us 

tell  us 

thank  us 

through  us 

to  us 

under  us 

value  us 


CIRCLES   JOINED  TO  TICKS  OR  "BRIEF  W  OR  T"  WORD-SICNS. 

254.    A  circle  may  be  joined,  if  convenient,  to  a  tick 
word-sign  or  a  "brief  w  or  y"  word-sign.    Illustrations:  is  to 


as  to 


,  is  a  .......  ,  as  a  -f  •• 


,  is  the. 


as  the  JQ ,  oil  is  (or  all  his)  ...  ...  ,  to  his 


CIRCLE  WORD-SIGNS. 


what  is, ,,  were  his  .  e.. 


EXERCISE. 

i  all  is  is    the 

I  all  his  is  to 

all  is  now  of  his 

(  as  a*  of  his  own 

I  has  a  on  his  (on  upward  or 

i  as  the  downward) 

I  has  the  to  his 

as  to  to  his  own 

as  would  were  his 

as  would  be  f  what  is 

as  you  *•  what  his 

as  you  are  with  his 

**is  a  would  his 

COALESCING    OR    MERGING    OF    CIRCLES. 

255.  When  a  word  consisting  of  or  ending  with  a  cir- 
cle is  joined  to  a  following  word  consisting  of  or  beginning 
with  a  circle,  the  two  circles  merge  or  coalesce,  making  a 
double-sized  circle. 

Illustrations: 

1.     Two    circle    word-signs    merged:    is    Ms    or    is    as 

o  0 

, ;  as  is,  as  his  or  as  has, ..W.... 


2.     A   circle  word-sign,  followed  by  a  word  beginning 
with  a  circle,  the  two  circles  being  merged:    as  soon  as 


*The  a  tick  is  perpendicular,  in  order  that  the  phrase  may  not  be 
mistaken  for  as  not  or  has  not. 

**The  a  tick  is  perpendicular,  in  order  that  the  phrase  may  not  be 
mistaken  for  »'*  not. 


CIRCLE  WORD-SIGNS.  135 

p  Q-x 

is    said- 1 is    seen.... ,    as    such 


,....../Q  ....,  is  such.../. ,.,  it  is  simply  .  .£TY. ,itissuf- 


ficient       ^J— 7 ,  it  is  such 

3.     A  word  ending  with  a  circle,  joined  to  a  word  be- 
ginning with  a  circle,  the  two  circles  merged:  this  subject 


,  in  this  city 


4.     A  word  ending  with  a  circle,  followed  by  a  circle 
word-sign,  the  two  circles  merged:    this  is   (or  this  has) 

...YD...-,  loves  tt».jL..\QM,,  takes  his  time  ,  1   O 

t — N 

256.  Sf  loop  at  the  end  ef  a  word  is  often  changed  to  a 
circle,  in  order  that  this  circle  may  merge  with  one  im- 
mediately    following.     Illustrations:      jus(t)      as      (w)ell 

,  as  fas(t)  as  ....p. 

Vb 

257.  The  double  circle  standing  alone  or  at  the  begin- 
ning of  a  phrase,  is  written  either  above  or  on  the  line, 
in  accordance   with   the  position  of  the   first  of  the  two 
words  which  the  double  circle  represents. 

258.  The  double  circle,  when  unconnected  with  other 
strokes,  is  made  in  the  contrary  direction  to  the  motion  of 
the  hands  of  a  clock,  and  is  best  begun  as  if  starting  to 
make  the  short-hand  letter  m  backward.     Joined  to  other 
characters,  it  is  written  in  one  direction  or  the  other,  ac- 


136  CIRCLE  WORD-SIGNS. 

..cording     to     eonvenience.     Illustrations:      as     has     been 


....O.....' 


as  some 
259.     The  double  circle  may  be  followed  by  an  a    or  the 


/O 
.tick.    Illustrations:  is  as  the.  .    .    ...........  ......  ,  is  as  a, 


as  is  ffce./Q...     ,  as  is  a ,..Q...., The  junction  of 

the  tick  with  the  double  circle  is  difficult  for  an  untrained 
hand,  and  should  be  specially  practised  by  the  learner. 

260.  In    some   cases   it   is   convenient,   in   other   cases 
highly  inconvenient,  to  form  a  double  circle  at  the  begin- 
ning of   a   phrase.     But  there   can   be   no   objection   to   a 
double  circle  so  comparatively  easy  as  that  at  the  begin- 
ning of  phrases  like  as  soon  as,  is  seen,  -etc.    The  student, 
following  what  should  be  a  general  rule — always  to  avoid, 
if    possible,    non-facile    forms — will,    wherever    it   seems 
more    convenient,    write    separately    the    circle    word-sign, 
instead  of  connecting  it  with  the  following  word  by  means 
of  an  initial  double  circle. 

261.  EXERCISE    ON"    INITIAL    "IS,"    "HIS,"    "AS,"    OB    "HAS,'' 

MAKING    PART    OF    A    DOUBLE    CIRCLE. 

as  has  as  is  now 

as  has  been  as  soon  as 

as  has  been  done  as  soon  as  it  may 

as  has  bee(n)  said                  as  soon  as  they 

as  has  never  as  soon  as  possible 

J  as  is  as  such 

j as  his  has  as 

as  is  known  has  as  many 


CIRCLE  WORD-SIGNS. 


137 


has  his 

is  as  they 

has  said 

is  as  true  (I.  D.) 

has  several 

is  as  was 

has  some 

is  as  (w)ell  known 

has  somehow 

is  described 

has  such 

is  his 

has  suggested 

is  safe 

has  supposed 

is  said 

his  description 

is  seen              -> 

his  sober 

is  several 

his  subject 

is  similar 

his  supposition 

is  somehow 

his  supremacy 

is  somewhere 

his  sympathy 

is  something 

is  as 

is  subject 

is  as  if  (I.  D.) 

is  substantially 

is  as  general 

is  such 

is  as  important 

is  sufficient 

is  as  this 

is  supposed 

262.      EXERCISE     ON     PHRASES     CONTAINING     TWO     MEDIAL 
CIRCLES    MERGED. 


by  his  several 

does  as  he 

does  as  the 

does  as  much 

if  his  subject 

if  his  success 

if  his  suggestion 

for  Chris(t's)   sake 

for  his  sake 

gives  his  time   (tm-) 

gives  sufficient 

in  his  senses 

in  his  subject 

in  this  city 

in  this  sense 


it  is  always  said 

it  is  as  the 

it  is  as  he 

it  is  his  desire 

it  is  said 

it  is  something 

it  is  seen 

it  is  soon  done 

it  is  such 

it  is  sufficient 

it  is  as     (w)ell 

ward) 

it  mus(t)  seen? 
jus(t)  as  (w)ell 

ward) 


( I     down- 


( I    down- 


138  CIRCLE  WORD-SIGNS. 

jus(t)  as  (w) ell  as  another      there  is  something 

las(t)    summer  there   is   such 

on  this  side  this  century 

on  this  subject  this  has  been 
on  this  supposition                 .  this  is  done 

something  is  said  this  is  no  doubt 

such  is  his  this  is  the 

there  is  some  this  is  your 

there  is  some  reason  yours  sincerely 

CIRCLE  WORD-SIGN  FOLLOWING  A  FINAL  CIRCLE. 

263.  To  a  word  with  a  final  circle,  a  circle  word-sign 
(especially  us  or  his)  may  be  added  by  converting  the 
final  circle  into  a  double-sized  circle.  Illustrations: 

Mess    us    or    bless    his,     Mi.>Q,.w . ..,  gives  us  or  gives  his 


EXERCISE. 

264.     In  the  following  exercise  add  us  or  his  by  chang- 
ing a  single  circle  to  a  double  circle: 

address,  address  us,  address  his. 
aids,  aids  us,  aids  his. 
amaze,  amaze  us,  amaze  his 
arouse,  arouse  us,  arouse  his 
authorize,  authorize  us,  authorize  his 
becomes,   becomes   us,   becomes   his 
bless,  bless  us,  bless  his 
brings,    brings   us,    brings   his 
calls,  calls  us,  calls  his 
cause,   cause  us,  cause  his 
choose,  choose  us,  choose  his 
crowns,  crowns  us,  crowns  his 
combines,   combines  us,  combines  his 


CIRCLE  WORD-SIGNS.  139 

does,  does  us,  does  his 

embrace,  embrace  us,  embrace  his 

gives,  gives  us,  gives  his 

improves,   improves  us,   improves   his 

it  is,  it  is  his 

knows,  knows  us,  knows  his 

makes,  makes  us,  makes  his 

observes,   observes   us,   observes   his 

place,   place   us,  place  his 

praise,    praise   us,   praise   his 

punishes,  punishes  us,  punishes  his 

receives,   receives   us,    receives   his 

refuse,  refuse  us,  refuse  his 

saddens,   saddens  us,   saddens  his 

surprise,  surprise  us,  surprise  his 

sustains,   sustains  us,   sustains  his 

takes,  takes  us,  takes  his 

tells,  tells  us,  tells  his 

thanks,  thanks  us,  thanks  his 

A    CIRCLE    WORD-SIGN    AFTER   A    DOUBLE    CIRCLE. 

265.  To  a  word  ending  with  a  double  circle,  a  circle 
word-sign  (most  commonly  us  or  Ms)  may  be  added  by  car- 
rying the  additional  circle  to  the  opposite  side  of  the 


stroke.     Illustrations:    raises  us  or  raises  his 


exposes  us  or  exposes  his 


EXERCISE. 


266.     In  accordance  with  the  rule  just  stated,  write  the 
following: 

<  addresses  us  j  arouses  us 

I  addresses  his  )  arouses  his 


140  CIRCLE  WORD-SIGNS. 

(  assesses  us  (  induces  us 

(  assesses  his  |  induces  his 

j  blesses  us  j  places    us 

I  blesses  his  J  places  his 

(  chooses  us  j  reduces  us 

(  chooses  his  j  reduces  his 

j  dismisses  us  j  refuses  us 

I  dismisses  his  |  refuses   his 

J  excuses  us  J  rejoices  us 

I  excuses   his  {  rejoices  his 

j  exposes   us  j  supposes  us 

I  exposes  his  (  supposes  his 

j  impresses  us  j  surprises  us 

I  impresses  his  |  surprises  his 

A    CIRCLE    WORD-SIGN    AFTER    A    LOOP. 

267.  To  a  word  ending  with  a  loop,  a  circle  word-sign 
(most  commonly  us  or  his)  may  be  added  by  carrying  the 
circle  to  the  opposite  side  of  the  stroke.  Illustrations: 

against  us  or  against  his          .......  ,  invest  us  or  invest  his 


EXERCISE. 

268.     In  accordance  with  the  rule  just  stated,  write  the 
fallowing: 

j  addressed  us  j  assist  us 

)  addressed  his  }  assist  his 

(against  us  j  authorized  us 

(against  his  j  authorized  his 

j  amazed  us  j  blessed  us 

I  amazed  his  j  blessed  his 

j  aroused  us  j  cost  us 

)  aroused  his  / cost  his 


CIRCLE  WORD  SIGNS. 


141 


j  disgust  us 
|  disgust  his 
(  embraced  us 
|  embraced  his 
I  exposed  us 
j  exposed  his 
j  expressed  us 
j  expressed  his 
foster  us 
foster  his 
invest  us 
invest  his 
master  us 
master  his 
noticed  us 
noticed  his 


purchased  us 
purchased  his 
raised  us 
raised  his 
reduced  us 
reduced  his 
refused  us 
refused  his 
rejoiced  us 
rejoiced  his 
passed  us 
passed  his 
j  trust  us 
j  trust  his 
j  supposed  us 
1  supposed  his 


ELLIPSIS  OF  A  CIRCLE. 


269.  A  single  circle  is  often  written  instead  of  a 
double  circle,  to  avoid  the  inconvenience  of  writing  the 
latter  upon  a  half-length  character.  Illustrations:  all 


that   is   said 


it  is  sometimes 


Charles 


Second 


270.  For  facility  of  writing,  and  also  because  there  i? 
no  triple-size  circle,  a  double  circle  is  frequently  used 
vhere  there  are  in  fact  three  sounds  of  s.  Illustrations: 


this  is  said 


just  as  roon  as 


142  CIRCLE  WORD-SIGNS. 

271.  This    principle    of    abbreviation    has    been    thus 
tersely  expressed    by  A.    J.    Graham:      "When    several    * 
sounds  come^together,  one  or  more  may  be  omitted  to  se- 
cure the  advantage  of  a  phrase." 

EXERCISE. 

272.  In  each  of  the  following  phrases,  one  sound  of  s 
is  omitted  in  the  writing,  a  single  circle     being     written 
for  two  sounds  of  s,  or  a  double  circle  for  three: 

all  that  is   (s)aid  let   us    (con)(s)ider 

all   this   is    (s)aid  mos(t)    (c)ertainly 

it  is  (c)ertain  this  (circum)  (s)tance 

it  is  (s)ometimes  this  is  (s)  aid 

jus(t)    as   (s)oon  as  there  is  (c)ertainly 

las(t)    (s)pring  these  (circum)  (s)tances 

VOCALIZATION    OF    THE    CIRCLE. 

273.  When  necessary  to   distinguish   one   circle   word- 
sign  from  another,  vocalization  may  be  resorted  to.     For 
instance,  it  may  sometimes  be  wise  to  distinguish  in  this 


..Id'. from  it  is     ......... 


way  it  has  .«...ld'. from  it  is     -•» But  a  resort  to 

this  expedient  is  rarely  necessary. 

FICTITIOUS   PRIMITIVE   FOR   "IS,"    "AS,"    OR    "HAS." 

274.  2s,  as  or  has  is  sometimes  represented  by  the  "fic- 
titious primitive"  )  t  in  order  that  it  may  be  added 
by  halving,  or  there  by  double-lengthing.  Illustrations: 


is  lt-- ,.....„.  as  it  .....)....,  is  there 


1 


(For  fuller  explanations,  with  exercises,  see  chapters  OH 
the  half-lengthing  and  double-lengthing  principles.) 


CHAPTER  XI. 


"BRIEF   W   AND   Y"   WORD-SIGNS. 

ii7o.  Subject  to  general  phrasing  laws  as  to  conveni- 
ence of  junction,  sense  relation,  etc.,  the  "brief  w  and  y" 
word-signs  (we,  with,  were,  what,  would,  you,  ye,  yet,  'be- 
yond) may  all  be  joined  initially  in  phrases;  and  all,  except 
beyond  and  yet,  may  also  be  joined  to  a  preceding  word.  Un- 
distinguished by  position,  beyond  might  be  mistaken  for  you, 

and  yet  for  you  inverted.  Illustrations: we  have      ^^^.....^ 


have     we  .......Ss^  ...  ,     with     this _,.L=~ »     wherewith 

,.,..c^~^ ,  they  were    ^_.\r^.,  were  they.... — «*•*- ,  what 

i.  may  •..JohMMMi«..i  would  be....^.^ ,  there  would  ,,..^.4,^,.^ 


you  may  ^.A^XS*.,  may  you  ..  ..^-^n.^^you  are     _<v/....,., ,  we 
you   .^^j^.^..,.t  beyond  my  reach ,  yet  it  is  .-* 


144 


"BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS 


276.      EXERCISE     ON     PHRASES     BEGINNING     WITH     "WE."" 


we  admit 

we  attempt 

we  believe 

we  blame 

we  call 

we  claim 

we  decide 

we  declare 

we  deem  (I.  D.) 

we  demand 

we  deny 

we  depend 

we  design 

we  did 

we  did  many  things 

we  do 

we  do  say 

we  fear 

we  find 

we  have 

we  have  a 

we  have  the 

we  have  done 

we  have  known 

we  have  made 

we  kave  never 

we  have  now 

we  have  observed 

we  have  only 

we  have  said 

we  have  seen 

we  have  that 


we  have  this 

we  have  (to)  be 

we  have  understood, 

we  have  you 

we  only 

we  shall 

we  shall  again 

we  shall  answer 

we  shall  be 

we  shall  do 

we  shall  get 

we  shall  have 

we  shall  never 

we  shall  not 

we  shall  now 

we  shall  observe 

we  take 

we  teach  (I.  D.) 

we  thank  (I.  D.) 

we  then 

we  think 

we  thought 

we  took  (I.  D.) 

we  touch 

we  went 

we  were 

we  were  doing 

w«  were  taking 

we  were  thinking 

we  wish  (I.  D.) 

we  wish  (te)  be 

we  wonder 


277.      EXERCISE    ON    PHBASES    BEGINNING    WITH    "WITH."" 


with  a 

with  advantage 


with  each  (I.  D.) 
with  its 


"BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS.  145 

with  itself  with  this 

with  justice  with  this  case 

with  much  (I.  D.)  with  this  subject 

with  one  with  this  understanding 

with  one  another  with  those  (I.  D.) 

with  such  with  those  which 

with  that  with  those  who 

with  the  with  which 

with  thanks  (I.  D.)  with  your 

with  them  with  your  approval 

with  themselves  with  your  (con) sent 

with  these   (I.  D.)  with  your  permission 

with  these   cases    (I.    D.)       with  your  promise 

with  these  subjects  (I.  D.)     with  your  sanction 

278.      EXERCISE  ON   PHEASES   BEGINNING  WITH   "WEBE." 

were  a  were  only 

were  chosen  were  seen 

were  discovered  were  taken 

were  done  were  the 

were  generally  were  then 

were  glad  were  they 

were  his  were  thinking 

were  just  i  were  this 
were  jus(t)  as  necessary      j  were  those 

were  once  were  wanted 

279.      EXERCISE   ON   PHRASES   ENDING   WITH    "WEBE." 

all  they  were  some  were 

and  were  think  they  were 

as  they  were  till  they  were 

if  they  were  we  were 

many  were  when  they  were 

since  they  were  when  we  were 

so  many  were  where  they  were 

BO  they  were  where  we  were 


146  "BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS. 

280.    As  will  be  explained  in  a  subsequent  chapter,  were 


is  also  expressed  by.,.,6<  .......  as  a  "fictitious  primitire"  in 


such  phrases  as  were  it  r....i^,n.^ ,  were  it  not^.i^zL.^;  and 
by  an  r  hook  in  such  phrases  as  which  weret~~:*jL and 

such  were  ^9 (See  Paragraphs  371-373,  463-464.) 

281.      EXERCISE   ON    PHRASES    BEGINNING    WITH    "WHA.T." 

what  a    )  horizontal  what  did  you 

what  an  f      tick  what  do  they 

what  answer  what  do  you  mean 

what   are   the    (are   down-    what  does  the 

ward)  what  does  it  matter 

what  are  you  (are  down-  /  what  did  he 

ward)  ]  what  did  the 

what  can  be  (the)  reason  i  what  he 

what  can  be  their  reason  j  what  the 
what  can  it  be  what  has  been 

what  ca(n)  there  be  what  he  did 

what  church  what  he  does 

what  could  a  what  he  thought 

what  could  be  what  is 

what  could  it  what  is  (to)  be 

what  could  they  what  it  can 

what  could  we  do  what  it  is 

what  could  we  think  what  it  may 

what  could  your  what  mus(t)   be 

what  did  they  what  it  would  be 


"BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS. 


147 


what  account 

what  kind 

what  matters  it 

what  neither 

what  occasion 

what  objection 

what  order 

what  reason 

what  reason  have  they 


what  reply 
what  right 
what  says  he 
what  says  my  friend 
what  say  they 
what  was 
what  would  be 
what  would  it  be 
what  would  the 


282.      EXERCISE    ON    PHRASES    BEGINNING    WITH    "WOULD." 


would  a   (horizontal  tick) 

would  exercise 

would  accept 

would  go 

would  another 

would  have  found 

would  ask 

would  have  made 

would  be 

would  have  said 

would  be   able 

would  have  seen 

would  become 

would  have  the 

would  be  done 

would  have   (to) 

would  be  glad 

1  would  he 

would  be  made 

"i  would  the 

would  be  one 

would  it 

would  be  only 

would  it  be 

would  be  received 

would  its 

would  be  remembered 

would  make 

would  be  said 

would  make  them 

would  be  saved 

would  manage 

would  be  seen 

would  mention 

would  be  sure 

would  never 

would  be  that 

would  not  be 

would  be  there 

would  not  do 

would  be  told 

would  not  only 

would  be  written 

would  not  say 

would  be  wrong 

would  not  take 

would  be  your 

would  not  think 

would  come 

would  not  the 

would  do 

would  not  they 

be 


148 


"BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS. 


would  not  this 
would  not  undertake 
would  rather 
would  receive 
would  require 


would  say 

would  see  (vocalize  see) 

would  take 

would  undertake 

would  write 


283.      EXEKCISE   ON    "WOULD"   JOINED   TO   A   PRECEDING   WORD. 


but  would 

but  would  be 

but  would  not 

but  would  rather 

but  would  say 

each  would 

each  would  be 

he  would  (he  downward) 

he  would  do 

he  would  go 

he  would  know 

he  would  never 

he  would  nevertheless 

he  would  no  doubt 

he  would  not 

he  would  not  do 

he  would  not  go 

he  would  not  know 

he  would  not  say 

he  would  not  think 

he  would  rather 

he  would  rather  not 

he  would  say 

much  would 


much  would  be 

much  would  no  doubt 

she  would  be 

she  would  do 

she  would  go 

she  would  have 

she  would  never 

she  would  not 

she  would  rather 

she  would  say 

so  would 

so  would  many 

who  would 

who  would  be  glad 

who  would  be  ready 

who  would  be  reasonable 

who  would  do 

who  would  go 

who  would  know 

who  would  never 

who  would  not 

who  would  not  think 

who  would  rather 

who- would  say 


284.  As  will  be  explained  in  a  subsequent  chapter, 
would  is  also  expressed  after  certain  strokes  by  making 
th3m  half-length  in  the  third  position.  (See  Paragraphs 
467-470.) 


"BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS. 


149 


285.      EXERCISE     ON     PHRASES 

you  always 

you  are  (are  upward) 

you  are  able 

you  are  aware 

you  are  becoming 

you  are  called  upon 

you  are  doing 

you  are  going 

you  are  interested 

you  are  known 

you  are  necessarily 

you  are  never 

you  are  now 

you  are   ready 

you  are  received 

you  are  rendered 

you  are  requested 

you  are  right 

you  are  seen 

you  are  supposed 

you  are  thinking 

you  are  wrong. 

you  can  (See  Par.  535.) 

you  can  be 

you  can  do 

you  can  have 

you  ca(n)  judge 

you  can  never 

you  can  observe 

you  ca(n)  only  be 

you  can  say 

you  can  take 

you  can  understand 

you  can  undertake 

you  cannot 

(See  Par.  187,  first  note.) 


BEGINNING    WITH     "YOU." 

you  cannot  be 

you  cannot  do 

you  cannot  have 

you  cannot  take 

you  cannot  understand 

you  could 

you  could  be 

you  could  do 

you  could  not  be 

you  have 

you  have   done 

you  have  only 

you  have  received 

you  have  seen 

you  have  your 

you  make 

you  may 

you  may  always  be 

you  may  as  (w)ell  be 

you  may  go 

you  may  receive 

you  may  remember 

you  may  recall 

you  may  recollect 

you  mention 

you  might 

you  might  not 

you  must 

you  mus(t)  accept 

you  mus(t)  also 

you  mus(t)  ask 

you  mus(t)  be 

you  mus(t)  be  aware 

you  mus(t)  become 

you  mus(t)  be  mistaken 

you  mus(t)  be  sure 


150 


"BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS. 


you  mus(t)  come  you  will 

you  mus(t)  -do  you  will 

you  mus(t)   go  you  will 

you  mus(t)   have  you  will 

you  mus(t)  know  you  will 

you  mus(t)  make  you  will 

you  mus(t)  not  you  will 

you  mus(t)  recollect  you  will 

you  mus(t)  remember  you  will 

you  mus(t)  say  you  will 

you  mus(t)  seem  you  will 

you  mus(t)   understand  you  will 

you  mus(t)  undertake  you  will 

you  mus(t)  write  you  will 

you  perceive  you  will 

you  require  you  will 

you  should  be  you  will 

you  should   do  you  will 

you  should  find  you  will 

you  should  have  done  you  will 

you  should  have  known  you  will 

you  should  have  taken  you  will 

you  should  know  you  will 

you  should  never  you  will 

you  should  not  be  you  will 

you  should  not  do  you  will 

you  should  observe  you  will 

you  should  take  you  will 

you  should  understand  you  will 

you  should  undertake  you  will 

you  will  you  will 

you  will  also  you  will 


become 

be  made 

be  saved 

be  seen 

be  sure 

be  supposed 

be  wanted 

do 

do  something 

find 

give 

have 

have  done 

have  placed 

have  seen 

have  shown 

have  taken 

know 

leave 

never 

observe 

perhaps 

perceive 

probably 

receive 

remember 

say 

see  (vocalize  see) 

sometime 

think  it 

understand 

write 


286.      EXERCISE  ON  "YOU"  JOINED  TO  A  PRECEDING  WORD. 

about  you  after  you  receive 

after  you  after  you  will  be 

after  you  are  (are  upward)     although  you 


"BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS. 


151 


although  you  are 

although  you  may 

although  you  will 

beneath  you 

but  you 

but  you  are 

but  you  may  think 

but  you  will  be 

ca(n)  you 

can  you  make 

can  you  receive 

did  you 

did  you  go 

did  you  know 

did  you  never 

did  you  receive 

do  you 

do  you  know 

do  you  recall 

do  you  remember 

for  you 

for  you  are 

for  you    may 

for  you  will  be 

from  you 

give  you 

give  you  my 

give  you  my  reasons 

had  you 

had  you  many 

had  you  reasons 

if  you 

if  you  may 

if  you  must 

if  you  will 

I  thank  you  (I.  D.) 

I  think  you  mus(t)  be 


I  think  you  will  never 

made  you 

many  think  you 

mus(t)  you 

mus(t)  you  go 

mus(t)    you  make 

mus(t)  you  receive 

of  you 

or  you 

or  you  may 

or  you  must 

or  you  will 

on  you    (on  downward) 

said  you 

said  you  should 

said  you  should  be 

see  you 

so  mus(t)  you 

so  you 

so  you  go 

so  you  may 

so  you  must 

so  you  should  be 

so  you  will  be 

take   you 

tell  you 

thank  you 

there  you  are 

there  you  mus(t)   be 

there  you  will  be 

till  you 

till  you  are  ready 

till  you  receive 

till  you  reply 

to  you 

told   you 

we  thank  you  (I.  D.) 


ins  "BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS. 

whether  you  whether  you  must 

•whether  you  are  whether  you  will  be 

287.  EXERCISE  ON  PHRASES  BEGINNING  WITH  "YE,"  "YET" 

AND  "BEYOND." 

ye  do  yet  it  is  not 

ye  had  (I.  D.)  yet  it  is  nothing 

ye  never  yet  it  is  no  doubt 

ye  think  yet  this 

ye  did  not  yet     this  is 
ye  do  not  (I.  D.)  yet  be    made 

ye  had  not  (I.  D.)  yet  be  seen 

ye  have  j  beyond  me 

yet  another  \  beyond  my 

jyet  it  has  beyond  the 

|  yet  it  is  beyond  you 

JUNCTION  OF  BRIEF  "w"  AND  "Y"  WORD-SIGNS. 

288.  In  a  few  cases  where  the  junction  is  convenient, 
a  "brief  w  or  y"  word-sign  may  be  joined  to  another  such 


sign.    Illustrations:   we  ivere 


3 
what  would  ..................    In  these  cases,  though  the  second 

word,  as  in  most  other  phrases,  loses  its  normal  position, 
no  ambiguity  results. 

EXERCISE. 

289.     In  the  following  phrases,  two  "brief  w  or  y"  word- 
signs  are  joined: 

we  were  we  were  generally 

we  were  chosen  we  were  just 

we  were  doing  we  were  taken 

we  were  done  we  were  taking 


"BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS.  153 

we  were  then  what  would  be  thought 

we  were  thinking  what  would  become 

were  we  what  would  give  them 

were  we  chosen  what  would  give  us 

were  we  doing  what  would  he 

were  we  just  what  would  the 

were  we  thinking  what  would  he  do 

what  would  what  would  he  have 

what  would  be  what  would  he  think 
what  would  be  necessary         what  would  my 
what  would  be  reasonable      what  would  our  reasons 

what  would  be  right  what  would  so  many 

what  would  be  said  what  would  so  much  (mch) 

S   CIRCLE   ON   BRIEF   "w"    AND    "Y"    WORD-SIGNS. 

290.    To  a  "brief  w  or  y"  word-sign,  a  circle  may  be  added 
for  is,  Ms,  as,  has  or  us,  giving  us  such  phrases  as  with  his 


<2>  3  -Zf 

or  with  us*  ..........  <—  >  what  is...  ^  ............  ...  ,  what  is  the  ..  .......  « 


a 

what  has  been  ...... -S ,  beyond  his  or  beyond 


EXERCISE. 

(  beyond  his  what  is  the 

1  beyond  us  what  is  the  answer 

were  as  what  is  the  date 

were  as  now  what  is  the  difference 

were  his  what  is  the  effect 

were  his  own  ,.  what  is  the  fact 

what  has  what  is  (the)  matter 

what  has  been  what  is  the  necessary 

what  has  been  done  what  is  the  necessity 

what  has  been  necessary  what  is  the  object 

what  is  what  is  the  theory 


154 


"BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS. 


what  is  (to)  be  done 

what  is  (to)  be  made 

what  his 

with  as 

with  as  much    (first  two 

words  displaced.) 
with  as  much  money  (I.D.) 
with  as  much  pleasure   (I. 

D.) 

with  as  much  profit  (I.  D.) 
with  as  much  reason  (I.  D.) 


with  as  much  respect  (I. 
D.) 

with  as  much  responsibili- 
ty (I.  D.) 

with  his    advantage 

with  his  claim 

with  his  client 

with  his  knowledge 

with  his  testimony 

with  his  theory 

with  us 


INITIAL    "W"    HOOK    FOR    "WE"    AND    "WITH." 

291.  The  initial  w  hook,  which  the  rules  of  word-writ- 
ing authorize  upon  five  alphabetic  strokes  (el,  lay,  n,  m 
and  ray),  may  in  phrasing  be  prefixed  to  any  of  those 
strokes  to  represent  we  or  with.  Illustrations:  we  listen 


>  we  always 


never,. 


we  may 


we  enjoy . 


..  ,  we  receive ....... .-,,  with  my 


or  with  me with  many  „„,., we  must 


we  will 


.  We  and  with,  when  represented  initially 


by  the  w  hook,  are  best  written  in  the  first  position,  the 
position  of  the  word-signs  to  which  in  form  they  so  closely 


"BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS. 


155 


approximate;  but  under  the  law  of  "initial  displacement/' 
their  position  is  sometimes  accommodated  to  that  of  the 
second  word  of  the  phrase. 

EXERCISE. 

292.  In  the  following  phrases,  we  is  to  be  represented 
by  the  w  hook,  and  if  it  begins  a  phrase,  should  occupy  the 
first  position: 


we  also 

we  always 

we  answer 

we  are   (are  upward) 

we  are  able 

we  are  acquainted 

we  are   better 

we  are  called 

we  are   certain 

we  are    clear  ' 

we  are  determined 

we  are  doing 

we  are  entering 

we  are   entitled 

we  are  found 

we  are  glad 

we  are  giving 

we  are   indebted 

we  are  never 

we  are  in  the  way 

we  are  informed 

we  are  known 

we  are  necessarily 

we  are  never 

we  are  now 

we  are  receiving 

we  are  right 

we  are  said  (to)  be 

we  are  then 


we  are  understood 
we  are  very  glad 
we  are  very  sure 
we  are  wrong 
all  we  are 
because  we  are 
because  we  are  able 
I  know  that  we  are 
if   we   are 
if  we  are  able 
if  we  are  now 
that  we  are 
where   we   are 
when  we  are 
when  we  are  bound 
while  we  are 
we  embrace 
we  employ 
we  enjoy 
we  inquire 
we  intend 
we  like 
we  may 

we  may  as  (w)ell 
we  may  also 
we  may  always 
we  may  have 
we  may  go 
we  may  never 


156 


"BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS. 


we  may  perhaps 

we  may  probably 

we  may  think 

if  we  may 

when  we  may 

whenever  we  may 

we  might  have  done 

we  might  have  taken 

we  might  make 

we  might  not 

we  might  not  be 

we  might  not  do 

we  might  not  decide 

we  might  not  determine 

we  might  not  have 

we  might  not  say 

we  might  not  think 

we  might  not  take 

we  must 

we  mus(t)  observe 

we  mus(t)   receive 

we  mus(t)  say 

we  mus(t)  take 

we  mus(t)  therefore 

we  mus(t)   understand 

we  mus(t)  write 

we  mus(t)  always 

we  mus(t)  be 

we  mus(t)  do 

we  mus(t)  go 

we  mus(t)  have 

we  mus(t)   have  done 

we  mus(t)  have  known 

we  mus(t)  have  taken 

we  mus(t)   make 


we  mus(t)  mention 

we  mus(t)  never 

we  mus(t)  not 

we  mus(t)    not  be 

we  mus(t)   not  have 

we  mus(t)  now 

if  we  must 

when  we  must 

whenever  we  must 

where  we  must 

wherever  we  must 

we  necessarily 

we  neglect 

we  never 

we  never  think 

we  now 

we  rather  (I.  D.)* 

we  receive 

we  reply 

we  require 

we  repeat 

we  report 

we  request 

we  resolve 

we  respect 

we  write  you 

we  will 

we  will  ask 

we  will  be 

we  will  become 

we  will  call 

we  will  do 

we  will  find 

we  will  have 

we  will  have  none 


*  We  accommodates  itself  to  the  position  of  rather,  in  order  that  the 
phrase  may  not  go  too  far  above  the  line. 


"BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS. 


157 


we  will  have  observed 

we  will  have  taken 

we  will  judge 

we  will  know  that 

we  will  make 

we  will  mention 

we  will  never 

we  will  now 

we  will  only 

we  will  proceed 

we  will  try 

we  will  take 

when  we  will 

where  we  will 

where  we  will  have 


where    we    may 

wherever  we  may 

we  mean 

we  mean  to 

we  mean  (to)  be 

we  mean  (to)  do 

we  mean    (to)    go 

we  mean  (to)  have 

we  mean  (to)  saj 

we  mention 

we  might 

we  might   as    (w)ell 

we  might  as  (w)ell  be 

we  might  as  (w)ell  have 

we  might  go 


EXERCISE    ON    "WE    KNOW." 


293.  By  writing  the  phrase  we  know,  for  the  sake  of 
distinction,  below  the  line,  we  avoid  the  necessity  which 
otherwise  might  often  arise,  of  distinguishing  it  by  vocaliza- 
tion from  when  in  the  first  position  or  one  in  the  second 
position. 


we  know  (third  position) 

we  know  that  you  can 

we  know  best 

we  know  that  you  must 

we  know  enough 

we  know  that  you  will 

we  know  he  must 

we  know  the 

we  know  his  name 

we  know  the   most 

we  know  it   is 

we  know  them 

we  know  not 

we  know  this 

we  know  nothing 

we  know  we  have 

we  know  one  thing 

we  know  we  may 

we  know  so  many 

we  know  we  must 

we  know  that 

we  know  we   might    not 

we  know  that  he  is 

we  know  we  were 

we  know  that  you  are 

we  know  where  we  are 

158  "BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS. 

"WITH"    EXPRESSED    BY   THE    "w"    HOOK. 

294.  In  the  following  exercise,  with  is  to  be  represented 
by  the  to  hook,  and,  unless  otherwise  indicated,  should  oc- 
cupy the  first  position,  in  accordance  with  the  general  rule 
governing  the  position  of  words  at  the  beginning  of  a 
phrase : 

with  another  with  regard  (to)  which 

with  another  person  with  regret  (I.  D.) 

with  him  (I.  D.)  with  respect 

with  many  with  respect  (to)  his 

rwith  me  with  respect   (to)   him 

| with  my  with  respect  (to)  many 

with  my  friends  with  respect  (te)   one 

with  my  information  with  respect  (to)  the 

with  my  knowledge  with  respect   (to)    this 

with  my  leave  with  respect  (to)  which 

with    my    love     (vocalize      with  respect  (to)  your 

Jove)*  **with  whom  (I.  D.) 

with  my  money  with  whom  he  has  been  (he 

with  my  own  upward) 

with  my  regards  with  whom  we  are 

with  regard  (I.  D.)  with  whom  you  are 

with  regard  (to)  my  with  whom  you  can 

with  regard  (to)  that  with  whom  you  could  be 

with  regard  (to)  them  with  whom  you  will  be 

with  regard  (to)  this  with  whom  you  will  have 

"WITH.OUB." 

295.  In  order  to  obtain  a  facile  phrase-form,  our,  in 
the  very  common  and  useful  phrase  with  our,  is  written 
with  the  upward  r  in  the  third  position.    Illustrations: 

with  our ..S-*  ;  with  our  sanction  •, 


•See  Paragraph  96- 

*»In  the  Graham  system,  this  phrase  is  written  by  joining  the  ordinary 
signs  fdnPWnHB'WWTTjut  in  this  list,  whom  is  supposed  to  be  writ- 
ten according  to  Bonn  Pitman,  with  m  in  the  third  position. 


"BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS.  159 

EXERCISE. 

with  our  with  our  discharge 

with  our  affection  with  our  friends 

with  our  attention  with  our  information 

with  our  bes(t)     informa-  with  our  name 

tion  with  our  objections 

with  our  bes(t)  regards  with  our  position 

with  our  (circum)  stances  with  our  reasons 

with  our  (con)dition  with  our  respect 

with  our  (con) sent  with  our  sanction 

with  our  duty  with  our  senses 

with  our  decision  with  our  visit 

"YOU,"  "WERE"  AND  "WOULD"  FOLLOWING  A  CIRCLE. 

296.  By  turning  the  circle  backward  on  upright  or  in- 
clined strokes,  or  downward  on  horizontal  strokes,  the 
joining  of  you,  were  or  would  is  often  made  easy  where 
otherwise  it  would  be  impracticable.  Illustrations:  does 


it  please  you^.,,..\>.  .....  ,  7  trust  you  will..  ..„„.&....„,  ,  7  suppose 


you  are  .jjv.  »  su°h  as  would  ......  <$.^.,  pay  as  you  go 


......  <$. 


,  makes  you  ..x^w^  .  In  these  cases  the  backward 

or  downward  turning  of  the  circle  does  not  include  an  n 
hook,  as  the  circle  so  turned  usually  does  at  the  end  of  a 
word. 

EXERCISE. 

297.  In  the  following  phrases  the  circle  preceding  you, 
were  or  would  is  to  be  turned  in  the  manner  which  best  ac- 
complishes a  convenient  junction: 

asks  you  because  you  are 


160  "BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS. 

because  you  may  I  trus(t)  you  will 

because  you  mus(t)  be  it  makes  you 

because  you  will  pay  as  you  go 

begs  you  such  as  would 

bless  you  such  as  would  be 

does  it  please  you  such  as  would  make 

gives  you  such  as  you 

I  suppose  you  are  such  as  you  will  have 

I  suppose  you  will  suppose  you  should  be 

I  trus(t)  you  are  we  may  trus(t)  you 

INVERSION    OF    "YOU,"    "WERE,"   ETC. 

298.  We,  were,  would  and  you,  when  their  regular  forms 
would  join  inconveniently  or  not  at  all,  may,  for  the  sake 
of  a  phrase,  be  inverted;  that  is  to  say,  the  open  or  hollow 
side  of  the  curve  may  be  turned  in  the  opposite  direction 


from  ordinary.     Illustrations:  shall  we  not „».,«/„.     ,  since 


you  take... J ,  there  were  many  ...J^^---^.-  ,  if  they 


would  tafce-^^^7--- —  .Because  of  the  aid  furnished  by  the 

I      i 
context,  this  expedient  does  not  interfere  with  legibility, 

and  by  means  of  it  we  secure  many  useful  phrases  which 
would  otherwise  be  impracticable.  This  inversion  is  au- 
thorized  by  Graham,  but  not  by  Benn  Pitman. 

^  (.As  io  position  of  inverted  you  and  your,  when  begin- 
ning a  phrase,  see  Paragraph  303.) 

EXERCISE. 

299.    In  each  of  the  following  phrases,  you,  were,  would 
3r  we  is  written  with  the  inverted  or  reversed  form: 


"BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS. 


161 


among  you 

between  you 

ca(n)  you  never 

I  observe  you 

I  send  you (7  upward) 

nor  you 

shall  we  ask 

shall  we  be 

shall  we    have 

shall  we  not 

shall  we  say 

since  you 

since  you  can 

since  you  do 

since  you  take 

should  you      (should 

ward) 

should  you  decide 
should  you   go 
should  you  take 
than  you 
than  you  expect 
than  you  have 
than  you  know 
there  were  many 
unless    you  do 
unless  you  take 
unless  you  think 
*we  can 
we  ca(n)   do 
we  ca(n)  have 
we  ca(n)  make 


we  ca(n)  observe 
we  ca(n)  only 
we  ca(n)   take 
we  ca(n)not 
we  ca  ( n )  not  be 
we  ca(n)not  have 
we  ca  (n)  not  say 
we  ca(n)not  take 
we  could 
we  could  be 
we  could  have 
we  could  not 
we  could  not  be 
we  could  not  have 
we  hope   (I.  D.) 
up-    when  you 

when  you  can 
when  you  desire 
when  you  discuss 
when  you  do 
when  you  go 
when  you  have 
when  you  take 
when  you  think 
which  we  can 
which  we  ca(n)not 
which  we  make 
yet  you  do 
yet  you  know 
yet  you  never 
yet  you  say 
you  did   (I.  D.) 


*The  author,  who  has  for  some  time  practised  the  joining  of  the  in- 
verted we  to  can  and  could,  has  not  experienced  in  the  slightest  degree 
the  conflict  theoretically  apprehended  by  some  writers,  between  we  and 
what.  Those  who  prefer  Mr.  Graham's  method  of  expressing  we  in  these 
cases,  where  theTB^ttlBMWnSHPIfrtW^Wfl,  will  find  it  explained  in  Par- 
agraph 121.  The  verbal  combinations  we  can  and  ive  could  are  so  com- 
mon that  some  method  of  effecting  a  junction  seems  to  belimperatively 
accessary. 


162  "BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS. 

you  deny  (I.  D.)*  you  think    (I.   D.) 

you  do  (I.  D.)  you  had  not  (I.  D.) 

you  do  not   (I.  D.)  you  know 

you  never  think  (I.  D.)  you  know  that 

you  thank  (I.  D.)  you  know  them 

300.  The  inversion  of  were  is  of  course  avoided  when 
were  is  represented  by  the  r  hook  as  in  the  phrases  which 
were,  such  were,  etc.     (See  Paragraphs  371-373.)     The  in- 
version of  would  is  avoided  when  would  is  expressed  by  half- 
lengthing,  as  in  they  would,  it  would,  etc.     (See  Paragraphs 
467-470.) 

"YOU''  USED  FOR  "YOUR." 

301.  Your,  when  its  ordinary  sign  does  not  make  a  con- 
venient junction,  may  be  represented  by  the  sign  for  you, 
either  regular  or  inverted,  preference  being  given  to  the 
regular  form,  if  convenient.     This  principle  is  recognized 
by  Munson,  not  by  Graham  or  Pitman.     But  the  represent- 
ation of  both  you  and  your  by  the  single  sign  here  given  was 
for  many  years  practised  in  the  United  States  Senate  by 
that  distinguished   reporter,   the   late   Dennis   F.   Murphy. 


Illustrations:    I  think  your  reasowr--w^ ,  among  your 

neighbors  -r^~^_^>^_^\.- 

EXERCISE. 

302.  In  the  following  exercise,  your  is  to  be  represented 
by  the  sign  for  you,  regular  or  inverted,  according  to  con- 
venience: 

among  your  neighbors  ask  your  mother 

answer  your  inquiry  define  your  duties 

ask  your  father  during  your  residence 


*As  ye  ia  never  used  except  in  the  solemn  style  of  address,  there  is 
no  danger  in  colloquial  matter  of  confounding  ye  and  you. 


"BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS.  163 

I  think  your  reasons  make  your  exit 

in    your   name  pay  your  respects 

in   your   position  read  your  letter 

in  your  testimony  resign  your  position 

it  may  be  your  case  take   your   time    (tm) 

make  your  answer  take  your  receipt 

POSITION   OF    "YOU"   AND   "YOUR." 

303.  At  the  beginning  of  phrases,  you  and  your,  in  their 
inverted  form,  may  safely  sacrifice  their  normal  position 
and  are  generally  written  as  high  or  low  as  may  be  neces- 
sary in  order  to  bring  the  second  word  of  the  phrase  into 
its  normal  place.     The  regular  form  of  you,  when  written 
initially,  takes  its  normal  position. 

EXPRESSION    OF    "YOU    WOULD,"    "WERE    YOU,"    ETC. 

304.  Every    shorthand    writer   of    experience   has   had 
forced  upon  him  in  his  daily  practice  the  conviction  that 
such   common   colloquial   expressions  as  would   you,   what 
you,  you  were,  ivith  you,  ought  not     to     be     unphrasable. 
When  called  upon  to  write  the  very  frequent  word-groups 
of  this  class  (which  are  spoken  rapidly,  because  they  are 
natural  word-groups),  he  has  felt,  (if  his  "system"  has  pro- 
vided for  them  no  convenient  method  of  phrasing),  that  to 
write  them  as  separated  words  was  an  almost  intolerable 
detention.     The  Graham  "systeinJM^n_order  to  meet  this 
want  (unprovifrecl  ior7"It  is  believed,  Tjy  other  systems)  has 
provided  that  certain  word-signs  belonging  to  the  "brief  w 
and  y"  series  may  be  enlarged  in  a  peculiar  way  to  indi- 
cate the  addition  of  other  word-signs  of  the  same  series, 
the  joining  of  which  by  customary  phrasing  methods  would 
be  in  some  cases  extremely  inconvenient,  and  in  others  ab- 
solutely   impracticable.     Thus,    according    to    the    Graham 


system,  we  may  write  with  you  :  ..............  instead  of  ....  ...........  o.. 


you  were 


"BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS. 


0.,...  instead  of  ........  ^  .....  c  .....  ,  what  you 


instead  of o .    In  view  of  the  fact  that  for  many 

years  this  method  of  phrase  abbreviation  has  been  practised 
by  a  large  body  of  Graham  writers,  with  (as  they  testify) 
very  satisfactory  results,  and  inasmuch  as  no  other  satisfac- 
tory expedient  for  meeting  this  urgent  stenographic  need 
has  been  introduced,  or,  so  far  as  the  author  knows,  even 
suggested,  there  seems  to  be  no  reason  why  writers  of  non- 
LrrahiimiKtic  systems  should  not  accept  this  device,  at  least 
upon  trial,  as  a  promising  innovation.  Hence  the  cases 
in  which  it  appears  to  be  highly  useful  are  here  explained. 

305.  We  may  be  enlarged  to  indicate  the  addition  of 
would;  and  would  may  be  enlarged  to  indicate  the  addition 

<Z 
of  we.     Illustrations:  we  would ,  would  we  .  3....  ., 

Though  the  ordinary  sign  for  we  is  by  careful  writers  par- 
tially thickened,  the  curve  of  the  enlarged  we  is  not  usually 
thickened,  because  reporters  find  that  the  thickening  is 
rarely  or  never  necessary  for  the  sake  of  verbal  distinction. 
All  the  word-signs  of  this  series  are,  when  enlarged,  not 
only  widened  but  lengthened,  thus  taking  somewhat  the 
form  of  a  horse-shoe.  As  Mr.  Graham  has  remarked,  "the 
horse-shoe  is  the  ideal  form  or  pattern  of  the  enlarged  brief 
way  or  yay." 

EXERCISE   ON    "WE   WOULD*'   AND    "WOULD   WE." 

306.  In  the  following  phrases,  we  would  is  to  be  writ- 
ten with  enlarged  we,  in  "horseshoe"  form,  and  without 
any  thickening  of  th«  curve: 


"BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS.  165 

I  know  we  would  we  would    have 

if  we  would  we  would  judge 

we  would  we  would  justify 

we  would  attempt  we  would  justly 

we  would  call  we  woulft  take 

we  would  choose  we  would  think 

we  would  deny  we  would  want 

we  would  discharge  we  would  wonder 

we  would  dismiss  when  we  would 
we  would  do  something  whenever  we  would 

we  would    find  where  we  would 

307.  In  the  following  phrases,  would  ice  is  to  be  writ- 
ten with  the  enlarged  would: 

would  we  would  we  never 

would  we  ask  would  we  now 

would  we  answer  would  we  pay 

would  we  awake  would  we  say 

would  we  be  would  we  take 

would  we  go  would  we  waste 

EXERCISE  ON   "WHAT  WE"  AND  "WHAT  WERE." 

308.  What  may  be  enlarged  to  add  we  or  were.     Illus- 


I ,  what  we  ask ) ........ 


trations:  what  we  do 1 ,  tvhat  we  ask 

accordance    with  these    examples,    write    the    following 

phrases : 

what  we  what  we  take 
what  we  are     (are    down-      what  were 

ward)  what  were  necessary 

what  we  ask  what  were  never 

what  we  can  what  were  not 

what  we  do  what  were  obtained 

what  we  make  what  were  remaining 

what  we  may  what  were  supposed 

what  we  say  what  were  taken 


166  "BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS. 

EXERCISE   ON   "YOU   WERE"   AND   "YOU   WOULD." 

309.    You  may  be  enlarged  to  add  were  or  would,  as  in 


the  phrases  you  were  ready  ...Q/..L,  you  would  go  .......  Q  _  . 

In  accordance   with   these   examples,   write   the   following 
phrases: 

you  were  you  would  get 

you  were  always  you  would  go 

you  were  among  them  you  would  keep 

you  were  going  you  would  make 

you  were  mistaken  you  would  rather 

you  were  rather  you  would  receive 

you  were  received  you  would  render 

you  were  receiving  you  would  respect 

you  would  acknowledge  you  would  therefore 

you  would  carry  you  would  write 

you  would  come  you  would  wrong 

310.  In  order  to  facilitate  phrasing  by  avoiding  awk- 
ward junctions,  you  were  and  you  would  may,  when  conve- 
nient, be  expressed  by  the  enlarged  you  inverted,  as  in  the 


phrases  when  you  ivere  .......  ...........  and  you  ivould  be  A<V..._.  . 

In  the  following  pnrases  you  were  and  you  would  are  to  be 
thus  expressed: 

you  were  admitted  you  would  admit 

you  were  going  you  would  attempt 

you  were  forced  you  would  deny 

you  were  indisposed  you  would  discuss 

you  were  interested  you  would  endeavor 

you  were  known  you  would  never 

you  were  never  you  would  not 

you  were  not  you  would  observe 

you  were  observed  you  would  possess 


"BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS.  167 

311.  The  enlarged  forms  of  with,  were,  what  and-  would 
may  be  written  in  an  oblique  direction  (corresponding  with 
the  inclination  of  the  consonant  chay  or  ray)  to  indicate 


the  addition  of  you.     Illustrations:  icith  you  ...........  ,  were 


-9 
you  .C- ,   ichat  you ,  would  you, "2.  ... 

In   accordance   with   these   examples,   write   the   following 
exercises: 

with  you  what  you  ask 

agree  with  you  what  you  give 

go  with  you  what  you  make 

reason  with  you  what  you  may 

speak  with  you  what  you  obtain 

take  with  you  what  you  say 

talk   with   you  would  you 

were  you  would  you  ask 

were  you.  engaged  would  you  be 

were  you  interested  would  you  go 

were  you  never  would  you  rather 

were  you  not  would  you  receive 

were  you  thinking  would  you  retain 

what  you  would  you  write 

312.  As  you,  for  convenience  of  phrasing,  may  be  used 
for  your,  so  with  you  may  be  used  for  icith  your;  were 
you  for  were  your;  what  you  for  ivhat  your;  would  you 
for  icould  your. 

EXERCISE. 

with  your  information  were  your  necessities 

with  your  necessities  were  your  objections 

with  your  objections  .were  your  visits 

with  your  testimony  what  your  life 

were  your  demands  what  your  many 


168  "BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS. 

what  your  mistakes  would  your  money 

would  your  mos(t)  impor-      would  your  reckons 
tant  would  your  receipts 

313.  Where  two  word-signs  of  the  "brief  icay  and  yay" 
series  can  be  conveniently  phrased  in  the  ordinary  method, 
the  enlarged  forms  need  not  be  resorted  to.  Thus  we  may  write 


ice  were »  were  ice £...., ,  what  icould 


would  we    .....3....  *    This  arrangement  makes  several  of  the 

enlarged  characters  more  readily  legible  by  reducing  the 
number  of  phrases  which  they  represent.     In  accordance 
with  these  examples,  write  the  following  exercise: 
we  were  chosen  what  would  be 

we  were  decided  what  would  never 

we  were  doing  what  would  not 

we  were  then  what  would  not  be 

we  were  thinking  what  would  .not  do 

were  we  chosen  would  we  ask 

were  we  decided  would  we  be 

were  we  doing  would  we  go 

were  we  then  would  we  make 

were  we  thinking  would  we  say 

314.  The  student  who  wishes  to  have  at  his  command 
the  methods  herein  explained  of  indicating,  instead  of  writ- 
ing, some  of  the  most  common  word-signs  of  the  "brief  way 
and  yay"  series,  should  not  pass  from  the  lessons  thereon 
until  he  can  write  without  hesitation  the  following 

EXERCISE. 

agree  with  you  what  you  say 

reason  with  you  when  you  were 


*(See  Paragraphs  288-9.) 


"BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS.  169 

we  would  judge  when  you  would  be 

we  would  think  would  you  go 

were  you  never  would  you  expect 

were  you  not  you  were   always 

what  we  expect  you  were  disposed 

what  were  essential  you  were  receiving 

what  were  remaining  you  would  receive 

what  you  make  you  would  take 

QUASI    "E"    HOOK   FOR    "YOU." 

314  V&.  As  a  contra-normal  expedient,  you,  according  to 
the  Graham  system,  may  be  joined  in  certain  phrases  in 
such  a  way  that  it  resembles  the  r  hook.  Illustrations: 

you  say  .,   ,{\... ,  you  shall f±...,  you  do,  or  you  had A 

-V 


you  ask  ^ ,  do  you  say k .    At  the  beginning 


of  a  phrase,  you,  thus  written,  is  distinguished  from  the  r 
hook  by  the  fact  that  the  phrase  begins  on  the  line;  whereas 
an  r  hook  at  the  beginning  of  a  consonant  stroke  (as  in 
the  word  sign  during)  would  be  half  a  stroke  above  the  line. 
Where  no  distinction  by  position  exists,  the  context  is  sup- 
posed to  be  a  sufficient  distinction,  because,  when  in- 
troduced as  part  of  a  sentence,  the  phrase,  if  read  other- 
wise than  intended,  would  not  "make  sense."  Such  phrases 
as  do  you  say,  if  you  be,  you  ask,  etc.,  are  very  frequent 
in  testimony,  and  this  irregular  method  of  writing  them,  it 
is  claimed,  is  excused  by  the  gain  in  speed,  and  by  the  fact 
that  the  apparent  ambiguity  does  not  entail  in  practice  any 
real  difficulty  in  reading.  While  the  author  of  this  book 
believes  that  in  a  number  of  these  phrases,  especially  such 
phrases  as  you  do  and  you  had,  a  perfectly  easy  and  un- 
ambiguous representation  of  you  may  be  obtained  by  invert- 
ing the  word-sign  in  the  manner  already  explained  (see 


170  "BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS. 

Paragraphs  298-9),  he  submits  for  the  benefit  of  Graham 
writers,  the  following  exercise,  in  which  the  r  hook,  as  it 
would  strictly  be  considered,  is,  by  "reporting  license," 
treated  as  the  sign  you. 

EXERCISE. 

did  you  ask  so  you  shall  be 

did  you  ask  that  you  ask 

did  you  ask  tnem  you  ask  this 

did  you  ask  your  you  do 

did  you  do  you  do  something 

did  you  say  you  do  many 

did  you  say  something  you  had 

did  you  say  there  was  you  had  many 

(there  expressed  by  you  had  occasion 

doubling)  you  had  received 

did  you  say  they  are  ready  you  say 

(they  are  expressed  by  you  say  nothing 

doubling)  you  say  so 

did  you  see   (vocalize  see)  you  say  so  little 

did  you  see  many  you  say  something 

did  you  see  as  many  you  see   (vocalize  see) 

did  you  see  some  reason  you  see  many 

did  you  see  something  you  see  something 

do  you  say  you  shall 

do  you  say  some  other  you  shall  be 

do   you   see    (vocalize   see)  you  shall  have 

if  you  ask  you  shall  not 

if  you  be  you  shall  receive 

if  you  do  what  did  you  say 

if  you  shall  be  what   did    you    see    (vocalize 
may  you  ask  see) 

may  you  do  what  do  you  ask 

mus(t)   you  ask  what  do  you  do 

mus(t)   you  do  what  do  you  say 

mus(t)  you  say  what    do    you    see    (vocalize 
so  you  do  see) 


"BRIEF  W  AND  Y"  WORD-SIGNS. 


171 


when  did  you  say 

when  did  you  see  (vocalize 

see) 

where  did  you  say 
where  did  you  see  (vocalize 

see) 
where  do  you  say 


which  you  do 

which  you  say 

which  you  see  (vocalize  see) 

will  you  be 

will  you  do 

why  you  ask 

why  you  do 


where  do  you  see  (vocalize    why  you  had 


see) 


why  you  shall  be 


CHAPTER  XII. 


PROXIMITY. 

315.  The  bringing  of  words  or  parts  of  words  close  to- 
gether, but  without  joining,  for  the  purpose  of  indicating 
omitted  words  or  parts  of  words,  is  called  "proximity;"  and 
the  words  or  parts  of  words  thus  brought  together  may  be 
said  to  be  "approximated." 

316.  "Proximity"    being    a    stenographic    expedient — a 
method  of  expressing  omitted  words  or  parts  of  words  by 
some  variation  from  the  ordinary  method  of  writing — the 
omitted  words  or  parts  of  words  are  said  to  be  "indicated," 
while,  if  they  are  to  be  supplied  merely  by  sense  or  context, 
they  are  said  to  be  "implied." 

"OF  THE." 

317.  One  common  use  of  proximity  is  to  indicate  the 
very  frequent  connecting  clause     of  the.     Generally  these 
two  words  need  not  be  written,  their  omission  being  indi- 
cated by  placing  in  closer  proximity  than  usual  the  words 
between  which    the    clause    of    the    occurs.     Illustrations: 


branch  of  the  subject  -W^-  >  reason  of  the  delay 

WHEN  "OF  THE"  CANNOT  BE  INDICATED. 

318.  (a.)  If  the  clause  of  the  follows  a  period  or  any 
other  distinct  pause,  it  cannot  be  indicated  by  proximity, 
"because  of  the  fundamental  rule  that  words  separated  by  a 
distinct  pause  cannot  be  brought  together  in  a  phrase. 


•See  note  at  end  of  chapter. 


PROXIMITY.  173 

319.  (b.)     If  the  word  preceding  the  expression  of  the 
is  written  at  the  end  of  a  line,  so  that  the  word  following 
of  the  begins  the  next  line,  proximity  is,  of  course,  impracti- 
cable, and  of  the  must  be  written,  not  indicated. 

320.  (c.)     Of  the  cannot  safely  be  indicated  by  proxim- 
ity when  either  of  the  words  between  which  the  phrase  oc- 
curs is  written  with  a  vowel  logogram,  as  such  a  sign  placed 
close  to  a  consonant  stroke  is  apt  to  be  mistaken  for  some 
ordinary  vowel  modifying  the  consonant  stroke.     For  in- 
stance, the  expressions  disease  of  the  eye,  all  of  the  advan- 
tages, two'  of  the  jury,  who  of  the  few  would  not  be  intelli- 
gible if  proximity  were  resorted  to  for  expressing  of  the. 

321.  (d)  Proximity  cannot  be  resorted  to  if  the  words 
between  which  of  the  occurs  are  widely  separated  by  dif- 
ference of  position.  For  this  reason,  such  a  phrase  as 

_0 

hand  of  the  gods ....      ,  would  not  be  a  good  phrase. 

\^ 

EXERCISE. 

322.     In  the  following  phrases,  of  the  is  to  be  indicated 
by  proximity: 

account  of   the   sales  difficulty  of  the  task 

advantage  of  the  plan  door  of  the  house 

attack  of  the  foe  elevation  of  the  masses 

business  of  the  firm  end  of  the  story 

cause  of  the  delay  exercise  of  the  lungs 

cause  of  the  people  expenses  of  the  trip 

choice  of  the  assembly  expiration  of  the  office 

close  of  the  day  fading  of  the  flower 

condition  of  the  country  fear  of  the  injury 

constitution  of  the  county  friends  of  the  government 

ooat  of  the  machine  gentlemen  of  the  profession 

day  of  the  week  importance  of  the  informa- 
decision  of  the  question  tion 

defence   of  the   coast  influence  of  the  teacher 

defence  of  the  prisoner  kingdom  of  the  Lord 


174 


PROXIMITY. 


leaves  of  the  trees 
life  of  the  members 
love  of  the  truth 
love  of  the  world 
mate  of  the  vessel 
motions  of  the  arms 
movements  of  the  planets 
name  of  the  person 
nature  of  the  subject 
object  of  the  invention 
officer  of  the  army 
order  of  the  chief 
origin  of  the  humble 
pages  of  the  book 
point  of  the  joke 
policy  of  the  department 
presence  of  the  ladies 


principal  of  the  academy 
professors  of  the  college 
reason  of  the  thing 
result  of  the  visit 
revenue  of  the  government 
revision  of  the  laws 
song  of  the  lover 
strength  of  the  engine 
study  of  the  languages 
subject  of  the  letter 
title  of  the  book 
tone  of  the  voice 
verdict  of  the  jury 
window  of  the  office 
words  of  the  sentence 
work  of  the  people 
worthy  of  the  nation 


EXFRCISE. 

323.  In  the  following  cases,  of  the  is  to  be  expressed  by 
the  two  ticks  joined,  in  order  to  avoid  writing  a  vowel  word- 
sign  in  ambiguous  proximity  to  a  word  outline: 


*all  of   the    advantages 
all  of  the  generals 
all  of  the  judges 
all  of  the  laws 
all  of  the  life 
all  of  the  reasons 
all  of  the  thinking 
awe  of  the  law 
better  of  the  two 


condition  of  the  eye 
disease  of  the  eye 
eye  of  the  patriot 
larger  of  the  two 
two  of  the  jurors 
two  of  the  letters 
we  of  the  legion 
what  of  the  rest 
who  of  the  few 


FROM-TO. 

324.     In  such  expressions  as  from  time  to  time,  from 
place  to  place,  etc.,  the  words  from  and  to  may  be  omitted 


*Many  Graham  writers  express  all  o/by  adding  to  all  the/-v  hook,  to 
which,  in  the  case  acre  given,  the  tick  would  be  added  for  he. 


PROXIMITY.  175 

and  their  omission  indicated  by  writing  close  together  (or 
in  proximity)  the  forms  of  the  repeated  word.  Illustra- 
tions: from  time  to  time ,  from  place  to  place 


The  peculiar  form  of  the  language — the  duplica- 
tion of  the  leading  word  of  the  phrase — removes  all  danger 
that  proximity,  as  used  in  this  case,  may  be  understood  as 
indicating  of  the.  Such  expressions  as  time  of  the  time, 
place  of  the  place,  would  not  "make  sense." 

EXERCISE. 

325.  According  to  the  instructions  just  given,  write  the 
following: 

from  church  to  church  from  mountain  to  mountain 

from  city  to  city  from  mouth  to  mouth 

from  day  to  day  from  nation  to  nation 

from  door  to  door  from  night  to  night 

from  end  to  end  from   ocean  to  ocean 

from  hour  to  hour  from  point  to  point 

from  house  to  house  from    side   to    side 

from  man  to  man  from  tower  to  tower 

from  moment  to  moment  from   town   to  town 

from  month  to  month  from  valley  to  valley 

326.  When  phrases  of  this  class  become  very  familiar, 
the  two  forms  of  the  repeated  word  may  be  written  without 
lifting  the  pen,  from  and  to  being  still  omitted.     Illustra- 
tions: from  generation  to  generation      y ,  from  place 

to  place     \*. In  such  cases  "ellipsis"  takes  the  ylace 

of  "proximity;"  "indication"  becomes  "implication." 


176  PROXIMITY. 

"OF"    EXPRESSED   BY   PROXIMITY. 

327.  In  some  special  cases  proximity  indicates  merely 
the  omission  of  of,  as  in  the  phrase  kingdom  of  God.  In  the 
Graham  system  of  is  very  frequently  thus  indicated. 


OB  "COM"  EXPRESSED  BY  PROXIMITY. 

328.  When  a  word  beginning  with  con  or  com  occurs 
in  the  midst  of  a  phrase,  the  dot  ordinarily  used  to  express 
these  prefixes  may  be  omitted  and  its  absence  supplied  by 
writing  the  remainder  of  the  word  close  to  and,  if  conve- 
nient, underneath  the  last  stroke  of  the  preceding  word. 


Illustrations:    you  must  confess .../vrpa ,  in  conjunction. 


.    The  position  underneath,  rather  than  alongside 


of,  the  preceding  stroke,  will  avoid  the  possibility  of  con- 
flict between  con-m  and  of  the,  both  being  expressed  by  prox- 
imity. Thus,  many  confessions  .C^v^y. and  common 


consent are  better  than  ../r~. x^.^SJJ...  and   .. 

EXERCISE. 

329.     In  the  following  phrases,  con  or  com  is  to  be  ex- 
pressed by  proximity: 

another    (con)jecture  by    (com)pulsion 

another    (con)tention  daily    (com) fort 

another  (con)tinent  daily    (con) duct 

by    (com)parison  dark  (com)plexion 


PROXIMITY. 


177 


I  am  (com)pelled 

I  am   (com) plaining 

I  am    (con)fident 

I  am   (con) scions 

I  am   (coil) tent 

I  may   (com) plain 

I   may    (con)fess 

important   (con) cession 

important   (con) vocation 

in    (com) petition 

in    (con) elusion 

in    (con) junction 

in  ( connection 

in  "(con) tempt 

in  ( contemplation 

in  the    (com) position 

in  the   (con)ference 

just  (com) plaint 


just   (con)demnation 
many  ( com )  plaints 
many  (com) plications 
my   (com) position 
my   ( conception 
my    ( con )  dcmnation 
my   (con)jecture 
my   (con) science 
my  (con)tention 
my   (con) test 
my   (con)trol 
no  (com) petition 
no  ( conception 
no    (con)cern 
no  (con)trol 
some  (com) promise 
some   (con)ception 
some  compassion 


"CON"  OB  "COM"  IMPLIED. 

330.  If  the  word  beginning  with  con  or  com  is,  when 
standing  alone,  written  habitually  without  the  initial  dot, 
the  con  or  com  need  not  be  indicated  in  a  phrase;  the  ordi- 
nary outline  may  be  freely  joined  to  the  preceding  word. 
Strictly  speaking,  this  is  a  case,  not  of  'proximity,"  but 
of  "implication."* 

"A  CON,"  "AND  COM,"  ETC. 

331.  The  initial  a  tick,  disjoined,  may  be  written  (either 
perpendicularly  or  horizontally,  according  to  convenience), 
in  the  place  ordinarily  occupied  by  the  con  dot,  to  express 
a  con,  a  com,  and  con  or  and  com.     Illustrations:     a  con- 


temptible U* ,    a  contention  l^^ .......    o  connection 


*See  Paragraph  126. 


178  PROXIMITY. 


t.,| — 3...,.    and  connected  „„., As   already   explained, 

the  word  following  the  initial  a  tick  is  always  written  in 
its  normal  place,  and  the  position  of  the  tick  is  accommo- 


dated   thereto.     Thus  we  write  and  confine 


-I  .......  • 


332.  Of  the  two  allowable  directions  of  the  a  tick,  that 
one  should  be  chosen,  as  shown  in  the  preceding  examples., 
which  varies  most  from  the  direction  of  the  stroke  to 
which  it  is  prefixed. 

EXERCISE. 

333.  In  the  following  phrases,  a  con,  a  com,  and  con  or 
and  com  should  be  expressed  by  a  horizontal  tick,  dis- 
joined: 

a  (com)batant  a  (com)  plaint 

a  (com)edy  a  (com)plex 

a  (com)fortable  a  (  complexity 

a  (comm)ittee  a  (com)  plication 

a  (comm)itment  a  (com)plicity 

a  (comm)odity  a  (com)ponent 

a  (comm)utation  a  (com)posite 

a  (com)  pact  a  (com)  position 

a  (com)panion  a  (ccm)  pound 

a  (com)parison  a  (comprehension 

a  (com)  patriot  a  (com)prehensive 

a  (com)pendium  a  (com)pression 

a  (com)  petition  a  (com)  promise 

a  (  competitor  a  (con)ceit 

a  (  com  )  pilation  a  (  conception 


PROXIMITY. 


179 


a  (con)demnation 
a  (con)demned 
a  (con)densation 
a  (con)densed 
a  ( condescension 
a   (con)ductor 
a  ( connection 
a  (con)  federate 
a  (con)fessed 
a  (con)fession 
a  (con)fldent 
a  (con)fidential 
a   (con) fined 
a   ( confiscation 
a   (con)flict 
a   ( conjecture 
a  (con) jugation 
a   (con) junction 
a  (con) science 
a  (con) scions 
a  ( consciousness 
a  ( conspiracy 
a  (con)stancy 
a  (con)straint 
a  (con) tact 
a  (con)tagion 
a  (con)tagious 
a  ( con)templation 
a  (con) temporary 
a  (con)tention 
a  (con) solation 
a  (con) test 
a  (con)tinued 
a  (con)tinent 
*  a  (con)   tract 
a  (con) traction 
a  (con) tractor 


a  (con)trast 
a  (con)trary 
a  ( con)trivance 
a  ( convergence 
a  (con) version 
a   (con) vert 
a  (con) vex 
a  (con)vexity 
a  ( conveyance 
a   (con)vict 
a  (con) vocation 
and   (com) passion 
and   (com) pel 
and   (com)pensate 
and  (com)plete 
and   (com) pile 
and   (com) plain 
and  (com)plex 
and  (com) plicate 
and   (com)  plicity 
and   (com)posedly 
and   (com) promise 
and  (con) cede 
and   (con)cise 
and   (con)demn 
and   (con) dense 
and  (con) descend 
and   (con) duct 
and  (con)fess 
and   ( con )  f essed 
and   ( confidence 
and   (con) fine 
and   ( confiscate 
and   ( conflict 
and  ( conjecture 
and   (con) join 
and   ( con)scious 


180  PROXIMITY. 

and  (con) spire  and  (con) tract 

and  (con) strain  and  (con)trary 

and  (con)straint  and  (con)trast 

and  (con)tagious  and  (con) verge 

and  (con) tain  and  (con) verse 

and  (con)taminate  and  (con)vey 

and  (con) template  and  (con)vict 

and  (con) tend  and  (con)vince 

and  (con) test  and  (con)voke     . 

334.  In  the  following  phrases  a  con,  a  com,  and  con  or 
and  com  should  be  expressed  by  a  perpendicular  tick  dis- 
joined: 

a  (comm)and  a  (con)gregation 

a  (comm)ander  a  ( connection 

a  (comm)encement  a  (con) quest 

a  (comm)endation  a  (con)secration 

a  (comm)ensurate  a  (con)sensus 

a  (comm)ent  a  (con) sonant 

a  (comm)entary  a  (con) summation 

a  (con) cave  and  (comm)and 

a  ( concentration  and   (comm)ence 

a  (con) clave  and  (comm)ent 

a  (con) elusion  and  (con) cave 

a  (con) elusive  and   ( con ) centrate 

a  ( concordance  and  (con) cur 

a  (con) course  and  (con)gratulate 

a  (con) crete  and  (con)gregate 

a  ( concurrence  and  (conn)nect 

a  (con)cussion  and   (con)quer 

a  ( congratulation  and  (con)secrate 

"i  CON,"  "HE  CON,"  ETC. 

335.  By  a  logical  extension  of  the  principle  followed  in 
the  expression  of  a  con,  and  con,  etc.,  we  may  write  I,  he,  is, 
his,  as,  has  in  the  place  of  the  "con  dot"  to  express  I  con  or 
I  com,  he  con  or  he  com,  is  con  or  is  com,  his  con  or  his  com, 


PROXIMITY.  181 

as  con  or  as  com,  has  con  or  has  com.    Illustrations:    I  con' 

° 
tend ,  he  commences....- .AjX- ,  is  continued  ....... i^,.... 


as  connected  or  Tias  connected  QT 


.*    In  these  cases 


the  prefixed  sign  retains  its  ordinary  position. 


EXERCISE. 


336.     In    accordance    with    the    instruction   just    given, 
write  the  following: 


fas  (com)pelled 
(has  (com)pelled 
I  as  (com)  posed 
I has  (com) posed 
( as  (con)curred 
)  has  (con)curred 
ras  (con)demned 
"^has  (con)demned 
,  as  (con) ducted 
-\  has  (con) ducted 
/-as  (con)fessed 
I  has  (con)fessed 
/•as  (con)veyed 
"j  has  (con)veyed 
/•as  (con)victed 
"i  has  (con)victed 
/as  (con)tained 
.has  (con)tained 
(as  (comm)anded 
"]  has  ( comm )  anded 
jas  (comm)enced 
I  has  (comm)enced 


(  as  (con) eluded 
(  has  (con) eluded 
he  (com) pels 
he  (com) poses 
he  (com)prehends 
he  (com) prises 
he  (con) cedes 
he  (con) curs 
he  (con)demns 
he  (con) ducts 
he  (con)fesses 
he  (con) tests 
he  (con)yeys 
he  (con)victs 
his  (com)pany 
his  (com)pilation 
his  (com)plexion 
his  (com) plication 
his  ( complicity 
his  (com) prehension 
his  (com) promise 
his  (con)demnation 


*The  use  of  the  circle  in  this  way  does  not  entail  any  danger  of   con 
flict  with  the  prefix  self-con. 


182 


PROXIMITY. 


his  (con) duct 

his  (con)fession 

his  (con) tempt 

his  (con) test 

his  (con)trol 

his  (con)viction 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I   (con) cur 


(con)demn 
(con) duct 
(con)fess 


I   (con)jecture 


I   (con) test 
I   (con)vey 
I   (con)vict 
is  (com)pelled 
is  (com)  plicated 
is  (com) posed 
is  (com)prehended 
is   (com) prised 
is  (con)cealed 
is  (con)demned 
is  (con) ducted 
is   (con)fessed 
is  (con) tested 
is  (con)veyed 
is  (con)victed 


PREFIXES   IN*   THE   MIDST  OF  PHRASES. 

337.  Any  word  which,  as  ordinarily  written,  has  a  dis- 
joined prefix  (such  as  incompetent,  recognize,  etc.), 
takes  in  a  phrase  its  ordinary  form,  the  prefix 
being  joined,  if  convenient,  to  the  preceding  word,  if 


there  be  one.     Illustrations:  we  are  incompetent, 

you  may  recognize ,.r>rrT.v/^r5>....    The  prefix  may  be  modified 

by    an    initial    hook    or    circle  to    express    in    whole    or 
in  part     a     preceding     word.     Illustrations:    we  magnify 


...IX... 


we  may  accompany- 


—   ,  it  is  incon- 


*Phrases  introducing  accom  cannot  be  written  by  Graham  wtiters  in 
the  way  here  indicated,  as  they  express  this  prefix  bj(  a  heavyytlot,  not 
by  the  k  stroke,  as  Pitman  writers  do. 


PROXIMITY. 


183 


ceivable 


we  recognize  ....................  ,  in  recognition 


EXERCISE. 

338.     In  the  following  phrases  the  prefixes  are  indicated 
by  italics: 


did  you  recognize 

did  you  recommend 

do  you  accomplish 

do  you   contradict 

do  you  recognize 

do  you   recommend 

if  incompatible 

if  we  recommend 

in  contradistinction 

in  controversy 

in  his  incomprehensible 

in  his  uncompromising 

in  order  (to)  accommodate 

in  order  (to)  accomplish 

in  order  to  magnify 

in  order  to  recognize 

in  order  to  recommend 

in  my  recognition 

in  the  accompanying 

in  their  incompetence 

it  is  accomplished  • 


it  is  incomplete 

it  is  inconceivable 

it  is  not  accompanied  • 

may  be  recognized 

mus(t)  magnify 

mus(t)  recompense 

my  misconduct 

our  recompense 

public  recognition 

these  disconnected  reasons 

we  magnify 

we  may  accompany 

we  may  magnify 

we  may  reconcile 

we  recognize 

we  recommend 

we  might   accomplish 

when  we  recognize 

with  recommendations 

you  may  recommend 

you  may  reconcile 


"ING  A,"  ''ING  THE,"  ETC. 

339.  When  a  word  having  the  participial  termination 
ing  is  immediately  followed  by  a,  an  or  and,  the  a  tick  (per- 
pendicular or  horizontal,  according  to  convenience),  may 


184  PROXIMITY. 

be  written  in  the  place  of  the  ing  dot  to  express  ing  a,  ing 
an  or  ing  and.  Of  the  two  allowable  directions  of  the  tick, 
that  one  is  to  be  chosen  which  varies  most  from  the  direc- 
tion of  the  stroKe  to  which  it  is  appended.  Illustrations:  giv- 


ing  a  ..................  ,  doing  a_.,,l.._.,,  loving  a  .../  .....  >»-<.•  losing  a 


340.  The  termination  ing  the  may  be  expressed  by  writ- 
ing, in  place  of  the  ing  aot,  the  the  tick  disjoined.  This 
tick  is  struck  in  the  direction  of  either  p  or  chay,  that  di- 
rection being  preferred  which  varies  most  from  the  direc- 
tion of  the  stroke  to  whicu  it  is  appended.  Illustrations: 

giving  the  ...= •  doing  the  J, t  ioving  th 

losing  the  ..../r$>....  . 


341.  In  the  following  phrases,  ing  a  or  ing  the  is  to  be 
written  by  the  a  or  the  tick,  detached,  the  a  tick  being  made 
perpendicular: 

EXERCISE. 

becoming  a  correcting  the 

becoming  the  costing  a 

begging  a  costing  the 

begging  the  drinking  a 

calling  a  drinking  the 

calling  the  forsaking  a 

conducting  a  forsaking  the 

conducting  the  gaining  a 

correcting  a  gaining  the 


PROXIMITY. 


185 


giving  a 
giving  the 
having  a 
having  the 
investing  a 
investing  the 
leaving  a 
leaving  the 
losing  a 
losing  the 
missing  a 

342.     In    the    following 
curs,  is  to  be  written  with' 
acknowledging  a 
acknowledging  the 
admiring  a 
admiring  the 
choosing  a 
choosing  the 
committing  a 
committing  the 
( concerning  a 
( concerning  the 
considering  a 
considering  the 
contesting  a 
contesting  the 
destroying  a 
destroying  the 
dividing  a 
dividing  the 
doing  a 
doing  the 
embracing  a 
embracing  the 
enjoying  a 
enjoying  the 


missing  the 
refusing  a 
refusing  the 
sinking  a 
sinking  the 
smoking  a 
smoking  the 
striking  a 
striking  the 
taking  a 
taking  the 

phrases,    ing    a,    where    it   oc- 
the  detached  tick  (horizontal); 
exposing  a 
exposing  the 
expressing  a 
expressing  the 
obliging  a 
obliging  the 
observing  a 
observing  the 
producing  a 
producing  the 
reducing  a 
reducing  the 
representing  a 
representing  the 
reversing  a 
reversing  the 
suggesting  a 
suggesting  the 
thinking  a 
thinking  the 
trying  a 
trying  the 
weighing  a 
weighing  the 


186  PROXIMITY. 

THE   TERMINATION    "ING  THERE." 

343.  When  there  or  their  immediately  follows  a  word 
having  the  participial  termination  ing,  a  disjoined  there 
tick  (in  the  direction  of  either  b  or  ;')  may  be  written  in 
the  place  of  the  ing  dot  to  express  ing  there  or  ing  their. 
Of  the  two  possible  directions  for  the  tick,  that  one  should 
be  chosen  which  varies  most  from  the  direction  of  the  pre- 


ceding stroke.  Illustrations:  loving  their  ...(......S*/....  ,  raising 


their     ....^..  .......  ,  paying  their      .....>s^  .....     ,  choosing  their 

_  ........  /      .   This  heavy  tick  for  there  or  their  is  sanctioned 

by  Graham,  not   by  Pitman. 


EXERCISE. 


344.  In  the  following  exercise  the  detacued  tick  for 
ing  there  or  ing  their  is  to  be  written  in  the  direction 
of  b: 

acknowledging  their  observing  their 

approaching  their  pledging  their 

beseeching  their  preaching  their 

burning  their  raising  their 

enjoying  their  rejoining  their 

enriching  their  resigning  their 

fetching  their  running  their 

imagining  their  searching  their 

knowing  their  silencing  their 

loaning  their  signing  their 

losing  their  suggesting  their 

maligning  their  turning  their 

matching  their  urging  their 


PROXIMITY.  187 

345.     In  the   following  phrases,   the  detached  tick   for 
ing  there  or  ing  their  is  to  be  written  in  the  direction  of  ;': 

abusing  their  expressing  their 

becoming  their  forsaking  their 

begging  their  giving  their 

causing  their  having  their 

committing  their  investing  their 

(  concerning  their  having  their 

(con)  sidering  their  missing  their 

costing  their  passing  their 

destroying  their  inducing  their 

devoting  their  representing  their 

doing  their  striking  their 

embracing  their  taking  their 

exposing  their  testing  their 

346.  Where  the  termination  ing  may  be  more  conven- 
iently written  by  the  consonant  stroke  than  by  the  ing 
dot,  ing  their  may  be  expressed  by  making  the  ing  stroke 
double  length.  (See  Paragraphs  405,  407.) 

THE   TERMINATION    "ING   HIS"   OR   "ING   US." 

347.     A  disjoined  circle  may  be  written  in  the  place  of 
the  ing  dot  to  express  ing  his  or  ing  us.    Illustrations:  tak- 


~..\ __  „, 


ing  his  or  taking  us  ~..  __  „,  loving  his  or  loving  us  .. 

EXERCISE. 

348.     In  the  following  phrases,  ing  his  or  ing  us  is  to 
be  expressed  by  the  detached  circle: 

\  acknowledging  his  I  concerning  his 

I  acknowledging  us  /  concerning  us 

\  begging  his  j  considering  his 

I  begging  us  1  considering  us 

j  calling  his  j  doing  his 

1  calling  us  (  doing  us 


188  PROXIMITY. 

j  dividing  his  j  missing  his, 

I  dividing  us  /  missing  us 

j  embracing  his  \  observing  his 

\  embracing  us  !  observing  us 

|  enjoying  his  j  reducing  his 

1  enjoying  us  '  reducing  us 

j  exposing  us  _*  reversing  his 

1  exposing  his  I  reversing  us 

j  giving  his  j  serving  his 

I  giving  us  (  serving  us 

I  having  his  i  striking  his 

1  having  us  I  striking  us 
j  losing  his                               .  j  taking  his 

( losing  us  /  taking  us 

j  loving  his  j  thinking  his 

( loving  us  "j  thinking  us 

PROXIMITY   IN   SPECIAL   PHRASES. 

349.  Sometimes  a  "special  phrase"  is  not  written  by  a 
continuous  movement,  but  is  broken  by  lifting  the  pen,  the 
two  parts  being  written  in  proximity.  In  such  cases  "prox- 
imity" serves  the  purpose  simply  of  showing  that  the  two 
parts  of  the  phrase  are  not  to  be  read  as  separate  words. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 


"WILL"  OR  "ALL"  EXPRESSED  BY  THE  "L"  HOOK. 

350.     The  I  hook,  prefixed  to  a  single  consonant  stroke, 
such  as  each,  which,  much,  they,  adds  will  or  all.    Illustra- 


tions:  it  will 1 ,  which  will ......../. ,  each  will 

<L 


much  will. -f1-    >  they  wiu  ..—V ,  if  att „ , ,  &2/  all 

\ 


,atall. Pr ,inall-  -•    The  context  in 


most  cases  readily  suggests  whether  the  word  added  by  the 
hook  is  ivill  or  all. 

EXERCISE. 

351.    In  the  following  phrases,  will  is  to  be  represented 
by  the  I  hook: 

each  will  it  will  always 

each  will  be  it  will  be 

each  will  make  it  will  bring 

each  will  perhaps  it  will  be  seen 

each  will  receive  it  will  be  observed 

each  vrill  suppose  it  will  be  remembered 

each  will  therefore  it  will  be  said 

it  will  it  will  be  seen 

it  will  also  it  will  certainly 


190    "WILL"  OR  "ALL"  EXPRESSED  BY  "L"  HOOK. 

it  will  make  they  will  mention 

it  will  only  they  will  remember 

it  will  perhaps  they  will  soon  be 

it  will  probably  they  will  submit 

it  will  sometimes  they  will  think 

it  will  therefore  they  will  wonder 

it  will  very  soon  which  will 

much  will  which  will  be 

much  will  be  which  will  be  sent 

much  will  be  read  which  will  be  such 

much  will  be  received  which  will  become 

much  will  be  retained  which  will  bring 

much  will  become  which  will  embrace 

much  will  go  which  will  make 

much  will  make  which  will  mos  (t)  ly 

they  will  which  will  never 

they  will  decide  which  will  render 

they  will  do  which  will  therefore 

they  will  make  which  will  very  soon 

352.     In  the  following  phrases,  all  is  represented  by  the 
Z  hook: 

at  all  for  all  this 

at  all  reasonable  for  all  your 

at  all  risk  if  all 

by  all  if  all  people 

by  all  labor  if  all  that  is 

by  all  means  if  all  these  (vocalize  these) 

by  all  measures  if  all  this 

by  all  people  if  all  this  is 

by  all  persons  if  all  those 

by  all  present  if  all  your 

by  all  such  if  all  we  do 

for  all  in  all 

for  all  people  in  all  cases 

for  all  places  in  all  circumstances 

for  all  they  in  all  (con)ditiona 


"WILL"  OR  "ALL"  EXPRESSED  BY  "L"  HOOK.    191 

in  all  he  is  in  all  that  he  may 

in  all  his  business  in  all  the 

in  all  of  his  in  all  these   (I.  D.) 

in  all  places  in  all  they 

in  all  stations  in  all  those  (I.  D.) 

in  all  such  cases  in  all  we  have 

in  all  such  places  in  all  which  is 

354.  Will  may  be  added  to  such  by  combining  the  in- 

/* 

itial  circle  with  the  I  hook,  thus:  such  will- *•> — . 

•x 

EXERCISE. 

355.  Write  the  following: 

such  will  such  will  recognize 

such  will  be  such  will  render 

such  will  become  such  will  reply 

such  will   (con)sider  such  will  require 

such  will  make  such  will  respect 

such  will  never  such  will  sometimes 

such  will  receive  such  will  soon 

356.  A  stroke  to  which  I  hook  is  prefixed  for  the  pur- 
pose of  adding  will  or  all  may  not  only  be  written  at  the 
beginning  of  a  phrase,  as  already  illustrated,  but  may  be 
added  to  a  preceding  stroke,  provided  it  does  not  cause  an 
awkward  junction   (as  in  the  phrase  7  know  it  will)   or 


tend  to  illegibility.     Illustrations:  1  hope  it  will,,?., 
whether  they  will 


192    "WILL"  OR  "ALL"  EXPRESSED  BY  "L"  HOOK. 


357.     Write  the  following: 

I  hope  it  will 

I  hope  it  will  be 

I  hope  it  will  soon  be 

I  hope  they  will 

in  which  they  will 

I  think  it  will 

I  think  it  will  make 

I  trus(t)  it  will  be     — - ^ 


I  trus(t)   it  will  make 
I  trus(t)  they  will 
whether  it  will 
whether  it  will  be 
whether  it  will  make 
whether  it  will  receive 
whether  they  will 
whether  they  will  make 


(For  Mr.  Graham's  method  of  expressing  aZZ  or  will  by 
enlarging  Ian  r  hook,  see  Paragraphs  374-5.) 

"  FOLLOWING  "OF"  OB  "WITH." 


358.     Treating 


...as  a  "fictitious  primitive"  for  of, 


and as  a  "fictitious  primitive"  for  with,  we  obtain 

c  r 

V_     .  and  with  all       \ 


the  useful  phrases  of  all 


,  and  with  all 


EXERCISE. 


359. 


Write  the  following; 

*of  all 
of  all  a 
of  all  his 
of  all  such 
of  all  such  cases 
of  all  such  persons 
of  all  that 
of  all  the 
of  all  these  (vocalize  tJiese) 


of  all  they 

of  all  those 

of  all  we  do 

of  all  which 

with  all 

with  all  his 

with  all  my  reasons 

with  all  such 

with  all  such  cases 


•Graham  writers  may  prefer  to  write  of  all  by  prefixing  the  I  hook  to- 
i  of  tick. 


"WILL"  OR  "ALL"  EXPRESSED  BY  "L"  HOOK.    193 

with  all  such  persons  with  all  they 

with  all  that  with  all  those 

with  all  the  with  all  we  do 

with  all  these   (vocalize  with  all  which 

these)  with  all  your 

360.  The  use  of  the  I  hook  in  thejGLcaJiaBi-systfim  to 
affix  will  or  all  to  the  tick  word-signs  has  been  already  ex- 
plained.    (See  Paragraphs  234-5.) 

361.  The  careful  and  conservative  writer  will  scarcely 
apply  the  I  hook  as  the  representative  of  will  or  all  to  other 
strokes  than  those  given  in  the  exercises  of  this  chapter. 
If  the  student  should  use  this  expedient  promiscuously  or 
to  excess — for  instance,  if  he  should  write  the  I  hook  for 
will  in  such  phrases  as  country  will  or  day  will — illegibility 
would  certainly  be  the  result. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 


THE  "R"  HOOK. 


'ARE"  EXPRESSED  BY  THE  "R"  HOOK. 


362.     By   combining  the  r  hook    with    the    consonant 
strokes  ivhich,  sucli  and  they,  we  may  add  are.     Illustra- 


tions: which  are 


L. 


they  are / ,  such  are. 

EXERCISE. 


L 


363.    In  the  following  phrases,  are  is  to  be  represented 
by  the  r  hook: 


such  are 

such  are  said  (to)  be 

such  are  the 

such  are  the    (con)ditions 

they  are 

they  are  also 

they  are  always 

they  are  among  the 

they  are  certain 

they  are  known 

they  are  no  more 

they  are  not 

they  are  now 

they  are  ready 

they  are  right 


they  are  sometimes 
they  are  (w) ell-known 
which  are 
which  are  again 
which  are  also 
which  are  better 
which  are  good 
which  are  likely 
which  are  made 
which  are  meant 
which  are  necessary 
which  are  ready 
which  are  sent 
which  are  subject 
which  are  supposed 


THE  "R"  HOOK. 


195 


THE  "R"   HOOK  FOR  ''OUR.'' 

364.     To  a  few  stroke  word-signs — at,  for,  in,  which,  by, 
and  possibly  some  others — our  is  added  by  prefixing  the  r 


hook.    Illustrations:  at  our. 


,  by  our 


\ 


EXERCISE. 

365.     In  the  following  phrases,  our  is  to  be  expressed 
by  the  r  hook: 


at  our  church 
at  our  expense 
at  our  many 
at  our  mos(t)  important 
at  our  pleasure 
at  our  reception 
at  our  refusal 
at  our  reply 
at  our  request 
at  our  respectful 
by  our 

by  our  custom 
by  our  excellent 
by  our  friends 
'by  our  judgment 
by  our  leave 
by  our  legislation 
by  our  legislature 
by  our  many 
by  our  mentioning 
by  our  mistake 
by  our  permission 


by  our  promises 

by  our  receiving 

by  our  suggestion 

by  our  system 

by  our  testimony 

in  our* 

in  our  answer 

in  our  calculation 

in  our  case 

in  our  circumstances 

in  our  desires 

in  our  haste 

in  our  house 

in  our  hurry 

in  our  judgment 

in  our  part 

in  our  position 

in  our  sight 

in  our  sorrow 

in  our  times  (tms) 

in  our  understanding 

in  our  way 


*py  Graham  and  Pitman,  in  our  is  written  in  the  first  position  ;  but 
an  exceptional  resort  to  the  third  position,  (not  necessary  in  the  opinion 
of  tpe  author,)  is  supposed  by  some  writers  to  insure  greater  legibility. 


196  THE  "R"  HOOK. 

"FOB  OUR." 


366.  In  the  Graham  system   (not  the  Pitman)   our  Is 
added  to  for  by  prefixing  to  f  the  r  hook,  and  the  hooked 
stroke  is  written  in  the  third  position,  in  order  that  for 
our  may  not  be  confounded  with  from,  in  the  second  posi- 
tion.   Illustration:  for  our  case 

EXEHCISE. 

367.  Write  the  following: 

for  our  case  for  our  many 

for  our  course  for  our  readiness 

for  our  imports  for  our  reasons 

for  our  legislation  for  our  reputation 

for  our  legislature  for  our  request 

for  our  life  for  our  recent 

for  our  love  for  our  respect 

for  our  manufactures  for  our  revision 

"SELF"  AND  "SELVES." 

368.  When  our  has  been  added  to  a  stroke  by  prefixing 
an  r  hook,  self  may  be  added  by  affixing  a  circle,  and  selves 
by  affixing  a  double  circle,  as  in  the  phrases  by  ourself 


^°         7»1/  nii.rsf>.li'>f>.s  VJ 


by  ourselves 


ADDITION  OF  "OK." 

369.     In   a   few   cases  the  r  hook   adds   or,   as  in   the 

phrases  at  or  about .*!....    ,  at  or  near A. 

V.  <_x 

EXERCISE. 

870.    Write  the  following: 

at  or  about  at  or  near  that  place 

at  or  about  that  time  (tm)  at  or  somewhere  near 

at  or  near  at  or  very  near 


THE  "R"  HOOK.  197 

"B"  HOOK  FOE  "WERE." 

371.  As  the  ordinary  word-sign  for  were,  when  affixed 
to  which  and  such,  does  not  make  a  convenient  junction, 
the  forms  which  in  the  second  position  represent  which 
are  and  such  are  may  be  written  in  the  third  position  to 


\rhich   were  ........  £„,   such   were  ,-.....?..  .     This   pe- 


_...  9 


culiar  method  of  expressing  were  by  the  r  hook  may,  if  de- 
sired, be  dispensed  with  without  sacrificing  the  phrase,  by 
attaching  to  ichich  and  such  the  inverted,  instead  of  the 
regular,  form  for  were,  as  in  the  phrases  which  were  neces- 


sary  .L..r~S..  ,  such  were  never  J. (See  Paragraph  298.) 

<_V  < — ^v 

In  these  cases,  where  the  reporter  writes  would  with  the 
intention  that  it  shall  be  read  were,  we  have  an  illustration 
of  "reporting  license."  Without  a  context,  the  character 
used  for  were  might  be  misread  would;  but  when  were  be- 
comes a  part  of  a  phrase,  and  the  phrase  a  part  of  a  sen- 
tence, misreading  is  practically  impossible. 

372.    Apart  from  the  phrases  which  were  and  such  were, 
the  r  hook  is  never  used  to  express  were,  except  in  the 

phrases  it  were ^V •  and  as  M  were  ••••°\ 

EXERCISE. 

373.    In  the  following  phrases,  were  is  to  be  expressed 
by  the  r  hook: 

which  were  able  which  were  again 

which  were  about  which  were  made 

which  were  always  which  were  many 

which  were  among  which  were  mos(t)  impor- 

which  were  best  tant 

which  were  gone  which  were  rather 


198 


THE  "R"  HOOK. 


which  were  received 
which  were  remembered 
which  were  represented 
which  were  right 
which  were  said  to  be 
which  were  something 
which  were  to  be 
which  were  wrong 
such  were 

such  were  employed 
such  were  his 


such  were  likely 
such  were  my  reasons 
such  were  our 
such  were  received 
such  were  sent 
such  were  supposed 
such  were  the  conditions 
such  were  the  indications 
such  were  the  opinions 
such  were  the  thoughts 
such  were  to  be 


ENLARGED   "L"   AND  "R"  HOOKS. 

374.  According  to  the  Grahamsystem  (not  the  Pit- 
man) an  I  hook  enlarged  (except  on  n  and  ray)  signifies 
Ir;  and  an  r  hook  enlarged  signifies  rl.  In  phrasing  the  I 
thus  added  may  represent  all  or  will,  and  the  r  thus  added 


may  represent  are  or  our.    For  instance,  fir 


...£_.., 


represent  for  all  our,  and  thrl   1. .  may  repres,nt  there 

will  or  they  are  all. 

375.  The  author  has  not  found  it  necessary  to  intro- 
duce this  principle  into  his  own  practice,  but  as  it  is  adopt- 
ed by  many  reporters  who  use  the  Graham  system,  the  fol- 
lowing exercise  is  given  for  the  benefit  of  students  who 
may  wish  to  take  advantage  of  it: 


at  all  our 


f 


at  all  our  efforts 
at  all  our  meetings 
at  all  our  mistakes 


EXERCISE. 

at  all  our  reasons 

by  all  our ....... 


THE  "R"  HOOK. 


198 


by  all  our  legislation 
by  all  our  principles 
by  all  our  promises 


during  all 


during  almost 
during  all  meetings 
during  all  my  life 
during  all  my  term 
during  all  recent 
during  all  seasons 
during  all  you(r)  life 
during  all  you(r)   resi- 
dence 
during  all  you(r)   term 


for  all  are 


£_. 


for  all 
for  all 
for  all 
for  all 
for  all 
for  all 
for  all 
for  all 
for  all 
for  all 


are  doing 
are  guilty 
are  sensible 
are  such 
our 

our  designs 
our  doings 
our  friends 
our  sakes 
our  success 


from  all 


from  all  (h)  arm 
from  all  manner 
from  all  matters 


from  all  receipts 
from  all  sources 


if  all  are 


if  all  are  certain 

if  all  are  chosen 

if  all  are  determined 

if  all  are  guilty 

if  all  are  just 

if  all  are  sensible 

if  all  are  successful 


if  all  our 


CL 


if  all  our  designs 
if  all  our  decisions 
if  all  our  efforts 
if  all  our  friends 
if  all  our  lessons 
if  all  our  testimony 
if  all  our  time   (tm) 


nor  all 

nor  all  such 

nor  all  such  matters 

nor  all  that 

nor  all  these  (I.  D.) 

nor  all  they 

nor  all  things 

nor  all  this 

nor  all  those  (I.  D.) 


nor  will 


200 


THE  "R"  HOOK. 


nor  will  anyone 

nor  will  such 

nor  will  that 

nor  will  they 

nor  will  this 

nor  will  these   (I.  D.) 

nor  will  those  (I.  D.) 

nor  will  we 


of  all  our  ... 


of  all 
of  all 
of  all 
of  all 
of  all 
of  all 
of  all 
of  all 
of  all 
of  all 
of  all 
of  all 
of  all 


our  attempts 
our  best 
our  business 
our  friends 
our  lessons 
our  objections 
our  success 
our  suggestions 
our  testimony 
our  thinking 
our  time 
our  vanity 
our  visits 


over  all 


over  all  else  (vocalize  else) 

over  all  his 

over  all  my 

over  all  these  (vocalize 

these) 

over  all  the  nations 
over  all  the  world 


there  will 


there  will  always 
there  will  never 
there  will  no  doubt 
there  will  now 
there  will  sometimes 


they  are  all 


they  are  all  toetssary 
they  are  all  now 
they  are  all  ready 
they  are  all  required 
they  are  all  sure 
they  are  always 


through  all 


through  all  nations 

through  all  our 

through  all  places 

through  all  such 

through  all  the 


till  our 


till  our  case 
till  our  many 
till  our  money 
till  our  proofs 
till  our  receipts 
till  our  reasons 
till  our  recent 
till  our  term 


which  are  ail 


..Z. 


THE  "R"  HOOK.  201 

which  are  all  gone  which  are  all  right 

which  are  all  impossible  which  are  all  the 

which  are  all  mistakes  which  are  all  wrong 

which  are  all  necessary  which  are  all  the  fashion 

LIMITATION  ON  THE  USE  OF  "R"  HOOK. 

376.  By  careful  writers,  the  use  of  the  r  hook  in  phrases 
for  the  purpose  of  word  indication  is  not  carried  beyond 
the  limited  extent   o"^ 'v'^Au1   «w  this  chapter.      Inexperi- 
enced writers  should  Dear  in  mind  that  the  indiscriminate 
and  unrestricted  use  of  this  principle  may  lead  to  confusion 
in  writing,  and  hesitation  or  error  in  reading. 

377.  The  use  of  the  r  hook  on  tick  word-signs,  as  prac- 
tised by  Graham  writers  (not  Pitman  writers),  to  add  are, 
our  and  or.  has  been  fully  explained  in  previous  lessons. 
(See  Paragraphs  234,  236.) 


CHAPTER  XV. 


SOME  SPECIAL  PHRASE-SIGNS. 


"MAY  BE." 

378.    The  stroke  mb  .^z^~.is  freely  used  in  phrasing 
to  represent  may  be.     Illustrations:   it  may  be    U-v 

'     *'j       U/& 

,  you  may  be  .......  o^—s     .    We  may  be  pre- 


fixed to  may  be  by  the  w  hook,  thus:   we  may  be 

Although,  in  word-writing,  this  character  represents  mr, 
and  is  a  word-sign  for  remark,  no  conflict  can  result  from 
the  "reporting  license"  which  thus  assigns  two  different 
significations  to  a  single  character. 

EXERCISE. 

379.  In  the  following  phrases  may  be  and  we  may  be 
are  to  be  represented  in  accordance  with  the  instruction 
just  given: 

may  be  may  be  one 

may  be  able  may  be  only 

may  be  also  may  be  perceived 

may  be  as  (w)  ell  may  be  placed 

may  be  always  may  be  ready 

may  be  certain  may  be  reasonable 

may  be  aware  may  be  received 


SOME   SPECIAL   PHRASE-SIGNS. 


203 


may  be  considered 

may  be  found 

may  be  greatly 

may  be  important 

may  be  impossible 

may  be  known 

may  be  likely 

may  be  made 

may  be  never 

may  be  reconciled 

may  be  represented 

may  be  required 

may  be  right 

may  be  said 

may  be  so 

may  be  some 

may  be  sometime 

may  be  sure 

may  be  told 

may  be  true 

may  be  very  sure 

may  be  very  (w)ell 

may  be  worth 

may  be  wrong 

may  be  you 

he  may  be  certain 

he  may  be   (con)sidered 

he  may  be  ready 

he  may  be  said 

he  may  be  sure 

I  may  be  able 

I  may  be  aware 

I  may  be   (con)sidered 

I  may  be  one 

I  may  be  right 

I  may  be  worthy 

I  may  be  wrong 


it  may  be  also 
it  may  be  found 
it  may  be  only 
it  may  be  rendered 
it  may  be  represented 
it  may  be  right 
it  may  be  said 
it  may  be  true 
it  may  be  worth 
it  may  be  you 
there  may  be  always 
there  may  be  certain 
there  may  be  important 
there  may  be  only 
there  may  be  reasons 
there  may  be  received 
there  may  be  some 
there  may  be  somehow 
there  may  be  supposed 
they  may  be  aware 
they  may  be  likely 
they  may  be  placed 
they  may  be  received 
they  may  be  represented 
they  may  be  somehow 
they  may  be  very  sure 
we  may  be  always 
we  may  be  as   (w)ell 
we  may  be  certain 
we  may  be  likely 
we  may  be  reasonable 
we  may  be  reconciled 
we  may  be  responsible 
we  may  be  right 
we  may  be  said 
we  may  be  sorry 
we  may  be  wrong 


204 


SOME   SPECIAL  PHRASE-SIGNS. 


you  may  be  able  you  may  be  reconciled 

you  may  be  aware  you  may  be  recognized 

you  may  be  certain  you  may  be  rendered 
you  may  be   (con)sidered        you  may  be  required 

you  may  be  found  you  may  be  said 

you  may  be  known  you  may  be  serviceable 

you  may  be  one  you  may  be  surpassed 

you  may  be  only  you  may  be  worth 

ycra  may  be  ready  you  may  be  wrong 

"MAY  HAVE  BEEN." 

380.     In  the  following  exercise,  may  have  been  is  to  be 
represented  by  the  brief  elliptical  sign  m&n~-../"""^.— .  * 
EXERCISE. 


he  may  have  been 
he  may  have  been  disposed 
he  may  have  been  taking 
I  may  have  been  asked 
I  may  have  been  coming 
may  have  been  ( con)  demn- 
ed     (con  expressed  by 
proximity) 

I  may  have  been  known 
I  may  have  been  positive 
it  may  have  been  asked 
it  may  have  been   ('con)- 

fessed* 

it  may  have  been  essential 
it  may  have  been  necessary 
it  may  have  been  so 
there  may  have  been 
there  may  have  been  an- 
other 


there  may  have  been  so 

many 

they  may  have  been  anxious 
they  may  have  been  asking 
they    may    have    been    dis- 
posed 

they  may  have  been  doing 
they  may  have  been  taking 
we  may  have  been  asked 
we  may  have  been  capable 
we  may  have  been  especial- 
ly 

which  may  have  been  known 
which   may   have   been   ad- 
mitted 

there  may  have  been  cases 
there  may  have  been  no 

necessity 
there  may  have  been  none 


*Con  expressed  by  proximity. 


SOME   SPECIAL  PHRASE-SIGNS.  205 

which   may   have   been   ca-  you  may  have  been  asking 

pable  you  may  have  been  especi- 

which  may  have  been  pos-  ally 

sible  you  may  have  been  known 

"TO  BE." 

381.  B  struck  through  the  line,  thus  .....V.....  Is  a  sign 
for  to  be. 

EXERCISE. 

382.  Write  the  following: 

to  be  to  be  ready 

to  be  also  to  be  reasonable 

to  be  always  to  be  received 

to  be  aware  to  be  recognized 

to  be  chosen  to  be  reconciled 

to  be   (con)  sidered  to  be  rejected 

to  be  embarrassed  to  be  represented 

to  be  just  to  be  something 

to  be  limited  to  be  sometimes 

to  be  made  to  be  that 
to  be  many  times  (tms)          to  be  this 

"TO  ::AVE  BEEN." 

1'83.    Bn  struck  through  the  line,  thus V  ,  is  a  sign, 

according  to  the  Graham  system,  for  to  have  been. 

EXERCISE. 
384.     Write  the  following: 

to  have  been  to  have  been  decided 

to  have  been  absent  to  have  been  done 

to  have  been  another  to  have  been  disposed 

to  have  been  asked  to  have  been  found 

to  have  been  better  to  have  been  invited 


206  SOME   SPECIAL  PHRASE-SIGNS. 

to  have  been  known  to  have  been  passed 

to  have  been  necessary  to  have  been  shown 

"IN  RE-." 

385.     Phrases  like  in  reply,  in  response,  etc.,  in  which 
the  preposition  in  is  followed  by  a  word  beginning  with  re-, 


may  be  written  thus:  in  reply X... ,  in  response 

EXERCISE. 

386.  Write  the  following: 

in  rebuttal  in  repayment 

in  receipt  in  reply 

in  ref(erence)  in  resp(ect) 

in  rejoining  in  response 

"IN  RECON-,"  ETC. 

387.  Nr,  disjoined  from,  but  written  in  close  proximity 
to,   the   following   character,   may   represent  in   recon,   in 


recom  or  in  recog,  as  in  the  phrases,  in  recompense 
in  recognition 


EXERCISE. 

388.  Write  the  following: 

in  recommencing  in  recompense 

in  recommending  in  recognition 

in  recommitting  in  recognizing 

"IS  IT,"  "AS  IT,"  "IS  THERE,"  "AS  THERE,"  ETC. 

389.  The  use  of  the  st  and  sir  loops  as  phrasing  factors 
is  authorized  by  Munson,  not  by  Graham  or  Benn  Pitman. 


SOME   SPECIAL  PHRASE-SIGNS.  207 

The  expedient  seems  meritorious  enough  to  be  explained  in 
the  present  chapter,  for  the  adoption  of  those  who  may 
favor  it.* 

390.  Standing  alone  or  at  the  beginning  of  a  phrase, 
the  st  loop  written  in  the  direction  of  chay  may  represent, 
above  the  line,  is  it,  and  on  the  line,  as  it  or  has  it.  Illus- 

trations: is  it  f  ...........  ,  as  it  or  Ttas  it  ...  (?.  .......  is  it  necessary 


,  as  it  is  ......  ••      ,  as  it  has  been  ...<s....,  . 


391.  If  this  expedient  be  adopted,  the  half-length  z  on 
the  line,  being  no  longer  required  for  as  it,  may  be  freely 
used  for  the  very  common  phrase  was  it,  thus  dispensing 

with  the  rather  too  long  and  cumbrous  sign ) 

EXERCISE. 

392.  In  the  following  exercise,  is  it,  as  it  and  has  it 
are  to  be  represented  by  the  st  loop: 

as  it  has  it  never 

as  it  has  been  has  it  not 

as  it  has  not  has  it  not  been 

as  it  is  is  it 

as  it  is  never  is  it  necessary 

as  it  is  necessary  is  it  never 

as  it  is  not  is  it  not 

as  it  is  now  is  it  now 

as  it  never  is  it  unnecessary 

as  it  now  is  it  your     (you    inverted) 

as  it  now  appears  opinion 


*That  well-known  reporter,  Mr.  Clarence  E.  Walker,  of  Louisville, 
Ky.,  a  writer  of  the  Graham  system,  has  approved  and  adopted  this  ex- 
pedient in  his  recent  book  entitled  "Speed  and  Legibility."  He  remarks 
that  from  it  "many  beautiful,  rapidly-made  and  surely-read  phrases 
result." 


208  SOME   SPECIAL   PHRASE-SIGNS. 

3921,4  Attached  to  when,  where  and  ichy,  the  st  loop 
may  express  is  it  or  has  it,  as  in  the  phrases  when  is  it,  or 
when  has  it;  where  is  it,  or  ichere  has  it;  why  is  it,  or  wl'.y 
has  it. 

393.  Standing  alone,  or  at  the  beginning  of  a  phrase, 
the  str  loop,  written  in  the  direction  of  chay,  may  represent 
above  the  line  is  there,  and  on  the  line  as  there 

<7 

or  has  there;   as  in  the  phrases  is  there ,isthere 


anything.,.,  ...  ,  as  there  is ^  ...,  Tics  there  been 


there  not 


394.  If  is  there  and  as  there  be  thus  provided  for,  the 
double-length  z  may  be  freely  used  for  was  there,  without 
any  care  as  to  position,  thus  avoiding  the  confusion  and  il- 
legibility which  sometimes  result  from  the  triple  use  of 
this  character,  to  represent  is  there,  was  there  and  as 
there,  with  no  distinction  except  carefully-expressed  posi- 
tion. 

395.  In  the  following  exercise,  is  there,  as  there,  has 
there  and  as  they  are  should  be  represented  by  the  str 
loop: 

as  there  as  there  is  now 

as  there  has  never  as  they  are  now 

as  there  has  no  doubt  as  they  are  necessary 

as  there  has  not  has  there 

as  there  is  has  there  been 

as  there  is  another  has  there  never 

as  there  is  no  objection          has  there  now 
as  there  is  no  time  is  there 

'  as  there  is  not  is  there  any  admission 

as  there  is  nothing  is  there  any  condition 


SOME   SPECIAL  PHRASE-SIGNS.  209 

is  there  any  objection  is  there  never 

is  there  anything  is  there  not 

is  there  enough  is  there  now 

396.  A  final  circle,  whether  it  be  a  word-sign  or  part 
of  a  word-outline,  may  be  enlarged  to  a  str  loop  to  add 
their,  there  or  they  are;  thus;  because  there  or  because  they 


are  ..............  ,  of  course  there  or  of  course  they  are. 


why  is  there ,  nor  is  there  „. This  expedient 

affords  a  convenient  means  of  joining  there  or  their  to  many 
verb-forms  ending  with  a  circle,  to  which  these  words  can 
not  be  added  by  doubling  the  preceding  stroke;  thus.Zoves 

their  ,..(...  .N^. . ,  says    there .0 .,  thinks    there, .v>...... 


takes  their  I...1.Z7)... 

397.     7s  or  has,  following  there  added  by  a  loop,  may 
be  expressed  thus:  of  course  there  is  or  of  course  there  has 


,  unless  there  is  or  unless  there  has 
there  is  or  says  there  has  ........  Q.....  ,  knoics  t  here  is  or  knows 

there  has  ^^ 


210 


SOME   SPECIAL  PHRASE-SIGNS. 


EXERCISE. 


398.  In  the  following  exercise,  there,  their  or  they  are 
is  to  be  expressed  by  changing  a  circle  to  a  str  loop;  and 
is  or  has,  following  there,  is  to  be  written  in  accordance 
with  Paragraph  397: 


(because  there  (or  their) 
(because  they  are 
( because  there  has 
(because  there  is 

loves  their 

knows  there 
(knows  there  is 
(knows  there  has 
(  nor  is  there 
(nor  has  there 
( of  course  there 
(of  course  they  are 
( says  there 
( says  they  are 
(  says  there  has 
(says  there  is 


(  since  their  (or  there) 
(  since  they  are 

since  there  has 

since  there  is 
(thinks  there  (or  their) 
(  thinks  they  are 
|  thinks  there  has 
( thinks  there  is 
J  unless  there  has 
( unless  there  is 
( when  has  there 
( when  is  there 
(where  has  there 
(where  is  there 
(  why  has  there 
1  why  is  there 


CHAPTER  XVI. 


THE  DOUBLE-LENGTH  PRINCIPLE. 


EXPRESSION   OF    "THEIR,"    "THERE"    AXD   "THEY   ARE." 

399.  In  learning  how  to  write  single  or  separate  words, 
the  pupil  has  learned  the  use  of  the  double-lengthing  prin- 
ciple to  express  the  consonant  sounds  thr,  dr,  tr,  as  occur- 
ring, for  instance,  in  the  words  leather,  fodder  and  meter, 
In  phrase-writing,  this  principle  is  called  into  play  to  ex- 
press not  merely  parts  of  words,  but  whole  words  whose 
consonants  are  thr,  dr  or  tr.  The  words  there  and  their  are 
very  commonly  thus  expressed,  as  is  also  the  frequent 

phrase  they  are.    Thus  we  write  may  there.-<^.~.-~^*-—*  s° 
there  or  so   they  are,, ..\ ,   love   their 


think   their  or   think  they  are. 


400.  In  order  that  a  stroke  may  be  doubled  to  add 
there  or  any  cognate  word,  three  things  are  necessary: 

First.  The  stroke  to  be  doubled  must  be  full  length. 
If  a  half-length  stroke  be  made  twice  its  ordinary  size,  we 
have  simply  a  full-length  character,  and  thr  is  not  added.* 

Second.  According  to  the  Benn  Pitman  system,  the  con- 
sonant which  is  made  double-length  for  the  purpose  of  add- 


*In  some  rare  cases  the  advanced  reporter,  desiring  to  add  there  to 
a  half-length  stroke,  such  as  that  or  let,  voluntarily  discards  the  t  or  d 
and  writes  for  instance,  tha'  there  for  that  there,  Ze'  there  for  let  there. 


212  THE   DOUBLE-LENGTH   PRINCIPLE. 

ing  there,  or  any  similar  word,  must  be  a  curved  stroke. 
The  Graham  system  allows  either  a  curved  or  a  straight 
.stroke  to  be  doubled  for  this  purpose.  This  feature  of  the 
Graham  system  will  be  explained  and  illustrated  in  a  sub- 
Sequent  part  of  this  chapter. 

Third.  The  doubling  principle  cannot  be  applied  to 
any  stroke  which,  before  doubling,  has  any  final  appendage, 
such  as  a  circle,  a  hook  or  a  loop,  because  any  such  ap- 
pendage must  necessarily  read  after  the  word  expressed 
by  doubling.  For  instance,  though  doubling  the  v  in  love 
will  give  us  the  phrase  love  their,  we  can  not,  by  the  same 


means,  convert  loves  into  loves  their.  I     \. would  be,  not 

V^__0 

loves  their,  but  love  there  is  or  love  theirs.*  For  *he  same 
reason,  if  we  should  double  the  r  in  arraign,  the  resulting 

.... would  be,  not  arraign  their,   but  are  their 

own.  Any  circle,  hook  or  loop,  at  the  end  of  a  double- 
length  stroke  reads  after  the  word  or  words  expressed  by 
doubling. 

401.  Strokes  with  initial  modifications  may  be  doubled 
as  freely  as  simple  strokes.     The  doubling  principle  may 
be  applied  either  to  the  last  stroke  of  a  complete  outline, 
as  when  we  write  love  their  by  doubling  the  v  in  love,  or 
to  an  incomplete  outline  used  as  a  word-sign,  as  when  we 
write  think  there  by  doubting  the  incomplete  outline   which, 
as  a  word-sign,  represents  think. 

POSITION    OF    DOUBLE-LENGTH    STROKES. 

402.  When  standing  alone  or  at  the  beginning  of  a  phrase, 
the  double-length  stroke  must,  according  to  the  regular  rule, 
occupy  its  own  distinctive  position.     In  order  to  write  a 
doubled  stroke  in  any  required  position,  it  usually  begins 

such  phrases  as  loves  their. 


*For  a  convenient  method  of  writing 
thinks  their,  says  tkeir,  see  Paragraph  396. 


THE  DOUBLE-LENGTH  PRINCIPLE.  213 

where  a  single-length  stroke  of  the  same  position  would 

begin.      Illustrations :    if  J^     .  ^  their  ...X.........  t  for V^ 


for   their L ...-thank  ....(. ,  thank  their /....     But   a 


mure  »harply-defined  distinction  between  the  doubled  stroke 
in  the  first  place  and  the  doubled  stroke  in  the  second  place 
will  be  obtained  if  the  first-position  stroke  be  written  some- 
what higher  than  the  rule  requires,  so  that  it  will  rest  on 
the  line,  instead  of  being  extended  a  short  distance  below 


it,  thus: 


"OWN"  ADDED  TO  DOUBLE-LENGTH  STROKES. 


403.  When    their    is    expressed    by    double-lengthing, 
own,    which    very    frequently    follows    their,    is,    in    such 
cases,   generally   expressed   by   adding  an   n   hook   to   the 

doubled  stroke,  thus:  -for  their  own     ...V ,  was  their  own 

•     See  Paragraphs  447-9. 

EXERCISE. 

404.  In   the   following  phrases,   there  or  their  is,   in 
every  case,  to  be  expressed  by  doubling: 

along  there  be  sure  there  is 

although  their  be  sure  there  mus(t)   be 

are  there  (are  downward)  between  their 

are  there  as  many  as  between  their  friends 

are  there  many  more  between  their  several 


214 


THE  DOUBLE-LENGTH   PRINCIPLE. 


ca(n)  have  their 

cannot  have  their 
{ for  there  has 
(for  there  is 
j  for  there  has  not 
(for  there  is  not 

for  there  was 

for  there  were 

from  their 

from  their  many 

from  their  representation 

have  their 

I  am  sure  there 

I  am  sure  there  can  be 

I  -have  seen  there 

I  have  seen  there  is  not 

I  know  their 

I  know  there  has  been 

I  know  there  have 

I  know  there  is 

I  know  thei'e  is  not 

I  know  there  was 

I  know  there  will    (will 
downward) 

*I  say  there  mus(t)  be 

I  shall  have  their 

I  value  their  (I.  D.) 

*I  was  there 

I  wish  their  (I.  D.) 

I  wish  there  would  (I.  D.) 

if  there 

if  there  be 

if  there  had 
(if  there  has 
(if  there  is 

if  there  has  been 


if  there  has  not 

if  there  is  not 

if  there  is  anything 

if  there  is  nothing 

if  there  is  nothing  more 

if  there  is  no  objection 

if  there  were 

**in  all  their 

in  all  their    books 

in  all  their  documents 

in  all  their  doings 

in  all  their  speeches 

in  all  their  subjects 

in  their 

in  their  discharge 

in  their  interest 

in  their  opinion 

in  their  place 

in  their  position 

it  is  only  their 

it  is  only  their  opinion 

it  was  there 

may  have  their 

mus(t)  have  their 

near  there 

never  there 

nor  their 

only  their 
( over  their 
{over  there 

over  their  objection 

over  their  protest 

over  their  resistance 

say  there 

say  there  is 

say  there  should  be 


*See  Paragraphs  214-218. 
**aee  Paragraphs  350-  352. 


THE  DOUBLE-LENGTH  PRINCIPLE. 


215 


say  there  was 
say  there  will 
see  there 

see  there  are  (are  upward) 
see  there  is 
see  there  mus(t)  be 
see  there  will  be 
seen  there 
shall  have  their 
shall  there  be 
shall  there  never  be 
should  have  their 
should  think  there 
show  their 
show  their  reasons 
so  there  / 

so  there  are  (are  upward) 
so  there  can  be 
so  there  is  not 
so  there  may 
so  there  must 
so  there  will 
some  there 

some  there    are     (are    up- 
ward) 

some  there  should  be 
still  there 
still  there  is 
still  there  may 
still  there  mus(t)  be 
still  there     never 
such  was  there 
sure  there 
sure(ly)  there  are 
sure(ly)  there  is  not 
sure(ly)  there  would  be 
therefore  there 
therefore  there  is 


they  are  there 

think  there 

think  there  has  been 

think  there  mus(t)   be 

though  there 

though  there  has   been 

though  there  is 

though  there  will  be 

though  there  were 

was  there 

was  there  never 

was  there  not 

was  there  some 

was  there  something 

we  have  seen  there 

we  have  their 

we  shall  have  their 

we  think  their 

we  will  have  their 

we  wish  there   (I.  D.) 

well  there  is 

well  there    mus(t)   be 

when  there 

when  there  are   (are 

downward) 
when  there  is 
when  there  is  not 
when  there  never 
when  there  shall  be 
whenever  there 
whenever  there  is 
whenever  there  has  been 
whenever  there  is  occasion 
wherever  there 
wherever  there  has  been 
wherever  there  is 
wheresoever  there 
wheresoever  there  is 


216 


THE   DOUBLE-LENGTH   PRINCIPLE. 


wheresoever  there  is  not 
wheresoever  there  will   be 
while  there  have 
while  there  is 
while  there  seems   (to)  be 
who  will  there  be 
why  there  are   (are  up- 
ward) 

why  there  can  be 
why  there  is 
why  there  is  not 
why  there  is  nothing 


why  there  is  so  much 
why  there  should  be 
will  there 
will  there  be 
will  there  never  be 
wish  there 
worth  their 
worthy  their 
you  have  seen  there 
you  have  seen  there  is  nev- 
er 
you  will  think  there 


DOUBLE    LENGTH    "ING"    AXD    ".Ml!." 

405.     In  word-writing  the  double-lengthing  of  ing  has 
the  peculiar  and  exceptional  effect  of  adding  kr  or  gr,  as  in 


the  words  rancor. .S. and  languor. 


and  the 


doubling  of  raft  adds  r,  as  in  chamber. .£rrrr^*..t.     But  in 

phrases,  the  double-lengthing  of  ing  and  mb  has  the  effect, 
as  with  all  other  curved  consonants,  of  adding  there  or  they 


are.     Illustrations:   may    be    there 


.„•  raising    their 


EXERCISE. 

406.     In  the  following  phrases,  there  or  their  is  to  be 
expressed  by  making  mb  double-length: 

he  may  be  there  they  may  be  there 

I  may  be  there  you  may  be  there 

I  may  be  their  friend  you  may  be     their     repre- 

it  may  be  there  sentative 


THE  DOUBLE-LENGTH  PRINCIPLE. 


217 


which  may  be  there 
which  may  be  their  reason 
which  may  be  their  repre- 
sentation 


we  may  be  there 
we  may  be  there  also 
what  may  be  their 
what  may  be  their  reasons 


EXERCISE. 
407.     In  the  following  phrases,  their  is  to  be  expressed 


by  making  ing  double  length: 
choosing   th^ir   l>y.e:v.ftM" 
commencing  their  work 
exposing  their  purpose 
effacing   their   names 
hastening  their  decay 
noticing  their  business  (vo- 
calize business) 
opposing  their  desires 
passing  their  time    (tm) 
purchasing  their  goods 


raising  their  voices 
reducing  their  expenses 
refusing  their  admission 
registering  their  decrees 
resigning  their  positions 
signing  their  bills 
singing  their  songs 
supposing  there  has  been 
surpassing     their     expecta- 
tion 


"THERE"  AS  A  SYLLABLE. 

408.  The  doubling  principle  is  used  to  express  there, 
not  onjy  when  it  is  a  complete  word,  but  when  it  is  merely 
a  syllable  of  such  words  as  thereupon,  thereby,  therefore, 
etc.  This  principle  is  especially  useful  in  writing  the  word 
therefore  in  phrases.  Illustrations:  you  will  therefore 


,  ,  you  will  thereby   ....</ , .  you   will   thereupon 


ivhen  therefore 


I  know  therefore 


*Iny-therea,nd  iiiff-their  can  also  be  expressed  in  the  Graham  system 
by  the  there  or  their  tick,  disjoined,  written  in  the  place  of  tilting  dot. 
(See  Paragraphs  344  and  345.) 


218  THE   DOUBLE-LENGTH   PRINCIPLE. 

EXERCISE. 

409.  In  the  following  exercise,  there  as  part  of  the  word 
therefore,  etc.,  is  to  be  expressed  by  doubling: 

he  may  therefore  they  are  therefore 

he  will  therefore  you  will  thereby 

I  may  therefore  you  will  therefore 

I  shall  thereby  you  will  thereupon 

I  shall  therefore  was  therefore 

I  shall  thereupon  we  have  therefore 

I  will  therefore  we  may  therefore 

I  wish  therefore  you  may  therefore 

"THEY  ARE." 

410.  The  phrase   they  are  is  frequently  expressed  by 
doubling,  in  the  same  manner  and  under  the  same  restric- 
tions as  in  the  case  of     there     or     their.       Illustrations: 


/  know  they  are  done  ^^       ,_..J...  ....  /  think  they  are  able 


411.     In  the  following  exercise,  the  phrase  they  are  is  to 
be  expressed  by  doubling: 

EXERCISE. 

although  they  are  seen  *I  say  they  are  necessary 

for  they  are  chosen  *I  say  they  are  right 

for  they  are  known  I  think  they  are  sent 

for  they  are  said  if  they  are  guilty 

I  am  sure  they  are  now  if  they  are  jus(t)   now 

I  am  sure  they  are  (to)  be  if  they  are  seen 

I  know  they  are  decided  if  they  are  sensible 

I  know  they  are  just  so  they  are  right 

I  know  they  are  not  when  they  are  decided 


*See  Paragraphs  214-21 0. 


THE  DOUBLE-LENGTH  PRINCIPLE. 


when  they  are  discussed 
when  they  are  done 
when  they  are  seen 
whenever  they  are   sent 
whenever  they  are  suggest- 
ed 
wherever  they  are  known 


wherever  they  are  seen 
why  they  are  many   times 

(tms) 

why  they  are  ready 
why  they  are  received 
why  they  are  sometimes 
why  they  are   (w)  illing 


"OTHEK." 

412.  "Other  may  be  joined  to  a  preceding  word  by 
doubling;  but  the  vowel  must  generally  be  inserted."  (Mun- 
son.)  But  in  doubling  every,  several,  some,  my,  our  and 
your  to  add  other,  vocalization  is  not  necessary,  because 
there  is  no  danger  of  conflict,  as  other,  not  there,  will  nec- 
essarily be  supplied  in  reading. 

EXER«ISE. 

413.     In  the  following  phrases,  other  is  expressed  by 
doubling,  without  vocalization: 


every  other 

every  other  case 

every  other  occasion 

every  other  reason 

every  other  representation 

every  other  right 

if  every   other 

my  other 

my  other  reasons 

one  other 

one  other  advantage 

one  other  decision 

one  other  person 

one  other  position 

one  other  suggestion 

several  other 


several  other  subjects 
several  other  suggestions 
in  several  others 
some  other 
some  other  cases 
some  other  man 
some  other  person 
some  other  reason 
some  other  respects 
some  other  rights 
some  others 
your  other 
your  others 
your  other  supposition 
when  your  other 
if  your  other 


220  THE   DOUBLE-LENGTH   PRINCIPLE. 

EXERCISE. 

414.     In   the   following   phrases,   other   following   any 
may  be  expressed  by  doubling,  but  the  accented  vowel  must 

be  inserted,  thus: 


any  other  any  other  passage 

any  other  cases  any  other  position 
any  other  circumstances          any  other  subject 

any  other  day  any  other  thing 

any  other  decision  any  other  testimony 

any  other  disposition  any  other  time 

any  other    lesson  any  other  variety 

415.  The  common  phrase  no  other,  when  it  stands  alone 
or  begins  a  phrase,  may  be  expressed  by  double-length  n  un- 
vocalized,  but  must  be  written  in  the  third  position  (under 
the  line)  to  distinguish  it  from  another,  written  in  the 
second. 

EXERCISE. 

416.  The  object  of  the  following  exercise  is  to  familiar- 
ize the  learner  with  the  very  important  distinction  between 
another  and  no  other: 

another  answer  another  occasion 

no  other  answer  no  other  occasion 

another  book  another  passage 

no  other  book  no  other  passage 

another  day  another   person 

no  other  day  no  other  person 

another  notice  another  portion 

no  other  notice  no  other  portion 

another  objection  another  position 

no  other  objection  no  other  position 

417.     When  no  other  is  attached  to  a  preceding  stroke, 
thereby  losing  its  distinctive  position,  it  must  be  vocalized, 


THE  DOUBLE-LENGTH  PRINCIPLE.  221 


thus:  there  is  no  other  position.. al       ...^ •  No  other  be- 


ing thus  distinguished  by  vocalization,  another  does  not  re- 
quire vocalization,  though  when  written  in  the  midst  of  a 
phrase  it  loses  the  distinction  of  position. 

418.  In  the  following  phrases,  another  is  to  be  written 
without  vocalization,  and  no  other  is  to  be  vocalized: 

in  another  case  there  is  no  other  time 

in  no  other  case  upon  another  (con)sideration 

I  have  another  objection     upon  no  other  (con)  sideration 
I  have  no  other  objection  upon  another  occasion 
this  is  another  case  upon  no  other  occasion 

this  is  no  other  case  upon  another  subject 

there  is  another  position     upon  no  other  subject 
there  is  no  other  position  under  another  (con)dition 
there  is  another  time  under  no  other  (con)dition 

419.  If,  at  the  end  of  a  phrase,  one  word  or  several  words 
be  omitted,  to  be  supplied  by  the  sense,  as  in  the  phrase 

in  reference  to,  which  is  constantly  written ^~  ,the 

last  stroke  actually  written,  though  it  be  not  the  last  sound 
of  the  phrase,  may  be  made  double  length  to  express  their, 
if  the  requirements  for  doubling  be  otherwise  complied 

with.    Thus  we  write  in  reference  to  their ... 

"FICTITIOUS  PIUMITIVES"  MADE  DOUBLE  LENGTH. 

420.  As  previously  explained,  in  some  cases  the  prim- 
itive word  of  the  phrase  is  supposed  or  assumed  to  be  writ- 
ten in  a  manner  different  from  ordinary,  whereby,  when 
the  supposed  or  assumed  form  is  subjected  to  phrasing 
rules,  we  obtain  useful  phrases  which  would  not  otherwise 
be  practicable.  These  primitive  forms,  different  from  those 


222  THE   DOUBLE-LENGTH   PRINCIPLE. 

which  are  in  fact  used,  have  been  designated  "fictitious 
primitives."  The  following  illustrations  will  show  how  the 
fictitious  forms  are  utilized  in  connection  with  the  doubling 
principle: 

By  doubling the  fictitious  primitive  for  the,  we 


obtain  the  phrase  the  other. 


By  doubling ..,  the  fictitious  primitive  for  of,  we 


obtain  the  phrases  of  their \?^_...and  of  all  there  ..>*«_.,„ 

By  doubling 4---  ,  the  fictitious  primitive  for  that,  we 

obtain  that  there  •"**  "* . 


By  doublingr..^,,..^.-.   the  fictitious  primitive  for  with,  we 
obtain  the  phrase  with  their...-. .!...,. 


By  doubling.,     ,  the  fictitious  primitive  for  or,  we 


obtain  the  phrase  or  there  or  or  other 


By  doubling  ^..;— and  ........Y....,  the  fictitious  primitives  for 


THE  DOUBLE-LENGTH  PRINCIPLE.  223 

is   and   as,   we   obtain   the   phrases  is   their,..../...,  ...and  as 
their  ... 


EXERCISE. 

421.  In  the  following  phrases  other,  their  and  there, 
wherever  they  occur,  should  be  expressed  by  doubling  the 
"fictitious  primitive,"  which  in  each  case  is  distinguished  by 
italics: 


all   the   other 

and  the  other 

*as  there 

as  there  are  (are  upward) 

as  there  can  be 

as  there  has  been 

as  there  has  never 

as  there  may  be 

as  there  should  be 

as  there  was 

as  there  will  be 

between  the  other 

by  some  means  or  other 

by  the  other 

give  the  other 

*has  there 

7ms  there  been 

Ties  there  never 

Tias  there  not 

I  know  the  other 

if  the  other 

is  the  other 

*is  there 

is  there  a 


is  there  never 

is  there   nobody 

is  there  none 

is  there  no  more 

is  there  not 

is  there  now 

is  their  own 

is  there  some 

is  there  somebody 

is  there  to  be 

many  of  their 

of  all  their 

of  all  their  doings 

of  all  their  lessons 

of  all  their  services 

of  all  their  success 

of  all  their  suggestions 

of  all  their  demands 

on  the  other  supposition 

of  some  kind  or  other 

of  there 

of  their  doings 

of  their  lessons 

of  their  services 


*For  another  method  of  expressing  as  there,  has  there  and  is  there,  see 
Paragraphs  393-395. 


224 


THE   DOUBLE-LENGTH   PRINCIPLE. 


of  their  success 
of  their  suggestions 
of  their  time 
that  there  is  now 
that  there  must  be 
that  there  will  be 
the  other 
the  others 
the  other  is  said 
the  other  side 
under  the  other 
when  the  other 
where  the  other 


with 
with, 
with 
with 
with 
with 
with 
with 
with 
with 
with 
with 
with 


the  other 
their 

their  cases 
their  majesty 
their  management 
their  many 
their     reasons 
their 'regards 
their  representations 
their  requests 
their  respects 
their  services 
their  success 


422.  In  a  certain  class  of  phrases,  generally  of  a  saln- 
tatory  character,  my  may  be  made  double  length  to  add 
dear. 

EXEBCISE. 

423.  Write  the  following: 

my  dear  brethren   (brn)          my  dear  Judge 

my  dear  brother  my  dear  madam 

my  dear  captain  my  dear  Major 

my  dear  Charles  my  dear  mother  • 

my  dear  colleague  my  dear  Mr. 

my  dear  Colonel  my  dear  Robert 

my  dear  Doctor  my  dear  sir 

my  dear  father  my  dear  sister 

my  dear  friend  my  dear  Smith 

"WHETHER." 

424.     In  a  few  cases,  whether  may  be  expressed  by  doub- 
ling the  preceding  stroke.    Illustrations:  you  know  whether 


it  is 


I  will  think  whether  you  are 


THE  DOUBLE-LENGTH  PRINCIPLE.  225 

EXERCISE. 

425.  In   the   following   phrases,   ivhether  is   to   be  ex- 
pressed by  doubling  the  preceding  stroke: 

can     you     (inverted)      say     you         (inverted)         know 

whether  the  whether  it  is 

can  you   (inverted)   think        I    know    whether    you    (in- 

whether  you  verted)   think  so 

I    know    whether   you    (in-  *I    would   not    say    whether 

verted;  do  you 

I    know   whether   you    (in-    tell  me  whether  you  are 

verted)    have  when  you    (inverted)   have 

seen  whether  it  is  so 

UOCRLE-LEXGTII  STROKES  JOINED  WITHOUT  AN  ANGLE. 

426.  Although   in   general   it   is   forbidden   to   run   to- 
gether two  strokes  of  different  lengths  without  an  angle  or 
distinct  point  of  junction,  to  show  where  one  stroke  ends 
and  the  other  begins,  yet  by  "reporting  license"  we  may 

write  among   there  **^\^ -^ ,   bring  there 


being   there      \^-^-^-,  and  a  few  similar  combinations. 

EXERCISE. 

427.    Write  the  following: 

among  their  acquaintance  being  their  agent 

among  their  agents  being  their  counsel 

among  their  families  being  their  friend 

among  their  friends  being  there  at  once 

among  their  neighbors  being  there  in  time  (tm) 

among  their  partisans  bring  their  friends 

among  their  patrons  bring  their  energy 

among  their  superiors  bring  their  information 

among  their  supporters  bring  their  knowledge 

among  their  workmen  bring  their  work 


*See  Paragraphs  214-210. 


226  THE   DOUBLE-LENGTH   PRINCIPLE. 

TRIPLE-LENGTH    STROKE. 

428.  Sometimes    a    consonant   stroke    is    extended    to 
triple  length,  for  the  purpose  of  including  therein  an  addi- 
tional there  or  tliey  are,  as  in  the  phrase  whether  they  are 

ready 

\A 

EXERCISE. 

429.  In  the  following  phrases,  there  or  their  is  to  be 
expressed  by  making  the  preceding  strokes  triple  length: 

center  their  energies  render  their  decision 

enter  their  names  surrender  their  posts 

enter  their  house  tender  their  services 

enter  their  service  tender  their  thanks 

I  know  they  are  there  now  whether  there  can  be 

I  wonder  there  is  not  whether  there  is  now 

murder  their  reputation  whether  there  will  be 

430.  Some  authorities  have  undertaken  to  teach  and 
exemplify  strokes     of  quadruple   length,   representing,   for 
instance,  such  phrases  as  do  you  "know  whether  they  are 
there.     But,  in  the  opinion  of  the  author,   even  a  triple 
length  should  be  used  very  sparingly,  and  the  quadruple 
length  not  at  all. 

UNDULY  LONG  PHRASES  TO  BE  AVOIDED. 

431.  In  order  to  avail  himself  of  the  doubling  principle, 
the  young  stenographer  is  often  tempted  to  make  phrases 
extending  upward,   downward    or  laterally  to    an  undue 
length.-  If  wise,  he  will  adhere  to  the  rule  already  given, 
that  in  general  a  phrase  should  not  extend  more  than  two 
strokes,  or  the  equivalent  thereof,  below  or  above  the  line, 
and  should  not  extend  laterally  to  a  length  which  the  hand 
feels  to  be  inconvenient.     (See  Paragraphs  49  and  50.) 


THE  DOUBLE-LENGTH  PRINCIPLE.  227 

Such  undesirable  phrases  as  would  say  there  was,  should 
have  therefore,  you  will  there  receive,  some  other  matter 
may  therefore,  illustrate  the  double-lengthing  principle 
carried  to  excess. 

DOUBLE  LEXGTHING  OF  STRAIGHT  STROKES. 

432.  According  to  the  Graham  system  (not  the  Pitman) 
thr,  tr  and  dr  may,  by  doubling,  be  added  to  a  straight 
stroke  as  well  as  a  curve.  Heavy  straight  consonants.^when 
made  double  length  for  this  purpose,  are  to  be  made  taper- 


ing, thus:  u.-N^. Applied  to  the  straight  strokes,  the  doub- 
ling principle  gives  us  such  phrases  as  had  there.. 


their \. .  give  t Jieir ;  where  there  </... A  double- 
length  straight  stroke,  like  a  double-length  curved  stroke, 
may  take  on  additional  words  by  means  of  initial  or  final 
hooks.  As  already  explained  in  connection  with  double- 
length  curves,  an  initial  hook  takes  effect  before  the  doub- 
ling, and  a  final  hook  afterward.  Thus,  in  the  phrase  by  all 

their  own        _^> aZZ,  expressed  by  the  Z  hook,  reads  before 

their;  and  own,  expressed  by  the  n  hook,  reads  after.  By 
means  of  an  n  hook,  the  Graham  writer  may  add  to  a  double- 
length  straight  siroKe^bicn^one  "or  not;  and  by  means  of  an 
f-v  hook,  have,  ever,  for  or  fore.  Illustrations:  by  their 

\  r 

own  \    it  will  therefore state  whether  (or)  not 


228 


THE   DOUBLE-LENGTH   PRINCIPLE. 


,.. .        In  certain  cases  where  no  ambiguity  will  result, 
the  doubling  may  imply  other  or  whether.     Illustrations: 


each  other  (.. ,  such  other /.... ,  state  whether  you  are 


EXEKCISE. 


433.  In  the  following  phrases,  there,  their,  they  are, 
other  and  whether  are  expressed,  according  to  the  Graham 
system,  by  double-lengthing;  all  and  icill  by  the  I  hook; 
and  the  syllable  -fore  in  therefore  by  the  f-v  hook: 


f  ask  whether 
I  ask  their 

ask  their  attention 

ask  their  leave 

ask  their  permission 

ask  whether  it  is 

ask  whether  their  (fc,  the 
last  stoke  of  ask,  is  made 
triple  length  to  add 
whether  their  or  whether 
they  are) 

ask  whether  they  are  done 

ask  whether  you  may 

at  all  their 

at  all  other 

at  all  other   places 

at  other  places 

at  their 

at  their  own 

at  their  pleasure 


be  there 

be  therefore 

be  their  own 

believe  their 

believe  therefore 

believe  they  are  right 

by  all  their 

by  all  their  life 

by  all  their  love 

by  all  their   own 

by  their 

by  their  money 

by  their  own 

by  their  reason 

by  their  request 

by  their  resolution 

do  their 

do  therefore 

do  there  exist 

each  other 


DOUBLE-LENGTH  PRINCIPLE. 


229 


each  other  one 

each  therefore 

give  their 

give  their  own 

give  their  time  (tm) 

give  therefore 

had  there 

had  therefore 

had  there  existed 

had  their  own 

had  their  reasons 

I  believe  there  is 

I  do  therefore 

I  had  their  leave  (I.  D.) 

it  will  therefore 

state  their 

state  their  case 

state  their  matter 

state  their  reasons 

state  whether 

state  whether  he  knows 

state  whether  (or)  not 

state  whether  there  is  (t, 
the  last  consonant  of 
state,  is  made  triple 
length  to  add  whether 
there) 

state  whether  you  can 

such  (an)   other  one 

such  other 

such  therefore 

tell  there 

tell  their  own 

tell  whether  there  is  (t, 


the  last  consonant  of  tell, 
is  made  triple  length  to 
add  ivhether  there 

tell  whether  there  may 

tell  whether  there  must 

till  there  can 

till  therefore 

till  there  is 

till  there  must  be 

till  there   seems  to  be 

till  there  should  be 

till  they  are  ready 

till  they  are  received 

till  they  are  right 

to  their  own* 

to  other* 

to  other  cases 

to  other  matters 

to  other  persons 

where  there 

where  there  are 

where  there  is 

where  there  is  not 

where  there  never 

where  they  are  at  present 

where  they  are    engaged 

where  they  are  now 

which  are  there 

which  are  therefore 

which  are  their   own 

which  therefore 

which  there  is   not 

which  they  are  sure 

which  will  therefore 


*7b,  ordinarily  written  with  a  tick,  is  in  these  cases  represented  by  the 
Stroke  t  in  order  to  facilitate  the  phrases  to  other  and  to  their. 


CHAPTER  XVII. 


THE  "N"  HOOK. 

EXPRESSION  OF  "ONE." 

434.  Subject  to  fundamental  phrasing  laws  as  to  con- 
venience of  junction,  legibility,  etc.,  the  n  hook  may  be 
added  to  any  full-length  or  double-length  stroke  to  express 


0  ....... 


one.    Illustrations:  every  one  ......  0  .......  ,  some  one  ... 

435.    The  n  hook,  when  written  for  one,  may  take  an  s 
circle  to  express  the  possessive  or  the  plural.    Illustrations: 


each  one's  >  every  ones  .....  o)  .....  ,  some  ones 


another  one's 


EXERCISE. 


436.     In  the  following  exercise,  one  is  to  be  expressed 

by  the  n  hook,  an  s  circle  being  added  whenever  necessary: 

another  one  any  one's 

another  one  can  be  any  one  may  respect 

another  one  may   be  any  one  receives 

another  one  must  any  one  recognizes 

another  one  must  be  at  one 

any  one  at  one  assembly 


THE  "N"  HOOK. 


231 


at  once 

at  one's 

at  one  showing 

at  one  time   (tm) 

at  one  town 

at  one  visit 

by  every  one 

by  every  one's 

by  some  one 

by  such  (a)  one 

by  such    (a)    one's 

by  the  other  one 

ca  (n)   such  (a)   one 

each  one 

each  one's 

every  one  asks 

every  one  does 

every  one  fears 

every  one  knows 

every  one  says 

every  one  shall    be 

every  one's  time  (tm) 

give  every  one 

gives  every  one 

I  think  every  one 

if  every  one  does 

if  every  one  knows 

if  every  one  says 

if  some  one 

if  some  one  asks 

if  some  one  was 

if  some  one  would  be 

if  such  (a)  one 

if  such  (a)  one's 

if  the  other  one 

if  the  other  one  can  be 

in  each  one   (I.  D.) 


in  each  one's 
*no  other  one 
no  other  one's 
no  other  one  can 
no  other  one  receives 
no  other  one  recognizes 
no  other  one  requires 
no  other  one  shall  be 

(shall  upward) 
no  other  one  will  be 
of  each  one  (I.  D.) 
of  each  one's 
of  every  one 
of  such  (a)  one 
of  such  (a)   one's 
on  each  one  (I.  D.) 
on  each  one's 
on  the  other  one's 
send  another  one 
some  one 
some  one's 
some  one  answers 
some  one  asked 
some  one's  position 
some  one  was 
some  one  was  there 
some  other  one's 
such  (a)   one 
such  (a)  one's 
tell  every  one 
tells  every  one 
that  is  another  one 
the  other  one 
the  other  one's 
there  is  another  one 
to  some  one 
to  such  (a)   one 


*See  Paragraph  415. 


232  THE   "N"   HOOK. 

to  some  one  or  other  (r)          to  such  (a)   one's 
double-length)  when  another  one* 

437.     Exception:     No  one  should  be  writtenis— <— />  not 

,.>>^..t ,  in  order  to  avoid  a  possible  conflict  between  none 

and  no  one,  involving,  if  not  a  variation  of  the  sense,  a  loss 
of  verbal  accuracy. 

EXERCISE. 

438.  Write  the  following: 

no  one  no  one  observes 

no  one  dares  no  one  of  you 

no  one  denies  no  one  shall  be 

no  one  does  no  one  thinks 

no  one  has  been  no  one  thought 

no  one  has  said  no  one  understands 

no  one  has   seen  no  one  was 

439.  To  the  n  hook  representing  one,  the  circle  s  may 
be  added,  when  convenient,  to  represent  is  or  has. 

440.  Write  the  following: 

another  one  is  every  other  one  is 

any  one  is  no  other  one  is 

each  one  is  some   one   is 

every  one  is  the  other  one  is 

"OWN." 

441.  To  the  ordinary  signs  of  her,  our,  their  and  your 
the  n  hook  may  be  added  to  express  own.    Illustrations:  her 

-^                                                             °> 
own.. our  own  ,^\......  ,  their  own J your  ow.i 


JL 


*Neilher,  if  introduced  into  a  phrase  anywhere  else  than  at  the  be- 
ginning, should  be  vocalized. 


THE  "N"   HOOK. 


233 


EXERCISE. 


442.     Write  the  following: 

her  own 

her  own  admission 
her  own  advantage 
her  own  business 
her  own  decision 
her  own  discharge 
her  own  family 
her  own  information 
her  own  judgment 
her  own  knowledge 
her  own  position 
her  own  showing 
her  own  time  (tm) 
our  own 

our  own  assumption 
our  own  knowledge 
our  own  name 
our  own  notion 
our  own  position 
our  own  time   (tm) 
your  own 

your  own  business 
your  own  decision 
your  own  duty 
your  own  family 
your  own  judgment 
your  own  knowledge 
your  own  name 
your  own  notion 
your  own  opinion 
your  own  position 
your  own  time  (tm) 
your  own  work 
about  your  own  ability 


about  your  own  business 
about  your  own  decision 
all  your  own 
all  your  own  doing 
all  your  own  fault 
if  your  own  ability 
if  your  own  information 
if  your  own  knowledge 
if  your  own  opinion 
if  your  own  time  (tm) 
in  your  own  name 
in  your  own  position 
in  your  own  opinion 
in  your  own  time   (tm) 
it  is  your  own 
it  is  your  own  business 
it  is  your  own  choice 
it  is  your  own   doing 
it  is  your  own    fault 
their  own 
their  own  ability 
their  own  business 
their  own  fault 
tneir  own  position 
their  own  time  (tm) 
ail  their  own 
by  their  own 
by  their  own  folly 
by  their  own  industry 
bjf  their  own  showing 
by  their  own  testimony 
by  their  own  violation 
do  their  own 
do  their  own  business 


234 


THE  "N"  HOOK. 


give  their  own 
give  their  own  information 
give  their  own  judgment 
gives  their  own 
on  their  own     (on     down- 
ward) 

on  their  own  part 
pay  their  own  debts 
take  their  own 
all  your  own  testimony 
at  your  own 
at  your  own  option 
at  your  own  position 
by  your  own  ability 
Ly  our  own  business 
by  your  own  decision 


by  your  own  name 

by  your  own  neighbors 

does  your  own  business 

for  your  own 

for  your  own  business 

to  your  own 

to  your  own  disgrace 

to  your  own  shame 

to  your  own  testimony 

to  your  own  volition 

with  your  own 

with  your  own  hands 

with  your  own  knowledge 

with  your  own  name 

with  your  own  neighbors 

with  your  own  things 


443.     In  many  cases,  own  is  conveniently  joined  by  the 
n  hook  to  with  our,  thus:    with  our  own  .(^/^. 

EXEECISE. 


444.     Write  the  following: 

with  our  own 
with  our  own  army 
with  our  own  case 
with  our  own  exertions 
with  our  own  imports 
with  our  own  lives 
with  our  own  manufactures 


with  our  own  money 
with  our  own  mouth 
with  our  own  receipt 
with  our  own  report 
with  our  own  respect 
with  our  own  responsibility 
with  our  own  right 


445.     Own,  expressed  by  the  n  hook,  is  often  convenient- 


ly joined  to  in  our,  thus:  in  our  own 


THE   "N"  HOOK. 

EXERCISE. 


235 


448.     Write  the  following: 
in  our  own 
in  our  own  case 
in  our  own  manufactures 
in  our  own  materials 
in  our  own  regiment 


in  our  own  report 

in  our  own  reply 

in  our  own  representations 

in  our  own  respect 

in  our  own  writing 


447.     The  n  hook  affords  often  a  very  convenient  means 
of  adding  oicn  to  their  expressed  by  double-lengthing.     Il- 


lustrations: for  their  own 
may  be  their  own  .<^~~^>. 


,  icas  their  own 


EXERCISE. 


448.     Write  the  following: 

although  their  own 

are  their  own 

ask  only  their  own 

between  their  own 

ca  (n)   have  their  own 

for  their  own 

for  their  own  case 

for  their  own  government 

for  their  own  information 

for  their  own  name 

for  their  own  necessities 

for  their  own  neighbors 

for  their  own  notions 

for  their  own  reasons 

for  their  own  sake 

from  their  own  admission 

from  their  own  information 


from  their  own  names 
from  their  own  necessities 
from  their  own  objections 
from  their  own  showing 
from  their  own  testimony 
have  their  own 
have  their  own  notions 
have  their  own  opinions 
have  their  own   reasons 
have  their  own  responsibil- 
ities 

have  their  own  rights 
I  have  seen  their  own 
I  take  only  their  own 
I  think  their  own 
I  think  their  own  informa- 
tion 


236 


THE  "N"   HOOK. 


I  think  their  own  knowl- 
edge. 

I  value  their  own  (I.  D.) 

I  wish  their  own  (I.  D.) 

in  their  own 

in  their  own  cases 

in  their  own  report 

in  their  own  representa- 
tion 

in  their  own  reputation 

in  their  own  right 

it  is  only  their  own 

it  was  their  own 

know  their  own 

know  their  own  case 

know  their  own  reasons 

may  their  own 

nor  shall  their  own 

over  their  own 

over  their  own  name 

over  their  own  town 

receive  only  their  own 

say  their  own 

seen  their  own 

shall  have  their  own 

shall  their  own 

should  know  their  own 

so  their  own 

they  may  have  their  own 

they  mus(t)  have  their 
own 


think  their  own 
though  their  own 
through  their  own 
through  their  own  fault 
through    their    own    objec- 
tion 

through  their  own   volition 
value  their  own 
was  never  their  own 
was  their  own 
was  their  own  choice 
was  their  own  position 
was  their  own  showing 
we  have  only  their  own 
we  have  seen  their  own 
we  have  their  own 
we  think  their  own 
when  shall  their  own 
whenever  their  own 
wherever  their  own 
while  their  own 
will  have  their  own 
why  their  own 
why  their  own  information 
why  their  own  judgment 
why  their  own  notice 
why  their  own  objection 
wish  their  own 
worthy  their  own 
you  have  only  their  own 
you  have  seen  their  own 


449.  Exception:  Own,  in  the  phrase  my  own,  should  be 
expressed  by  the  stroke  n,  instead  of  the  hook,  to  avoid  pos- 
sibility of  conflict  between  mine  and  my  own  in  such  sen- 
tences as  it  is  my  own  and  it  is  mine. 


THE   "N"   HOOK.  237 

EXERCISE. 

450.  Write  the  following  phrases,  expressing  oicn  by 
the  n  stroke: 

my  own  business  expressed     by     "proximi- 

my  own  confessions       (con        ty") 

expressed     by     "proximi-  my  own  course 

ty")  my  own  decision 

my  own     conscience     (con  my  own  duty 

expressed     by    "proximi-  my  own  information 

ty")  my  own  judgment 

my  own  condition  (con  eli-  my  own  objection 

ded  and  dition  joined)  my  own  position 

my  own     convictions    (con  my  own  showing 

451.  It  need  hardly  be  said  that  the  final  hook  for  one 
and  own  must  not  be  used  in  any  case  where  its  use  would 
cause  an  awkward  junction  or  endanger  legibility.    But,  in 
general,  no  confusion  is  found  to  result  from  representing 
one  and  own  by  the  same  hook,  as  the  context  usually  indi- 
cates clearly  the  word  intended. 

"N"  HOOK  FOB  "THAN." 

452.  Than  may  be  added  by  means  of  the  n  hook  to  the 
words  more,  other  and  rather,  and  to  any  word  ending  with 
er,  the  sign  of  the  comparative  degree.     Illustrations:  ~bet- 

•^ 
ter  than %/?,..  ,  lower  £&««,/_... ..A...  ,  higher  than 


EXERCISE. 
453.  Write  the  following: 

any  more  than  better  than  mine 

any  more  than  enough  better  than  my  own 

any  more  than  necessary  better  than  the 

better  than  better  than  you 

better  than  a  better  than  you  can 


238 


THE   "N"   HOOK. 


earlier  than 
easier  than 
farther  than 
farther  than  a 
farther  than  asked 
farther  than  necessary 
farther  than  the 
farther  than  was 
greater  than 
greater  than  the 
greater  than  you 
greater  than  you  can 
harder  than 
harder  than  a 
harder  than  ever 
harder  than  necessary 
harder  than  now 
harder  than  the 
harder  than  was 
higher  than 
higher  than  now 
it  is  better  than  a 
it  is  better  than   mine 
it  is  better  than  the 
larger  than 
longer  than  a 
longer  than  necessary 
longer  than  now 
longer  than  required 
longer  than  the 
more  than 

more  than  necessary 
more  than  a 
more  than  enough 
more  than  now 
more  than  the 
more  than  would   be 


much  more  than 

much  more  than   necessary 

no  greater  than  will  be 

no  longer  than 

no  more  than 

no  more  than  can  be 

no  more  than  necessary 

no  more  than  would  be 

no  more  than     would     an- 
swer 

other  than 

rather  more  than 

rather  than 

rather  than  a 

rather  than  ask 

rather  than  make 

rather  than  mention 

rather  than  receive 

rather  than  refuse 

rather  than  remain 

rather  than  say 

rather  than  the 

shorter  than 

shorter  than  they 

smoother  than 

so  many  more  than 

sooner    than 

sooner  than  a 

sooner  than  required 

sooner  than  risk 

sooner  than  the 

stronger  than 

this  is  better  than 

you  know  better  than 
(you  inverted) 

you  know  more  than  (you 
inverted) 


THE  "N"  HOOK.          t  239 

454.     In  three  exceptional  cases,  the  n  representing  than 
is  by  some  reporters  attached  to  an  s  circle  or  an  sir  loop 


thus:  less  than ....(.. ,  faster  than....:..L  ,  vaster  than 


455.  To  the  n  hook  representing  than  the  circle  s  may 
be  added  when  convenient,  to  represent  is,  his,  has. 

EXERCISE. 

456.  Write  the  following: 

/-  better  than  is  ,  longer  than  is 

-1  better  than  his  -1  longer  than  his 

(  better  than  has  I  longer  than  has 

(  farther  than  is  /-more  than  is 

-|  farther  than  his  \  more  than  his 

*  farther  than  has  '  more  than  has 

^  harder  than  is  ,-  shorter  than  is 

J  harder  than  his  J  shorter  than  his 

I  harder  than  has  (  shorter  than  has 

c  higher  than  is  /-  smaller  than  is 

\  higher  than  his  -I  smaller  than  his 

(  higher  than  has  v  smaller  than  has 

,  larger  than  is  ,  smoother  than  is 

J  larger  than  his  J  smoother  than  his 

{  larger  than  has  (  smoother  than  has 

"N"  HOOK  FOE  "BEEN." 

457.  Been  may  be  added  by  the  n  hook  to  had,-  have  and 

Tiave  there,  thus:  have  been V;>..,  had  been.. 4 ,  have 

there 


*Benn  Pitman  does  not  use  the  hook  for  this  purpose ;  nor  does 
•Graham,  except  on  have. 


240  THE  "N"   HOOK. 

458.     Write  the  following: 


EXERCISE. 


could  have  been 
could  not  have  been 
have  been 
have  there  been 
he  had  been* 
he  may  have  been 
he  may  not  have  been 
he  might  not  have  been 
he  might   have  been 
he  must  have  been 
I  cannot  have  been 
**I  have  been 
I  have  been  received 
I  had  been  (I.  D.) 
I  may  not  have  been 
I  might  have  been 
I  mus(t)  have  been 
it  mus(t)  have  been 
it  should  not  have  been 
it  would  have    been 
many  hare  been 
may  not  have  been 
never  have  been 


must  have  been 
nor  have  there  been 
should  not  have  been 
such  as  have  been 
there  have  been 
there  might  have  been 
there  must  have  been 
they  might  not  have  been 
they  must  have  been 
we  have  been  acknowledged 
we  have  been  ready 
when  there  have  been 
which  should  not  have  been 
would  have  been 
would  not  have  been 
you  cannot  have  been 
you  have  been 
you  have  been  ready 
you  hare  been   right 
you  might  have  been 
you  will  have  been 
you  know  more  than 
enough  (you  inverted) 


459.  The  use  of  the  n  hook  in  the  expression  of  nol 
will  be  explained  in  the  next  chapter,  in  connection  with 
the  half-length  principle. 

459^.  In  a  very  few  phrases,  when  in  follows  are,  such 
as  we  are  in,  n  hook  is  used  by  some  writers  to  express  in. 


*He  should  be  made  downward  in  this  particular  case  to  guai  d  against 
confounding  the  very  common  phrases  he  had  6««r»and  Thad  been.  (See 
Paragraph  187  and  note.)  Or  he  had  may  be  written  with  the  half-length 
hay  in  the  third  position,  as  explained  in  a  previous  note. 

**In  this  and  the  next  phrase,  /  have  is  supposed  to  be  written  ac- 
cording to  Benn  Pitman. 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 


THE  HALF-LENGTH  PRINCIPLE. 


"IT"    EXPRESSED   BY   HALVING. 

460.     To  a  word  consisting  of,  or  ending  with,  a  full- 
length  stroke,  it  may  frequently  be  added  by  halving  such 

stroke.    Illustrations:  if  it,. ,  until  it .        ,  wish  it  ,„ 

it  „...._    .    By  a  circle  added  to  the  half-length  stroke, 


it  may  be  converted  into    its,  it  is,  or  it  has.    Thus-  -  • 

may  represent  ivhen  its,  when  it  is,  or  when  it  has.    The 
stroke  thus  halved  to  add  it  may  have  an  initial  or  a  final 


hook;  thus,  over  it  .  upon  it  ,....->>....,  from  £/,*..  J3u. 

461.  By  it  must  not  be  expressed  by  half-length  &  stand- 
ing alone,  nor  which  it  by  half-length  chay  standing  alone, 
as  these  strokes,  when  thus  detached,  might  be  mistaken 
respectively  for  all  or  on.  Nor  should  the  half-length  chay 
be  used  for  which  it  at  the  end  of  a  phrase,  as  in  the  phrase 

by  which  it  ,  because  the  half-length  chay  in  such  a 

case  might  be  mistaken  for  the  tick  the. 


242 


HALF-LENGTH   PRINCIPLE. 

EXERCISE. 


462.  In  the  following  exercise,  it  is  to  be  represented 
by  halving  the  last  or  only  stroke  of  the  preceding  word; 
and  in  some  cases  it  is  converted  into  its,  it  is,  or  it  has  by 
the  addition  of  the  s  circle: 


at  it 

at  its 

during  it 

during  its 

during  its  necessary 

during  its  only 

during  its  own 

during  its  time  (tm) 

had  it 

had  it  appeared 

nad  it  been 

had  it  left 

had  it  made 

had  it  received 

had  it  recognized 

had  it  represented 

had  it  something 

had  it  that 

had  it  this 

have  it 

I  must  have  it 

I  shall   have   it 

could   have   it 

I    will   have   it   done 

if  it 

if  it  be 

if  it  be  necessary 

if  it  did 

if  it  does 

if  it  does  not 

if  it  had 


if  it  had  (to)   be 

if  it  has  not  been 
(if  it  is 
i  if  it  has 

if  it  has  been 

if  it  is  not  done 

if  it  is  not  necessary 

if  it  is  not  so 

if  it  please  your  Honor 

if  it  were 

if  it  were  only 

make  it 

make  it   clear 

make  it  necessary 

make  it  plain 

I   may   make   it 

if  they  make  it 

over  it 

over  its 

over  its  own 

take  it 

take  it  down 

cannot  take  it 

I  take  it 

should  take   it 

I  think  it  (think  it  should 
be       written       on       the 

'  line     to     distinguish     it 
from  thought) 

I  think  it  is 

I  think  it  is  not 


HALF-LENGTH   PRINCIPLE. 


243 


I  think  it  may  be 
I  think  it  mus  (t)   be 
I  think  it  mus  (t)   have 

been 

through  it 
through  its 
until  it 
until  it  can 
until  it  can  be 
until  it  is 
until  it  is  done 
until  it  is  impossible 
until  it  is  known 
until  it  may  be 
until  it  makes 
until  it  must  be 
until  it  should  be 
upon  it 
upon  its 
depend  upon  it 
was  it  (see  Paragraph  391) 
was  it  necessary 
was  it  never 
was  it  not 
was  it  not  seen 
was  it  reasonable 
was  it  right 
was  it  said 
was  it  supposed 
was  it  true 
when  it 
when  it  is 
when  its 
when  it  is  done 
when  it  is  necessary 
when  it  is  not 
when  it  is  time  (tm) 


when  it  shall   be 

when   it   was 

whenever  it 

whenever  it  has  been 

whenever  it  is  chosen 

whenever  it  is  done 

whenever  it  is  necessary 

where  it  is 

where  it  is  necessary 

where  it  is  not 

where  it  is  now 

where  it  is  known 

by  which  it  appears 

by  which  it  can 

by  which  it  is 

by  which  it  is  not 

by  which  it  may  not 

by  which  it  may  be 

by  which  it    mus(t)  be 

by  which  it  was 

by  which  it  would  have 

for  which  it  is  not 

in  which  it  is 

in  which  it  has  been 

of  which  it  has  been 

of  which  it  may  be 

to  which  it  is 

with  which  it  is  not 

with  which  it  was 

with  which  it  would  be 

wish  it 

I  wish  it 

I  wish  it  could 

I  wish  it  understood 

I  wish  it  had 

I  wish  it  would 

to  whom  it  may 


244 


HALF-LENGTH  PRINCIPLE. 


to  whom  it  may  be  to  whom  it  mus  (t)  be 

to  whom  it  may   (con)cern     to  whom  it  will  be 

463.     By  the  use  of  "fictitious  primitives"  for  of,  is,  as 
and  were  (see  Paragraphs  108,274),  we  obtain  the  following 

facile  phrases:  of  it        '...  ,  is  it ,  as  it  or  has  it 


)      ,  were  it 


c 

of  all  it ....  _ 


To  these  the  circle 


may  be  added,  changing  it  to  its,  it  has,  or  it  is. 
EXERCISE. 


464.    Write  the  following: 

of  all  it 

of  all  its 

of  all  its  own 

of  all  it  is  now 

of  all  it  has  been 

of  it 

of  its 

of  its  own 

of  its  information 

of  its  introduction 

of  its  necessity 

of  its  passage 

is  it  (for  another  way  of 
writing  is  it,  see  Para- 
graph 390) 

is  it  the 

is  it  better 

is  it  important 

is  it  impossible 

is  it  known 

is  it  likely 

is  it  necessary 


is  it  never 

is  it  not 

is  it  now 

is  it  observed 

is  it  reasonable 

is  it  right 

is  it  wrong 

is  it  so 

is  it  so  much  (m,  ch.) 

is  it  supposed 

is  it  to  be 

is  it  true 

is  it  understood 

is  it  you 

is  it  you  (r)   right 

as  it  (this  phrase,  if  writ- 
ten with  the  half-length  z, 
is  best  written  in  th« 
third  position  to  distin- 
guish it  from  was  it  in 
the  second.  (See  Para- 
graphs 390,  391.) 


HALF-LENGTH   PRINCIPLE.  245 

as  it  came  has  it  become 

as  it  can  has  it  been 

as  it  could  be  has  it  come 

as  it  is  has  it  happened 

as  it  may  be  has  it  made 

as  it  must  has  it  many 

as  it  might  has  it  never 

as  it  might  not  has  it  not 

as  it  requires  has  it  not  been 

as  it  seems  were  it 

as  it  should  be  were  it  not 

as  it  sometimes  were  it  necessary 

as  it  was  were  it  not  necessary 
has  it   (see  remark    on    as    were  it  known 

it)  were  it  never 

"TO"  EXPRESSED  BY  HALVING. 

465.  In  a  few  cases  the  last  or  only  stroke  of  a  word 

may  be  halved  to  add  to;  thus,  able^^\. .,  able  to  ,  S. ...,., . 

EXERCISE. 

466.  In  the  following  exercise,  to  is  expressed  by  halv- 
ing the  preceding  stroke: 

able  to  I  shall  not  be  able  to 

be  able  to  should    be    able   to 

might  not  be  able  to  you  should  be  able  to 

you  may  be  able  to  we  are  able  to 

I  shall  not  be  able  to  when  I  am  able  to 

he  is  able  to  you  are  able  to 

I  may  be  able  to  you  will  be  able  to 

"WOULD"  EXPRESSED  BY  HALVING. 

467.  Certain    single   strokes    representing   respectively 
it,  which,  such,  she,  they,  there  and  they  are,  may  be  writ- 


246  HALF-LENGTH  PRINCIPLE. 

ten  half  length  in  the  third  position  to  add  would;  thus, 

it  would-, -,  such    would  ...^      .,  they    would  ...... 

there  would  f _. 

468.     In  the  opinion  of  the  author,  would  in  these  cases 
is  best  expressed  in  the  ordinary  way,  thus,  it  would  „.  ..I,.. 

which  would  ^^  SUCh  would. ..^......,  she  would *„...„ 

there  would .../... ~.  In  the  phrase  they  would,  the  ordi- 
nary sign  for  would,  which  does  not  conveniently  join,  may, 
without  risk  of  illegibility,  be  inverted,  according  to  the 
principle  already  explained  in  Paragraphs  298-9.  Or  in  this 
particular  case,  the  half-length  may  be  resorted  to. 

469.  If  the  word  would  be  uniformly  expressed  by  the 
"brief  way''  character,  and  not  by  half-lengthing,  the  half- 
length  device,  instead  of  representing  in  these  cases  both 
would  and  had,  will,  of  course,  have  but  a  single  significa- 
tion— had — as  explained  in  Paragraph  471. 

EXERCISE. 

470.  In  the  following  exercise,  would  may  be  expressed, 
if  preferred,  by  writing  the  preceding  word  half-length  in 
the  third  position: 

it  would  it  would  sanction 

it  would  be  it  would  be  required 

it  would  leave  it  would  be  received 

it  would  make  she  would 

it  would  receive  she  would  be 

it  would  retain  she  would  never 


HALF-LENGTH    PRINCIPLE.  247 

she  would  insist  there  would  now 

she  would  observe  they  would 

she  would  say  they  would  decide 

such  would  they  would  do 

such  would  be  they  would  deny 

such  would  require  they  would  make 

such  would  make  which  would 

such  would  never  which  would  be 

such  would  now  which  would  be  necessary 

such  would  remain  which  would  be  left 

there  would  which  would  be  required 

there  would  be  which  would  be  received 

there  would  go  which  would  make 

there  would  never  which  would  receive 

there  would  necessarily  which  would  sanction 

"HAD"  EXPRESSED  BY  HALVING. 

471.     The  words  named  in  Paragraph  467,  and  also  had 
and  have,  may  be  written  half-length  in  the  third  position 

to  add  had;  thus,  it  had  wMch  ha(l  ...........  ^  such  had 

,...^e     ...  they  had  .........  ,  there  had    .......  _..  .   ,  ......  ,  she  had 

/—.  •  .,   -have  had  .«,_  ........  ,  had  7iad  .  ......  ..--.-. 


EXERCISE. 

In   the    following   exercise,   had   is   to   be   expressed   by 
writing  the  preceding  word  half-length  in  the  third  position: 

it  had  it  had  sometime 

it  had  been  it  had  such 

it  had  once  it  had  sure(ly) 

it  had  only  it  had  the 

it  had  some  it  had  their  own 


248 


HALF-LENGTH  PRINCIPLE. 


it  had  theirs 

it  had  to  be 

it  had  your  own 

had  had 

had  had  many 

had  had  reason 

had  had  some 

had  had  something 

had  had  occasion 

had  had  trouble 

have  had 

have  had  the 

have  had  information 

have  had  sufficient 

have  had  time   (tm) 

have  had  none 

have  had  several 

have  had  such 

she  had 

she  had  been 

she  had  better 

she  had  gone 

she  had  made 

she  had  never 

she  had  not 

she  had  observed 

she  had  received 

she  had  said 

she  had  (to)  be 

she  had   (to)    say 

such  had 

such  had  a 

such  had  the 

such  had  been 

such  had  become 

such  had  many 

such  had  only 


such  had  (to)  be 
such  had  received 
there  had 
there  had  been 
there  had  better 
there  had  never 
there  had  no  doubt 
there  had  rarely 
they  had 
they  had  chosen 
they  had  done 
they  had  many 
they  had  only 
they  had  recently 
they  had  several 
they  had  such 
they  had  their 
they  had  this 
which  had 
which  had  a 
which  had  the 
which  had  become 
which  had  been 
which  had  occasion 
which  had  once 
which  had  only 
which  had  received 
which  had  somehow 
which  had  something 
which  had  sometimes 
which  had  such 
which  had  sure(ly) 
which  had  the 
which  had  their  own 
which  had   (to)   be 
which  had  (to)  make 
which  had  (to)   say 


HALF-LENGTH   PRINCIPLE.  249 

472.    Have  had  may  generally  be  attached  with  safety 
to  a  preceding  stroke,  although  thereby  it  loses  positional 

•V 
distinction.     Examples:   I  have  had ..... ,  may  have  had 


r.<rr>^..  _.*_.«  ,  you  have  had  the^.--<\-  ...... 

"NOT,"   BY   HALVING  AND  THE  "N"   HOOK. 

4t3.     To  a  full-length  stroke  without  a  final  attachment, 
not  may  be  added  by  halving  the  stroke  and  adding  the  n 


hook;  thus,  if  not  ,...„  ........  »  ^°  not  .....  J.  .......  >  had  not....^  ......      , 

J 


may  not  ^  .^..M    ~be  net  .,  ,  JOill  not, „  .    (usually 

written    above    the    line) ;    are  not     ~^\  /> 

' -«"-r-...          Of ».- f. .™~ 

was  not  „   ^ ......  ,^ve  not,,..^, ,were   not  ..r..</> we   will 


not  ••- •     we   may   n°t. i>  we  are  not  „. .„  ..,  they 

C  T,  ** 

will  not' 'I  think  not _ ;  why  not. (This  use- 
ful phrase  may  be  thus  represented  by  "reporting  license." 
(See  Paragraphs  111-112.) 

EXERCISE. 

474.    In  the  following  exercise,  not  is  to  be  expressed 
oy  halving  the  preceding  stroke  and  adding  an  n  hook: 


250 


HALF-LENGTH  PRINCIPLE. 


am  not 

am  not  to  be 

am  not  responsible 

I  am  not 

I  am  not  to  be 

I  am  not  responsible 

I  am  not  going 

I  am  not  attempting 

are  not    (are    upward    or 

downward) 

are  not  now  (r  downward) 
are  not  known 
are  not  asked 
are  not  assumed 
such  as  are  not 
who  are  not 
those  who  are  not 
you  are  not  (r  upward) 
which  you  are    not 
if  you  are  not 
you  are  not  ready 
you  are  not  received 
you  are  not  recognized 
be  not 

be  not  deceived 
if  it  be  not 
if  it  be  not  necessary 
if  it  be  not  known 
if  it  be  not  so  much 
if  there  be  not 
do  not 
do  not  think 
do  not  know 
do  not  now 
do  not  ask 
do  not  usually 
do  not  possess 


I  do  not  (I.  D.) 

I  do  not  know 

I  do  not  now 

I  do  not  possess 

I  do  not  think 

I  do  not  say 

I  do  not  see  (vocalize  see) 

we  do  not  (I.  D.) 

we  do  not  ask 

we  do  not  know 

we  do  not  say 

we  do  not  think 

we  do  not  wish 

do  not 

you  (inverted)  do  not  (I.  D.) 

you  do  not  ask 

you  do  not  intend 

you  do  not  know 

you  do  not  now 

you  do  not  possess 

you  do  not  think 

they  do  not.  ( They  had  not 
would  take  a  different 
form,  as  explained  later 
in  Paragraphs  475,  477, 
and  they  did  not  would 
be  distinguished  by  writ- 
ing did  not  separatelyj 

if  they  do  not 

if  they  do  not  know 

had  not 

had  not  been 

had  not  asked 

had  not  thought 

had  not  time 

had  not  known 

had  not  intended 


HALF-LENGTH    PRINCIPLE. 


251 


*I  had  not  (I.  D.) 

I  had  not  asked 

I  had  not  time 

I  had  not  the 

I  had  not  necessarily 

we  had  not  (I.  D.) 

we  had  not  asked 

we  had  not  known 

we  had  not  intended 

we  had  not  so  many 

have  not 

have  not  received 

have  not  now 

have  not  asked 

have  not  so  much 

I  have  not 

I  have  not  been 

I  have  not  observed 

I  have  not  received 

you  have  not 

you  have  not  been 

you  have  not  now 

may  not 

may  not  be 

may  not  ask 

may  not  receive 

may  not  go 

may  not  have 

we  may  not 

we  may  not  be 

we  may  not  be  able 

we  may  not  be  sure 

we  may  not  have  the 

we  may  not  have  their 


it  may  not 

it  may  not  be 

it  may  not  have 

which  may  not 

I  fear  you  may  not 

as  it  may  not  be 

as  it  may  not  go 

such  as  may  not 

such  as  may  not  receive 

such  as  may  not  be  aware 

he  may  not 

he  may  not  go 

he  may  not  come 

you  may  not  be 

you  may  not  know 

you  may  not  attempt 

there  may  not  be 

you  may  not  know 

you  may  not  attempt 

there  may  not  be 

all  may  not  be 

all  may  not  have 

all  may  not  have  their 

they  may  not  come 

they  may  not  go 

they  may  not  be  able 

they  may  not  be  sure 

they  may  not  have 

think  not 

I  think  not 

I  think  not  now 

was  not 

was  not  shown 

was  not  taken 


*H<>  liail  nof  must  be  distinguished  by  writing  the  lie  tick  downward 
or  by  adding  the  ordinary  si^n  for  not  to  half-length  hay  in  the  third  po- 
sition, which,  although  not  recognized  by  Graham  or  Benn  Pitman,  is  a 
safe  and  useful  sign  for  fie  liail.  ^^- 


252 


HALF-LENGTH  PRINCIPLE. 


was  not  doing 

was  not  thinking 

he  was  not 

who  was  not 

I  was  not  (/  downward  in 

the  direction  of  chay) 
we  are  not 
we  are  not  to  be 
we  are  not  received 
we  are  not  recognized 
we  are  not  many 
if  we  are  not 
I  think  we  are  not 
when  we  are  not 
where  we  are  not 
were  not 

were  not  received 
were  not  making 
were  not  many 
were  not  going 
we  were  not 
if  it  were  not 
all  were  not  ready 
they  were  not 
if  they  were  not  right 
why  not 
why  not  ask 
why  not  do 
why  not  have 
why  not  insist 
why  not  now 
why  not  say 
why  not  take 
will  not  (always  written  in 

the  first  position) 
will  not  attempt 
will  not  ask 


will  not  be 

will  not  be  ready 

will  not  become 

will  not  do 

will  not  have 

will  not  obtain 

will  not  receive 

will  not  remain 

will  not  say 

will  not  say  so 

will  not  make 

will  not  be  supposed 

all  will  not 

all  will  not  be 

all  will  not  say 

all  will  not  ask 

we  will  not 

we  will  not  be 

we  will  not  be  responsible 

we  will  not  have 

I  will  not  say 

I  will  not  ask 

I  will  not  do 

I  will  not  receive 

I  will  not  remain 

I  will  not  say 

you  will  not 

you  will  not  be 

you  will  not  have 

you  will  not  make 

you  will  not  ask 

if  you  will  not  be 

for  you  will  not  be 

but  you  will  not  be 

I  fear  you  will  not  be 

I  think  you  will  not  be 

of  which  you  will  not  be 


HALF-LENGTH    PRINCIPLE.  253 

all  will  not  receive  this  will  not  be  (will  not 

they  will  not  (express  will         downward) 

by  the  I  hook)  this  will  not  do 

they  will  not  be  it  will  not  be   (  express  will 

I  know  they  will  not  be  by  the  I  hook) 

(See  Paragraph  110)  you  will  not  be 

EXPRESSION   OF   "NOT"    BY    N    HOOK. 

475.  In  certain  cases,  the  expression  of  not  by  n  hook 
and  half-lengthing  is  not  practicable,  because  the  stroke 
to  which  not  is  to  be  attached  has  already  been  halved. 
Hence  the  following  rule:  To  the  half-length  stroke  repre- 
senting did  and  to  any  stroke  which  has  been  halved  to  add 
had  or  would,  we  may  add  not  by  an  n  hook,  thus:  did 


not  _  ......  ,.,(   u   would   not,...^.   .....  ...   which   would   not  ...... 

J 


they  had  not--  -  £-,  there  would  not  .......... 

In  these  cases  many  writers  prefer,  as  simpler  and  clear- 
er, such  phrases  as  the  following:  it  would  not   __  1     J( 


would  not 


,   ./.  .......  there  would  not  .......  / 


EXERCISE. 


476.    In  the  following  exercise,  not  is  expressed  by  the  n 
hook: 

EXERCISE. 

did  not  did  not  say  so 

did  not  have  I  did  not  anticipate 

did  not  know  I  did  not  ask 

did  not  intend  I  did  not  know 

did  not  think  that  I  did  not  intend 


•254  HALF-LENGTH  PRINCIPLE. 

I  did  not  think  you  did  not  say  that 

I  did  not  say  you  did  not  have  there 

I  did  not  see  (vocalize  we  did  not 

see)  we  did  not  ask 
you   (inverted)   did  not   (L     we  did  not  have 

D.)  we  did  not  think 

you  did  not  ask  that  we  did  not  know 

you  did  not  know  we  did  not  say 

you  did  not  think  we  did  not  say  there 

477.  In  the  phrases  there  did  not  and  they  did  not,  the 
pen  must  be  lifted,  in  order  to  give  the  phrase  did  not  its 
regular  position.     If  the  tnree  words  were  joined,  did  not 
might  be  confounded  with  do  not  or  had  not.     No  distinc- 
tion between  they  do  not  and  they  had  not  is  necessary,  aa 
.the  context  will  make  clear  the  words  intended. 

EXERCISE. 

478.  In  the  following  phrases  in  which  would  or  had 
has  been  added  to  it,  ^vh^ch,  they,  there  and  such,  by  halv- 
ing, not  is  appended  by  attaching  the  n  hook  to  the  half- 
Jength  stroke: 

it  had  not  she  would  not 

it  had  not  assumed  she  would  not  listen 

it  had  not  been  she  would  not  think 

it  had  not  done  such  had  not 

it  had  not  taken  such  had  not  thought 

it  would  not  such  had  not  visited 

it  would  not  be  such  had  not  enough 

it  would  not  become  there  would  not 

it  would  not  have  there  would  not  be 

it  would  not  possess  there  had  not 

it  would  not  take  there  had  not  been 

she  had  not  they  had  not 

she  had  not  thought  they  had  not  been 

she  had  not  this  they  had  not  become 

she  had  not  then  they  had  not  had 


HALF-LENGTH  PRINCIPLE. 


255 


they 
they 
they 
they 
they 
they 
they 
they 
they 
they 
they 
they 
they 

479. 
also  to 


had  not  observed 
had  not  understood 
would  not 
would  not  answer 
would  not  be 
would  not  become 
would  not  do 
would  not  have 
would  not  know 
would  not  necessarily 
would  not  observe 
would  not  say 
would  not  take 


they  would  not  understand 
which  had  not 
which  had  not  been 
which  had  not  enough 
which  had  not  now 
which  had  not  information 
which  had  not  necessarily 
which  would  not 
which  would  not  answer 
which  would  not  necessa- 
rily 

which  would  not  now 
which  would  not  insist 


won 


According  to  the  Graham  system,  not  may  be  added 
or  or  but  by  the  n  hook.     (See  Paragraphs  234,  238.) 


CHAPTER  XIX. 


THE   "F-V  HOOK." 


"HAVE"  AND  "TO  HAVE"  EXPRESSED  BY  THE  "F-V  HOOK." 
480.    In  many  cases,  have  or  to  have  may  be  expressed 

bv  a  hook,  thus:  which  have     </     ,  such  have-.b—^Jtwitt 
have...  ..,,li,™,..  which  will  have  —^     •,  much  will  have     /° 
hope  (to)  have. .\~--said  (to)  have. ..\i which  are  (to)   have 

^._c. His,  as  or  us,  -Allowing  have,  may  be  expressed 

by  a  circle  written  inside  the  hook,  thus:  ivhich  have  his 

or  which  have  us.-~.&~,....,  it  will  have  his  or  -It  will  have  us 

I ... 

481.  In  the  following  exercise,  have  is  to  be  expressed 
by  the  f-v  hook,  and  his,  as  or  us  following  have,  is  to  be 
written  by  a  circle  inside  the  hook: 


THE    "F-V"    HOOK. 


257 


it  will  have 
it  will  have  a 
it  will  have  the 
it  will  have  his 
it  will  have  no 
it  will  have  now 
it  will  have  this 
it  will  have  necessarily 
it  will  have  done 
it  will  have  been 
it  will  have  to  be 
ca(n)   have* 
ca(n)  have  a 
ca(n)  have   the 
ca(n)   have  his 
ca(n)  have  nothing 
ca(n)  have  received 
which  have 
which  have     a 
which  have  become 
which  have  been 
which  have  chosen 
which  have  done 
which  have  no 
which  have  not 
which  have  not  been 
which  have  never 
which  have  now 
which  have  taken 
which  have  the 
which  have  us 
which  have  his 
which  have  this 
which  have  that 
which  have  necessarily 


which  will  have 
which  will  have  a 
which  will  have  done 
which  will  have  his 
which  will  have  his  own 
which  will  have  this 
which  will  have  that 
which  will  have  the 
which  will  have    them 
which  will  have  no 
which  will  have  been 
which  will  have  never 
which  will  have    now 
which  will  have  necessarily 
which  will  have  nothing 
much  will  have 
much  will  have  been 
much  will  have  to  be 
much  will  have  now 
such  have 
such  have  his 
such  have  been 
such  have  never 
such  have  none 
such  have  now 
such  have  to  be 
such  will  have 
such  will  have  a 
such  will  have  the 
such  will  have  been 
such  will  have  done 
such  will  have  none 
such  will  have  this 
such  will  have  that 
such  have  the 


"The  writing  of  can  by  the  simple  stroke  k  without  the  hook,  is  sanc- 
tioned by  Isaac  Pitman  and  Munson,  not  by  Benn  Pitman  or  Graham. 


258 


THE    "F-V"    HOOK. 


EXERCISE. 


482.     In  the  following  exercise,  to  have  is  to  be  expressed 
by  the  v  hook: 


hope  (to)  have 
hope  (to)   have  a 
hope  (to)   have  the 
hope  (to)  have  his 
hope  (to)   have  enough 
hope  (to)   have  none 
hope  (to)  have  better    suc- 
cess 

hope  (to)  have  informa- 
tion 

hope  (to)  have  no  more 
I  hope  (to)  have  (I.  D.) 
I  hope  (to)   have  enough 
I  hope  (to)  have  the 
I  hope  (to)  have  a 
I  hope  (to)  have    informa- 
tion 

I  hope  (to)  have  another 
said  (to)  have 
said  (to)  have  information 
said  (to)  have  another 
said  (to)  have  now 
said   (to)  have  been 
said  (to)  have  known 
said  (to)  have  obtained 
said  (to)  have  finished 
is  said  (to)  havetaken  (be- 
gin   phrase   with    double 
circle) 

is  said  (to)  have   informa- 
tion 
is  said  (to)  have  included 


is  said  (to)   have  none 
is  said  (to)   have   shown 
who  was  said   (to)   have 
may  be  said   (to)  have 
I  may  be  said  (to)  have 
you  may  be  said  (to)  have 
they  may  be  said  (to)  have 
we  may  be  said  (to)  have 
cannot  be  said  (to)  have 
will  be  said  (to)  have 
should  be  said  (to)  have 
never  said    (to)    have 
it  is  said  (to)  have  (double 

circle  following  it) 
we  are  said  (to)  have 
they  are  said  (to)  have 
who     is     said     (to)     have 
(one  s  omitted.  See  Par- 
agraph 159.) 

such  may  be  said  (to)  have 
you  are  said   (to)    have 
was  said  (to)   have 
I   was   said    (to)    have    (I 
downward    in    the    direc- 
tion of  chay) 
he  was  said  (to)  have 
try  (to)   have 
we  will  try  (to)  have 
we  may  try   (to)    have   (I. 

D.) 

I  try  (to)  have  (I.  D.) 
you  will  try  (to)  have 


THE    "F-V"    HOOK. 


259 


•which  are   (to)   have  which   are    (to) have  infor- 

which  are  (to)  have  anoth-        mation 

er  which  are   (to)   have  noth- 

which       are       (to)       have        ing 

enough  which  are   (to)   have  this 

EXERCISE. 

483.     In  the  following  phrases    to  have  is  to  be  added 
by  means  of  the  v  hook  to  which  ivere  and  such  were,  thus: 


which  were  to  have ,.,. .2-  . 

6 

(See  Paragraphs  371-373.) 
which  were  to  have  a 
which  were  to  have  the 
which  were  to  have    anoth- 
er 

which  were  to  have  an- 
swered 

which  were  to  have    been 
which  were  to  have  done 
which  were  to  have  this 
which  were  to  have  enough 
which  were  to  have     infor- 
mation 

which  were  to  have  knowl- 
edge 

which  were  to  have  taken 
which  were  to  have  that 
which  were  to  have  this 
such  were  to  have 


such  were  to  have  a 
such  were  to  have  an- 
other 

such  were  to  have   answer- 
ed 

such  were  to  have  been 
such  were  to  have  enough 
such  were  to  have    entered 
such  were  to  have  this 
such  were  to  have  informa- 
tion 

such  were  to  have     knowl- 
edge 

such  were  to  have  none 
such  were  to  have  noticed 
such  were  to  have  that 
such  were  to  have  the 


such  were  to  have  this 
"OUGHT  TO  HAVE." 

484.  The  consonant  stroke  t,  in  the  first  position,  is 
used  in  the  Benn  Pitman  system,  as  a  "fictitious  primitive" 
for  ought,  in  order  to  form  certain  phrases,  especially  the 
phrases  ought  to  have  and  its  derivatives.  Ought  to  have 
may  be  so  expressed  in  writing  the  following: 


260  THE    "F-V"    HOOK. 

485.  EXERCISE. 

ought  to  have  this  ought  to  have  information 

ought  to  have  that  ought  to  have  been 

ought  to  have  none  ought  to  have  become 

ought  to  have  now  ought  to  have  found 

ought  to  have  shown  ought  to  have  information 

486.  It,  which  and  such,  in  the  first  position,  with  the  v 
hook  attached,  may  be  used  to  represent  respectively,  it 
ought  to  have,  which  ought  to  have,  and  such  ought  to  have; 

thus:  it  ought  to  have „....,.,..,  which  ought  to  have ^. 


f 

such  ought  to  have In  these  cases  ought  is  neith- 
er written  nor  indicated,  unless  we  may  regard  it  as  being 
indicated  by  the  mere  position  of  the  hooked  stroke.  (It 
will  be  observed  that  it  ought  to  have  is  in  the  Benn  Pit- 
man system  written  in  precisely  the  same  way  as  ought  to 
have.  In  the. Graham  system,  the  latter  phrase  is  written  by 
adding  to  the  ordinary  sign  for  ought  the  v  hook.) 

487.  These  three  signs  are  recommended  by  both  Gra- 
ham and  Benn  Pitman,  and  though  somewhat  anomalous, 

•••^•••fc 

they  afford  when  well  learned  a  convenient  means  of  writ- 
ing three  very  common  and  useful  phrases. 

488.  EXERCISE. 

it  ought  to  have  it  ought  to  have  chosen 

it  ought  to  have  the  it  ought  to  have  taken 

it  ought  to  have  his  it  ought  to  have  become 

it  ought  to   have  none  it  ought  to  have  gone 

it  ought  to  have  nothing  it  ought  to  have  shown 

it  ought  to  have  enough  such  ought  to  have 

it  ought  to  have  done  such  ought  'to  have  the 

it  ought  to  have  been  such  ought  to  have  his 


THE    "F-V"    HOOK. 


261 


such  ought  to  have  finished 
such  ought  to  have  nothing 
such  ought  to  have  become 
such  ought  to  have  been 
such  ought  to  have  done 
which  ought  to  have 
which  ought  to  have  be- 
come 


which  ought  to  have  been 
which  ought  to  have    chos- 
en 

which  ought  to  have    done 
which  ought  to  have  finish- 
ed 

which  ought  to  have  his 
which  ought  to  have  the 


"WOULD  HAVE." 

489.     Would  have  may  be  added  to  which,  it  and  such 
by  writing  the  consonant  stroke  in  the  third  position  and 

adding  the  v  hook,  thus:     it  would  have    I ,  which 


would   have 


,   such   would   have  ^... 


,.  .    This 


rather  arbitrary  method  of  representing  would  have  is  au- 
thorized by  both  Graham  and  Benn  Pitman,  but  is  re- 
jected in  practice  by  many  writers,  even  of  those  systems, 
because  would  have  following  it,  which  and  such,  can  be 
readily  and  very  clearly  expressed  by  joining  the  ordinary 
word-signs  for  would  and  have. 


EXERCISE. 


it  would 
it  would 
it  would 
it  would 
it  would 
it  would 
it  would 
it  would 
it  would 
it  would 
it  would 
it  would 


have 
have  a 
have  the 
have  another 
have  been 
have  found 
have  nothing 
have  taken 
have  that 
have  them 
have  this 
have  to  be  done 


such  would  have 
such  would  have  been 
such  would  have  his 
such  would  have  us 
such  would  have  taken 
such  would  have  the 
such  would  have  them 
such  would  have  to  be    done 
such    would    have    to    be 

found 

which  would  have 
which  would  have  a 


262  THE    "F-V"    HOOK. 

which  would  have  another  which  would  have  this 

which  would  have  his  which    would    have    to    be 
which  would  have  us  done 

which  would  have  that  which  would  have    to    be 
which  would  have  them  made 

"HAVE  HAD"  OB  "HAVE  IT." 

490.    A  full-length  stroke  to  which  an  f-v  hook  has  been 
attached  to  express  have  or  to  have  may  be  made  half-length 

to  add  had  or  it;  thus  which  have  /. t  which  have 

had  c <!.,..,,  ought  to  have        '........ ,  ought  to  have  had  or 


b                                          P 
ought  to  have  it    , ,  it  will  have    ,, b ,  it  will 


have  had  or  it  will  have  it~. ..  C_,»  it  would  have L. 

it  would  have  it  or  it  would  have  had 

lj 

EXERCISE. 

491.     In   the   following   phrases,   which    have 
becomes  by  halving  which  have  had  or  which  have  it  ..A 


which  have  had  which  have  had      informa- 

which  have  had  no  tion 

which  have  had  enough          which  have  had  knowledge 


THE    "P-V"    HOOK.  263 

which  have  had  nothing  which  have  had  the    recog- 

which  have  had  the  most  nition 

which  have  had  the  resolu-  which  have  it 

tion  which  have  its 


492.    In  the  following  phrases,  such  have   ••«••« be- 


comes  by  halving  such  have  had  or  such  have  it 


such  have  had  such  have  had  nothing 

such  have  had  another  such  have  had  no  means 

such  have  had  enough  such  have  had  no  time  (tm) 

such  have  had  information  such  have  had  notice 

such  have  had  no       knowl-  such  have  it 

edge  such  have  its 

493.    In  the  following  phrases,  which  will  have  „„&.  .....  .. 

becomes  by  halving  which  will  have  had  or  which  will  have 


which  will  have  had  which    will  have    had  no 
which  will  have  had  anoth-        more 

er  which  will  have  had  no  part 

which  will  have  had     any-  which  will  have  had  neces- 

thing  sarily 

which  will  have  had  enough  which  will  have  it 

which  will  have  had  none  which  will  have  its 


494.     In  the  following  phrases,  it  will  have 


264 


THE    "F-V"    HOOK. 


becomes  by  halving,  it  will  have  had  or  it  ivill  have  it     C   ., 

it  will  have  had  it  will  have  had     informa- 

it  will  have  had  the  tion 

it  will  have  had  enough  it  will  have  had  no  notice 

it  will  have  had  knowledge  it  will  have  it 

it  will  have  had  notice  it  will  have  its 


495.     In  the  following  phrases,  such  will  have     ...&._ 
becomes  by  halving,  such  icill  have  had  or  such  will  have  it 


such  will  have  had 

such  will  have  had  another 

such  will  have  had      infor- 

mation 
such  will  have  had  no  time 


such     will     have     had  the 

pleasure 

such  will  have  had  various 
such  will  have  it 
such  will  have  its 


496.     In  the  following  phrases,  it  would  have 
becomes  by  halving  it  would  have  had  or  it  would  have  it 


it  would  have  had 
it  would  have  had  a 
it  would  have  had  another 
it  would  have  had  enough 
it  would  have  had  knowledge 
it  would  have  had  no      in- 
formation 


it  would  have  had  none 
it  would  have  had  nothing 
it  would  have  had  no  sucli 

thing 

it  would  have  it 
it  would  have  it  known 
it  would  have  its 


THE    "F-V"    HOOK.  265 

497.  In  the  following  phrases,  which  would  have  ..~./.-~~. 

Lf 

becomes  by  halving,  which  would  have  had  or  which  would 

have  it  ....         • 
t 

which  would  have  had  which  would  have  had     no 

which  would  have  had    a  more  reason 

which     would     have     had  which  would  have  had  noth- 

enough  ing 

which  would  have  had     in-  which  would  have  had  time 

formation  which  would  have  it 

which  would  have  had  the  which  would  have  its- 

498.  In  the  following  phrases,  such  would  have    .../?.  .... 

L/ 

becomes  by  halving  such  would  have  had  or  such  would 
have  it  '•••••#••  '• 

such  would  have  had  such  would  have  had     tes- 

such  would  have  had  a  timony 

such  would  have  had  an-  such  would  have  had  time 

other  such  would  have  it 

such      would      have      had  such  would  have  its 

enough 

499.  In  the  following  phrases,  hope  to  have  ,...\^  .......... 

becomes  by  halving  hope  to  have  had  or  hope  to  have  it 


hope  to  have  had  hope  to  have  had  informa- 
hope  to  have  had  another    tion 

hope  to  have  had  anything  hope  to  have  had  no  more 

hope  4o  have  had  enough  hope  to  have  had  nothing 


266  THE    "F-V"    HOOK. 

hope  to  have  it  hope  to  have  it  now 

hope  to  have  it  entered          hope  to  have  its 
500.    In  the  following  phrases,  the  Benn  Pitman  sign 


for  ought  to  nave     .........  -       becomes  by  halving  ought  to 


have  had  or  ought  to  have  it 


ought  to  have  had  mation 

ought  to  have  had  a  ought  to  have   had    knowl- 

ought    to    have  had  anoth-        edge 

er  ought  to  have  had  notice 

ought  to  have  had  enough  ought  to  have  had  testi- 
ought  to   have   had   infor-        mony 


501.  In  the  following  phrases,  said  to  have 
becomes  by  halving  said  to  have  had  or  said  to  have  it 

.t     : 

said  to  have  had  said  to  have  had   no     such 

said  to  have  had  enough  thing 

said  to  have  had     informa-    said  to  have  had  time 

tion  said  to  have  it 

*3aid  to  have  had  no  more      said  to  have  its 

502.  In   the   following  phrases,   which   were   to   have 

,^,...2..*       becomes  by  halving  which  were  to  have  had  or 
which  were  to  have  it  •  ••*--*; 

which  were  td  have  had          which  were  to  have  had 

which  were  to  have  had  a        enough 
which  were  to  have  had         which  were  to  have  it 
another  which  were  to  have  its 


THE    "F-V"    HOOK.  267 

which  were  to  have  had         which  were  to  have  had  no 
nothing  which  were  to  have  had  it 

503.    In  the  following  phrases,  such  were  to  have  «~  ?  , 
becomes  by  halving  such  were  to  have  had  or  such  were  to 


have  it  .....  -a  ......  ; 

such  were  to  have  had  such  were  to  have  had    in- 
such  were  to  have  had   an-        formation 

other  such    were    to    have    had 
such  were  to  have  had  any-         nothing 

thing  such   were    to    have    had 
such    were    to    have    had        time  (tm) 

enough 

"OF"  EXPRESSED  BY  "v"  HOOK. 

504.  Of,  medial  or  final,  may  be  expressed  by  the  v  hook; 
thus:    out   of,  ........  I  ........  ...  ,   each   of,  ...............  ,   in   receipt   of 


Q-^f 

L...,,    another    side    of  ,.s~-  —  -*3  •••-.,  aware  of 


time    of    day   ~V His  or  us  following  of  may  be  ex- 
pressed by  writing  a  circle  inside  the  hook,  thus:  each  of  us 

„ .,...  ,  much  of  his,.-./- — ,  out  of  his.. I 


EXERCISE. 


505.  In  the  following  exercise,  of  is  to  be  expressed  by 
the  v  hook;  and  his  or  us  following  of  is  to  be  attached  to 
the  hook  by  a  circle: 


268 


THE    "F-V"    HOOK. 


a  number  of  cases 
a  number  of  his 
a  number  of  us 
ahead  of  another 
ahead  of  time   (tm) 
another  side  of 
aware  of 
aware  of  his 
aware  of  many 
aware  of  most 
"city  of  Annapolis 
city  of  Newark 
city  of  Newport 
danger  of  delay 
danger  of  fire 
danger  of  his 
danger  of  that 
danger  of  this 
danger  of  those 
day  of  January 
day  of  June 
day  of  July 
day  of  October 
day  of  November 
each  of 
each  of  a 
each  of  his 
each  of  us 
each  of  his  own 
each  of  them 
each  of  this 
each  of  which 
each  of  your 
great  number  of 


I  am  aware  of 
in  receipt  of  them 
in  sight  of  (I.  D.) 
inside  of 

it  is  said  of  another 
it  is  said  of  us 
lack  of  information 
lack  of  knowledge 
much  of 
much  of  his 
much  of  his  own 
much  of  that 
much  of  this 
much  of  your  own 
number  of  bills 
number  of  books 
number  of  his 
number  of  us 
number  of  names 
number  of  packages 
number  of  necessary 
number  of  pages 
number  of  papers 
out  of 
out  of  a 
out  of  the 
out  of  fashion 
out  of  his 
out  of  nothing 
out  of  patience 
out  of  this 
out  of  that 
out  of  time  (tm) 
out  of  town 


*O/  following  City  is  often  omitted  and  the  next  word  joined,  leav- 
ing of  to  be  supplied  by  context. 


THE    "F-V"    HOOK. 


269 


out  of  temper 

outside  of  that 

right  of  another 

right  of  action 

right  of  possession 

right  side  of  them 

state  of  decay 

state  of  neglect 

*State  of  New  York 

State  of  New  Jersey 

State  of  Texas 

such  are  of 

such  are  of  no  account 

such  of 

such  of  a 

such  of  his 

such  of  us 

such  of  his  neighbors 

such  of  those 


such  of  them 
such  of  your  own 
such  were  of  this  class 
such  were  of  this   kind 
time  of  day 
time  of     night 
time  of  payment 
which  are  ef 
which  are  of  another 
which  are  of  bes(t)  make 
which  are  of   bes(t)    mate- 
rial 

which  are  of  necessity 
which  are  of  no  account 
which  are  of  no  value 
which  are  of  that  class 
which  are  of  those  classes 
which  are  of  this  class 
which  are  of  this  kind 


"IT"    OB    "ITS"    EXPRESSED    BY    HALVING. 

506.  A  full-length  stroke  to  which  of  has  been  attached 
by  the  v  hook,  may  be  made  half-length  to  add  it,  which 
may  be  converted  into  its  by  adding  a  circle  to  the  hook, 


thus:  out  of 


507. 


., ,  out  of  it , ,  out  of  its v> 

U  \s> 

EXERCISE. 


Write  the  following: 

aware  of  it 
each  of  its 
much  of  it 
much  of  its 
out  of  it 


out  of  its 
such  of  it 
such  of  its 
said  of  it 
said  of  its 


* O/  following  State  is  often  omitted,  and  the  next  word  joined  leav- 
ing of  to  b«  supplied  by  context.    (See  Paragraph  657.) 


\ 


270      .  THE    "F-V"    HOOK. 

"v"  HOOK  ON  "ITH"  AND  "THE." 

508.  The  large  final  hook  on  the  consonant  strokes  ith 
and  the  is  theoretically  a  shun  hook;  but  as  such  it  is  use- 
less, there  being  no  word  in  the  English  language  which 
for  the  use  of  such  a  hook  upon  these  two  strokes. 
some  authors  (including  Graham,  but  not  Benn  Pit- 
man) treat  the  large  final  hook  in  these  two  cases  as  an 
f-v  hook,  and  utilize  it  to  represent  of  on  ith,  and  have  on 


the,  thus  obtaining  the  useful  phrases  think  of.  .  __ 
and  they  have   ,.\j...    ,  which  become    still  further  useful 


in     their     various     combinations,     as     7     think     of     an- 


.other  ....^Trr^T ..  ,  they  have  never  been 


EXERCISE. 
509.     The  following  exercise  has  been  prepared  for  the 

-use  of  those  who  wish  to  introduce  into  their  practice  this 

method  of  representing  of  and  have: 
I  think  of  we  think  of  objecting 

I  think  of  answering  when  you  (inverted)  think 

I  think  of  his  of 

I  will  think  of  another  will  they  think  of 

I  will  think  of  his  they  have 

I  will    think  of  nobody          they  have  a 
I  will    think    of    no    such    they  have  another 

thing  they  have  attempted 

we  think  of  they  have  become 

we  think  of  answering  they  have  done 

we  think  of  doing  they  have  had 

we  think  of  going  they  have  enough 

•we  think  of  nothing  they  have  finished 


THE    "F-V"    HOOK.  271 

they  have  found  as     soon     as     they     have 

they  have  information  enough 

they  have  no  knowledge  they  will  have 

they  have  nothing  they    will    have    no    time 

will  they  have  time(t,  m)  (tm) 

will  they  have  known  they    will     have4    another 

as  soon  as  they  have  chance 

510.     In  analogy  with  which  ought  to  have  ... 


etc.,  (see  Paragraph  486),  we  may  write  they  ought  to  have 

\J 

:  and  in  analogy  with  which  would  have ../.. »  eiCt» 

(see  Paragraph  488),  we  may  write  they  would  have      C <•  - 

EXERCISE. 

511.  Write  the  following: 

they  ought  to  have  they  would  have  denied 

they  ought  to  have  another  they  would  have  done 

they  ought  to  have  heen  they  would  have  entered 

they  ought  to  have  enjoyed  they  would  have  finished 

they  ought  to  have      infor-  they  would  have  gone 

mation  they  would  have  kept 

they  ought  to  have     insist-  they  would  have  known 

ed  they  would  have  no  such 

they  ought  to  have  seen  they  would  have  nothing 

they  would  have  they  would  have  notice 

they  would  have  a  they  would  have  seen 

they  would  have  answered  they  would  have  taken 

"V"    HOOK    ON    TICKS. 

512.  The  attaching  of  the  f-v  hook  to  tick  word-signs 
(as  taught  hv  Mr    rtrafrjyn^   to  express  have  or  of,  as  in 
the   phrases  all  of.,  to  lia-ve.  has  been  fully  explained  in 
Paragraphs  234,  237. 


CHAPTER  XX. 


THE  "N  CURL." 

513.  The  initial  n  hook  (otherwise  called  the  "in  hook" 
or  the  "in  curl")  is  used  in  word-writing  to  express  the 
syllables  in,  un,  or  en  at  the  beginning  of  such  words  as 

Leu                                        ^ 
, ,  unstrung  - .[^,  -and  enslave       ./o....V_ 

In  phrase-writing  the  "in  curl"  or  "in  hook"  represents  only 
the  word  in.    The  circle  following    the    "curl"    expresses 

sometimes  the  s  beginning  the  next  word,  as  in  sober  >.._\  .... 

T 

in  stronf l^^....    In  other  phrases,  fche  hook  and  accom- 
panying circle  may  represent  the  words  in  his  or  in  as; 


thus:  in  his  life  ..............  ;  in  as  many  _<#—  v^^,  _...    The  ini- 

tial n  hook,  as  its  name  implies,  is  never  used  in  phrases 
except  at  the  beginning. 

THE    COMBINATIONS    REPRESENTED    BY    THE    "N    CURL." 

514.  The  in  hook  with  its  accompanying  circle  may  be 
prefixed  to  the  following-named  consonants  and  consonantal 
combinations: 


To  pr,  as  in  the  phrase  in  spring,..^. 


THE  "N"  CURL.  273 

oi 

To  lr,  as  in  the  phrase  in  sober      ,  .....  \  ........  ^ 


To  tr,  as  in  the  phrase  in  strong    .. 

To  fir,  as  in  the  phrase  in  (  consideration     .  .....  \j 

To  clir,  as  in  the  phrase  in  his  charming 
To  jr.  as  in  the  phrases  in  his  danger   ( 


To  Arr,  as  in  the  phrase  in  his  crime    , 


To  gr,  as  in  the  phrase  in  his  grief 


To  Z,  a&  in  the  phrase  in  his  letter 

To  m,  as  in  the  phrase  in  some 

To  mcl,  as  in  the  phrase  in  his  immediate 

To  r,  as  in  the  phrase  in  his  remittance 


d 


274  THE  "N"  CURL. 

To  rd,  as  in  the  phrase  in  his  word 

To  s,  as  in  the  phrase  in  liis  escape 

\ 

*) 

To  z,  as  in  the  phrases  in  size...... ,  in  his  zeal 

y 

To  sh,  as  in  the  phrase  in  his  wish     ...„ ^ 

To  zh,  as  in  the  phrase  in  his  usual — f. 

To  mp,  (or  w&),  as  in  the  phrases  in  Ms  amMtion 


in  Ms  important 

To  way,  as  in  the  phrase  in  his  way  , J..,.  . 

To  hay,  as  in  the  phrase  in  his  hurry  +.3L. 

515.  This  hook,  or  "curl,"  may  be  prefixed  to  word- 
signs  (incomplete  outlines)  as  well  as  to  complete  out- 
lines. Illustrations:  in  Scripture ,  in  his  improve- 
ment 


THE  "N"  CURL.  275 

POSITIOX   OF   "N    CURL." 

516.  As  the  n  curl,  like  a  tick,  can  never  be  written 
alone,  it  has  no  position  of  its  own,  and  hence,  with  its  ac- 
companying circle,  accommodates  itself  to  the  normal 
position  of  the  succeeding  word.  Illustrations:  in  Ms  grief 


. ,  in  his  grave      -.     ->      ,  in  his  list ,  in  Ms 


last ./? ,  in  similar .*„  ;  in  some. rsTTTX 

/D 


*'x  CURL"  FOR  "IN." 

517.     In  the  following  exercise,  initial  in  is  followed  by 
a  circle  which  is  a  part  of  the  next  word: 

EXERCISE. 

in   (con)sideration  in  small 

in  (con)sidering  a  in  small  numbers 

in   (con)sidering  his  in  smoke 

in  (con)sidering  the  in  sober 

in   ( construction  in  some 

in  (ex) press  language  in  some  cases 

in  sacred  in  some  degree 

in  secret  in  some  instances 

in  security  in  some  measure 

in  seeming  in  some  one 

in  seizing  in  some  other 

in  selfish  in-  some  other  respects 

in  selling  in  some  other  way 

in  sermons  in  some  other  places 

in  ceremony  in  some  you  will  find 

in  similar  in  spring 

in  sleep  in  something 


27b 


THE  "N"  CURL. 


in  something  better 

in  strict  accord 

in     something     else     (else 

in  summer 

made  downward) 

in  supreme 

in  some  things 

in  surprise 

in  somewhat 

in  swallowing 

in  strong 

in  (ex)  pressing 

in  strength 

in  suppressing 

in  strict 

in  symmetry 

in  striving 

in  sympathy 

"IX   HIS"   REPRESENTED  BY 

THE  "CURL"   AND  CIRCLE. 

518.     In  the  following  exercise,  the  in  hook  and  its  ac- 

companying circle  represent  in 

his: 

in  his  ambition 

in  his  credit 

in  his  allusion 

in  his  credulity 

in  his  ample 

in  his  crime 

in  his  appearance 

in  his  criticism 

in  his  argument 

in  his  cruelty 

in  his  arrest 

in  his  crusade 

in  his  association 

in  his  danger 

in  his  brain 

in  his  drama 

in  his  branch 

in  his  drawer 

in  his  brave 

in  his  dread 

in  his  bravery 

in  his  dream 

in  his  breast 

in  his  dress 

in  his  brief 

in  his  drink 

in  his  brutality 

in  his  eagerness 

in  his  care 

in  his  easy 

in  his  careful 

in  his  empire 

in  his  character 

in  his  error 

in  his  charming 

in  his  escape 

in  his  course 

in  his  grace 

in  his  courage 

in  his  grade 

in  his  courtesy 

in  his  grasp 

in  his  creation 

in  his  grave 

THE  "N"  CURL. 


277 


in  his  gravity 

in  his  merit 

in  his  great 

in  his  method 

in  his  grip 

in  his  mind 

in  his  gross 

in  his  miserable 

in  his  growth 

in  his  mission 

in  his  habits 

in  his  mistake 

in  his  haste 

in  his  moderation 

in  his  head 

in  his  motive 

in  hi's  hearty 

in  his  mouth 

in  his  heavy 

in  his  music 

in  his  hesitation 

in  his  order 

in  his  holy 

in  his  perception 

in  his  house 

in  his  permission 

in  his  hurried 

in  his  praise 

in  his  hurry 

in  his  personal 

in  his  husky 

in  his  precious 

in  his  illustration 

in  his  precise 

in  his  image 

in  his  prediction 

in  his  immense 

in  his  preface 

in  his  immediate 

in  his  preference 

in.  his  importance 

in  his  premises 

in  his  imposition 

in  his  principles 

in  his  improvement 

in  his  promise 

in  his  impulses 

in  his  process 

in  his  journey 

in  his  proof 

in  his  labor 

in  his  property 

in  his  last 

in  his  proposition 

in  his  las  (t)   letter 

in  his  provision 

in  his  lecture 

in  his  protest 

in  his  letter 

in  his  prime 

in  his  line 

in  his  remonstrance 

in  his  list 

in  his  remedy 

in  his  love 

in  his  room 

in  his  grief 

in  his  treaty 

in  his  management 

in  his  trunk 

in  his  manuscript 

in  his  usual 

in  his  march 

in  his  usual  way 

278  THE  "N"  CURL. 

in  his  way  in  his  western 

in  his  weariness  in  his  wish 

in  his  wise  in  his  weary 

"IN    AS"    REPRESENTED    BY    THE    "CURL"    AND    CIRCLE. 

519.  In  the  following  exercise,  the  in  hook  and  the  ac- 
companying circle  represent  in  as: 

in  as  brave  in  as  many 

in  as  brief  in  as  many  ways 

in  as  cheerful  in  as  many  cases 

in  as  correct  in  as  many  as  possible 

in  as  careful  in  as  many  more 

in  as  great  in  as  true 

in  as  gross  in  as  wise 

in  as  little  in  as  zealous 

in  as  moderate 

ELLIPSIS  OF  "A,"   "AX"   OR  "THE." 

520.  In  some  cases,  a,  an,  or  the,  following  in  express- 
ed by  the  "curl,"  is  omitted  in  the  writing,  to  be  supplied 

by  the  sense  in  the  reading.     Thus  we  may  write       

for    in    the    street; for   in    a  similar    manner; 

,,'g'^X  for  in  the  same.  When  in  the  same  is  thus  writ- 
ten, same  should  always  be  vocalized  to  distinguish  this 
phrase  from  in  some. 

521.  EXERCISE. 

in   (a  or  the)  consider-  tion 

able  in  (a  or  the)   experi- 

in  (a  or  the)  consider-  ence 

ation  in  (a  or  the)   express- 
in  (a  or  the)  construe-  sion 


THE  "N"  CURL.  279 

in  (a  or  the)   sacred  in   (a)   similar 

in  (the)  same    (vocalize  in  (a)  strange 

same)  in  (the)  street 

in  (a  or  the)   secret  in  (the)  supreme  law 

in  (a  or  the)  selfish  in  the  Supreme  Court 

DOUBLE    CIRCLE    FOLLOWING    THE    "IN    CURL." 

522?  When  the  initial  n  hook  and  its  accompanying 
circle  are  prefixed  to  a  word  beginning  with  a  circle,  the 
two  circles  merge  or  coalesce,  forming  a  double-sized  circle; 


thus:  in  his  sympathy  ,  ........  \  .....  ,  in  his  supreme 

Published  lists  contain  phrases  constructed  on  this  prin- 
ciple; but  in  the  opinion  of  the  author  a  double  circle  after 
the  n  curl  is  difficult  of  execution,  and  on  account  of  the 
special  pains  required  to  form  it  correctly,  is  often  a  de- 
tention rather  than  an  aid  to  speed.  With  this  cautionary 
remark,  the  following  exercise  is  presented  for  the  benefit 
of  those  who  may  wish  to  practise  it: 

523.  EXERCISE. 

in  his  (cou)sideration  in  his  simple 

in  his  description  in  his  sober 

in  his  experience  in  his  sojourn 

in  his  expression  in  his  solitude 

in  his  salvation  in  his  soul 

in  his  secret  in  his  spirit 

in  his  security  in  his  surprise 

in  his  seeming  in  his  sympathy 

524.  CAUTION.    When   written    easily   and   promptly, 
the  in  hook  is  a  valuable  time-saving  expedient;    but  to 
force  it  into  use  where  it  does  not  make  a  convenient  junc- 
tion or  where  the  proper  method  of  joining  it  does  not  read- 
ily suggest  itself,  is  a  sad  waste  of  time.     In  order  that  the 
xise  of  this  expedient  in  proper  cases  may  be  thoroughly  ac- 
quired, the  foregoing  lists  have  been  made  copious  enough 
to  suit  the  wishes  of  the  most  ambitious  student. 


CHAPTER  XXI. 


SPECIAL  METHODS  OF  WRITING  PARTICULAR 
WORDS  OR  EXPRESSIONS. 

525.    Ability.     Disjoined   I,  which  in   word-writing  ex- 
presses the  termination  bility,  may  be  used  in  phrases  to 

represent   ability.      Illustrations:    my    ability  .  ......  \  ......  „ 


your  ability      t-i  .......  ,best  (of)  my  ability 

526.  Any  and  no,  when  standing  alone  or  beginning  a 
phrase,  are  sufficiently  distinguished  by  position,  without 
vocalization;  but  in  the  midst  of  a  phrase  a  distinction  by 
means  of  vocalization  is  necessary.  In  accordance  with  the 
rule  already  given,  the  reporter  habitually  vocalizes  any, 
the  less  common  of  the  two  words,  and  habitually  allows  no, 
the  more  common,  to  go  unvocalized.  Illustrations:  If 


there  is  any  objection   ^s^j^^ ,  if  there  is  no  objection 


527.     Are.     For  this  word  standing  alone,  Benn  Pitman 
writers  use  the  upward  stroke,  and  Graham  writers  the 
downward.     But  in  phrases  these  two  schools  of  wrl'feTS" 
agree  in  using  either  the  upward  or  the  downward  stroke, 
according  to  convenience.    Illustrations:  There  are  enough 


PARTICULAR    WORDS    OR    EXPRESSIONS.       281 


... ,  there  are  many  ... 

At  the  beginning  of  a  phrase,  the  downward  form,  ar, 
generally       joins  more  conveniently  with  the  next  word 

than  ray;  as  in  the  phrases,  are  you         ..Jv...  ,  are  many 


'     The  downward  stroke,  made  double  length, 

is  more  suggestive  for  are  there  than  the  lengthened  ray, 
which  some  writers  employ,  and  generally  joins  more  con- 
veniently with  the  following  word,  as,  are  there  many 

~^\--  ,  are  there  some    ^\^ .  (See  Gra- 

ham's Second  Reader,  page  142,  note.) 

There  are  two  other  ways  of  expressing  are  in  phrases: 
First,  by  the  r  hook  (see  Chapter  XIV),  and,  second,  as 
part  of  a  double-length  stroke  which  includes  they  are. 

528.  At  all  and  until,  written  with  tl  in  the  third  posi- 
tion, as  they  are  by    many  Pitmanic     stenographers    are 
liable  to  serious  conflict.     The  best  means  of  distinction 
known  to  the  author  is  to  write  at  all  in  the  first  position, 
and  until  in  the  third. 

529.  At  the  same  time  and  at  some  time,  written  with 

the  same  outline 1 ,  must  generally  be  distinguish- 
ed. A  convenient  method  of  doing  this  is  by  vocalizing  some 
in  the  phrase  last  named. 

530.  Avenue,  following  the  name  of  a  street,  may  often 
be  represented,  especially  if  the  phrase  is  familiar,  by  a 
joined  v,  if  the  junction  be  convenient,  thus:  Jackson  Av- 


282       PARTICULAR    WORDS    OR    EXPRESSIONS. 


enue 


531.    Been,  ordinarily  written   bn,  is  in  some  phrases 
represented  by  b  only,  and  in  others  by  the  n-hook  only. 

Illustrations:  Had  been,..!...,  have  been...\^,  which  have 


v 


been  there ...  / 

532.  Bill,  in  phrases,  may  be  written  bl,  as,  true  bill 
_ ,  due  bill  .... 

533.  Body,  in  phrases,  is  generally  written  bd,  as  any- 
body  ,  nobody...^. ,x- »  resurrection  (of  the)   body 


Somebody,  by  way  of  exception,  is  written 


~,  because  bd  will  not  join  conveniently  to  m. 
534.     Business,  is  in  phrases  frequently  written  bs,  as.. 

— \ 

no   business x_^v      ,   in   his   business \>      .     Many 

V> 

writers  use  the  same  outline  in  the  first  position  for  bus- 
iness, when  standing  alone;  others  prefer  to  write  the 
full  outline. 


PARTICULAR    WORDS    OR    EXPRESSIONS.       283 

535.  Can,  though  usually  written  with  a  final  hook  by 
both  Graham  and  Benn  Pitman  writers,  may  safely    drop 
the   Eiook  in  all  cases  where  thereby  a  more  convenient 
junction  with  the  next  word  will  be  obtained.     It  is  the 
author's  experience  that  in  all  cases,  can,  whether  isolated 
or  in  a  phrase,  may  safely  be  represented  by  the  simple 
k  stroke.     It  is  so  expressed  in  the  Munson  and  Isaac  Pit- 
man systems. 

53514.  First,  as  an  isolated  word,  is  habitually  repre- 
sented by  its  word-sign,  the  disconnected  st  loop.  In 
phrases  this  sign  has  a  very  restricted  use,  the  phrase  at 

first      I        being   perhaps   the    only    instance  of  its  advan- 

b 

tageous  employment.  The  phrase  the  first  is  by  some 
writers  represented  thus:  .  ?? ,  but  there  seems  to  be  no 

need  for  making  this  single  exception  to  the  otherwise  un- 
broken rule  that  the  tick  shall  not  begin  a  phrase.  In  sev- 
eral common  phrases,  first  takes,  for  the  sake  of  the  phrase, 

a  form  different  from  the  ordinary  one;  thus: 

in  the  first  place,  and        .._T\^>   in  the  first  instance. 

536.  Have   has    three    forms,    the    alphabetic  stroke  v, 
the  f-v  hook,  and  that  variation  of  form  which  it  assumes 
when  the  stroke  v  is  made  double  length  to  add  thr. 

537.  I  and  he.     Care  must  be  taken  that  the  personal 
pronouns  7  and  he  are  not  confounded.    For  the  best  meth- 
ods   of   securing   the   needed    distinction,    see    Paragraphs 
220-222. 


284       PARTICULAR    WORDS    OR    EXPRESSIONS. 

538.  Him  and  me,  when  occurring  in  the  midst  of 
phrases,  need  to  be  carefully  distinguished,  because  in  such 
cases  the  ordinary  positional  distinction  is  lost.  In  several 
instances  the  necessary  distinction  is  secured  by  joining 
the  word  which  in  the  phrase  retains  its  ordinary  position, 
and  separating  the  word  which  the  phrase  would  take  out 


of  its  usual  place.    Illustrations:  of  me  ,  of  Mm 


.,tome > ,  to  him     vrrv......    in  other 


instances,  a  distinction  is  secured  by  vocalization,  in  which 
case  it  is  best  to  vocalize  me  and  allow  him  to  go  unvo- 
calized . 

539.  House.  In  many  cases  the  regular  sign  for  the 
very  common  word  house  can  not  be  phrased.  Hence, 
to  secure  a  convenient  phrase,  the  alphabetic  stroke  s  is 

sometimes  used  for  house,  as  State  House Legisla- 


tive House  L..L....'     In  other    cases,  for  the    sake  of  the 

phrase,  house  is  represented  by  the  s  circle,  which,  if  it 
follows  another  circle,  as  in  the  phrase  at  his  house,  merges 
with  the  preceding  circle,  forming  a  double  circle,  thus: 


this  house  .^O    ,  at  his  house  -...L^^,  in  his  house 

If  there  be  danger  of  misreading,  the  vowel  ow  may  bo 


inserted  in  the  double  circle,  thus 


PARTICULAR    WORDS    OR    EXPRESSIONS.       285 

540.  There  seems  to  be  no  reason  why  the  circle  should 

^3 
not  be  used  for  house  in  such  phrases  as  in  the,  house  •, 

if  the  house 

541.  In    law.     These    words,   terminating   the    phrases 
mother-in-law,   etc.,   may   be   represented   by   nl.     Illustra- 


tions:  motlier-in-law  ..^r^r^>. ,  sister-in-law 


542.    Indeed  and  no  doubt.    Indeed  should  not  be  used 
in  the  midst  of  a  phrase  unless  vocalized  with  e.    No  doubt 
may  be  freely  interjoined  without  vocalization. 
543.   Instance    and    circumstance   should    be    carefully 

distinguished  by  writing  the  full  formal, -for  the  former 
word,  wherever  it  occurs,  except  in  the  special  phrase  for 


instance 


544.    Ocean.    The  last  word  of  such  phrases  as  Atlantic 
Ocean,  Pacific  Ocean,  Arctic  Ocean,  may,  when  convenient, 


be  expressed  by  the  shn  hook,  thus:  Atlantic  Ocean 


in^.± 


545.  Own,  introduced  into  a  phrase,  if  it  may  possibly 
conflict  with  know,  should  be  vocalized. 

546.  Less,  else.    When  written  as  separate  words,  less 
and  else  are  distinguished  by  vocalizing  the  latter.     The 
same  method  of  distinction  should  be  adopted  in  phrases. 
The  downward  direction  of  the  I  stroke  does  not  sufficiently 


286       PARTICULAR    WORDS    OR    EXPRESSIONS. 

distinguish  the  word  else,  as  in  phrases  both  these  words 
are  frequently  written  with  the  downward  stroke. 

547.    Me,  Mac  or  Mack,  at  the  beginning  of  personal 
names,   may.be   represented   by   m  joined.     Illustrations: 


Macmullin  ...t^*^*. ,  McManus . 

548.     North,  which  begins  many  geographical  names,  is 
commonly  represented  by  nr  joined.     Illustrations:  North 


Dakota          I—-,...  f  North  America .     In  a 

few  cases  nr  is     used  for  northern,  though  more  generally 
norther  is  used  if  the  n  hook  cannot  be  conveniently  join- 


ed.    Illustration:  Northern  Democracy 

549.  Of  the,  in  phrases,  is  expressed  in  two  ways:  First, 
by  the  joined  ticks  of  and  the;  second,  by  proximity.  (See 
Paragraphs  317-323).  It  is  also  implied,  not  expressed,  by 
joining  the  words  between  which  it  occurs;  as  one  of  the 


most,. 

550.     Or,  in  phrases,  is  sometimes  expressed  thus:   three 


or  four  . .Jr...  >^....^,,once  or  twice. £«•£....» The  con 

sonant  stroke  r  (downward)  is  sometimes  treated  as  a 
"fictitious  primitive"  for  or,  in  order  to  add  there  or  oth- 
er by  doubling.  (See  Paragraph  420.) 

551.    Part,  in  phrases,  is  written  either  ...jv£.,or  ....r\..., 
according  to  convenience. 


PARTICULAR    WORDS    OR    EXPRESSIONS.       287 

552.  Regard  and  regret,  as  isolated  words,  are  distin- 
guished by  position.     Either  of  them  occurring  as  the  second 

word  of  a  phrase  may  often  have  positional  distinction  by 
means  of  "initial  displacement."  (See  Paragraphs  70-81.) 
When  this  is  not  practicable,  these  words  may  be  distin- 
guished by  vocalization  or  "exclusion."  (See  Paragraphs 
87,  88,  92.)  If  "exclusion"  be  resorted  to,  regard  should 
"be  excluded,  as  regret  is  the  more  common  of  the  two  words 
and  has  the  greater  need  of  being  phrased. 

553.  Secretary.    This  word,  at  the  beginning  of  certain 


phrases,  may  be  expressed  by. , ,  as  in  Secretary  of  State 

a — f  O — C/ 

,  Secretary  of  War ,  Secretary  of  the  Navy 


554.  See,    say.     At   the   beginning   of   a   phrase   these 
words    are    distinguished    by    position.      Elsewhere    in    a 
phrase,  see  should  be  vocalized,  while  say  need  not  be. 

555.  Session  is  often  added  to  a  preceding  word  by  the 

•circle  and  the  eshon  hook;    as,  legislative  session  .^//. 

•another  session        _?—__— — ^ Where  the  preceding 

word  ends  with  a  circle  or  a  loop,  session  is  often  expressed 
lay  adding  the  hook  only;  thus:  this  session V     ,  next 

session      ^£?    .,  last  session    >  ft?- •. 


238       PARTICULAR    WORDS    OR    EXPRESSIONS. 

556.     Stairs,  in  a  few  phrases,  may  be  represented  by 

the  str  loop  and  the  circle,  as,  down  stairs    \>    ,  up  stairs 
^\>....  ,  back  stairs 


557.    State,  in  phrases,  may  be  represented  initially  or 
finally  by  the  st  loop  when  it  will  conveniently  join.     II- 

t 

lustrations:    state   if   there -S ,   State    of    Texas 

L_Q... ,  Stale  of  New  York       _?!..,  ,  New  York  8tate 

-— Y  s-^P  Another  common 

_„..,.() t    Empire  State    -^^^- 

method  of  writing  state  is  shown  in  the  following  illustra- 


tions:  /  will  state  ,  in  my  State' 

558.  Stock,  at  the  beginning  of  certain  phrases,  may  be 

represented  by  the  st  loop,  thus:  stockholder  „ 
stock-book  . 

559.  Store  may  often  be  added  to  the  preceding  word 
by  the  str  loop.    Illustrations:  Book-store\..  ^-drug-store 

••  ,  our  store      ,.77\. ,  your  store      n  .. 


PARTICULAR    WORDS    OR    EXPRESSIONS.       289 

560.  Street  may  be  represented  by  st  loop  attached  to 
the  name  of  the  street,  thus:  Jackson  street   /   p/; 

561.  Therefore,  in  phrases,  takes  sometimes  its  ordi- 
nary form,  while  in  other  cases  there  is  expressed  by  dou- 
ble-lengthing,  and  f  is  added  for  fore,  as  I  know  therefore 


562.     Time.    The  word-sign  for  time^^^is  rarely  used 
in  a  phrase,  either  initially,  medially  or  finally.     Thus  we 


write  better  time   VJ^->.  »  he  has  no  time     <(_  at 

T£T 

all  times-  -p    "-,  our  time  ..   ,  etc.    The  word-sign 


may,  of  course,  be  used  where  ambiguity  or  obscurity  in 
reading  will  not  result. 

563.     Way  or  away  may,  if  convenient,  be  represented  in 
phrases  by  the  diphthong  icay,  joined,  instead  of  the  alpha- 

betic stroke.    Illustrations:  some  wajac^.,  this  way 


go  away  -.— r- ••• . 

564.  Were,   in   phrases,   is   sometimes   represented,   as 
heretofore  explained,  by  the  r  hook  prefixed  to  a  stroke  in 

the  third  position;  thus:  which  were...  9  ,,  such  were-*?~ 

565.  Year.     Many  common  phrases  are  facilitated  by 
the  use  of  the  consonant  y  as  a  word-sign  for  year.    For 

instance:  This  year     \o    ,  many  years  t^-^., ;  one  year 


290       PARTICULAR    WORDS    OR    EXPRESSIONS. 

s_...two  years.      >      ,  next  year....  w^     ,  from  year 


y>      ,  next  year....  w^ 


to  year  .....  S....,,.  .....    The  author,    has,    fora    number  of 

years  used  this  sign  with  great  satisfaction.  It  is  not  recog- 
nized by  either  Benn  Pitman  or  Graham.  When  standing 
alone  or  beginning  a  phrase,  it  should  be  written  above  the 
line. 


CHAPTER  XXII. 


INVENTION  OF  IRREGULAR  PHRASE-SIGNS. 

566.  When  particular  word-groups  are  uttered  over  and 
over  again,  in  either  general  or  special  matter,  the  speaker 
becomes  accustomed  to  their  utterance,  and  hence  they  are 
spoken  with  more  than  his  average  rapidity.     For  their 
prompt  expression,  regular  methods  of  phrasing  seem  in 
many  cases  inadequate.     Hence  arises  an  occasional  neces- 
sity for  irregular  phrase  forms,  wholly  or  partially  unau- 
thorized by  phrasing  rules,  and  therefore  in  some  respects 
arbitrary.  These,  being  analogous  in  this  particular  to  word- 
signs,  which  are  abbreviated  according  to  no  settled  rule, 
may  be  called   phrase-signs.     Though   irregular  and  arbi- 
trary in  their  character,  some  of  these  phrase-signs  are  so 
highly  useful  in  connection  with  the  general  subjects  of 
the  stenographer's  work  that  it  is  the  duty  of  the  learner 
to  make  himself  as  familiar  with  them  as  with  the  or- 
dinary word-signs.    For  a  list  of  such  phrases  the  reader  is 
referred    to    the    chapter    entitled    "Irregular    Phrases    of 
General  Utility." 

567.  But  there  are  irregular  phrases,  useful  only  on 
certain  occasions  or  in  connection  with  particular  subjects; 
and  while  a  certain  number  of  these  are  provided  in  many 
of  the  text-books — phrases,  for  instance,   relating  to  law, 
theology,   commercial   business,   etc. — yet  often  the   steno- 
grapher is  required  to  invent  such  phrases  for  himself,  be- 
cause no  text-book  maker  can  anticipate  the  varying  needs 
of  every  individual  writer.     The  office  stenographer,  deal- 
ing with  the  technicalities  peculiar  to  his  particular  line  of 
business,  as  well  as  the  professional  reporter,  whose  work 


292     INVENTION  OF  IRREGULAR  PHRASE  SIGNS. 

may  range  over  such  varied  topics  as  theology,  science, 
medicine,  law,  politics,  history,  education,  etc.,  is  at  times 
called  upon  to  provide  special  forms  for  verbal  combina- 
tions which,  because,  for  the  time  being,  they  occur  so  fre- 
quently, and  because,  perhaps,  they  involve  some  special 
difficulty,  require  briefer  phrase-forms  than  could  be  con- 
structed in  accordance  with  ordinary  phrasing  rules. 

PREMEDITATED    PHRASE-SIGNS. 

568.  In  some  cases  these  are  provided  beforehand,  be- 
cause of  their  foreseen  necessity.  The  office  stenographer, 
if  anxious  to  give  full  satisfaction  to  his  employer,  will, 
when  a  lull  of  regular  business  allows  it,  examine  letter- 
books,  catalogues,  etc.,  relating  to  the  business  of  the  estab- 
lishment, and  wherever  it  may  seem  necessary,  will  delib- 
erately and  carefully  invent  facile  methods  of  representing 
particularly  difficult  terms  or  phrases  that  the  employer 
is  likely  to  use  in  dictation.  The  professional  reporter, 
who  has  been  engaged  to  report  a  particular  law  case,  will, 
if  he  is  wise,  take  occasion  beforehand  to  glance  over,  or, 
indeed,  carefully  examine,  books  and  papers  embodying  the 
names,  the  facts,  the  precedents,  the  arguments  which  will 
be  brought  into  the  consideration  of  the  case  in  court;  and 
he  will,  so  far  as  seems  desirable,  make  special  provision 
by  irregular  phraseograms  for  specially  difficult  word- 
groups  which  are  likely  to  be  frequently  uttered. 

OFF-HAND  PHRASE-SIGNS. 

569.  But  irregular  phrase-signs  must  oft-times  be  in- 
vented by  the  stenographer  during  the  course  of  note- 
taking.  Such  invention  is  generally  a  step-by-step  process. 
Rarely  does  the  reporter,  on  the  spur  of  the  moment,  take 
a  single  leap  from  the  too  cumbrous  regular  sign  to  an 
irregular  representation  absolutely  adequate  and  satisfac- 
tory. More  often  these  special  signs  are  developed  grad- 
ually, the  method  of  representation  becoming  shorter  and 


INVENTION  OF  IRREGULAR  PHRASE  SIGNS.  293 

shorter  as  the  verbal  combination  continues  to  recur.  The 
first  time  a  particular  word  group  is  encountered,  the  re- 
porter may  not  phrase  it  at  all,  or  a  phrase-form  constructed 
according  to  regular  methods  may  suggest  itself.  But,  as  the 
speech  proceeds,  and  as  the  word-group,  repeated  from  time 
to  time,  is  spoken  with  increasing  rapidity,  the  regularly 
constructed  sign  seems  too  cumbrous.  So,  without  effort 
of  thought  —  by  instantaneous  suggestion,  as  it  were,  for 
in  such  cases  there  is  no  time  for  deliberation  —  a  sign  fs 
written  which  does  not  follow  any  regular  phrasing  rules; 
and  this  sign,  as  the  speech  proceeds,  may  give  place  to 
another  and  another,  each  more  abridged  than  its  prede- 
cessor, until  the  utmost  brevity  is  attained. 

IRREGULAR  PHRASES  CLASSIFIED. 

570.  The  following  are  the  principal  classes  of  word- 
groups  which,  often  recurring  and  not  briefly  enough  writ- 
ten by  ordinary  methods,  may  be  represented  by  irregular 
phrase-signs,  similar  in  construction  to  those  suggestively 
given  below: 

1.    Names  of  individuals,    as,    for    instance,    Jonathan 

Smith  x/ry.  ,  Benjamin  Franklin  ^^^     Andrew  Jackson. 


2.     Names  of  business  firms  or  establishments,  as,  for 
example:  Bosivorth  &  Bacon  .....S^  .....  Skivington  Brothers 


3.     Titles   of   societies,   associations,   corporations,   etc., 
for  instance:    District  of    Columbia ]L.,.. Temperance 


294     INVENTION  OF  IRREGULAR  PHRASE  SIGNS. 
Society  .....  UW  ..    ,  Pennsylvania  Loan  and  Trust  Company 


.....  ,  Citizens'  National  Bank 


O 

b^^ 


4.     Terms   applying   to   historical   events   or   to   public 
measures,  present  or  past.    Illustrations:  Declaration  of  In- 


dependence   .U.      .......  ,  Missouri  Compromise..  - 


Monroe  Doctrine  .......    K,  Demonetization  of  Silver  . 


Spanish-American  War 

5.     Technical  terms;  that  is  to  say,  verbal  combinations 
peculiar  to  special  subjects — chemistry,  medicine,  law,  etc. 


Illustrations:    Carbonic  acid  .„       ...i\»  ,~>  rheumatic  gout 


law  of  primogeniture 


6.  Any  combinations  of  words  (though  general,  not 
technical,  in  their  character)  if  frequently  recurring,  and 
not  written  easily  or  briefly  enough  by  regular  methods. 

HOW    ARE    IRREGULAR    PHRASES    CONSTRUCTED  f 

571.  Irregular  phrase-signs  are  constructed  according 
to  three  different  methods: 

1.  In  one  class  of  irregular  phrases,  words  or  parts  of 
words  are  very  freely  omitted,  without  regard  to  the  regular 
methods  of  ellipsis  heretofore  explained;  and  the  remain- 
ing words  or  parts  of  words  are  joined  without  lifting  the 

pen.    Illustration:  Nort h  Dakota  * ,  Central  Pacific 


INVENTION  OP  IRREGULAR  PHRASE  SIGNS.  295 
Railway  ,^^^^\^^    _    A  favorite  method  of  construct 

ing  phrases  of  this  class  is  "to  join  one  or  two  letters,  usual- 
ly the  initial     ones,  of  two  or  more     parts  of  the  name  or 

phrase,"  as  Pacific  Hail  steamship  Company  ^j 

(A.  J.  Graham.) 

2.  In  other  irregular  phrases,  the  omission  of  certain 
letters  is  accomplished  by  breaking  the  phrase  and  repre- 
senting  the    whole   verbal   combination   by   two   disjoined 

fragments,  as  viva  voce  -V,  - 

3.  In  other  cases,  while,  as  in  the  class  of  phrases  last 
described,  the  phrase  is  broken,  the  fragments  are  not  com- 
pletely disjoined,  but  are  brought  into  contact  by  the  prin- 
ciple of  "intersection;"  in  other  words,  after  the  first  part 
of  the  phrase  has  been  written,  the  pen  is  lifted,  and  the 
latter   part — generally   a   single   stroke — is  written   across 

the  former  part.     Illustration:  Democratic  party 

572.  In  applying  the  principle  of  "intersection,"  the 
following  suggestions  (not  intended  to  cover  all  cases)  will 
be  found  useful: 

(a.)     An  intersecting  s  may  represent,  at  the  end  of  a 

title,  the  word  society,  as  phonetic  society     ..V»Xir_l_. . 
(b.)     An   intersecting   k   may   represent   company;  as, 


cotton  company  - 

(c.)     An  intersecting  sh  may  represent  association;  as, 

beneficial  association 


296     INVENTION  OF  IRREGULAR  PHRASE  SIGNS. 

(d.)     An  intersecting  p  may  represent  party;  as,  na- 


tional party 

(e.)     An  intersecting  t  may  represent  committee;  as, 

finance  committee  ...\jU_s... . 

(f.)     An  interesecting  d  may  represent  department;  as 

railway  department  ....< 

If  the  direction  of  the  preceding  stroke  does  not  allow 
the  final  stroke  to  intersect,  the  latter  may  be  written  along- 
side of,  and  close  to,  the  preceding  stroke,  making  what 
may  be  called  a  "broken  phrase;"  thus,  Republican  party 


CAUTIONS. 

573.  In  devising  irregular  phrases,  the  young  writer 
may  wisely  bear  in  mind  the  following  suggestions  and  cau- 
tions: 

(a.)  In  the  writing  of  either  words  or  phrases,  the 
stenographer  should  avoid  irregular  and  arbitrary  expe- 
dients, unless  normal  and  regular  methods  involve  some 
awkwardness,  or  some  lack  of  needed  speed. 

(b.)  Any  verbal  combination,  in  order  to  be  entitled 
to  irregular  representation,  should  be,  at  least  transiently 
and  in  reference  to  the  particular  subject,  of  frequent  occur- 
rence. 

(c.)  While  words  or  parts  of  words  may  be  freely 
omitted,  the  writer  should  retain  those  portions  of  the 
phrase  which  will  be  most  significant  or  suggestive. 

(d.)  As  brevity  is  the  object  sought,  the  inventor  of  a 
phrase-sign  should  assure  himself  that  the  special  device  ia 


INVENTION  OF  IRREGULAR  PHRASE  SIGNS.  297 

brief  enough  to  meet  the  demands  of  the  case,  and  especially 
that  it  avoids  inconvenient  junctions. 

(e.)  A  phrase  written  without  lifting  the  pen  is  pre- 
ferable generally  to  a  broken  or  an  intersected  phrase.  In 
almost  every  case  where  special  abbreviation  is  necessary, 
it  will  be  found  practicable  to  devise  some  rapid  and  legible 
form  which  can  be  written  entire  without  a  pen-lift.  Not 
only  is  time  lost  in  lifting  the  pen,  but  an  intersecting 
stroke  is  sometimes  misunderstood  as  a  cancellation  of 
the  character  through  which  it  is  struck. 

(f.)  An  all-important  and  never-to-be-forgotten  consid- 
eration is  that  a  phrase-sign  should  be  legible.  This  does 
not  mean  that  it  must  be  so  clear  as  to  be  self-suggestive 
to  a  person  who  meets  it  for  the  first  time.  To  comply 
with  such  a  requirement  would  be  impracticable,  because  a 
phrase-sign  of  this  class  is  but  an  incomplete  and  more  or 
less  arbitrary  expression  of  the  words  intended.  Yet  the 
special  phrase  should  be  at  least  unambiguous — incapable 
of  being  mistaken  by  the  writer  for  another  phrase  or  some 
single  word.  As  has  been  remarked  by  Mr.  Graham,  "Some- 
times a  contraction  which  is  suggestive  and  legible  in  one 
kind  of  subject  matter  would  not  be  legible,  and  therefore 
not  allowable,  in  another  kind  of  matter."  On  the  other 
hand,  special  contractions  devised  with  reference  to  a  par- 
ticular subject-matter  may  be  so  inherently  suggestive,  may 
have  such  a  natural  adhesion  to  the  memory,  that,  once 
learned,  they  can  never  be  forgotten;  so  that  the  reporter 
instinctively  extends  them  to  all  classes  of  topics  that  may 
call  them  into  use.  Two  incidents  of  actual  occurrence  will 
illustrate  some  of  the  dangers  attending  special  contrac- 
tions devised  for  the  purposes  of  a  particular  occasion,  but 
not  devised  with  sufficient  care  and  forethought.  In  an  in- 
vestigation before  a  Congressional  committee  some  years 
ago,  "Buenos  Ayres  hides"  were  a  constant  topic  of  dis- 
cussion; and  the  reporter,  feeling  the  need  of  some  special 
abbreviation  for  "Buenos  Ayres,"  adopted  for  that  purpose, 
on  the  spur  of  the  moment,  the  longhand  letters  "B.  A." 


298     INVENTION  OF  IRREGULAR  PHRASE  SIGNS. 

The  notes  were  not  written  out  till  some  time  after  they 
were  taken,  and,  unfortunately,  when  weeks  had  elapsed, 
the  initials  "B.  A."  suggested  to  the  mind  of  the  reporter 
(who,  by  the  way,  was  a  Canadian)  not  "Buenos  Ayres"  but 
"British-American."  And  so  the  testimony,  as  now  recorded 
in  the  reports  of  the  Congressional  Committees,  has  much 
to  say  about  British- American  hides  and  nothing  to  say 
about  Buenos  Ayres  hides! 

In  another  case,  a  youthful  student  of  a  certain  short- 
hand text-book  made  himself  very  familiar  with  its  reading 
and  writing  exercises,  including  a  lecture  on  chemistry,  in 
which  the  phrase  "carbonic  acid"  (represented  steno- 
graphically  by  krbsd)  occurred  again  and  again.  Years  af- 
terward, when  this  youthful  student  had  become  an  expe- 
rienced reporter,  without  ever  having  had  occasion  to  re- 
call this  special  sign  for  "carbonic  acid,"  he  was  engaged 
in  reporting  a  law  case  in  which  carbonate  of  soda  was 
much  talked  about.  Thoughtlessly,  in  the  hurry  of  note- 
taking,  it  occurred  to  him  that  krbsd  would  be  a  good  sign 
for  carbonate  of  soda;  and  in  this  way  he  wrote  the  phrase 
over  and  over  again.  The  law-case  proceeded  to  its  end; 
and  no  thought  of  carbonic  acid,  with  its  long-disused  sign, 
ever  occurred  to  him.  Seemingly  it  was  obliterated  from 
his  mind.  But,  alas,  as  the  sequel  proved,  memory  was 
cunningly  lying  in  wait  to  play  him  one  of  her  fantastic 
tricks.  When  the  notes  came  to  be  transcribed,  this  phrase- 
sign  which  he  had  written  over  and  over  again  for  car- 
bonate  of  soda,  recalled  to  him,  without  a  moment's  hesi- 
tation or  doubt,  carbonic  acid!  And  so  it  was  transcribed 
unquestioningly  as  often  as  it  occurred.  Fortunately,  be- 
fore the  transcript  had  passed  the  stage  of  possible  correc- 
tion, some  good  angel  flashed  upon  the  reporter's  mind  the 
consciousness  of  his  error.  What  wonderful  chemical  ab- 
surdity might,  but  for  this  angelic  intervention,  have  been 
foisted  upon  confiding  court  and  counsel,  only  a  chemical 
expert  can  tell. 

(g.)     Until  the  writer  who  has,  in  the  course  of  note- 
taking,  invented  an  irregular  phrase,  becomes  familiar  wich 


INVENTION  OF  IRREGULAR  PHRASE  SIGNS.  299 

it,  (which  is  generally  accomplished  after  it  has  been  writ- 
ten several  times),  it  is  a  wise  precaution,  if  time  allows, 
to  call  attention  to  the  irregular  and  arbitrary  nature 
of  the  sign,  by,  for  instance,  encircling  it  with  the  pen  or 
by  making  a  cross  in  the  margin.  This  will  prove  especially 
useful  if  the  notes  are  to  be  transcribed  by  some  other  per- 
son than  the  reporter  himself. 

(h.)  A  final  caution  to  the  young  writer  may  fittingly 
be  given  in  the  words  of  that  eminent  shorthand  writer 
(now  deceased),  Thomas  Allen  Reed:  "Nor  should  he  (the 
student)  be  in  a  hurry  to  devise  special  contractions  of  his 
own.  They  may  at  first  seem  very  convenient  and  unob- 
jectionable; but  the  probability  is  that,  as  he  proceeds,  he 
will  find  it  advisable,  if  not  absolutely  necessary,  to  discard 
them.  Better  follow  the  lines  laid  down  in  the  instruction- 
books  than  diverge  into  untrodden  paths,  until  by  study 
and  experience  the  writer  has  qualified  himself  to  assume 
the  role  of  an  explorer  and  guide." 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 


IRREGULAR  PHRASES  OF  GENERAL  UTILITY. 

574.  To  some  students  the  following  list  of  Special  or 
Irregular  Phrases  may  at  first  glance  appear  disappoint- 
ingly meagre.  For  such,  a  few  words  of  explanation  may 
be  necessary.  In  the  first  place,  many  phrases  ordinarily 
classed  as  "Special  Phrases"  (for  instance  United  States  of 
America)  are  in  fact  "Simple  Phrases,"  as  already  de- 
fined; that  is,  phrases  constructed  by  merely  joining  togeth- 
er several  words  in  their  ordinary  forms.  Phrases  of  this 
character  are  appropriately  included  in  the  list  of  "Simple 
Phrases."  (See  Chapter  XXIV).  Other  so-called  "Special 
Phrases"  (especially  those  whose  only  peculiarity  is  an  ellip- 
sis of  some  word  or  words)  have  in  this  volume  found  their 
logical  place  under  some  specific  principle  of  phrase  forma- 
tion. It  would  not  have  been  practicable  to  include  here  all 
phrases  that  may  be  found  useful  by  different  writers  in  all 
the  various  branches  of  business.  Any  such  list,  if  at- 
tempted, could  not  possibly  be  complete;  and  it  would  simply 
swell  this  volume  to  inordinate  size,  without  any  corres- 
ponding advantage  to  the  general  student.  A  third  consid- 
eration, the  most  important  of  all,  is  that  such  a  list,  if 
placed  before  the  student,  would  be  regarded  by  him  as  an 
invitation  to  memorize  a  number  of  phrastss  which  he  would 
suppose  to  have  been  invented  for  his  benefit;  and  in  that 
way,  one  prime  object  of  this  book — to  educate  the  student 
to  construct  for  himself  phrases  suitable  to  meet  his  indi- 
vidual needs — would  be  defeated.  The  author's  aim  has 
been,  not  to  make  the  present  list  exhaustive,  or  to  adapt  it 
to  the  demands  of  particular  lines  of  business,  but  simply 


IRREGULAR  PHRASES  OF  GENERAL  UTILITY.  301 

to  give  enough  phrases  of  irregular  formation  to  serve  as 
models  for  the  young  writer  in  learning  to  make  phrases  for 
himself,  according  to  the  principles  presented  in  this  vol- 
ume. 


Almighty  God 
and  company 
at  any  rate 
at  hand 
at  least 
at  some  time 
at  the  same  time 
at  length 
as  far  as 

best    of     your    (or  my) 
knowledge 

British  America 
carbonic  acid 


ir 


302  IRREGULAR  PHRASES  OF  GENERAL  UTILITY. 
Christian  society 
circumstantial  evidence          -  •^•- 

C~ r 

Court  of  Common  Pleas         ^>- 

Democratic  party 
District  of  Columbia 

down  stairs  .....L. 

eight  or  nine 

Episcopal  church 

eternal  life 
express  company 
fellow-citizens 
finance  committee 

five  or  sir  „.„!.„-. 

for  instance  .Jw— 


1RREGUULAR  PHRASES  OF  GENERAL  UTILITY  303 
for  the  purpose  of 

four  or  five 

Great  Britain 

Great  Britain  and  Ireland 

habeas  corpus 

handwriting 

Her  Majesty 

Holy  Ghost 

honorable  gentleman-men 
honorable  member 
honorable  Senator 
House  of  Commons 
House  of  Lords 

Hous.  of  Representatives 


304  IRREGULAR  PHRASES  OF  GENERAL  UTILITY, 
human  life 

inasmuch  as 

<^ 
in  order  


in  order  to 

^ 


in  order  that 

in  the  first  place 
in  the  last  place 

in  the  next  place 
in  the  second  place 
in  this  shape 

in  writing  

Jesus  Christ  JOT" 

joint  stock 

justification  by  faith  / 


IRREGULAR  PHRASES  OF  GENERAL  UTILITY.  305 
learned  counsel  ..U.Z 

learned  friend  ••••<-/. 

learned  gentleman-men 

learned  judge 

Lord      and      Savior     Jesus 
Christ 

may  it  please  your  Honor 
medical  department 
might  there 
my  beloved  brethren 
my  beloved  brother 
my  beloved  friends 

my  brethren 

my  Christian  brethren 
'my  fellow-citizen 


306  IRREGULAR  PHRASES  OF  GENERAL  UTILITY, 
my  honorable  friend 
national  bank  >~^- 

* 

New  Testament 
nine  or  ten 

±L 

northeast 
northeastern 

Northern  States 


Old  and  New  Testament 

a~> 


on  the  one  hand 

on  the  other  hand 
per  annum 

per  cent 


IRREGULAR   PHRASES  OF  GENERAL    UTILITY.  307 


per  centum 

Presbyterian  church 
prisoner  at  the  bar 
railway  car 

railway  station 
respecter  of  persons 

right  honorable 

right  reverend 
Roman  Catholic 

Roman  Catholicism 

Roman  Catholic  church 
Secretary  of  State 
Secretary  of  the  Interior 


£,_ 

As 


308  IRREGULAR  PHRASES  OF  GENERAL  UTILITY. 

Secretary  of  the  Navy          Sw. 

Secretary  of  the  Treasury  J. "... 

Secretary  of  War  

seven  or  eight  ....Awsf.... 

six  or  seven  ...No.... 

so  far  as 

-N 

sooner  or  later  (Graham) 
statute  book 


southeast  ..../'..... 

southeastern  ../°.../7. 

southwest  .....  ~A.. 
southwestern 


step  by  step 


IRREGULAR  PHRASES  OF  GENERAL  UTILITY.  309 
temperance  society 

ten  or  eleven  (Graham) 
three  or  four 
to  a  great  extent 
to  some  extent 

"1? 


J 
to  that  extent 


to  this  extent 

1 

United  States 


United  States  of  America 
United  States  Senate  v   o 

* 

United  States  Senator 
up  stairs 

Vice-President 
vice  versa 


310  IRREGULAR  PHRASES  OF  GENERAL  UTILITY. 

viva  voce  \^.... 

words  of  my  text  ~yx_-^ 

p 
where  do  you  reside  (y\ 


*yes,  sir 


c 

yours  truly  f 

v~ 


*ln  the  opinion  of  the  author,  the  sign  here  given  for  yes  [S3]  is  more 
legible  and  more  phrasable  than  ys,  the  sign  usually  written. 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 


SIMPLE    OR    WORD-JOINING    PHRASES. 

575.  The  words  composing  the  following  phrases  are 
written  just  as  they  would  be  if  standing  separate,  except 
where,  in  the  midst  of  phrases,  they  necessarily  lose  their 
normal  position.  The  correct  execution  of  these  phrases 
calls  for  no  knowledge  ef  phrasing  principles  as  expounded 
in  the  previous  chapters  of  this  book.  Nothing  more  is  re- 
quired than  that  the  student,  giving  each  word  its  accus- 
tomed form,  shall  keep  his  pen  on  the  paper  till  the  phrase 
is  finished.  Hence  these  phrases  afford  excellent  exercises 
for  the  learner  at  any  stage  of  his  shorthand  study,  after  he 
can  write  correctly  the  separate  forms  of  ordinary  words. 
As  soon  as  he  begins  the  study  of  this  book,  these  phrases 
should  be  practised  upon  in  convenient  portions  from  day 
to  day,  in  order  that  the  habit  of  extempore  phrasing  may 
be  acquired  as  quickly  as  possible.  (See  note  to  Para- 
graph 65.) 

about  it  about  that  which  is 

about  its  about  their 

about  its  own  about  them 

about  matters  about  themselves 

about  several  about  this 

about  some  about  when 

about  something  about  which 

about  such  things  about  which  you  are 

about  that  about  which  you  may 

about  that  date  about  which  you  will 

about  that  matter  about  your 

about  that  which  about  yours 


312 


SIMPLE  OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES. 


above  his 

account  book 

after  he 

after  such 

after  the 

after  that 

after  them 

after  they 

after  this 

after  which 

after  you 

after  your 

after  yours 

agree  that 
j  although  it  is 
I  although  it  has 

although  this 

always  be 

always  ready 

always  right 

always  there 

always  was 

always  will  be 

among  yourselves 

among  your  friends 

another  affair 

another  day 

another  instance 

another  nation 

another  point 

another  question 

another  subject 

another  thing 

any  better 

any  man 

any  more 

any  subject 


anything 

anything  further 

anything  more 

anything  said 

anything  that  is  done 

any  way  you  like 

any  worse 

are  we  (upward  r) 

are  we  decided 

are  we  doing 

are  we  having 

are  you  (are  downward) 

are  you  prepared 

are  you  ready 

are  you  sure 

are  you  there 

as  good  as 

as  good  as  ever 

as  great  as 

as  great  as  ever 

as  little  as 

as  long  as 

as  long  as  it  is 

as  long  as  it  may 

as  long  as  necessary 

as  long  as  possible 

as  many 

as  many  as 

as  many  as  possible 

as  many  as  they 

as  many  as  were 

as  many  more 

as  many  such 

as  much  as 

as  much  as  another 

as  much  as  it  is 

as  much  as  may 


SIMPLE  OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES. 


313 


as  much  as  our 

as  much  as  possible 

as  much  as  they 

as  much  as  was 

as  shall 

as  shall  be 

as  that 

as  usual 

at  church 

at  first 

at  him 

at  his 

at  his  own 

at  last 

at  most 

at  one  glance 

at  one  another 

at  present 

at  some 

at  such 

at  that 

at  that  date 

at  that  place 

at  their 

at  their  request 

at  them 

at  this 

at  which 

at  which  you  may 

at  your 

at  your  place 

at  yourself 

at  yourselves 

Attorney-General 

baggage  master 

bank  note 

be  able 


be  called  upon 

be  careful 

be  certain 

be  clearly 

be  claimed 

be  done 

be  glad 

be  good 

be  good  enough 

be  gratified 

be  greatly 

be  it  so 

be  kind  enough 

be  likely 

be  made 

be  manifest 

be  met 

be  obliged 

be  pleased 

be  ready 

be  received 

be  requested 

be  said 

be  said  to 

be  saved 

be  seen 

be  seen  that 

be  such 

be  supposed 

be  sure 

be  surprised 

be  sustained 

be  that 
("be  their 
(be  there 

be  they 

be  these  (vocalize  these) 


314 


SIMPLE  OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES. 


be  this 
be  those 
be  told 
be  told  that 
be  told  this 
be  very 

be  very  careful 
be  your 

because    it    has  been 
because  it  is 
because  it  is  not 
because  it  is  so 
because  it  is  your 
because  it  may  always 
because  it  should  be 
because  it  will  be 
because  it  would  be 
because  of  their 
because  of  this 
because  their  position 
because  there  is  no  one 
because  there  are 
because  there  are  some- 
times 

because  they  may 
because  they  were 
because  they  will 
because  this 
because  we  have 
because  you  are 
because  you  are  aware 
because  you  have 
because  you  will  be 


been  answered 

been  done 

been  enabled 

been  known 

been  observed 

been  so 

been  taken 

been  understood 
*before  him 

before  his 

before  that 

before  there  is  another 

before  there  has  been 

before  they 

before  these  (vocalize 
these) 

before  this 

before  those 

before  you 

before  you  are 

before  you  are  ready 

before  you  can 

before  you  go 

before  you  make 

before  you  mention 

before  you  receive 

before  you  trust 

before  your 

begin  again 
**  believe  that 

believe  them 

believe  this 

better  that 


*In  this  and  the  phrases  immediately  following 
be  written  by  the  Benn  Pitman  feign, 
**See  note  to  Paragraph  207. 


,  hefore  is  intended  to 


SIMPLE  OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES. 


315 


between  any  such 

between  his 

between  that 

between  them 

between  themselves 

between  these  (vocalize 

these) 

(between  this 
,  between  those 

between  which 

between  your 

between  themselves 

bill  book 

bills  payable 

bona  fide 

bring  to  mind 

brings  to  mind 

brought  forward 

but  you  are 

but  you  must 

but  you  will  be 

by  any  means 

by  as  many 

by  every 

by  every  means 

by  him 

by  his 

by  his  own 

by  his  own  admission 

by  his  own  opinion 

by  his  own  supposition 

by  it 

by  itself 

by  its  own 

by  many 

by  many  more 

by  many  persons 


by  many  such 

by  me  (vocalize  me) 

by  means  of  , 

by  no  means  (vocalize  no) 

by  one 

by  permission 

by  reason  of 

by  some 

by  some  means 

by  some  man 

by  some  persons 

by  such 

by  such  means 

by  such  things 

by  that 

by  that  which  you 

by  their 

by  their  admission 

by  them 

by  themselves 

by  these  (vocalize  these) 

by  this 

i  by  this  account 
I  by  this  kind 

by  those 

by  those  accounts 

by  those  who 

by  which 

by  which  many 

by  which  means 
j  by  which  their 
"\  by  which  they  are 

by  which  you  are 

by  which  you  may 

by  you 

by  your 

call  for 


316 


SIMPLE  OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES. 


called  for 
call  forth 
calls  forth 
call  them 
call  upon 
called  upon 
call  you 
call  your 
*can(n)  he 
ca(n)  be  done 
ca(n)  become 
ca(n)  be  said  that 
ca(n)   be  seen 
ca(n)  be  saved 
ca(n)   do 
ca(n)  have 
ca(n)  make 
ca(n)  never 
ca(n)  observe 
ca(n)not 

ca(n)not  be  made 
ca(n)not  be  received 
ca(n)not  be  said 
ca(n)not  be  sure 
ca(n)not  do 
ca(n)not  go 
ca(n)not  take 
Catholic  church 
Catholic  priest 
Catholic  religion 
certain  about 
chief  engineer 
Christian  character 
Christian  church 
Christian  doctrine 
Christian  friends 


Christian  principles 

Christian  religion 

Christian  system 

circuit  court 

civil  law 

civil  power 

civil  service  reform 

commanding  officer 

commercial  freedom 

common  law 

common  pleas 

common  sense 

conditions  of  men 

could  be 

could  have  seen 

could  it  be 

could  make 

could  never 

could  nevertheless 

could  no  doubt 

could  not 

could  not  be 

could  not  do 

could  not  have 

could  not  have  seen 

could  not  say 

could  not  see  (vocalize  see) 

could  not  take 

could  not  understand 

could  not  undertake 

could  now 

could  there  be 

could  they 

could  these  (vocalize  these) 

could  this 

could  those 


*See  note  to  Paragraphs  74, 164,  481 ;  see  also  Paragraph  535. 


SIMPLE  OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES. 


317 


could  we 

could  you 

could  you  have  seen 

court-martial 

dead-letter  office 

dear  friend 

dear  madam 

dear  sir 

depend  upon 

did  he 

did  he  have 

did  he  know 

did  that 

did  they 

did  we 

did  we  call 

did  we  claim 

did  we  do 

did  you 

did  you  have 

did  you  furnish 

did  you  get 

did  you  give 

did  you  go  (vocalize  go) 

did  you  go  there 

did  you  have  anything 

did  you  know 

did  you  look 

did  you  make 

did  you  mean 

did  you  mention 

did  you  proceed 

did  you  receive 

did  you  refer 

did  you  regard 

did  you  remember 

did  you  render 


did  you  request 

Divine  Providence 

do  perhaps 

do  so 

do  sometimes 

do  such 

do  that 

do  their 

do  them 

do  themselves 

do  their 

do  these  (vocalize  these) 

do  those 

do  they 

do  this 

do  we 

do  we  claim 

do  we  have 

do  you 

do  you  go  there 

do  you  have 

do  you  know 

do  you  never 

do  you  make 

do  you  mean  to 

do  you  recollect 

do  you  remember 

do  you  require 

do  you  respect 

do  you  think 

do  your 

does  he 

does  it 

does  it  seem 

does  not 

does  not  intend 

does  not  know 


318 


SIMPLE  OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES. 


does  not  know  that 

does  not  say 

does  not  see  (vocalize  see) 

does  not  think  so 

does  not  this 

does  nothing 

does  one 

does  that  which 

does  their 

does  this 

does  your 

does  your  Honor 

during  my 

during  that 

during  this 

during  your 

each  has  been 

each  moment 

each  other 

each  was 

East  Indies 

engineer-in-chief 

et  cetera 

eternal  damnation 

eternal  death 

eternal  glory 

eternal  happiness 

ever  has  been 

ever  more 

ever  since  that 

ever  since  then 

everybody  else 

every  direction 

every  man 

every  moment 

everything 

ex  officio 


ex  parte 

fee  simple 

fellow  men 

few  persons 

for  another 

for  certain 

forever 

for  every  man 

for  every  reason 

for  his 

for  his  advantage 

for  his  interest 

for  his  name('s)   sake 

for  his  own 

for  his  own  interest 

for  his  own  part 

for  his  own  purpose 

for  his  own  sake 

for  his  own  use 

for  it  is 

for  its  own 

for  many 

for  many  years 

for  my  own  sake 

for  my  part 

for  my  sake 

for  one 

for  several 

for  several  years 

for  some  reason 

for  something 

for  such 

for  such  as 

for  such  as  were 

for  such  as  would 

for  such  is  not 

for  such  was 


SIMPLE  OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES. 


319 


for  that 

for  that  is  not 

for  them 

for  themselves 

for  these  (vocalize  these) 

for  this 

for  this  reason 

for  those 

for  those  who  ca(n) 

for  which 
j  for  which  their 
)  for  which  they  are 

for  which  there  is 

for  which  there  seems 

for  yon 

for  you  are  aware 

for  you  ca  (n) 

for  you  may  think 

for  you  will 

for  your 

for  your  honor 

for  your  sake 

for  as  much  as 

free  trade 

free  trader 

from  among 

from  as  many  as 

from  him 

from  many  such 

from  many  things 

from  that 

from  that  day 

from  them 

from  themselves 

from  this 

from  those  who  are     (are 
downward) 


from  this  place 

from  you 

from  your 

give  me 

give  it 

give  some 

give  that 

give  them 

give  themselves 

give  this 

give  you 

give  your 

gives  me 

gives  them 

God  is  faithful 

God  is  love 

God  is  my  refuge 

God  is  not 

good-bye 

good  day 

good  deal 

good  many 

good  night 

great  advantage 

great  applause 

great  danger 

great  deal 

great  deal  more 

great  majority 

great  many 

great  many  instances 

great  measure 

great  nation 

great  number 

great  people 

great  pleasure 

great  principles 


320 


SIMPLE  OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES. 


had  seen 
\  had  their 
"j  had  there 

had  therefore 

had  they 

had  we 

had  you 

had  you  known 

half  dozen 

has  been 

has  been  done 

has  done 

has  had 

has  just 

has  known 

has  made 

has  many 

has  many  more 

has  not 

has  not  been 

has  not  taken 

has  that 

has  them 

has  this 

have  become 

have  done 

have  endeavored 

have  found 

have  greatly 

have  just 

have  known 

have  many 

have  no  doubt 

have  only 

have  said 

have  seen 

have  sent  them 


have  several 

have  shown 

have  spoken 

have  suggested 

have  such 

have  supposed 

have  taken 

have  that 

have  them 

have  themselves 

have  these  (vocalize  these) 

have  this 

have  those 

have  thought 

have  understood 

have  we 

have  you 

hear  me 

hear  you 

Holy  Scriptures 

Holy  Spirit 

hope  that 

hope  this 

hope  you 

(The  following  phrases,  be- 
ginning with  how,  are  intend- 
ed for  Benn  Pitman  writers. 
For  phrases  written  with  the 
Graham  sign  for  how,  see 
Paragraphs  227-8.) 

how  are  (are  upward) 

how  are  they 

how  are  we 

how  ca(n) 

how  ca(n)  it  be 

how  ca(n)   they 

how  ca(n)  we 


SIMPLE  OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES. 


321 


how  ca(n)   you 
how  could 
how  could  you 
how  is  that 
how  is  this 
how  many 
how  many  cases 
how  many  days 
how  many  more 
how  many  occasions 
how  many  places 
how  many  such 
how  many  years 
how  may 
how  may  you 
how  much  (m,  ch) 
how  much  money 
how  must 
how  will  they 
human  being 
human  government 
human  happiness 
human  kind 
human  nature 
human  race 
human  rights 
human  understanding 
(For     phrases      beginning 
with    7,    see    Paragraphs 
212-9.) 
if  he 

if  he  ca(n) 
if  he  is 
if  he  is  not 
if  he  was 
if  his 
if  his  desire 


if  possible 

if  such 

if  that 

if  that  has 

if  that  has  been 

if  that  is 

if  that  is  done 

if  that  is  not 

if  that  were 

if  they 

if  they  were 

if  this 

if  we 

if  we  do 

if  we  have 

if  we  take 

if  we  think 

if  you  are 

if  you  ca(n) 

if  you  ca(n)not 

if  you  have 

if  you  must 

if  you  receive 

if  your 

in  accordance 

in  addition 

in  advance 

(For     phrases      beginning 

with  in  all,  see  Paragraph 

352.) 

in  another 

in  another  case 

in  another  instance 

in  answer 

in  any 

in  any  business 

in  any  case 


322 


SIMPLE  OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES. 


in  any  degree 

in  many 

in  any  instance 

in  many  instances 

in  any  position 

in  many  particulars 

in  any  way 

i  in  me 

in  anything 

^  in  my 

in  behalf 

in  my  life 

in  business 

in  my  opinion 

in  chief 

in  my  presence 

in  detail 

in  my  speech 

in  effect 

in  part 

in  every  case 

in  person 

in  existence 

in  progress 

in  general 

in  proportion 

in  God's  name 

in  pursuance 

in  heaven 

in  such 

in  vain    (vocalize    vain 

if    in  such  cases 

necessary) 

in  such  manner 

in  his 

in  such  way 

in  his  behalf 

in  such  words 

in  his  business 

in  such  matters 

in  his  interest 

in  that 

in  his  judgment 

in  that  manner 

in  his  opinion 

in  that  matter 

in  his  own 

in  them 

in  his  own  business 

in  this 

in  his  own  interest 

in  this  age 

in  his  own  name 

in  this  business 

in  his  position 

in  this  case 

in  his  testimony 

in  this  claim 

in  it 

in  this  instance 

in  its 

in  this  manner 

in  itself 

in  this  neighborhood 

in  its  own 

in  this  part 

in  its  place 

in  this  place 

in  its  position 

in  this  respect 

in  Jesus  Christ 

in  this  world 

in  judgment 

in  which 

SIMPLE  OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES. 


323 


in  which  he 
j  in  which  their 
( in  which  they  are 
in  which  you 
in  which  you  are  engaged 
in  which  you  are  under- 
stood 
in  your 

in  your  presence 
in  yourself 
in  so  much  as 
into  that 
into  their 
into  them 

into  these  (vocalize  these) 
into  this 
into  those 
into  this  country 
is  done 
is  necessary 
is  not 

is  not  necessary 
is  not  necessarily 
is  not  quite 
is  not  quite  clear 
is  not  only 
is  not  that 
is  not  this 
is  now 
is  so 
is  that 
is  this 

it  appears  that 
it  brings 
it  ca(n) 
it  ca(n)  be 
it  ca(n)  be  made 


it  ca(n)  be  said 

it  ca(n)  have 

it  ca(n)  make 

it  ca(n)not 

it  cannot  be 

it  cannot  be  done 

it  cannot  be  said 

it  could 

it  could  be 

it  could  be  done 

it  could  be  made 

it  could  be  said 

it  could  have 

it  could  not 

it  could  not  be  done 

it  could  not  be  made 

it  could  not  be  said 

it  could  not  have 

i  it  is 

I  it  has 

it  has  been 

it  has  been  done 

it  has  been  found 

it  has  been  known 

it  has  been  observed 
j  it  has  not 
I  it  is  not 

it  has  not  been 

it  has  not  done 

it  is  absolutely 

it  is  admitted 

it  is  also 

it  is  always 

it  is  believed 

it  is  better 

it  is  clear 

it  is  clearly 


324 


SIMPLE  OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES. 


it  is  done 

it  is  observed 

it  is  enough 

it  is  one 

it  is  found 

it  is  only 

it  is  generally 

it  is  only  necessary 

it  is  good 

it  is  perhaps 

it  is  important 

it  is  plain 

it  is  impossible 

it  is  probable-y 

*it  is  no  doubt 

it  is  quite  clear 

it  is  intended 

it  is  rather 

it  is  interesting 

it  is  right 

it  is  just 

it  is  so 

it  is  known 

it  is  surely 

it  is  manifest 

it  is  that 

it  is  most 

it  is  their 

it  is  mos(t)   important 

it  is  then 

it  is  mos(t)   likely 

it  is  this 

it  is  my  opinion 

it  is  true 

it  is  nearly 

it  is  understood 

it  is  necessary 

it  is  unknown 

it  is  necessarily 

it  is  unnecessary 

it  is  no 

it  is  wonderful 

it  is  no  more 

it  is  wrong 

it  is  no  part 

it  is  your 

it  is  no  use 

it  is  yours 

it  is  none 

it  looked 

it  is  not 

it  looks 

it  is  not  intended 

it  makes 

it  is  not  known 

it  makes  no  difference 

it  is  not  necessary 

it  may 

it  is  not  only 

it  may  never 

it  is  not  so 

it  might  not  be 

it  is  not  understood 

it  must 

it  is  nothing 

it  mus  (t)  be 

it  is  nothing  more 

it  mus  (t)  not 

it  is  now 

It  perhaps 

*Indeed,  in  order  that  it  may  not  be  confounded  with  no  doubt,  is 
never  joined  in  a  phrase,  except  at  the  beginning. 


SIMPLE  OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES. 


325 


it  probably 

it  seemed 

it  seems 

it  seems  so 

it  seems  strange 

it  should 

it  should  be 

it  should  not  be 

it  should  not  be  said 

it  should  not  have 

it  sometimes 

it  surely 

it  therefore 

it  was 

it  was  necessary 

it  was  never 

it  was  not 

it  was  nothing 

it  was  said 

it  was  supposed 

it  was  understood 

it  was  unnecessary 

judicial  decision 

judicial  investigation 

know  better 

know  it  Is  not 

know  nothing 

know  that 

know  that  it  is 

know  them 

know  this 

know  where  it  is 

knows  that 

knows  them 

knows  this 

law  court 

letter  book 


like  them 

like  that 

like  this 

long  ago 

long  before 

long  enough 

long  has  been 

long  since 

long  while 

look  at  that 

look  at  this 

look  like 

looks  like 

Lord's  day 

made  mention 

major  general 

make  mention 

make  that 

make  them 

make  this 

manner  in  which 

many  as  possible 

many  cases 

many  (circum)  stances 

many  instances 

many  more 

many  nations 

many  occasions 

many  such 

many  things 

may  also 

may  always 

may  always  be 

may  appear 

may  bring 

may  have 

may  have  done 


326 


SIMPLE  OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES. 


may  mention 

may  never 

may  probably 

may  perhaps 

may  sometimes 

may  they 

may  we 

may  you 

mean  to 

might  have 

might  have  done 

might  not 

might  not  be  able 

more  likely 

more  probable 

Mr.  Chairman 

Mr.  President 

Mr.  Speaker 

much  as 

much  as  it  is 

much  as  possible 

much  money 

my  colleague 

my  servant 

my  brother 

my  Christian  friends 

my  friend 

my  good  friend 

my  life 

my  love 

my  mind 

my  opinion 

my  own  opinion 

my  own  interest 

my  own  knowledge 


my  own  sake 
my  own  sentiments 
my  own  understanding 
my  respect  (ed)  friends 
near  as  possible 
necessary   (con) sequences 
need  never 
need  not 
need  not  be 
need  not  do 
need  not  necessarily 
need  not  say 
never  be 
never  do 
never  said 
no   (con) sequence 
no  doubt 
no  intention 
no  instance 
no  interest 
no  knowledge 
no,  it  is  not 
no,  it  won't 
no  man 
no  more 
no  necessity 
no  notice 
no  occasion 
no  one 
no  part 
no  person 
no  reason 
*no,  sir 
no  such  thing 
no,  thank  you 


*To  distinguish  this  phrase  from  answer,  it  is  best  to  give  sir  it*  or- 
dinary form. 


SIMPLE  OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES. 


327 


no  wonder 
no  worse  than 
nobody  else 
nor  do  I  think 
nor  do  they 
nor  do  you 
nor  have  we 
nor  is  it 
nor  is  that 
nor  is  this 
nor  shall 
nor  shall  it  be 
nor  such 
nor  was 
nor  were 
nor  were  the 
nor  were  they 
nor  were  we 
not  been 
not  enough 
not  known 
not  necessary 
not  necessarily 
not  now 
not  only 
not  only  that 
not  possible 
not  quite 
not  that 

not  to  my  knowledge 
not  so 

not  understood 
nothing  about  it 
nothing  about  that 
nothing  more 

(For      phrases     beginning 
with   of    and    on,  see    Para- 


graphs 173,  182-3.) 
one  another 
one  day 
one  generation 
one  idea 
one  instance 
one  item 
one  man 
one  side 
one  thing 
one  thing  more 
one  understands 
one  way 
one  which 
only  be 
only  had 
only  he  is  not 
only  he  would 
only  one  thing 
only  such 
only  those  who 
ought   (to)   be 
over  them 
over  this 
paper  money 
peculiar  circumstances 
perhaps  not 
perhaps  they 
perhaps  you  will 
perhaps  your 
personal  expenses 
personal  interview 
personal  knowledge 
personally  acquainted 
police  court 
political  advantage 
political  economy 


SIMPLE  OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES. 


political  power 

political  principles 

present  advantage 

present  (circum)  stances 

present  day 

present  instance 

public  matters 

public  mind 

public  life 

public  service 

public  works 

prima  facie 

promissory  note 

quarter  section 

quite  agree 

quite  likely 

quite  probable 

quite  sure 

railroad  car 

railroad  station 

rather  better 

recollect  that 

recollect  their 

recollect  them 

retired  list 

rising  generation 

Sabbath  day 

Sabbath  School 

St  Paul  (See  Paragraphs 

63-4.) 
St.  Peter  (See  Paragraphs 

63-4.) 
said  there 
saw  another 
saw  you 
saw  you  there 
say  anything 


say  so 

say  to  them 

say  you  are 

see  that 

see  that  it  is 

see  that  you  are 

see  you  are 

see  you  will 

seems  likely 

seems  so 

seems  there  is 

several  thousand  dollars 

shall  be 

shall  be  certain 

shall  be  sure 

shall  become 

shall  do 

shall  endeavor 

shall  go 

shall  never 

shall  not 

shall  not  be 

shall  remain 

shall  make 

shall  say 

shall  take 

she  ca(n) 

she  ca(n)not 

she  did 
|  she  has 
/  she  is 

she  has  been 

she  has  done 

she  has  never 

she  is  not 

she  may 

she  may  never 


SIMPLE  OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES.  329 


she  says 

she  seems 

she  shall 

she  was 

she  would 

short  distance 

short  space 

(For      phrases     beginning 
with  should,  see  Paragraphs 
184,  185.) 
(  since  it  has 
j  since  it  is 

since  it  has  been 

since  it  was 

since  that 

since  then 

since  they 

since  this 

since  which 

since  your 

so  as 

so  as  to  appear 

so  as  to  prevent 

so  as  to  receive 

so  as  to  remember 

so  be  it 

so  do  you 

so  good 

so  it  appears 

so  it  makes 

so  it  rests 

so  it  seems 

so  little 

so  many 

so  may  you 

so  sure 

so  that 


so  that  it  is 

so  that  it  seems 

so  that  you  may 

so  then 

so  they 

so  this 

so  you  are 

so  you  are  aware 

so  you  may 

so  you  will 

some  means 

some  regard 

some  such 

something  has  been  done 

something  is  necessary 

sons  of  men 

South  America 

spirit  land 

spirit  world 

State  rights 

stock  broker 

subject  matter 
f  such  as 
-j  such  has 
I  such  is 

such  as  are     (are     down- 
ward) 

such  as  ca(n) 

such  as  ca(n)   be 

such  as  ca(n)not  be 

such  as  could 

such  as  it  is 

such  as  may 

such  as  need  not 

such  as  that 

such    as    these      (vocalize 
these) 


330 


SIMPLE  OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES. 


such  as  this 

such  as  those 
(such  as  they  are 
(such  as  there 

such  as  there  are 

such  ca(n) 

such  ca(n)not  be 

such  cases 

such  could  not  be 

such  could  only  be 

such  has  been 

such  has  never 

such  has  no  doubt 
(such  has  not 
( such  is  not 

such  matters 

such  may 

such  men 

such  only 

such  persons 

such  principles 

such  therefore 

such  you 

suppose  you  are 

sure  way 

take  another  case 

take  care 

take  courage 

take  notes 

take  occasion 

takes  occasion 

take  pains 

take  part 

take  place 

take  possession 

takes  possession 

take  such 


take  such  matters 

take  their 

take  that 

take  them 

take  this 

take  this  occasion 

take  you 

take  your 

tell  him 

tell  me  (vocalize  me) 

tell  such 

tell  your 

tell  them 

thank  you 

that  day 

that  does 

that  does  not 

that  has 

that  is 

that  has  been 

that  has  never 

that  have 

that  is  all 

that  is  to 

that  is  another 

that  is  another  thing 

that  is  entirely 

that  is  intended 

that  is  it 

that  is  necessary 

that  is  not 

that  is  no  doubt 

that  is  nothing 

that  is  not  necessary 

that  is  not  possible 

that  is  now 

that  is  one 


SIMPLE   OR  WORD-JOINING   PHRASES. 


331 


that  is  only 

that  is  so 

that  is  understood 

that  is  where 

that  is  worse 

that  is  worth 

that  it  is 

that  it  is  only 

that  it  may  appear 

that  is  might  appear 

that  it  might  not 

that  it  should  be 

that  it  may 

that  perhaps 

that  probably 

that  plan 

that  place 

that  supposition 

that  such 

that  such  are 

that  such  as  ca(n) 
(that  there 
(that  their 

that  there  appears 

that  there  are 

that  there  is 

that  they 

that  this 

that  we 

that  we  were 

that  were 

that  which 

that  which  ca(n)  be 

that  which  ca(n)not  be 

that  which  has  been 

that  which  is  not 

that  which  you  may 


that  you 

that  you  are 

that  you  have 

that  you  should  be 

that  your 

there  are 

there  are  some 

there  ca(n)   be 

there  ca(n)not  be 

there  could  be 

there  could  not  be 

there  does  not 
( there  has 
"j  there  is 

there  has  been 

there  has  never 

there  have 

there  is  another 

there  is  another  point 

there  is  another  subject 

there  is  little 

there  is  necessarily 

there  is  never 

there  is  no  difference 

there  is  no  doubt 

there  is  no  objection 

there  is  no  one 

there  is  no  subject 

there  is  no  such  thing 

there  is  not 

there  is  nothing 

there  is  not  only 

there  is  now 

there  was  occasion 

there  was  no  occasion 

there  should  be 

there  you  are 


332         SIMPLE   OR  WORD-JOINING   PHRASES. 


there  you  may 

there  you  must 

there  you  will 

therefore  it  is 

these  people 

these  places 

these  points 

these  reasons 

these  things 

they  are  said  (there  for 

they  are) 
they  are  so 
they  are  sometimes 
they  did 
they  do 
they  may  have 
they  may  sometimes 
they  must 
they  said 
they  themselves 
they  think 
they  think  that 
they  were 
think  this 
think  you  are 
think  you  may 
think  perhaps 
think  probably 
think  that 
think  them 
think  they  may 
this  account 
this  advantage 
this  afternoon 
this  age 
this  bill 
this  business 


this  country 

this  ca(n)  be 

this  ca(n)not  be 

this  case 

this   (circum)  stance 

this  could  be 

this  date 

this  day 

this  does 

this  does  not 

this  generation 

this  instance 

this  kind 

this  matter 

this  never  will  be 

this  notice 

this  one  thing 

this  opinion 

this  part 

this  passage 

this  people 

this  period 

this  place 

this  point 

this  purpose 

this  question 

this  reason 

this  thing 

this  was 

this  was  not 

this  undertaking 

this  vote 

this  world 

those  are   (are  upward) 

those  were 

those  that 


SIMPLE   OR   WORD- JOINING   PHRASES. 


333 


those  things 

those  which 

those  who 

those  who  are    (are   down- 
ward ) 

those  who  could 

those  who  would 

though  that 

though  they 

though  this 

though  they  were 

though  you  may 

thought  that 

thought  their 

thought  they  were 

thought  them 

thought      these      (vocalize 

these) 

j thought  this 
(thought  those 

thought  we  were 
\  through  his 
I  through  us 

through  so  many 

through  you 

thus  far 

thus  it  is 

till  some 

till  such 

till  that 

till  there 

till  there  be 

till  then 

till  they 

till  these  (vocalize  these) 
(till  this 
"(till  those 


till  those  who 
till  you  are 
till  you  are  ready 
till  you  ca  (n) 
till  you  go 

(For      phrases     beginning 
with  to,  see  Paragraph  174.) 
told  him 

told  me  (vocalize  me) 
told  them 
told  you 

to-morrow  afternoon 
to-morrow  night 
too  great 
too  little 
too  late 
too  many 
too  short 
too  true 
took  you 
took  possession 
took  your 
took  part 
took  them 
took  place 
total  amount 
toward  such 
toward  you 
towards  another 
towards  it 

towards  one  another 
towards  that 
towards  which 
towards  them 
towards      these      (vocalize 

these) 
true  God 


334         SIMPLE   OR   WORD-JOINING   PHRASES. 


( towards  this 
(towards  those 

truly  yours 

under   (con)sideration 

under  his 

under  it 

under  no  circumstances 

under  such 

under  such  circumstances 

under  such  regulations 

under  that 

under  them 

under  this 

under  which 

under  your 

United  States  of  America 

unless  it  is 

unless  that 

unless  they 

unless  this 

unless  your 

universal  church 

universal  happiness 

until  his 

until  some 

until  there  are 

until  there  is 

until  there  is  another 

until  they 

until  you 

until  you  are 

up  side  down 

upon  another  occasion 

upon  his 

upon  his  own 

upon  his  own  behalf 

upon  ourselves 


upon  no  such 

very  bad 

very  best 

very  certain 

very  dear 

very  good 

very  great 

very  late 

very  lately 

very  likely 

very  many 

very  much  (m,  ch) 

very  near 

very  probable 

very  rare 

very  seldom 

very  short 

very  shortly 

very  soon 

very  strong 

very  sure 

very  true 

wants  of  mankind 

was  also 

was  always 

was  as  good  as 

was  asked 

was  another 

was  better 

was  done 

was  lately 

was  likely 

was  made 

was  many  times  (tms) 

was  meant 

was  mentioned 

was  never 


SIMPLE   OR  WORD-JOINING   PHRASES. 


335 


was  no  doubt 

was  notwithstanding 

was  noticed 

was  nothing 

was  present 

was  received 

was  regular 

was  said 

was  seen 

was  sent 

was  so 

was  somewhere 

was  soon 

was  lately 

was  this 

was  then 

was  truly 

was  understood 

(For      phrases     beginning 

with  we.  see  Paragraph  276) 

well  done 

well  known 

well,  now 

well  that 

well,  then 

well,  sir 

were  we 

what  amount 

what  ca(n)  be 

what  ca(n)not 

what  could  be 

what  could  they 

what  could  we 

wlfat  could  we  do 

what  could  we  think 

what  do  they 


what  do  you 

what  do  you  mean 

what  do  you  think 
\  what  has 
( what  is 

what  has  been 

what  has  been  done 
\  what  it  has 
f  what  it  is 

what  it  has  been 

what  it  is  worth 

what  is  necessary 

what  is  right 

what  may 

what  may  not 

what  matter 

what  means 

what  might 

what  must 

what  position 

what  say  you 

what  was 

what  was  the 

what  way 

what  would  be 

whatever  it  may 

when  do 

when  do  they 

when  do  you  go 

when  did 

when  does  it 

when  have  we 

when  I  am 

when  I  am  able 

when  I  am  inclined 

when  that  is 


336 


SIMPLE  OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES. 


when  these  (vocalize  these) 
j when  this 
(when  those 

when  they 

when  we  do 

when  we  have 

when  is  this 

when  it  has  been 

when  it  is 

when  it  is  done 

when  it  is  known 

when  it  is  necessary 

when  it  may 

when  it  was 

when  was 

when  we  were 

when  were  they 

when  will  you   (will  down- 
ward) 

when  your 

whenever  it  is 

whenever  it  may 

whenever  that 

whenever    these     (vocalize 

these) 

( whenever  this 
(whenever  those 

whenever  you 

whenever  you  are 

whenever  you  like 

whenever  you  will 

where  are  (are  upward) 

where  are  they 

where  are  these 

where  are  we 

where  did  you 

where  did  you  go 


where  do  you  live 
where  do  you  reside 
where  do  you  think 
where  does  it 
where  does  this 
where  is  this 
where  have  they 
where  have  we 
where  have  you 
where  is  that 
where  we 
where  we  had 
where  we  have 
where  we  were 
where  were 
where  were  they 
where  were  we 
whereas  it  is 
whereby  you  may 
whereby  you  ca(n) 
where  another  has  been 
wherever  it  is 
whether  you 
whether  you  have 
whether  you  may 
wherever  you  are 
wherever  you  ca(n) 
wherever  you  will 
which  ca(n) 
which  ca(n)  be 
which  could  be 
which  ca(n)   not 
which  ca(n)  not  be 
which  could  never 
which  could  not 
j  which  has 
I  which  is 


SIMPLE   OR  WORD-JOINING   PHRASES. 


337 


•which  has  been 

which  has  never 

which  has  not  been 

which  has  nothing 

which  has  now 

which  is  known 

which  is  now 

which  is  no  doubt 

which  is  nothing 

which  is  not 

which  is  not  clear 

which  is  not  only 

which  is  not  possible 

which  is  not  intended 

which  makes 

which  many 

which  matters  little 

which  matters  not 

which  may 

which  might 

which  must 

which  perhaps 

which  seems 

which  seemed 

which  shall  (shall  upward) 

which  should 

which  some 

which  sure(ly) 

which  was 

which  was  not 

which  was  never 
j  which  they  are 
|  which  their 

which  you 

which  you  are 

which  you  ca(n) 

which  you  will 


which  you  will  perceive 

while  another 

while  they  were 

while  this 

who  are 

who  ca(n)   be 

who  could  be 

who  came 

who  ca(n)   not 
.  who  has 
\  who  is 

who  has  been 

who  has  done 

who  has  had 

who  has  nothing 

who  has  not  observed 

who  has  it 

when  shall 

who  is  it 

who  is  this 

who  is  to 

who  was  it 

who  may 

who  said 

who  supposes 

who  make 

who  mean 

who  mean  (to)  b« 

who  must 

who  know  nothing 

who  said 

who  said  so 

who  said  there  is 

who  therefore 

who  told  him 

who  told  that 

who  told  them 


338 


SIMPLE  OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES. 


who  told  you 
who  told  your 
who  was  not 
who  could  not 
who  could  not  be 
who  would  not  have 
who  would  not  say 
will  be 
will  be  found 
will  perhaps 
will  probably 
will  be  said 
will  have 
will  you 
with  advantage 
with  his 
with  his  own 
with  it 
with  its 
with  one 
with  one  another 
with  one  thing 
with  that 
with  them 
with  themselves 
with  this 

with  this  understanding 
with  which 

with    which    you    are    ac- 
quainted 
with  your 

with  your  permission 
with  your  sanction 
without  doubt 
without  his 
without  his  knowledge 


without  one 

without  such 

without  that 

without  these  (vocalize 

these) 

( without  this 
"(without  those 

without  their 

without  them 

without  your 

won't  be 

won't  notice 

won't  they 

won't  understand 

worthy  member 

would  be 

would  be  sufficient 

would  come 

would  do 

would  go 

would  hope 

would  have 

would  it 

would  make 

would  no  doubt 

would  know 

would  mention 

would  never 

would  not 

would  not  be 

would  not  have  said 

would  occasion 

would  receive 

would  rather 

would  understand 

would  say 


SIMPLE   OR  WORD-JOINING  PHRASES. 


839 


would  see  (vocalize  see) 
*yes,  sir 
yet  another 
yet  have 
you  are 
you  are  aware 
you  are  certain 
you  are  determined 
you  are  never 
you  are  ready 
you  are  supposed 
you  ca(n)  be 
you  ca(n)  hare 
you  may  think 
you  may  say 
you  made 
you  mean  to 
you  mention 
you  might 


you  might  not  be 
you  recollect 
you  require 
you  should 
you  should  be 
you  should  not 
you  should  do 
you  will  be 
you  will  be  sorry 
you  will  be  sure 
you  will  do  right 
you  will  do  wrong 
you  will  make 
you  will  no  doubt 
you  will  remember 
you  will  think 
you  will  understand 
young  man 
young  woman 


*Ss  is  a  more  convenient  sign  for  yes  than  Ys,  especially  in  the  very 
common  phrase,  Yet,  sir. 


INDEX. 

(The  figures  refer  to  the  numbers  of  the  Paragraphs.) 


A,  ellipsis  of,  129.     (See  Tick  Word-signs.) 

A  con,  a  com,  etc.,  indicated  by  disjoined  ticks,  331,  334. 

Ability,  special  method  of  writing,  in  phrases,  525. 

Al,  termination,  ellipsis  of,  151. 

All  or  will,  expressed  by  I  hook  on  consonant  strokes,  Chap. 
XIII,  350-361;  caution  in  regard  to,  361;  all  or  will  ex- 
pressed by  I  hook  on  tick  word-signs,  234-5;  all  or  will 
expressed  by  enlarging  r  hook,  374-5. 

Already  (See  Tick  Word-signs.) 

Ambiguity,  safe,  law  of,  83. 

An  (See  Tick  Word-Signs.) 

And,  ellipsis  of,  130:    (See  Tick  Word-signs.) 

Any,  no,  how  distinguished  in  phrases,  526. 

Are,  expressed  by  r  hook  on  consonant  strokes,  362-3;  on 
tick  word-signs,  234,  236;  expressed  by  enlarging  I 
hook,  374-5;  word-sign  for,  written  upward  or  downward 
in  phrases,  527. 

As,  initial,  249;  rule  for     placing,  79;  fictitious  primitive 
for,  420-1,  463-4. 

As  it,  expressed  by  st  loop,  389-392;  expressed  by  halving 
consonant  stroke  z,  463-4. 

As  there,  expressed  by  double-length  z,  420-1;  expressed  bj 
str  loop,  393-8. 

At  all,  until,  how  distinguished  in  phrases,  528. 

At  some  time,  at  the  same  time,  how  distinguished  in 
phrases,  529. 

Avenue,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  530. 

Aivay,  how  sometimes  expressed  in  phrases,  563. 


342  INDEX. 

Bad  junctions  (See  Junctions). 

Been,  expressed  by  n  hook,  457-8;  various  methods  of  ex- 
pressing, in  phrases,  531;  to  have  been,  special  phrase- 
sign,  383-4. 

Before  (See  Tick  Word-signs). 

Believe,  how  best  written,  207  (note). 

Beyond,  initial,  287. 

Bill,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  532. 

Body,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  533. 

Books,  shorthand,  consulted  in  preparing  this  volume,  6. 

Brace,  meaning  of,  in  exercises,  173    (note). 

Broken  phrase  defined,  20. 

Business,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  534. 

But  (See  Tick  Word-signs). 

Can,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  74  (note),  164  (note),  481 
(note),  535. 

Cannot,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  187,  (first  note.) 

Cautions,  general,  to  students,  Chap.  IV,  56-60. 

Circles,  double  (See  Circle  Word-signs). 

Circle  Word  Signs  (is,  his,  as,  has,  us)  Chap.  X,  246-274; 
position  of,  246;  'is,  initial,  247;  his,  initial,  248;  has, 
initial,  250;  caution  as  to  initial  circle-signs,  251;  circle 
for  us,  medial  or  final,  252-3;  circle  word-signs,  joined  to 
ticks  or  brief  w  and  y  word-signs,  254;  circles,  merging 
of,  255-9,  262-4;  circle  word-signs  as  part  of  double  circle, 
255-266;  double  circle  followed  by  a  or  the  tick,  259;  double 
circle  beginning  a  phrase,  260-1;  circle  word-signs  follow- 
ing double  circle,  265-6;  circle  word-signs  following  loop, 
267-8;  ellipsis  of  circle,  269-272;  vocalization  of  circles, 
273;  "fictitious  primitive"  substituted  for  circle  word- 
signs,  274. 

Composite  phrase,  defined,  22. 

Con  or  com,  ellipsis  of,  147-8;  indicated  by  proximity,  328-9; 
Implied  by  joining,  330. 

Context,  a  means  of  word  distinction,  82-4. 

Contra-normal  expedients,  why  necessary,  111-2;  classified, 
113-121. 


INDEX.  343 

Court  reporting,  American  system  of,  14. 

Court,  phrases  beginning  with,  63-5. 

D  or  ed,  ellipsis  of,  154-5,  157. 

Dear,  expressed  by  double-lengthing,  422-3. 

Distinction,  means  of,  between  possibly  conflicting  words, 
82-100;  distinction  by  position,  85-7;  by  "exclusion,"  88-9; 
by  variation  of  outline,  90-91;  by  vocalization,  9/-100. 

Double-circles  (See  Circle  Word-signs.) 

Double-lengthing  as  a  phrasing  factor,  Chap.  XIII,  399-433; 
double-length  for  their  or  there,  399-409,  t!9-421,  426-7; 
double-length  for  they  are,  410-11;  double-length  for 
other,  412-418,  421;  dou Die-length  for  whether,  424-5; 
double-length  for  dear,  422-3;  double-lengthing  of  straight 
strokes,  432-3. 

Ellipsis  (the  law  of  implication),  Chap.  VIII,  122-168;  im- 
plication and  indication  distinguished,  126-7;  what  words 
may  be  omitted,  122;  caution  as  to  use  of  this  principle, 
128;  ellipsis  of  a,  129;  ellipsis  of  -al  and  -ly,  151;  ellipsis 
of  and,  130;  ellipsis,  of  con  or  com,  148;  ellipsis  of 
from,  146;  ellipsis  of  h  tick,  152;  ellipsis  of  ing,  149;  ellip- 
sis of  n  hook,  163-4;  ellipsis  of  of,  133;  ellipsis  of  of  the, 
134-5;  ellipsis  of  on  the,  136;  ellipsis  of  personal  pro- 
nouns, 165;  ellipsis  of  r  hook,  161-2;  ellipsis  of  s,  159; 
ellipsis  of  t  or  d,  153-7;  ellipsis  of  to,  138-146;  ellipsis  of 
the,  132;  ellipsis  of  w  hook,  160;  ellipsis  of  with,  137; 
irregular  ellipsis,  167-8. 

Elliptic  phrase,  defined,  21. 

Else,  less,  how  distinguished  in  phrases,  546. 

"Exclusion,"  a  means  of  word-distinction,  88-9. 

Exercises,  modo  of  practising,  65  (note). 

Expedients,  contra-normal, (See  Contra-normal  Expedients.) 

Extra  care  necessary  in  writing  some  useful  phrases,  34-5. 

F-v  hook  as  phrasing  factor,  Chap.  XIX,  480-512;  f-v  hook 
for  have  and  to  have,  480-9;  have  had  and  have  it,  490- 
503;  f-v  hook  for  of,  504-5;  of  it  and  of  its,  506-7;  en- 
larged f-v  hook  for  have  and  of,  508-512. 

"Factors  of  Shorthand  Speed,"  relation  of  this  book  to,  7. 


844  INDEX. 

"Fictitious  primitives"  (consonant  strokes  in  lieu  of  tick 
word-signs,  etc..  108,  274,  358-9,  420-1,  463.,  484. 

First,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  535%. 

First,  the,  not  an  advisable  phrase,  206  (note). 

From,  ellipsis  of,  146. 

From-to,  indicated  by  proximity,  324-5. 

Graham,  Andrew  J.,  states  law  of  implication,  124. 

H,  initial  tick,  ellipsis  of,  152. 

Had,  depressed  by  halving,  471. 

Half-lengthing  as  a  phrasing  factor,  Chap.  XVIII,  460-479; 
half-lengthing  for  it,  460-4;  half-lengthing  of  "fictitious 
primitive,"  463-4;  half-legthing  for  to.  465-6;  half-lengtlt- 
ing  for  would,  467-470;  half-lengthing  for  had,  471-2;  ha.f- 
lengthing  and  n  hook  for  not,  473-4,  477-8. 

Hand-training  required  for  facile  phrasing,  36-38. 

Has,  initial,  250;  rule  for  placing,  79;  "fictitious  primitive" 
for,  420-1;  463. 

Has  it,  expressed  by  st  loop,  389,  392;  expressed  by  halving 
consonant  stroke  z,  463-4. 

Has  there,  expressed  by  double-length  z,  420-1;  expressed  by 
str  loop,  393-8. 

Have,  ellipsis  of,  168  (note) ;  expressed  by  f-v  hook  on  con- 
sonant strokes,  480-488;  on  tick  word-signs,  234,  237;  affix- 
ed to  they  by  enlarged  f-v  hook,  508-511;  several  methods 
of  expressing,  in  phrases,  536. 

Have  had,  or  have  it,  expressed  by  f-v  hook  and  half-length- 
ing, 490-503. 

He,  ellipsis  of,  165.  (See  Tick  Word-signs.) 

He  had,  he  had  not,  how  phrased,  474  (note). 

He,  I,  how  distinguished  in  phrases,  186  (note),  537. 

Him,  me,  how  distinguished  in  phrases,  538. 

His,  initial,  248. 

"Horse-shoe,"  or  enlarged  semi-circle,  for  we  would,  would 
you,  etc.,  304-10. 

House,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  539-540. 

How,  tick  word-sign,  226-230. 


INDEX.  345 

I,  ellipsis  of,  165;  I  initial,  209-220;  I  and  he  distinguished, 
80,  537. 

Z  con-,  he  con-,  is  con-,  has  con-,  etc.  indicated  by  detached 
ticks  or  circles,  335-6. 

I.  D.,  a  sign  for  "initial  displacement,  141  (note). 

I  had,  he  had,  how  distinguished,  458   (note). 

I  had  not,  he  had  not,  how  distinguished,  474   (note). 

Implication,  the  law  of,  122-5;  distinguished  from  indica- 
tion, 126-7. 

In,  expressed  by  n  hook,  459  l/». 

In  as  and  in  his,  expressed  by  "in  curl"     (See  In  Curl). 

In  curl,  for  in,  in  as,  iti  his,  Chap.  XX,  513-524;  in  expressed 
by  "in  curl,"  513,  517;  in  as,  expressed  by  "in  curl"  and 
circle,  513,  519;  in  his,  expressed  by  "in  curl"  and  circle, 
513,  518;  a,  an  or  the,  elided  in  the  "in  curl,"  520-1;  double- 
circle  following  "in  curl,"  522-3. 

In  law,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  541. 

In  our,  position  of,  365    (note). 

In  re-,  how  expressed  in  such  phrases  as  in  reply,  etc.,  385-6. 

In  recom-,  in  recog-,  etc.,  how  expressed  in  such  phrases  as 
in  recompense,  etc.,  387-8. 

Indeed,  no  doubt,  how  distinguished  in  phrases,  542. 

Indication  and  implication  distinguished,  126-7. 

-Ing,  termination,  ellipsis  of,  149. 

Ing  (consonant  stroke)  double-lengthing  of,  in  phrases  to 
add  their  or  there,  405-7. 

-Ing  a,  -ing  the,  indicated  by  disjoined  tick,  339-342. 

-Ing  is,  -ing  his  or  -ing  us,  indicated  by  detached  circle, 
347-8. 

-Ing  their  or  -ing  there,  indicated  by  disjointed  tick,  343-5. 

Initial  displacement  (See  Position). 

Instance,  circumstance,  how  distinguished  in  phrases,  543. 

Intersection,  how  used  in  phrase-construction,  572. 

Invention  of  irregular  phrases,  (See  Phrases,  Irregular). 

Inversion  of  ice,  were,  would,  you,  298-9. 

Irland,  Fred,  acknowledgment  of  assistance  rendered  by,  12. 

Irregular  phrase  denned,  23.  (See  Phrases,  Irregular). 


346  INDEX. 

7s,  initial,  247;  fictitious  primitive  for,  420-1,  463. 

7s  con-,  his  con-,  as  con-,  has  con-,  etc.,  indicated  by  detached 
circle,  335-6. 

7s,  his,  as,  has,  position  of,  when  initial,  79,  251;  not  to  be 
needlessly  displaced,  246  (note). 

7s  it,  as  it,  has  it,  expressed  by  halving  consonant  stroke  z, 
463-4;  expressed  by  st  loop,  389,  392,  392%. 

7s  there,  as  there,  has  there,  expressed  by  double-length  z, 
420-1;  expressed  by  sir  loop,  393-8. 

It,  expressed  by  halving,  460-464. 

Junctions,  bad,  classified,  39-47;  how  obviated,  48;  easy 
junctions  necessary  for  good  phrases,  31-2;  difficult  junc- 
tions sometimes  tolerated,  but  require  extra  practice,  33-5. 

L  hook  on  consonant  strokes  for  all  or  will,  Chap.  XIII,  350- 
361;  I  hook  on  tick  word-signs  for  all  or  will,  234-5;  I  hook 
enlarged  to  add  are  or  our,  374-5. 

Legibility,  requisite  for  good  phrases,  52-3;  legibility  pro- 
moted by  good  phrases,  14%. 

Less,  else,  how  distinguished  in  phrases,  546. 

Letters  or  syllables,  ellipsis  of,  150. 

"License,  reporting,"  when  and  why  allowable,  111-2. 

Limitations,  cautions,  etc.,  Chap.  IV,  56-60. 

Lineality,  required  in  a  good  phrase,  49. 

-Ly,  termination,  ellipsis  of,  151. 

Mavor.  William,  states  law  of  implication,  122. 

May  be,  special  phrase  sign  for.  378-9. 

May  have  been,  special  phrase  sign  for,  380. 

Mb  (consonant  stroke)  double-lengthing  adds  their  or 
there,  405-6. 

Mac,  Me,  etc.,  expressed  by  m  at  the  beginning  of  proper 
names,  547. 

Morris,  F.  G.,  states  law  of  implication,  125. 

Mount,  phrases  beginning  with,  63-5. 

N  curl  (See  "In  Curl"). 

N  hook,  ellipsis  of,  163-4;  n  hook  as  a  phrasing  factor, 
Chap.  XVII,  434-459;  been  expressed  by  n  hook,  457;  one 
expressed  by  n  hook,  434-440;  own  expressed  by  n  hook, 


INDEX.  347 

234,  238,  441-451;  than,  expressed  by  n  hook,  452-6;  not 
expressed  by  n  hook,  234,  238,  475-9;  by  n  hook  and  halv- 
ing, 473-4. 

No,  any,  how  distinguished  in  phrases,  526. 

No  other,  how  expressed  in  phrasing,  415-418. 

North,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  548. 

Northern,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  548. 

Not,  expressed  by  halving  and  the  n  hook,  473-4;  expressed 
by  n  hook  only,  475-9. 

Ocean,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  544. 

Of,  ellipsis  of,  133;  indicated  by  proximity,  327;  initial  tick 
for,  173;  "fictitious  primitive"  for,  108,  358-9,  420-1,  463-4; 
expressed  by  f-v  hook  on  consonant  strokes,  504-5;  on 
tick  word-signs,  234,  237;  affixed  to  think  by  enlarged  f-v 
hook,  508-9.  (See  Tick  Word-signs.) 

Of  all,  how  phrased,  234-5,  358-9. 

Of  all  it,  how  phrased,  463-4. 

Of  it,  expressed  by  halving  "fictitious  primitive,"  463-4;  ex- 
pressed by  f-v  hook  and  halving,  506-7. 

Of  the,  ellipsis  of,  134-5;  indicated  by  proximity,  317-322; 
when  not  indicated  by  proximity,  323;  several  methods 
of  expressing,  549.  (See  Tick  Word-signs). 

Omission  of  words.     (See  Ellipsis). 

On  the,  ellipsis  of,  136. 

One,  expressed  by  n  hook,  434-440. 

Or,  ellipsis  of,  131;  expressed  by  r  hook,  369-370;  fictitious 
primitive  for,  420;  several  methods  of  expressing,  in 
phrases,  550.  (See  Tick  Word-signs). 

Originality,  absolute,  not  practicable  in  a  phrase-book,  5. 

Other,  expressed  by  double-lengthing,  412-418,  421. 

Ought,  (See  Tick  Word-signs). 

Ought  to  have,  how  written,  484-488;  affixed  to  they  by  en- 
larged f-v  hook,  510-511. 

Our,  expressed  by  r  hook  on  consonant  strokes,  365-7; 
on  tick  word-signs,  234,  236;  our  added  by  enlarging  I 
hook,  374-5. 

Ourself,  ourselves,  expressed  by  r  book  and  circle,  368. 


34S  INDEX. 

Outline,  variation  of  (See  Variation). 

Own,  expressed  by  n  hook,  234,  238,  441-451;  how  distin- 
guished from  knoio,  545. 

Parenthesis,  an  indication  of  omitted  letters  or  words,  123. 

Part,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  551. 

Patterson,  Robert,  states  law  of  implication,  123. 

Personal  pronouns,  ellipsis  of,  165. 

Phrase,  general,  definition  of,  24;  "simple,  or  word-join- 
ing phrase"  defined,  15;  "word-blending  phrase"  defined, 
16-19;  "broken  phrase"  defined,  20;  "elliptic  phrase"  de- 
fined, 21;  "composite  phrase"  defined,  22;  "irregular  or 
special  phrase"  defined,  23. 

Phrase,  a  good,  requisites  of,  Chap.  Ill,  28-55. 

Phrases,  advisability  of  particular,  varies  with  different 
writers,  60. 

Phrases,  customary,  sometimes  varied,  110. 

Phrases,  irregular,  utility  and  necessity  of,  566-7;  invention 
of,  Chap.  XXII,  566-573;  premeditated,  568;  off-hand,  how 
suggested  and  evolved,  569;  irregular  phrases  classified, 
570;  how  constructed, — (a)  by  omission  of  words  or  parts 
of  words,  (b)  by  breaking  the  phrase,  (c)  by  intersection, 
571-2;  irregular  phrases,  off-hand,  indication  of,  5730;  ir- 
regular phrases,  cautions  in  regard  to  construction  of, 
573;  irregular  phrases,  legibility  of,  how  endangered, 
573/v  irregular  phrases  of  general  utility,  list  of,  Chap. 

XXIII,  574;  why  larger  number  are  not  listed,  574. 
Phrases,  shorthand  key  to,  why  unnecessary  and  harmful,  3. 
Phrases  should  correspond  with  natural  word-groups,  29. 
Phrases,  simple  or  word-joining,  defined,  15;  list  of,  Chap. 

XXIV,  575. 

Phrases,  unduly  long,  to  be  avoided,  431. 
Phrase-signs,  special,  Chap.  XV,  378-398. 
Phrase-signs,  irregular.     (See  Phrases,  Irregular). 
Phrasing,  how  correctly  learned  or  taught,  1-2 ;  when  should 
study  of,  begin,  8;  lessons  on,  how  studied,  11,  65  (note). 
Phrasing  in  Pitmanic  shorthand,  gradually  developed,  17; 


INDEX.  319 

utility  of,  testimony  of  'i.  A.  Reed,  13;  especially  useful  in 
testimony  and  other  colloquial  matter,  14. 

Phrase  word-signs,  10,3-104. 

Position,  general  and  special  rules  for,  Chap.  V,  61-81;  first 
word  generally  determines  position  of  phrase,  61;  two 
exceptions  to  general  rule  of  position  (phrases  treated  as 
compound  words,  and  phrases  whose  first  word  or  first  two 
words  have  no  position  of  their  own),  66-68;  "initial  dis- 
placement" (first  word  or  first  two  words  displaced  to  ac- 
commodate second  or  third),  70-79,  223;  when  proper,  78; 
utility  of  "initial  displacement,"  81;  displacement  of  ini- 
tial is,  his,  as,  has,  he,  I,  79,  80;  I.  D.,  a  sign  for  "initial 
displacement,"  141  (note)  ;  position  as  a  means  of  word- 
distinction,  85-7;  substitutes  for  positional  distinction 
"exclusion,"  variation  of  outline,  vocalization),  88-100. 

Preface,  1-12. 

Prefixes  in  the  midst  of  phrases,  337-8. 

"Primitives,  fictitious."    (See  "Fictitious  Primitives"). 

Pronouns,  personal,  ellipsis  of,  165. 

Proximity,  a  means  of  indicating  omitted  words  or  syl- 
lables, 315-349;  when  dispensed  with  in  familiar  phrases, 
326;  of  the  indicated  by  proximity,  317-323;  from-to  indi- 
cated by  proximity,  324-6;  of  indicated  by  proximity,  327; 
con  or  com  indicated  by  proximity,  328-336;  prefixes  In 
midst  of  phrases,  337-8; -ing  a  and  -ing  the  indicated  by 
proximity,  339-341;  -ing  their  indicated  by  proximity, 
343-5;  -ing  his  or  -ing  us  indicated  by  proximity,  347-8; 
proximity  in  special  phrases,  349. 

Quadruple  lengths  disapproved,  430. 

Quasi  r  hook  for  you,  314%. 

R  hook,  ellipsis  of,  161-2;  r  hook  as  phrasing  factor,  Chap. 
XIV,  362-377;  r  hook  for  are,  363;  r  hook  for  or,  369;  r 
hook  for  our,  364-8 ;r  hook  for  were,  371-3;  enlarged  r  hook 
to  add  all  or  will,  374-5;  quasi  r  hook  for  you,  314%;  limi- 
tation of  r  hook  as  word  indicator,  376. 

Reed,  T.  A.,  testimony  of,  as  to  value  of  phrasing,  13. 


350  INDEX. 

Regard,  regret,  how  distinguished  in  phrases,  552. 

Reporters,  practice  of,  exemplified  in  this  book,  4. 

"Reporting  license,"  when  and  why  allowable,  111-2. 

"Restoration,"  (a  full  outline  instead  of  a  word-sign),  when 
necessary,  106. 

Rules,  when  and  how  violated  for  convenience  or  speed,  111- 
121. 

S  circle  word-signs  (See  Circle  Word-signs). 

8,  ellipsis  of,  159. 

Safe  ambiguity,  law  of,  83. 

Saint,  phrases  beginning  with,  63-5. 

Say,  see,  how  distinguished  in  phrases,  554. 

Secretary,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  553. 

See,  say,  how  distinguished  in  phrases,  554. 

Self  or  selves,  following  our,  368. 

Sense  relation,  requisite  for  good  phrases,  30. 

Semi-circle,  enlarged,  to  express  we  would,  ivere  you,  etc., 
304-14. 

Session,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  555. 

Shorthand  books  consulted  in  preparing  this,  6. 

Shorthand  systems  represented  in  this  book,  10. 

Should  (See  Tick  Word-signs). 

Similar  signs,  confusing  succession  of,  to  be  avoided,  50. 

Simple  or  word-joining  phrases,  defined,  15;  list  of,  Chap. 
XXIV,  575. 

Special  or  irregular  phrase,  defined,  23.  (See  Phrases,  Ir- 
regular). 

Special  methods  of  writing  particular  words  or  phrases, 
Chap.  XXI,  525-565. 

Spontaneity,  requisite  for  a  good  phrase,  54 ;  spontaneity  the 
result  of  education -and  practice,  55. 

Stairs,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  556. 

State,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  557. 

Stock,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  558. 

Store,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  559. 

Street,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  560. 

Student,  errors  of,  56-9. 


INDEX.  351 

Systems  of  shorthand  represented  in  this  book,  10. 

Syllables,  ellipsis  of,  when  and  why  allowable,  150. 

T,  ellipsis  of,  153-7. 

Than  expressed  by  n  hook,  452-6. 

That,  "fictitious  primitive"  for,  420. 

The,  ellipsis  of,  132;  "fictitious  primitive"  for,  420-1.  (See 
Tick  Word-signs). 

Their,  there  or  they  are,  expressed  by  double-lengthing,  399- 
409,  419-421,  426-7;  expressed  by  changing  circle,  to  str 
loop,  396-7. 

There,  first  syllable  of  therefore,  etc.,  expressed  by  double- 
lengthing,  408-9. 

There,  their,  or  they  are,  expressed  by  double-lengthing,  399- 
409,  419-421,  426-7;  expressed  by  changing  circle  to  str 
loop,  896-7. 

Therefore,  how  expressed  in  phrasing,  408-9,  561. 

They,  ellipsis  of,  165. 

They  are,  expressed  in  phrases  by  double-lengthing,  410-11; 
expressed  by  changing  circle  to  str  loop,  396-7. 

Tick  word-signs  (a,  already,  all,  before,  but,  he,  how,  I,  of, 
or,  on,  ought,  should,  the,  there,  to,  who)  Chap. IX,  169-245; 
tick  word-signs,  initial,  171-188, 226-230,  234-243;  tick  word- 
signs,  final,  189-195,  206-208,  231;  tick  word-signs,  initial 
or  final,  196-205,  209-223;  a,  201,  204-5;  all,  178;  an,  202- 
204;  and,  203;  before,  180;  but,  177;  he,  186-194;  how,  226- 
230;  I,  212-222;  of,  173;  on,  182-3;  or,  176;  should,  184-5; 
the,  207-8;  there  or  their,  231-3;  to,  174;  too,  179;  who, 
181;  tick  word-signs  with  hooks  for  all,  are,  have,  not, 
of,  own,  will,  234-8;  tick  word-signs  with  the  Initial  or 
final  hook  and  appended  circle,  tick,  ing  dot,  you,  or  dis- 
joined tick,  241-3;  tick  word-signs  attached  to  tick  word- 
signs,  243-5;  tick  word-signs,  "initial  displacement"  of, 
223-5;  tick  word-signs  with  what  or  would  appended,  239- 
240. 

Time,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  562. 

To,  ellipsis  of,  138-145;  to,  expressed  by  hairing,  465-6.  (See 
Tick  Word-signs.) 


352  INDEX. 

To  be,  special  phrase  sign,  381-2. 

To  have,  expressed  by  f-v  hook,  480-488;  expressed  by  ti<^k 
and  f-v  hook,  234,  237. 

To  have  been,  special  phrase-sign,  38i>-4. 

Too,  initial,  179. 

Triple-length  strokes  (whether  there,  etc.)  428-9. 

Until,  at  all,  how  distinguished  in  phrases,  528. 

Us,  expressed  by  circle,  252-3. 

V  hook  (See  F-V  Hook.) 

Variation  of  outline,  to  facilitate  brevity,  verbal  distinc- 
tions and  facile  junctions,  90-1,  101-121;  variation  by  use 
of  phrase  word-signs,  103-4;  variation  by  "word-splitting," 
105;  variation  by  "restoration,"  106;  variation  without 
curtailment,  107;  variation  by  "fictitious  primitives,"  108; 
variation  by  omission  of  letters,  109;  variation  by  contra- 
normal  expedients,  111-121. 

Vocabulary,  the  phrasing,  Chap.  II,  25-27;  what  words  may 
or  may  not  be  phrased,  25-27. 

Vocalization,  a  means  of  word  distinction,  92-100;  full  vocal- 
ization not  necessary,  97;  peculiar  vocalization,  99;  vocal- 
ization of  badly-shaped  outlines,  100. 

W  and  y,  brief,  word-signs  (we,  with,  were,  what,  icould,  ye, 
yet,  you,  beyond,  275-314;  we,  initial,  276;  with,  initial, 
277;  were,  initial,  278;  what,  initial,  281;  would,  initial, 
282;  would,  medial  or  final,  283;  you,  initial,  285;  you, 
medial  or  final,  286;  ye,  yet,  and  beyond,  initial,  287; 
junction  of  "brief  w  and  y"  signs  with  each  other,  288-9; 
junction  with  *  circle,  290;  initial  hook  for  we  and  with, 
291-4;  we  know,  special  phrase  for,  293;  with  our,  special 
phrase  for,  295;  you  and  would  following  a  circle,  296-7; 
we,  were,  would,  you,  inversion  of,  298-300;  you  used  for 
your,  301-2;  you  and  your,  position  of,  303;  Mr.  Graham's 
method  of  expressing  you  would,  would  you,  etc.,  by  en- 
larged semi-circle,  304-314. 

Walker,  Clarence  E.,  work  on  "Speed  and  Legibility"  re- 
ferred to,  84  (note),  226  (note),  389  (note). 

W  hook,  ellipsis  of ,  160 ;  w  hook  to  express  we  or  with,  291-5. 


INDEX.  353 

Way,  away,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  563. 

We,  ellipsis  of,  165;  ice,  initial,  276,  291;  we  or  with  ex- 
pressed by  hook,  291;  inversion  of  we,  298-9. 

We  know,  special  phrase,  293-4. 

We  were,  were  we,  how  phrased,  313. 

We,  were,  would,  you,  inversion  of,  298-9. 

We  would,  how  phrased,  304-6. 

Were,  phrases  beginning  with,  278;  phrases  ending  with, 
279;  "fictitious  primitive"  for,  108,  463-4;  expressed  by  r 
hook,  371-3;  several  methods  of  expressing,  in  phrases, 
564;  inversion  of,  298-9. 

Were  it,  how  phrased,  463-4. 

Were  you,  how  phrased,  304-5,  311. 

What,  initial,  281. 

What  ice,  what  were,  how  phrased,  304-5,  308. 

What  would,  how  phrased,  313. 

What  you,  how  phrased,  304-5,  311,  314. 

Whether,  expressed  by  double-lengthing,  424-5,  432-3. 

With  and  toe,  expressed  by  initial  hook,  291. 

Who  (See  Tick  Word-signs.) 

Will  or  all,  expressed  by  I  hook  on  consonant  strokes,  350- 
361;  expressed  by  I  hook  on  tick  word-signs,  234-5;  ex- 
pressed by  enlarging  r  hook,  374-5. 

With,  ellipsis  of,  137;  ivith,  initial,  277,  291-5;  with,  "ficti- 
tious primitive"  for,  358-9,  420. 

With  all,  how  phrased,  358-9. 

With  our,  special  phrase,  295. 

With  you,  were  you,  what  you,  would  you,  how  phrased,  311, 
314;  with  your,  etc.,  similarly  expressed,  312. 

Word-blending  phrase,  defined,  16-19. 

Word-joining  phrase,  defined,  15. 

Word-distinction,  Chap.  VI,  82-100;  methods  of, — by  position, 
85-87;  by  "exclusion,"  88-9;  by  variation  of  outline,  90-1; 
by  vocalization,  92-100. 

"Word-splitting,"  105. 

Words,  what  may  or  may  not  be  phrased,  25-7;  not  too  many 
in  a  phrase,  51. 


354  INDEX. 

Words  or  expressions,  particular,  special  methods  of  writ- 
ing, Chap.  XXI,  525-565. 

Would,  initial,  282;  not  initial,  283;inversion  of,  298-9;  junc- 
tion with  preceding  circle,  296-7;  expressed  by  half- 
lengthing,  467-470. 

Would  have,  expressed  by  f-v  hook,  489. 

Would  we,  how  phrased,  305,  307,  313. 

Would  you,  what  you,  etc.,  how  phrased,  304-9,  314. 

Y,  brief,  word-signs  (See  W  and  Y,  Brief,  Word-signs). 

Ye,  yet  and  beyond,  initial,  287. 

Year,  how  expressed  in  phrases,  565. 

Yet,  initial,  287. 

You,  ellipsis  of,  165;  you,  initial  or  not  initial,  285-6;  you, 
initial,  position  of,  303;  you,  inversion  of,  298-9;  you,  ex- 
pressed by  quasi  r  hook,  314 Vi>;  you,  used  for  your,  301-2; 
junction  of  you  with  preceding  circle,  296-7. 

You  were  and  you  would,  how  phrased,  304-5,  309-310. 

Your,  sometimes  expressed  by  you,  301-2,  312;  expressed  by 
you,  inverted,  303;  your,  initial,  position  of,  303;  your 
following  with,  were,  what,  icould,  312. 


4*23 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


Form  L9-25m-9,'47(A3618)444 


LOS  ANGELES 


A     000564814     2 


Z56 
B812s 


